| [Top][Contents] |
LilyPond — Frammenti
|
Questo documento contiene una selezione di frammenti LilyPond tratti dal LilyPond Snippet Repository (LSR). I frammenti sono nel pubblico dominio. Desideriamo ringraziare Sebastiano Vigna per la gestione del sito web e del database dell’LSR, e l’università di Milano per l’hosting. Questo documento non è un sottoinsieme esatto dell’LSR: alcuni frammenti
vengono dalla directory input/new dei sorgenti di LilyPond; i
frammenti tratti dall’LSR vengono convertiti con I frammenti sono raggruppati per categorie; le categorie elencate nell’indice corrispondono a una sezione del manuale di notazione di LilyPond. Un frammento potrebbe avere più di una categoria, e non tutte le categorie dell’LSR saranno presenti in questo documento. Nella versione HTML di questo manuale, si può fare clic sul nome del file o sull’immagine di ciascun esempio per vedere il corrispondente file di input. |
Notazione musicale | ||
|---|---|---|
| 1 Pitches | Altezze | |
| 2 Rhythms | Ritmi | |
| 3 Expressive marks | Segni di espressione | |
| 4 Repeats | Ripetizioni | |
| 5 Simultaneous notes | Note simultanee | |
| 6 Staff notation | Notazione del rigo | |
| 7 Editorial annotations | Note editoriali | |
| 8 Text | Testo | |
Notazione specialistica | ||
| 9 Vocal music | Musica vocale | |
| 10 Chord notation | Accordi | |
| 11 Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments | Tastiere | |
| 12 Percussion | Percussioni | |
| 13 Fretted string instruments | Strumenti a corde con tasti | |
| 14 Unfretted string instruments | Strumenti a corde senza tasti | |
| 15 Wind instruments | Strumenti aerofoni | |
| 16 Ancient notation | Notazione antica | |
| 17 World music | World music | |
Altre raccolte | ||
| 18 Contexts and engravers | Contesti e incisori | |
| 19 Tweaks and overrides | Modifiche e sovrascritture | |
| 20 Paper and layout | Foglio e formattazione | |
| 21 Titles | Titoli | |
| 22 Spacing | Spaziatura | |
| 23 MIDI | MIDI | |
| 24 Templates | Modelli | |
|
Questo manuale è disponibile in altri formati ed è integrato col resto della documentazione. Maggiori informazioni in Manuali. La documentazione completa si trova all’indirizzo https://lilypond.org/. |
| [ << Top ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Top ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Un ambitus per voce > ] |
1 Pitches
See also Pitches.
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Pitches ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce > ] |
Un ambitus per voce
L’ambitus può essere specificato per voce. In tal caso occorre spostarlo manualmente per evitare collisioni.
\new Staff << \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c'' { \override Ambitus.X-offset = 2.0 \voiceOne c4 a d e f1 } \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c' { \voiceTwo es4 f g as b1 } >>
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Un ambitus per voce ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Teste di nota Aiken variante sottile > ] |
Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce
Se il rigo ha più di una voce, l’ottavazione in una voce trasporrà
la posizione delle note in tutte le voci per la durata della parentesi
dell’ottava. Se si intende applicare l’ottavazione a una sola voce,
occorre spostare l’incisore Ottava_spanner_engraver nel
contesto Voice.
\layout { \context { \Staff \remove Ottava_spanner_engraver } \context { \Voice \consists Ottava_spanner_engraver } } { \clef bass << { <g d'>1~ q2 <c' e'> } \\ { r2. \ottava -1 <b,,, b,,>4 ~ | q2 \ottava 0 <c e>2 } >> }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Altering the length of beamed stems > ] |
Teste di nota Aiken variante sottile
Le teste di nota Aiken bianche sono più difficili da leggere a dimensioni del rigo più piccole, specialmente coi tagli addizionali. Perdendo lo spazio bianco interno le fa apparire come note di un quarto.
\score { { \aikenHeads c''2 a' c' a % Switch to thin-variant noteheads \set shapeNoteStyles = ##(doThin reThin miThin faThin sol laThin tiThin) c'' a' c' a } }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Teste di nota Aiken variante sottile ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Ambitus > ] |
Altering the length of beamed stems
Stem lengths on beamed notes can be varied by overriding the
beamed-lengths property of the details of the
Stem. If a single value is used as an argument, the length
applies to all stems. When multiple arguments are used, the first
applies to eighth notes, the second to sixteenth notes and so on. The
final argument also applies to all notes shorter than the note length
of the final argument. Non-integer arguments may also be used.
\relative c'' { \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(2) a8[ a] a16[ a] a32[ a] \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(8 10 12) a8[ a] a16[ a] a32[ a] r8 \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(8) a8[ a] \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(8.5) a8[ a] \revert Stem.details.beamed-lengths a8[ a] a16[ a] a32[ a] r16 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Altering the length of beamed stems ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave > ] |
Ambitus
Ambitus indicate pitch ranges for voices.
Accidentals only show up if they are not part of the key signature.
AmbitusNoteHead grobs also have ledger lines.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } } << \new Staff { \relative c' { \time 2/4 c4 f' } } \new Staff { \relative c' { \time 2/4 \key d \major cis4 as' } } >>
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Ambitus su più voci > ] |
Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
Per impostazione predefinita, gli ambitus sono posizionati a sinistra della chiave. La
funzione \ambitusAfter permette di cambiare questo posizionamento.
La sintassi è \ambitusAfter grob-interface (vedi
Graphical
Object Interfaces per un elenco dei possibili valori per
grob-interface.)
Un caso d’uso comune è il posizionamento dell’ambitus tra l’armatura di chiave e l’indicazione di tempo.
\new Staff \with { \consists Ambitus_engraver } \relative { \ambitusAfter key-signature \key d \major es'8 g bes cis d2 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Applicazione degli stili delle teste di nota in base al grado della scala > ] |
Ambitus su più voci
Se si aggiunge l’incisore Ambitus_engraver al contesto Staff viene
creato un solo ambitus per il rigo, anche nel caso di righi che hanno più
voci.
\new Staff \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } << \new Voice \relative c'' { \voiceOne c4 a d e f1 } \new Voice \relative c' { \voiceTwo es4 f g as b1 } >>
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus su più voci ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Cambiare automaticamente la direzione del gambo della nota centrale in base alla melodia > ] |
Applicazione degli stili delle teste di nota in base al grado della scala
La proprietà shapeNoteStyles può essere usata per definire vari
stili di teste di nota per ogni grado della scala (definita dall’armatura
di chiave o dalla proprietà tonic). Questa proprietà richiede un
insieme di simboli, che può essere puramente arbitrario (sono permesse
espressioni geometriche come triangle, cross e xcircle)
o basato sull’antica tradizione tipografica americana (sono consentiti
anche alcuni nomi di nota latini).
Detto questo, per imitare gli antichi canzionieri americani, ci sono vari
stili predefiniti disponibili attraverso dei comodi comandi come
\aikenHeads o \sacredHarpHeads.
Questo esempio mostra modi diversi di ottenere teste di nota di varie forme e illustra la possibilità di trasporre una melodia senza perdere la corrispondenza tra le funzioni armoniche e gli stili delle teste.
fragment = { \key c \major c2 d e2 f g2 a b2 c } \new Staff { \transpose c d \relative c' { \set shapeNoteStyles = ##(do re mi fa #f la ti) \fragment } \break \relative c' { \set shapeNoteStyles = ##(cross triangle fa #f mensural xcircle diamond) \fragment } }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Applicazione degli stili delle teste di nota in base al grado della scala ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Changing ottava text > ] |
Cambiare automaticamente la direzione del gambo della nota centrale in base alla melodia
LilyPond può modificare la direzione del gambo della nota centrale di un
rigo in modo che segua la melodia: occorre aggiungere l’incisore
Melody_engraver al contesto Voice.
La proprietà di contesto suspendMelodyDecisions può essere usata
per disattivare questo comportamento localmente.
\relative c'' { \time 3/4 a8 b g f b g | \set suspendMelodyDecisions = ##t a b g f b g | \unset suspendMelodyDecisions c b d c b c | } \layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Melody_engraver" \autoBeamOff } }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Cambiare automaticamente la direzione del gambo della nota centrale in base alla melodia ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Modifica dell’intervallo dell’ambitus > ] |
Changing ottava text
Internally, \ottava sets the properties ottavation (for
example, to 8va or 8vb) and middleCPosition. To
override the text of the bracket, set ottavation after invoking
\ottava.
Short text is especially useful when a brief ottava is used.
{ c'2 \ottava 1 \set Staff.ottavation = "8" c''2 \ottava 0 c'1 \ottava 1 \set Staff.ottavation = "Text" c''1 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Changing ottava text ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Changing the interval of lines on the stave > ] |
Modifica dell’intervallo dell’ambitus
È possibile cambiare le impostazioni predefinite dell’intervallo tra le teste di nota dell’ambitus e la linea che le collega.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } } \new Staff { \time 2/4 % Default setting c'4 g'' } \new Staff { \time 2/4 \override AmbitusLine.gap = 0 c'4 g'' } \new Staff { \time 2/4 \override AmbitusLine.gap = 1 c'4 g'' } \new Staff { \time 2/4 \override AmbitusLine.gap = 1.5 c'4 g'' }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Modifica dell’intervallo dell’ambitus ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Clefs can be transposed by arbitrary amounts > ] |
Changing the interval of lines on the stave
staffLineLayoutFunction is used to change the position of notes.
This snippet shows setting its value to ly:pitch-semitones in
order to produce a chromatic scale with the distance between each space
and line of the stave equal to one semitone.
scale = \relative c' { a4 ais b c cis4 d dis e f4 fis g gis a1 } \new Staff \with { \remove "Accidental_engraver" staffLineLayoutFunction = #ly:pitch-semitones } { << \scale \context NoteNames { \set printOctaveNames = ##f \scale } >> }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Changing the interval of lines on the stave ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Coloring notes depending on their pitch > ] |
Clefs can be transposed by arbitrary amounts
Clefs can be transposed by arbitrary amounts, not just by octaves.
\relative c' { \clef treble c4 c c c \clef "treble_8" c4 c c c \clef "treble_5" c4 c c c \clef "treble^3" c4 c c c }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Clefs can be transposed by arbitrary amounts ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Creating a sequence of notes on various pitches > ] |
Coloring notes depending on their pitch
It is possible to color note heads depending on their pitch and/or their names: the function used in this example even makes it possible to distinguish enharmonics.
% Association list of pitches to colors. #(define color-mapping (list (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 0 NATURAL) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 0 SHARP) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 1 FLAT) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 2 NATURAL) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 2 SHARP) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 3 FLAT) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 3 NATURAL) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 4 SHARP) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 5 NATURAL) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 5 FLAT) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 6 SHARP) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 1 NATURAL) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 3 SHARP) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 4 FLAT) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 5 SHARP) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 6 FLAT) (x11-color 'blue)))) % Compare pitch and alteration (not octave). #(define (pitch-equals? p1 p2) (and (= (ly:pitch-alteration p1) (ly:pitch-alteration p2)) (= (ly:pitch-notename p1) (ly:pitch-notename p2)))) #(define (pitch-to-color pitch) (let ((color (assoc pitch color-mapping pitch-equals?))) (if color (cdr color)))) #(define (color-notehead grob) (pitch-to-color (ly:event-property (event-cause grob) 'pitch))) \score { \new Staff \relative c' { \override NoteHead.color = #color-notehead c8 b d dis ees f g aes } }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Coloring notes depending on their pitch ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Creating custom key signatures > ] |
Creating a sequence of notes on various pitches
In music that contains many occurrences of the same sequence of notes at different pitches, the following music function may prove useful. It takes a note, of which only the pitch is used.
This example creates the rhythm used throughout Mars, from Gustav Holst’s The Planets.
rhythm = #(define-music-function (p) (ly:pitch?) "Make the rhythm in Mars (the Planets) at the given pitch" #{ \tuplet 3/2 { $p 8 8 8 } 4 4 8 8 4 #}) \new Staff { \time 5/4 \rhythm c' \rhythm c'' \rhythm g }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Creating a sequence of notes on various pitches ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Direction of merged ‘fa’ shape note heads > ] |
Creating custom key signatures
LilyPond supports custom key signatures. In this example, print for D minor and D major with an extended range of shown flats.
\new Staff \with { \override StaffSymbol.line-count = #8 \override KeySignature.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeyCancellation.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeySignature.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override KeyCancellation.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override Clef.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\combine \musicglyph "clefs.C" \translate #'(-3 . -2) \musicglyph "clefs.F" #})) clefPosition = #3 middleCPosition = #3 middleCClefPosition = #3 } { \key d\minor f bes, f bes, | \key d\major fis b, fis b, | }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Creating custom key signatures ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Force a cancellation natural before accidentals > ] |
Direction of merged ‘fa’ shape note heads
Using property NoteCollision.fa-merge-direction, the direction
of “fa” shape note heads (“fa”, “faThin”, etc.) can be controlled
independently of the stem direction if two voices with the same pitch
and different stem directions are merged. If this property is not set,
the “down” glyph variant is used.
{ \clef bass << { \aikenHeads f2 \override Staff.NoteCollision.fa-merge-direction = #UP f2 } \\ { \aikenHeads f2 f2 } >> }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Direction of merged ‘fa’ shape note heads ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Forcing a clef symbol to be displayed > ] |
Force a cancellation natural before accidentals
The following example shows how to force a natural sign before an accidental.
\relative c' { \key es \major bes c des \tweak Accidental.restore-first ##t eis }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Force a cancellation natural before accidentals ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Generating random notes > ] |
Forcing a clef symbol to be displayed
When a clef sign has already been displayed and it has not been changed
to a different clef, then repeating the \clef command will be
ignored by LilyPond, since it is not a change of clef. It is possible
to force the clef to be redisplayed using the command
\set Staff.forceClef = ##t.
\relative c' { \clef treble c1 \clef treble c1 \set Staff.forceClef = ##t c1 \clef treble c1 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Forcing a clef symbol to be displayed ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Nascondere le alterazioni delle note con legatura di valore all’inizio di un nuovo sistema > ] |
Generating random notes
This Scheme-based snippet generates random notes. Use as
\randomNotes n from to dur
to generate n random notes between pitches from and to, with duration dur.
randomNotes = #(define-music-function (n from to dur) (integer? ly:pitch? ly:pitch? ly:duration?) (let ((from-step (ly:pitch-steps from)) (to-step (ly:pitch-steps to))) (make-sequential-music (map (lambda (_) (let* ((step (+ from-step (random (- to-step from-step)))) (pitch (ly:make-pitch 0 step 0))) #{ $pitch $dur #})) (iota n))))) \randomNotes 24 c' g'' 8
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Generating random notes ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Keep change clefs full-sized > ] |
Nascondere le alterazioni delle note con legatura di valore all’inizio di un nuovo sistema
Questo frammento mostra come nascondere le alterazioni delle note unite alla figura precedente mediante una legatura di valore all’inizio di un nuovo sistema
\relative c'' { \override Accidental.hide-tied-accidental-after-break = ##t cis1~ cis~ \break cis }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Nascondere le alterazioni delle note con legatura di valore all’inizio di un nuovo sistema ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Esempio di makam > ] |
Keep change clefs full-sized
When a clef changes, the clef sign displayed is smaller than the
initial clef. This can be overridden by setting the context property
full-size-change to #t.
\relative c' { \clef "treble" c1 \clef "bass" c1 \clef "treble" c1 \override Staff.Clef.full-size-change = ##t \clef "bass" c1 \clef "treble" c1 \revert Staff.Clef.full-size-change \clef "bass" c1 \clef "treble" c1 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Keep change clefs full-sized ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava > ] |
Esempio di makam
Makam è un tipo di melodia proveniente dalla Turchia che usa alterazioni microtonali di 1/9. Consultare il file di inizializzazione ‘ly/makam.ly’ per vedere come sono definiti i nomi delle altezze e le alterazioni.
\include "makam.ly" \relative c' { \set Staff.keyAlterations = #`((6 . ,(- KOMA)) (3 . ,BAKIYE)) c4 cc db fk gbm4 gfc gfb efk fk4 db cc c }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Esempio di makam ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Armature di chiave non tradizionali > ] |
Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava
È possibile cambiare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.OttavaBracket.stencil = #ly:line-spanner::print \override Staff.OttavaBracket.bound-details = #`((left . ((Y . 0) (attach-dir . ,LEFT) (padding . 0) (stencil-align-dir-y . ,CENTER))) (right . ((Y . 5.0) ; Change the number here (padding . 0) (attach-dir . ,RIGHT) (text . ,(make-draw-dashed-line-markup (cons 0 -1.2)))))) \override Staff.OttavaBracket.left-bound-info = #ly:horizontal-line-spanner::calc-left-bound-info-and-text \override Staff.OttavaBracket.right-bound-info = #ly:horizontal-line-spanner::calc-right-bound-info \ottava 1 c1 c'''1 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Numeri dentro le teste di nota > ] |
Armature di chiave non tradizionali
Il comando \key comunemente usato imposta la proprietà
keyAlterations del contesto Staff.
Per creare armature di chiave non standard, tale proprietà va
impostata esplicitamente.
Il formato di questo comando è una lista:
\set Staff.keyAlterations = #`(((ottava . grado) . alterazione) ((ottava
. grado) . alterazione) ...)
dove, per ogni elemento della lista, ottava indica l’ottava (0 è
l’ottava dal Do centrale al Si precedente), grado indica la nota
all’interno dell’ottava (0 significa Do e 6 significa Si) e alterazione
può essere ,SHARP ,FLAT ,DOUBLE-SHARP etc.
Altrimenti, usando il formato breve per ogni elemento della lista,
(grado . alterazione), ciò indica che la stessa alterazione deve
essere presente in tutte le ottave. Per le scale microtonalidove un
“diesis” non è 100 centesimi, alterazione si riferisce alla
proporzione di un duecentesimo di tono intero.
\include "arabic.ly" \relative do' { \set Staff.keyAlterations = #`((0 . ,SEMI-FLAT) (1 . ,SEMI-FLAT) (2 . ,FLAT) (5 . ,FLAT) (6 . ,SEMI-FLAT)) % \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f re reb \dwn reb resd dod dob dosd \dwn dob | dobsb dodsd do do | }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Armature di chiave non tradizionali ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte > ] |
Numeri dentro le teste di nota
Le teste di nota con nome della nota usano la proprietà note-names
dell’oggetto NoteHead per determinare cosa appaia
all’interno della testa. È possibile sovrascrivere questa proprietà
e mostrare numeri corrispondenti ai gradi della scala.
Si può creare un semplice incisore che faccia questo per ogni oggetto testa di nota che incontra.
#(define Ez_numbers_engraver (make-engraver (acknowledgers ((note-head-interface engraver grob source-engraver) (let* ((context (ly:translator-context engraver)) (tonic-pitch (ly:context-property context 'tonic)) (tonic-name (ly:pitch-notename tonic-pitch)) (grob-pitch (ly:event-property (event-cause grob) 'pitch)) (grob-name (ly:pitch-notename grob-pitch)) (delta (modulo (- grob-name tonic-name) 7)) (note-names (make-vector 7 (number->string (1+ delta))))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'note-names note-names)))))) #(set-global-staff-size 30) \layout { ragged-right = ##t \context { \Voice \consists \Ez_numbers_engraver } } \relative c' { \easyHeadsOn c4 d e f g4 a b c \break \key a \major a,4 b cis d e4 fis gis a \break \key d \dorian d,4 e f g a4 b c d }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Numeri dentro le teste di nota ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Impedire l’inserimento automatico dei bequadri supplementari > ] |
Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
Questo modello mostra come usare i contesti annidati StaffGroup e
GrandStaff per creare sottogruppi degli strumenti dello stesso
tipo. Mostra anche come usare \transpose in modo che le variabili
mantengano la musica per gli strumenti traspositori nell’intonazione reale.
#(set-global-staff-size 17) \paper { indent = 3.0\cm % add space for instrumentName short-indent = 1.5\cm % add less space for shortInstrumentName } fluteMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } % Pitches as written on a manuscript for Clarinet in A % are transposed to concert pitch. clarinetMusic = \transpose c' a \relative c'' { \key bes \major bes1 d } trumpetMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } % Key signature is often omitted for horns hornMusic = \transpose c' f \relative c { d'1 fis } percussionMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g1 b } sopranoMusic = \relative c'' { \key g \major g'1 b } sopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { Lyr -- ics } altoIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoILyrics = \sopranoLyrics altoIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoIILyrics = \lyricmode { Ah -- ah } tenorMusic = \relative c' { \clef "treble_8" \key g \major g1 b } tenorLyrics = \sopranoLyrics pianoRHMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } pianoLHMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } violinIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violinIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violaMusic = \relative c { \clef alto \key g \major g'1 b } celloMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } bassMusic = \relative c { \clef "bass_8" \key g \major g,1 b } \book { \score { << \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_woodwinds" << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" } \fluteMusic \new Staff = "Staff_clarinet" \with { instrumentName = \markup { \concat { "Clarinet in B" \flat } } } % Declare that written Middle C in the music % to follow sounds a concert B flat, for % output using sounded pitches such as MIDI. %\transposition bes % Print music for a B-flat clarinet \transpose bes c' \clarinetMusic >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_brass" << \new Staff = "Staff_hornI" \with { instrumentName = "Horn in F" } % \transposition f \transpose f c' \hornMusic \new Staff = "Staff_trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet in C" } \trumpetMusic >> \new RhythmicStaff = "RhythmicStaff_percussion" \with { instrumentName = "Percussion" } \percussionMusic \new PianoStaff \with { instrumentName = "Piano" } << \new Staff { \pianoRHMusic } \new Staff { \pianoLHMusic } >> \new ChoirStaff = "ChoirStaff_choir" << \new Staff = "Staff_soprano" \with { instrumentName = "Soprano" } \new Voice = "soprano" \sopranoMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "soprano" { \sopranoLyrics } \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_altos" \with { \accepts Lyrics } << \new Staff = "Staff_altoI" \with { instrumentName = "Alto I" } \new Voice = "altoI" \altoIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoI" { \altoILyrics } \new Staff = "Staff_altoII" \with { instrumentName = "Alto II" } \new Voice = "altoII" \altoIIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoII" { \altoIILyrics } >> \new Staff = "Staff_tenor" \with { instrumentName = "Tenor" } \new Voice = "tenor" \tenorMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "tenor" { \tenorLyrics } >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "Staff_violinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" } \violinIMusic \new Staff = "Staff_violinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" } \violinIIMusic >> \new Staff = "Staff_viola" \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } \violaMusic \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } \celloMusic \new Staff = "Staff_bass" \with { instrumentName = "Double Bass" } \bassMusic >> >> } }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Impedire l’inserimento dei segni di bequadro quando cambia l’armatura di chiave > ] |
Impedire l’inserimento automatico dei bequadri supplementari
Secondo le norme tipografiche tradizionali, un segno di bequadro viene
inserito prima di un diesis o di un bemolle se un precedente doppio diesis o
bemolle sulla stessa nota è cancellato. Per cambiare questo comportamento
e seguire la pratica contemporanea, si imposta la proprietà extraNatural
su f (falso) nel contesto Staff.
\relative c'' { aeses4 aes ais a \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f aeses4 aes ais a }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Impedire l’inserimento automatico dei bequadri supplementari ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Quoting another voice with transposition > ] |
Impedire l’inserimento dei segni di bequadro quando cambia l’armatura di chiave
Quando l’armatura di chiave cambia, vengono inseriti automaticamente i
segni di bequadro per annulare le alterazioni di precedenti armature. Si
può evitare questo comportamento impostando su f (falso) la proprietà
printKeyCancellation nel contesto Staff.
\relative c' { \key d \major a4 b cis d \key g \minor a4 bes c d \set Staff.printKeyCancellation = ##f \key d \major a4 b cis d \key g \minor a4 bes c d }
Quoting another voice with transposition
Quotations take into account the transposition of both source and
target. In this example, all instruments play sounding middle c;
the target is an instrument in f. The target part may be
transposed using \transpose. In this case, all the pitches
(including the quoted ones) are transposed.
\addQuote clarinet { \transposition bes \repeat unfold 8 { d'16 d' d'8 } } \addQuote sax { \transposition es' \repeat unfold 16 { a8 } } quoteTest = { % french horn \transposition f g'4 << \quoteDuring "clarinet" { \skip 4 } s4^"clar." >> << \quoteDuring "sax" { \skip 4 } s4^"sax." >> g'4 } { \new Staff \with { instrumentName = \markup { \column { Horn "in F" } } } \quoteTest \transpose c' d' << \quoteTest s4_"up a tone" >> }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Quoting another voice with transposition ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Transposing pitches with minimum accidentals (“smart” transpose) > ] |
Separating key cancellations from key signature changes
By default, the accidentals used for key cancellations are placed
adjacent to those for key signature changes. This behavior can be
changed by overriding the break-align-orders property of the
BreakAlignment grob.
The value of break-align-orders is a vector of length 3,
with quoted lists of breakable items as elements. Each list describes
the default order of prefatory matter at the end, in the middle, and at
the beginning of a line, respectively. We are only interested in
changing the behaviour in the middle of a line.
If you look up the definition of break-align-orders in
LilyPond’s Internal Reference (see the
BreakAlignment
grob), you get the following order in the second element:
... staff-bar key-cancellation key-signature ...
We want to change that, moving key-cancellation before
staff-bar. To make this happen we use the
grob-transformer function, which gives us access to the original
vector as the second argument of the lambda function, here called
orig (we don’t need the first argument, grob). We
return a new vector, with unchanged first and last elements. For the
middle element, we first remove key-cancellation from the list,
then adding it again before staff-bar.
#(define (insert-before where what lst) (cond ((null? lst) ; If the list is empty, (list what)) ; return a single-element list. ((eq? where (car lst)) ; If we find symbol `where`, (cons what lst)) ; insert `what` before curr. position. (else ; Otherwise keep building the list by (cons (car lst) ; adding the current element and ; recursing with the next element. (insert-before where what (cdr lst)))))) cancellationFirst = \override Score.BreakAlignment.break-align-orders = #(grob-transformer 'break-align-orders (lambda (grob orig) (let* ((middle (vector-ref orig 1)) (middle (delq 'key-cancellation middle)) (middle (insert-before 'staff-bar 'key-cancellation middle))) (vector ;; end of line (vector-ref orig 0) ;; middle of line middle ;; beginning of line (vector-ref orig 2))))) music = { \key es \major d'1 \bar "||" \key a \major d'1 } { <>^\markup "default" \music } { <>^\markup "cancellation first" \cancellationFirst \music }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Separating key cancellations from key signature changes ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Turkish Makam example > ] |
Transposing pitches with minimum accidentals (“smart” transpose)
This example uses some Scheme code to enforce enharmonic modifications for notes in order to have the minimum number of accidentals. In this case, the following rules apply:
- double accidentals should be removed
- b sharp → c
- e sharp → f
- c flat → b
- f flat → e
In this manner, the most natural enharmonic notes are chosen.
#(define (naturalize-pitch p) (let ((o (ly:pitch-octave p)) ;; `ly:pitch-alteration` returns quarter tone steps. (a (* 4 (ly:pitch-alteration p))) (n (ly:pitch-notename p))) (cond ((and (> a 1) (or (eqv? n 6) (eqv? n 2))) (set! a (- a 2)) (set! n (+ n 1))) ((and (< a -1) (or (eqv? n 0) (eqv? n 3))) (set! a (+ a 2)) (set! n (- n 1)))) (cond ((> a 2) (set! a (- a 4)) (set! n (+ n 1))) ((< a -2) (set! a (+ a 4)) (set! n (- n 1)))) (when (< n 0) (set! o (- o 1)) (set! n (+ n 7))) (when (> n 6) (set! o (+ o 1)) (set! n (- n 7))) (ly:make-pitch o n (/ a 4)))) #(define (naturalize music) (let ((es (ly:music-property music 'elements)) (e (ly:music-property music 'element)) (p (ly:music-property music 'pitch))) (when (pair? es) (ly:music-set-property! music 'elements (map naturalize es))) (when (ly:music? e) (ly:music-set-property! music 'element (naturalize e))) (when (ly:pitch? p) (set! p (naturalize-pitch p)) (ly:music-set-property! music 'pitch p)) music)) naturalizeMusic = #(define-music-function (m) (ly:music?) (naturalize m)) music = \relative c' { c4 d e g } \new Staff { \transpose c ais { \music } \naturalizeMusic \transpose c ais { \music } \transpose c deses { \music } \naturalizeMusic \transpose c deses { \music } }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Transposing pitches with minimum accidentals (“smart” transpose) ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave > ] |
Turkish Makam example
This template uses the start of a well-known Turkish Saz Semai that is familiar in the repertoire in order to illustrate some of the elements of Turkish music notation.
#(set-default-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) \include "turkish-makam.ly" \header { title = "Hüseyni Saz Semaisi" composer = "Lavtacı Andon" tagline = ##f } \relative { \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f \set Staff.autoBeaming = ##f \key a \huseyni \time 10/8 a'4 g'16[ fb] e8.[ d16] d[ c d e] c[ d c8] bfc | a16[ bfc a8] bfc c16[ d c8] d16[ e d8] e4 fb8 | d4 a'8 a16[ g fb e] fb8[ g] a8.[ b16] a16[ g] | g4 g16[ fb] fb8.[ e16] e[ g fb e] e4 r8 | } \layout { indent = 0 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Turkish Makam example ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Using \autoChange with more than one voice > ] |
Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave
Cambiando il glifo della chiave, la sua posizione o l’ottavazione non
cambia la posizione delle note successive nel rigo. Per far sì che
le armature di chiave si trovino sulle linee del rigo corrette, bisogna
specificare anche middleCPosition, con valori positivi o negativi
che spostano il Do centrale rispettivamente su o giù in senso
relativo alla linea centrale del rigo.
Per esempio, \clef "treble_8" equivale a impostare
clefGlyph, clefPosition (che regola la posizione
verticale della chiave), middleCPosition e
clefTransposition. Viene stampata una chiave quando cambia una
di queste proprietà, eccetto middleCPosition.
Gli esempi seguenti mostrano le possibilità date dall’impostazione manuale di tali proprietà. Sulla prima linea le modifiche manuali preservano il posizionamento relativo standard di chiavi e note, mentre sulla seconda linea non lo fanno.
{ % The default treble clef. \key f \major c'1 % The standard bass clef \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.F" \set Staff.clefPosition = 2 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 6 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 6 \key g \major c'1 % The baritone clef. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.C" \set Staff.clefPosition = 4 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 4 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 4 \key f \major c'1 % The standard choral tenor clef. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.G" \set Staff.clefPosition = -2 \set Staff.clefTransposition = -7 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 1 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 1 \key f \major c'1 % A non-standard clef. \set Staff.clefPosition = 0 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 0 \set Staff.middleCPosition = -4 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = -4 \key g \major c'1 \break % The following clef changes do not preserve % the normal relationship between notes, key signatures % and clefs. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.F" \set Staff.clefPosition = 2 c'1 \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.G" c'1 \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.C" c'1 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 7 c'1 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 0 \set Staff.clefPosition = 0 c'1 % Return to the normal clef. \set Staff.middleCPosition = 0 c'1 }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Rhythms >> ] |
| [ < Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave ] | [ Up: Pitches ] | [ Rhythms > ] |
Using \autoChange with more than one voice
Here is a demonstration of how to use \autoChange with more
than one voice.
\score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "up" { << \set Timing.beamExceptions = #'() \set Timing.beatStructure = #'(4) \new Voice { \voiceOne \autoChange \relative c' { g8 a b c d e f g g,8 a b c d e f g } } \new Voice { \voiceTwo \autoChange \relative c' { g8 a b c d e f g g,,8 a b c d e f g } } >> } \new Staff = "down" { \clef bass } >> }
| [ << Pitches ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Using \autoChange with more than one voice ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding beams, slurs, ties, etc., when using tuplet and non-tuplet rhythms > ] |
2 Rhythms
See also Rhythms.
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Rhythms ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Adding drum parts > ] |
Adding beams, slurs, ties, etc., when using tuplet and non-tuplet rhythms
LilyPond primarily uses postfix syntax for inputting parentheses, brackets, etc., which might feel unintuitive for novices.
For example, when entering a manual beam, the left square bracket has to be placed after the starting note and its duration, not before. Similarly, the right square bracket should directly follow the note which is to be at the end of the requested beaming, even if this note happens to be inside a tuplet section.
This snippet demonstrates how to combine manual beaming, manual slurs, ties, and phrasing slurs with tuplet sections (enclosed within curly braces).
{ r16[ g16 \tuplet 3/2 { r16 e'8] } g16( a \tuplet 3/2 { b d' e') } g8[( a \tuplet 3/2 { b d') e']\( ~ } \time 2/4 \tuplet 5/4 { e'32 a b d' e' } a'4.\) }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Adding beams, slurs, ties, etc., when using tuplet and non-tuplet rhythms ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Adjusting grace note spacing > ] |
Adding drum parts
Using the powerful pre-configured tools such as the \drummode
function and the DrumStaff context, inputting drum parts is
quite easy: drums are placed at their own staff positions (with a
special clef symbol) and have note heads according to the drum.
Attaching an extra symbol to the drum or restricting the number of
lines is possible.
drh = \drummode { cymc4.^"crash" hhc16^"h.h." hh hhc8 hho hhc8 hh16 hh hhc4 r4 r2 } drl = \drummode { bd4 sn8 bd bd4 << bd ss >> bd8 tommh tommh bd toml toml bd tomfh16 tomfh } timb = \drummode { timh4 ssh timl8 ssh r timh r4 ssh8 timl r4 cb8 cb } \score { << \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "timbales" drumStyleTable = #timbales-style \override StaffSymbol.line-count = #2 \override BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1 . 1) } << \timb >> \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "drums" } << \new DrumVoice { \stemUp \drh } \new DrumVoice { \stemDown \drl } >> >> \layout { } \midi { \tempo 4 = 120 } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Adding drum parts ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Allineare i numeri di battuta > ] |
Adjusting grace note spacing
The space given to grace notes can be adjusted using the
spacing-increment property of Score.GraceSpacing.
graceNotes = { \grace { c4 c8 c16 c32 } c8 } \relative c'' { c8 \graceNotes \override Score.GraceSpacing.spacing-increment = #2.0 \graceNotes \revert Score.GraceSpacing.spacing-increment \graceNotes }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting grace note spacing ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Note brevi alternative > ] |
Allineare i numeri di battuta
Per impostazione predefinita i numeri di battuta sono allineati a destra rispetto al loro oggetto genitore. Di solito si tratta del margine sinistro della linea oppure, se i numeri appaiono all’interno della linea, del lato sinistro della stanghetta. I numeri possono essere posizionati anche direttamente sopra la stanghetta oppure allineati a sinistra della stanghetta.
\relative c' { \set Score.currentBarNumber = 111 \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #all-visible % Increase the size of the bar number by 2 \override Score.BarNumber.font-size = 2 % Print a bar number every second measure \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) c1 | c1 | c1 | \break c1 | c1 | c1 | \break \override Score.BarNumber.self-alignment-X = #(break-alignment-list CENTER RIGHT CENTER) c1 | c1 | c1 | \break c1 | c1 | c1 | } \paper { line-width = 70\mm }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Allineare i numeri di battuta ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Appoggiatura or grace note before a bar line > ] |
Note brevi alternative
Le note brevi sono disponibili anche con due linee verticali su ciascun lato della testa invece di una sola e in stile barocco.
\relative c'' { \time 4/2 c\breve | \override Staff.NoteHead.style = #'altdefault b\breve \override Staff.NoteHead.style = #'baroque b\breve \revert Staff.NoteHead.style a\breve }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Note brevi alternative ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Automatic beam subdivisions > ] |
Appoggiatura or grace note before a bar line
By default, appoggiaturas and grace notes that occur on the first beat of a measure are printed after the bar line. A possible solution for single staves to print it before the bar line is to add an invisible bar line and then the visible one.
In multi-staff systems, however, adding an invisible bar line distorts
the positioning of full-bar rests in other staves; they are no longer
centered but slightly shifted to the left. A better solution for such
situations is to use the \afterGrace command with setting
afterGraceFraction appropriately.
<< { \appoggiatura d''8 c''4 r2. | \appoggiatura { \bar "" d''8 \bar "|" } | c''4 r2. } { R1 | R1 } >> afterGraceFraction = 15/16 << { \appoggiatura d''8 c''4 \afterGrace r2. d''8( | c''4) r2. } { R1 | R1 } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Appoggiatura or grace note before a bar line ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Automatically change durations > ] |
Automatic beam subdivisions
Beams can be subdivided automatically. By setting the property
subdivideBeams, beams are subdivided whenever possible. The
intervals and depth of subdivision can be limited with properties
beamMinimumSubdivision and
beamMaximumSubdivision, respectively.
\new Staff { \relative c'' { << { \voiceOne \set subdivideBeams = ##t b32[^"subdivide beams" a g f c' b a g b32 a g f c' b a g] } \new Voice { \voiceTwo b32_"default"[ a g f c' b a g b32 a g f c' b a g] } >> \oneVoice \once \set beamMinimumSubdivision = #1/8 b32^\markup \center-column { "beamMinimum-" "Subdivision 1/8" } [ a g f c' b a g] \once \set beamMaximumSubdivision = #1/16 b32^\markup \center-column { "beamMaximum-" "Subdivision 1/16" } [ a g f c' b a g] } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Automatic beam subdivisions ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Estremità delle travature nel contesto Score > ] |
Automatically change durations
shiftDurations can be used to change the note lengths of a piece
of music.
It takes two arguments – the scaling factor as a power of two, and the number of dots to be added as a positive integer.
music = \relative c'' { a1 b2 c4 d8 r } { \time 4/2 \music \time 4/4 \shiftDurations 1 0 \music \time 2/4 \shiftDurations 2 0 \music \time 4/1 \shiftDurations -1 0 \music \time 8/1 \shiftDurations -2 0 \music \time 6/2 \shiftDurations 0 1 \music \time 7/2 \shiftDurations 0 2 \music }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Automatically change durations ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Beam nibs > ] |
Estremità delle travature nel contesto Score
Le regole relative alle estremità delle travature definite nel contesto Score
si applicano a tutti i righi, ma possono essere modificate anche ai livelli
Staff e Voice:
\relative c'' { \time 5/4 % Set default beaming for all staves \set Score.beatBase = #1/8 \set Score.beatStructure = 3,4,3 << \new Staff { c8 c c c c c c c c c } \new Staff { % Modify beaming for just this staff \set Staff.beatStructure = 6,4 c8 c c c c c c c c c } \new Staff { % Inherit beaming from Score context << { \voiceOne c8 c c c c c c c c c } % Modify beaming for this voice only \new Voice { \voiceTwo \set Voice.beatStructure = 6,4 a8 a a a a a a a a a } >> } >> }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Estremità delle travature nel contesto Score ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Travature che attraversano le interruzioni di linea > ] |
Beam nibs
Beam nibs at the start and end of beams together with beams attached to
solitary notes that look like flat flags are possible with a
combination of stemLeftBeamCount, stemRightBeamCount, and
paired [] beam indicators.
For imitating right-pointing flat flags on lone notes, use paired
[] beam indicators and set stemLeftBeamCount to zero. For
imitating left-pointing flat flags on lone notes, set
stemRightBeamCount to zero instead (line one).
For right-pointing nibs at the end of a run of beamed notes, set
stemRightBeamCount to a positive value. For left-pointing nibs
at the start of a run of beamed notes, set stemLeftBeamCount
instead (line two).
Sometimes it may make sense for a lone note surrounded by rests to
carry both a left- and right-pointing nib. Do this with paired
[] beam indicators alone (line three).
Note that \set stemLeftBeamCount is always equivalent to
\once \set. In other words, the beam count settings are not
“sticky”, so the pair of nibs attached to the lone 16th note in the
last example has nothing to do with the \set command for the
beam before.
\score { << \new RhythmicStaff { \set stemLeftBeamCount = 0 c16[] r8. r8. \set stemRightBeamCount = 0 16[] } \new RhythmicStaff { 16 16 \set stemRightBeamCount = 2 16 r r \set stemLeftBeamCount = 2 16 16 16 } \new RhythmicStaff { 16 16 \set stemRightBeamCount = 2 16 r16 16[] r16 \set stemLeftBeamCount = 2 16 16 } >> }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Beam nibs ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modificare la distanza delle travature angolari > ] |
Travature che attraversano le interruzioni di linea
Le interruzioni di linea sono di norma proibite quando le travature attraversano la stanghetta di una battuta. Si può cambiare questo comportamento nel modo seguente:
music = { \repeat unfold 8 c8 c8 \repeat unfold 7 { c[ c] } c \repeat unfold 8 c8 } \relative c'' { <>^\markup { \typewriter Beam.breakable set to \typewriter "#t" } \override Beam.breakable = ##t \music } \relative c'' { <>^\markup { \typewriter Beam.breakable not set } \music } \paper { line-width = 100\mm }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Travature che attraversano le interruzioni di linea ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modificare la forma delle pause multiple > ] |
Modificare la distanza delle travature angolari
Le travature angolari vengono inserite automaticamente quando viene
rilevata un’ampia distanza tra le teste di nota. Questo comportamento
può essere regolato attraverso la proprietà auto-knee-gap. Viene
disegnata una travatura angolare se la distanza è più grande del valore
di auto-knee-gap più la larghezza della travatura (che dipende dalla
durata delle note e dall’inclinazione della travatura). Il valore predefinito
di auto-knee-gap è 5.5 spazi rigo.
{ f8 f''8 f8 f''8 \override Beam.auto-knee-gap = #6 f8 f''8 f8 f''8 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Modificare la distanza delle travature angolari ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota > ] |
Modificare la forma delle pause multiple
Se la pausa multipla dura dieci misure o un numero inferiore a dieci, nel rigo
apparirà una serie di pause di longa e di breve (chiamate in tedesco “Kirchenpausen”
- pause ecclesiastiche); altrimenti apparirà una semplice linea. Il numero
predefinito di dieci può essere cambiato sovrascrivendo la proprietà
expand-limit..
\relative c'' { \compressMMRests { R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9 \override MultiMeasureRest.expand-limit = 3 R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9 } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Modificare la forma delle pause multiple ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica > ] |
Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota
Il numero di punti di aumentazione su una singola nota può essere modificato in modo indipendente dai punti posizionati dopo la nota.
\relative c' { c4.. a16 r2 | \override Dots.dot-count = 4 c4.. a16 r2 | \override Dots.dot-count = 0 c4.. a16 r2 | \revert Dots.dot-count c4.. a16 r2 | }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modifica del numero del gruppo irregolare > ] |
Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica
Per cambiare il tempo del file MIDI senza che appaia l’indicazione metronomica, basta renderla invisibile.
\score { \new Staff \relative c' { \tempo 4 = 160 c4 e g b c4 b d c \set Score.tempoHideNote = ##t \tempo 4 = 96 d,4 fis a cis d4 cis e d } \layout { } \midi { } }
Modifica del numero del gruppo irregolare
Di norma compare sulla parentesi del gruppo irregolare solo il
numeratore del numero del gruppo irregolare, ovvero il numeratore
dell’argomento del comando \tuplet. Ma è possibile
mostrare la frazione num:den del numero del gruppo irregolare
oppure nascondere del tutto il numero.
\relative c'' { \tuplet 3/2 { c8 c c } \tuplet 3/2 { c8 c c } \override TupletNumber.text = #tuplet-number::calc-fraction-text \tuplet 3/2 { c8 c c } \omit TupletNumber \tuplet 3/2 { c8 c c } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Modifica del numero del gruppo irregolare ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Chant or psalm notation > ] |
Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using \scaleDurations
Flexible polymeter with unaligned measures
To support explicit creation of independently measured contexts, remove the
Timing_translator from Score context and define a
TimingStaffGroup context that has Timing_translator. This makes
Timing an alias for TimingStaffGroup, targeting \time
commands to the enclosing TimingStaffGroup.
Unlike LilyPond’s built-in \enablePerStaffTiming command, this approach
requires the explicit creation of TimingStaffGroup contexts; in exchange,
it allows creating multiple Staff contexts that jointly follow the
measure defined in their enclosing TimingStaffGroup.
Locally scaled time signatures
Use the unscalable \time command to establish a measure of the desired
length in Timing, a.k.a. TimingStaffGroup. In this snippet, all
staves below TimingStaffGroup use a scaled time signature, so any time
signature with the desired measure length is as good as any other. If there
were an enclosed context that did not use a scaled time signature, the choice of
time signature to set in Timing would matter in that context.
Use the \polymetric \time command to set scalable metric properties in
contexts below Timing, and use the \scaleDurations command to
scale both the local meter and the notes to fit the measure.
\layout { \context { \Score \remove "Timing_translator" \accepts TimingStaffGroup } \context { \StaffGroup \name TimingStaffGroup \alias StaffGroup \consists "Timing_translator" } } << \new TimingStaffGroup << \new Staff { \scaleDurations 8/5 { \time 6/5 % to set measure length in Timing \context Staff \polymetric \time 6/8 b8 b b b b b \time 4/5 % to set measure length in Timing \context Staff \polymetric \time 2/4 b4 b } } >> \new TimingStaffGroup << \new Staff { \clef bass \time 2/4 c2 d e f } >> >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using \scaleDurations ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Compound time signatures > ] |
Chant or psalm notation
This form of notation is used for psalm chant, where verses aren’t always of the same length.
stemOff = \hide Staff.Stem stemOn = \undo \stemOff \score { \new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" } { \key g \minor \cadenzaOn \stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4 \stemOn a'2 \section \stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4 \stemOn f'2 \section \stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe } \stemOn g'2 \fine } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Chant or psalm notation ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Segni per la conduzione, segni di raggruppamento della misura > ] |
Compound time signatures
Odd 20th century time signatures (such as “5/8”) can often be played as complex time signatures (e.g. “3/8 + 2/8”), which combine two or more inequal metrics.
LilyPond can make such music quite easy to read and play, by explicitly printing the time signatures and adapting the automatic beaming behavior.
\relative c' { \compoundMeter #'((2 8) (3 8)) \set Timing.beamExceptions = #'() \set Timing.beatStructure = 2,3 c8 d e fis gis c8 fis, gis e d c8 d e4 gis8 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Compound time signatures ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare > ] |
Segni per la conduzione, segni di raggruppamento della misura
Il raggruppamento delle pulsazioni all’interno della misura è regolato dalla
proprietà di contesto beatStructure. I valori di beatStructure per
varie indicazioni di tempo vengono stabiliti in scm/time-signature-settings.scm.
Questi valori possono essere impostati o modificati con \set. Altrimenti, si
può usare \time per impostare sia l’indicazione di tempo che la struttura
delle pulsazioni. Per farlo si specifica il raggruppamento interno delle pulsazioni in
una misura in una lista di numeri (nella sintassi di Scheme) prima dell’indicazione
di tempo.
\time agisce nel contesto Timing, dunque non reimposterà i
i valori di beatStructure e beatBase che sono impostati in
altri contesti di più basso livello, come Voice.
Se si include l’incisore Measure_grouping_engraver in uno dei
contesti che regolano l’aspetto, appariranno i segni di raggruppamento
della misura. Tali segni facilitano la lettura di musica moderna ritmicamente
complessa.
Nell’esempio la misura di 9/8 è raggruppata in due diversi schemi usando
due metodi differenti, mentre la misura di 5/8 è raggruppata in base alle
impostazioni predefinite in scm/time-signature-settings.scm:
\score { \new Voice \relative c'' { \time 9/8 g8 g d d g g a( bes g) | \set Timing.beatStructure = 2,2,2,3 g8 g d d g g a( bes g) | \time 4,5 9/8 g8 g d d g g a( bes g) | \time 5/8 a4. g4 | \time 3,3,2 4/4 \set Timing.beatBase = #1/8 f4 d8 f4 d8 g4 } \layout { \context { \Staff \consists "Measure_grouping_engraver" } } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Segni per la conduzione, segni di raggruppamento della misura ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Cow and ride bell example > ] |
Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare
Il comportamento predefinito relativo alla visibilità della parentesi quadra del gruppo irregolare è di mostrare una parentesi a meno che non ci sia una travatura della stessa lunghezza del gruppo.
Per controllare la visibilità di tale parentesi, si imposta la proprietà
'bracket-visibility su #t (mostra sempre la parentesi),
#'if-no-beam (mostra la parentesi solo se non c’è una travatura,
che è il comportamento predefinito) o #f (non mostrare mai la parentesi).
L’ultima opzione equivale a omettere l’oggetto @code{TupletBracket}
dall’output.
music = \relative c'' { \tuplet 3/2 { c16[ d e } f8] \tuplet 3/2 { c8 d e } \tuplet 3/2 { c4 d e } } \new Voice { \relative c' { \override Score.TextMark.non-musical = ##f \textMark "default" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam \textMark \markup \typewriter "'if-no-beam" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = ##t \textMark \markup \typewriter "#t" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = ##f \textMark \markup \typewriter "#f" \music \omit TupletBracket \textMark \markup \typewriter "omit" \music } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Creare indicazioni metronomiche in modalità testuale > ] |
Cow and ride bell example
Two different bells, entered with ‘cb’ (cow bell) and ‘rb’ (ride bell).
#(define mydrums '((ridebell default #f 3) (cowbell default #f -2))) \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = #"Different Bells" } \drummode { \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \set DrumStaff.clefPosition = 0.5 \override DrumStaff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'(-2 3) \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.0 . 1.5) \time 2/4 rb8 8 cb8 16 rb16-> ~ | 16 8 16 cb8 8 | }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Cow and ride bell example ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Disegnare manualmente le legature di valore > ] |
Creare indicazioni metronomiche in modalità testuale
Si possono creare nuove indicazioni metronomiche in modalità testuale, ma non modificheranno il tempo del file MIDI.
\relative c' { \tempo \markup { \concat { ( \smaller \general-align #Y #DOWN \note { 16. } #UP " = " \smaller \general-align #Y #DOWN \note { 8 } #UP ) } } c1 c4 c' c,2 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Creare indicazioni metronomiche in modalità testuale ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Engraving tremolos with floating beams > ] |
Disegnare manualmente le legature di valore
Le legature di valore possono essere disegnate a mano cambiando la
proprietà tie-configuration dell’oggetto TieColumn. Il
primo numero indica la distanza dal centro del rigo nell’unità di
metà spazio rigo, mentre il secondo numero indica la
direzione (1 = su, -1 = giù).
Si noti che LilyPond fa una distinzione tra valori precisi e imprecisi
per il primo numero. Se si usa un valore preciso (ovvero un intero o
una frazione come (/ 4 5)), il valore serve come posizione verticale
approssimata che viene ulteriormente aggiustata da LilyPond per far sì che
la legatura di valore eviti le linee del rigo. Se si usa un valore impreciso,
come una virgola mobile, viene usato per la posizione verticale senza ulteriori
regolazioni.
\relative c' { <>^"default" g'1 ^~ g <>^"0" \once \override Tie.staff-position = 0 g1 ^~ g <>^"0.0" \once \override Tie.staff-position = 0.0 g1 ^~ g <>^"reset" \revert Tie.staff-position g1 ^~ g } \relative c' { \override TextScript.outside-staff-priority = ##f \override TextScript.padding = 0 <>^"default" <c e g>1~ <c e g> <>^"0, -2, -4" \override TieColumn.tie-configuration = #'((0 . 1) (-2 . 1) (-4 . 1)) <c e g>1~ <c e g> <>^"0.0, -2.0, -4.0" \override TieColumn.tie-configuration = #'((0.0 . 1) (-2.0 . 1) (-4.0 . 1)) <c e g>1~ <c e g> <>^"reset" \override TieColumn.tie-configuration = ##f <c e g>1~ <c e g> }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Disegnare manualmente le legature di valore ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Inserire vari gruppi irregolari usando una sola volta il comando \tuplet > ] |
Engraving tremolos with floating beams
If a tremolo’s total duration is less than a quarter-note, or exactly a
half note, or between a half note and a whole note, it is normally
typeset with all beams touching the stems. Certain engraving styles
typeset some of these beams as centered floating beams that do not
touch the stems. The number of floating beams in this type of tremolo
is controlled with the gap-count property of the Beam
object, and the size of the gaps between beams and stems is set with
the gap property.
\relative c'' { \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #1 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #2 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #3 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #3 \override Beam.gap = #1.33 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap = #1 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap = #0.67 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap = #0.33 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Engraving tremolos with floating beams ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Forcing rehearsal marks to start from a given letter or number > ] |
Inserire vari gruppi irregolari usando una sola volta il comando \tuplet
La proprietà tupletSpannerDuration imposta la durata di ognuno dei
gruppi irregolari compresi tra parentesi dopo il comando \tuplet.
In questo modo si possono inserire molti gruppi irregolari consecutivi
all’interno di una singola espressione \tuplet, risparmiando così
tempo e spazio.
Ci sono vari modi per impostare tupletSpannerDuration. Il
comando \tupletSpan la imposta su una certa durata e poi
la annulla quando invece di una durata viene specificato
\default. Altrimenti si può usare un argomento
opzionale con \tuplet.
\relative c' { \time 2/4 \tupletSpan 4 \tuplet 3/2 { c8^"\\tupletSpan 4" c c c c c } \tupletSpan \default \tuplet 3/2 { c8^"\\tupletSpan \\default" c c c c c } \tuplet 3/2 4 { c8^"\\tuplet 3/2 4 {...}" c c c c c } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Inserire vari gruppi irregolari usando una sola volta il comando \tuplet ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Generating custom flags > ] |
Forcing rehearsal marks to start from a given letter or number
This snippet demonstrates how to obtain automatic ordered rehearsal marks, but from the letter or number desired.
\relative c'' { \override Score.RehearsalMark.Y-offset = #3.5 c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default c1 \mark #14 c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default c1 \mark \default c1 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Forcing rehearsal marks to start from a given letter or number ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Ritmi di accompagnamento per chitarra > ] |
Generating custom flags
The stencil property of the Flag grob can be set to a
custom Scheme function to generate the glyph for the flag.
#(define-public (weight-flag grob) (let* ((stem-grob (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (log (- (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'duration-log) 2)) (is-up? (eqv? (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'direction) UP)) (yext (if is-up? (cons (* log -0.8) 0) (cons 0 (* log 0.8)))) (flag-stencil (make-filled-box-stencil '(-0.4 . 0.4) yext)) (stroke-style (ly:grob-property grob 'stroke-style)) (stroke-stencil (if (equal? stroke-style "grace") (make-line-stencil 0.2 -0.9 -0.4 0.9 -0.4) empty-stencil))) (ly:stencil-add flag-stencil stroke-stencil))) % Create a flag stencil by looking up the glyph from the font #(define (inverted-flag grob) (let* ((stem-grob (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (dir (if (eqv? (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'direction) UP) "d" "u")) (flag (retrieve-glyph-flag "" dir "" grob)) (line-thickness (ly:staff-symbol-line-thickness grob)) (stem-thickness (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'thickness)) (stem-width (* line-thickness stem-thickness)) (stroke-style (ly:grob-property grob 'stroke-style)) (stencil (if (null? stroke-style) flag (add-stroke-glyph flag stem-grob dir stroke-style ""))) (rotated-flag (ly:stencil-rotate-absolute stencil 180 0 0))) (ly:stencil-translate rotated-flag (cons (- (/ stem-width 2)) 0)))) snippetexamplenotes = { \autoBeamOff c'8 d'16 c'32 d'64 \acciaccatura {c'8} d'64 } { \time 1/4 <>^"Normal flags" \snippetexamplenotes <>_"Custom flag: inverted" \override Flag.stencil = #inverted-flag \snippetexamplenotes <>^"Custom flag: weight" \override Flag.stencil = #weight-flag \snippetexamplenotes <>_"Revert to normal" \revert Flag.stencil \snippetexamplenotes }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Generating custom flags ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Heavily customized polymetric time signatures > ] |
Ritmi di accompagnamento per chitarra
Per la musica per chitarra, è possibile mostrare i ritmi di accompagnamento, insieme alle note della melodia e ai nomi e ai diagrammi degli accordi.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" << \new ChordNames \chordmode { c1 | f | g | c } \new FretBoards \chordmode { c1 | f | g | c } \new Voice \with { \consists "Pitch_squash_engraver" } \relative c'' { \improvisationOn c4 c8 c c4 c8 c f4 f8 f f4 f8 f g4 g8 g g4 g8 g c4 c8 c c4 c8 c } \new Voice = "melody" \relative c'' { c2 e4 e4 f2. r4 g2. a4 e4 c2. } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "melody" { This is my song. I like to sing. } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Ritmi di accompagnamento per chitarra ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ High and low woodblock example > ] |
Heavily customized polymetric time signatures
Though the polymetric time signature shown is not the most essential item here, it has been included to show the beat of this piece (which is the template of a real Balkan song, by the way).
melody = \relative c'' { \key g \major \compoundMeter #'((3 8) (2 8) (2 8) (3 8) (2 8) (2 8) (2 8) (2 8) (3 8) (2 8) (2 8)) \set Timing.beamExceptions = #'() \set Timing.beatStructure = 3,2,2,3,2,2,2,2,3,2,2 c8 c c d4 c8 c b c b a4 g fis8 e d c b' c d e4-^ fis8 g \break c,4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 \break } drum = \new DrumStaff \drummode { \repeat volta 2 { bd4.^\markup { Drums } sn4 bd \bar ";" sn4. bd4 sn \bar ";" bd sn bd4. sn4 bd } } \new Staff { \melody \drum }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Heavily customized polymetric time signatures ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property > ] |
High and low woodblock example
Two Woodblocks, entered with ‘wbh’ (high woodblock) and ‘wbl’ (low
woodblock). The length of the bar line has been altered with an
\override command, otherwise it would be too short. The
positions of the two staff lines also have to be explicitly defined.
% These lines define the position of the woodblocks in the stave; % if you like, you can change it or you can use special note heads % for the woodblocks. #(define mydrums '((hiwoodblock default #f 3) (lowoodblock default #f -2))) woodstaff = { % This defines a staff with only two lines. % It also defines the positions of the two lines. \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'(-2 3) % This is necessary; if not entered, % the barline would be too short! \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.0 . 1.5) % small correction for the clef: \set DrumStaff.clefPosition = 0.5 } \new DrumStaff { % with this you load your new drum style table \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \woodstaff \drummode { \time 2/4 wbh8 16 16 8-> 8 | wbl8 16 16-> ~ 16 16 r8 | } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < High and low woodblock example ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio > ] |
Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property
Setting the transparent property will cause an object to be
printed in “invisible ink”: the object is not printed, but all its
other behavior is retained. The object still takes up space, it takes
part in collisions, and slurs, ties and beams can be attached to it.
This snippet demonstrates how to connect different voices using ties. Normally, ties only connect two notes in the same voice. By introducing a tie in a different voice, and blanking the first up-stem in that voice, the tie appears to cross voices.
\relative { \time 2/4 << { \once \hide Stem \once \override Stem.length = #8 b'8 ~ 8\noBeam \once \hide Stem \once \override Stem.length = #8 g8 ~ 8\noBeam } \\ { b8 g g e } >> } \paper { line-width = 40\mm ragged-right = ##f }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Manually controlling beam positions > ] |
Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio
Le legature di portamento possono avere schemi di tratteggio complessi
definendo la proprietà dash-definition. dash-definition è
una lista di dash-elements. Un dash-element è una lista
di parametri che definiscono il comportamento del tratteggio per un
segmento della legatura.
La legatura di portamento è definita come il parametro t della curva di
bezier che va da 0 sul margine sinistro della legatura fino a 1 su quello
destro. dash-element è una lista di (inizio-t fine-t frazione-trattino
punto-trattino). La regione della legatura di portamento che va da inizio-t a
fine-t avrà una frazione frazione-trattino di ogni
punto-trattino nero. punto-trattino viene definito in spazi
rigo. frazione-trattino è impostato su 1 per una legatura di portamento
continua.
\relative c' { \once \override Slur.dash-definition = #'(( 0 0.3 0.1 0.75) (0.3 0.6 1 1 ) (0.65 1.0 0.4 0.75)) c4( d e f) \once \override Slur.dash-definition = #'((0 0.25 1 1 ) (0.3 0.7 0.4 0.75) (0.75 1.0 1 1 )) c4( d e f) }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Merging multi-measure rests in a polyphonic part > ] |
Manually controlling beam positions
Beam positions may be controlled manually, by overriding the
positions setting of the Beam grob.
\relative c' { \time 2/4 % from upper staff-line (position 2) to center (position 0) \override Beam.positions = #'(2 . 0) c8 c % from center to one above center (position 1) \override Beam.positions = #'(0 . 1) c8 c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Manually controlling beam positions ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modifying tuplet bracket length > ] |
Merging multi-measure rests in a polyphonic part
Multi-measure rests in a polyphonic staff are placed differently
depending on the voice they belong to. They can be printed on the same
staff line using the setting below. If you omit the \once
keyword, the change affects all rests in that follow in the given
voice.
normalPos = \once \revert MultiMeasureRest.direction << { c''1 R c'' \normalPos R c'' R } \\ { c'1 R c' \normalPos R c' R } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Merging multi-measure rests in a polyphonic part ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Spostare le note puntate in polifonia > ] |
Modifying tuplet bracket length
Tuplet brackets can be made to extend horizontally to prefatory matter or the next note. By default, tuplet brackets end at the right edge of the final note of the tuplet; full-length tuplet brackets extend farther to the right, either to cover all the non-rhythmic notation up to the following note, or to cover only the whitespace before the next item of notation, be that a clef, time signature, key signature, or another note. The example shows how to switch tuplets to full length mode and how to modify what material they cover.
\new RhythmicStaff { % Defaults. \time 2/4 \tuplet 3/2 { c4 4 4 } \time 4/4 \tuplet 5/4 { 4 1 } \time 3/4 2. } \new RhythmicStaff { % Set tuplets to be extendable... \set tupletFullLength = ##t % ...to cover all items up to the next note \set tupletFullLengthNote = ##t \time 2/4 \tuplet 3/2 { c4 4 4 } % ...or to cover just whitespace. \set tupletFullLengthNote = ##f \time 4/4 \tuplet 5/4 { 4 1 } \time 3/4 2. }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Modifying tuplet bracket length ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Regolazione della lunghezza delle pause multiple > ] |
Spostare le note puntate in polifonia
Quando una nota puntata della voce più alta viene spostata per evitare una
collisione con una nota di un’altra voce, il comportamento predefinito è
spostare la nota più alta a destra. Tale comportamento può essere
modificato tramite la proprietà prefer-dotted-right di
NoteCollision.
\new Staff \relative c' << { f2. f4 \override Staff.NoteCollision.prefer-dotted-right = ##f f2. f4 \override Staff.NoteCollision.prefer-dotted-right = ##t f2. f4 } \\ { e4 e e e e e e e e e e e } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Spostare le note puntate in polifonia ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Testo a margine delle pause multiple > ] |
Regolazione della lunghezza delle pause multiple
Le pause multiple hanno una lunghezza che dipende dalla loro durata totale
e tale lunghezza è regolata da MultiMeasureRest.space-increment. Nota
che il valore predefinito è 2.0.
\relative c' { \omit Staff.TimeSignature \compressEmptyMeasures R1*2 R1*4 R1*64 R1*16 \break \override MultiMeasureRest.space-increment = 4 R1*2 R1*4 R1*64 R1*16 } \layout { ragged-right = ##t }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Regolazione della lunghezza delle pause multiple ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Numeri non predefiniti per i gruppi irregolari > ] |
Testo a margine delle pause multiple
Il testo a margine di una pausa multipla viene centrato sopra o sotto di essa. Se il testo è lungo, la misura non si espanderà. Per espandere la pausa multipla in modo che si allinei col testo, conviene usare un accordo vuoto con del testo attaccato prima della pausa multipla.
Il testo così attaccato a una nota spaziatrice viene allineato a sinistra della posizione in cui la nota sarebbe posta nella misura, ma se la lunghezza della misura è determinata dalla lunghezza del testo, il testo verrà centrato.
\relative c' { \compressMMRests { \textLengthOn <>^\markup { [MAJOR GENERAL] } R1*19 <>_\markup { \italic { Cue: ... it is yours } } <>^\markup { A } R1*30^\markup { [MABEL] } \textLengthOff c4^\markup { CHORUS } d f c } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Testo a margine delle pause multiple ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Numbering single measure rests > ] |
Numeri non predefiniti per i gruppi irregolari
LilyPond fornisce anche funzioni di formattazione che permettono di creare numeri di gruppi irregolari diversi dalla frazione vera e propria, così come di aggiungere un valore di nota al numero o alla frazione di un gruppo irregolare.
\relative c'' { \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::non-default-tuplet-denominator-text 7) \tuplet 3/2 { c4. c4. c4. c4. } \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::non-default-tuplet-fraction-text 12 7) \tuplet 3/2 { c4. c4. c4. c4. } \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::append-note-wrapper (tuplet-number::non-default-tuplet-fraction-text 12 7) (ly:make-duration 3 0)) \tuplet 3/2 { c4. c4. c4. c4. } \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::append-note-wrapper tuplet-number::calc-denominator-text (ly:make-duration 2 0)) \tuplet 3/2 { c8 c8 c8 c8 c8 c8 } \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::append-note-wrapper tuplet-number::calc-fraction-text (ly:make-duration 2 0)) \tuplet 3/2 { c8 c8 c8 c8 c8 c8 } \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::fraction-with-notes (ly:make-duration 2 1) (ly:make-duration 3 0)) \tuplet 3/2 { c4. c4. c4. c4. } \once \override TupletNumber.text = #(tuplet-number::non-default-fraction-with-notes 12 (ly:make-duration 3 0) 4 (ly:make-duration 2 0)) \tuplet 3/2 { c4. c4. c4. c4. } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Numeri non predefiniti per i gruppi irregolari ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Partcombine and \autoBeamOff > ] |
Numbering single measure rests
Multi-measure rests show their length by a number except for single
measures. This can be changed by setting restNumberThreshold.
{ \compressEmptyMeasures R1 R1*10 R1*11 \bar "||" \set restNumberThreshold = 0 R1 R1*10 R1*11 \bar "||" \set restNumberThreshold = 10 R1 R1*10 R1*11 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Numbering single measure rests ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Percussion example > ] |
Partcombine and \autoBeamOff
The function of \autoBeamOff when used with
\partCombine can be difficult to understand. It may be
preferable to use
\set Staff.autoBeaming = ##f
instead to ensure that auto-beaming is turned off for the entire staff. Use this at a spot in your score where no beam generated by the auto-beamer is still active.
Internally, \partCombine works with four voices – up-stem
single, down-stem single, combined, and solo. In order to use
\autoBeamOff to stop all auto-beaming when used with
\partCombine, it is necessary to use four calls to
\autoBeamOff.
{ % \set Staff.autoBeaming = ##f % turns off all auto-beaming \partCombine { \autoBeamOff % applies to split up-stems \repeat unfold 4 a'16 % \autoBeamOff % applies to combined stems \repeat unfold 4 a'8 \repeat unfold 4 a'16 % \autoBeamOff % applies to solo \repeat unfold 4 a'16 r4 } { % \autoBeamOff % applies to split down-stems \repeat unfold 4 f'8 \repeat unfold 8 f'16 | r4 \repeat unfold 4 a'16 } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Partcombine and \autoBeamOff ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Consentire l’interruzione del rigo all’interno di gruppi irregolari con travature > ] |
Percussion example
A short example taken from Stravinsky’s L’histoire du Soldat.
#(define mydrums '((bassdrum default #f 4) (snare default #f -4) (tambourine default #f 0))) U = \stemUp D = \stemDown global = { \time 3/8 s4. \time 2/4 s2*2 \time 3/8 s4. \time 2/4 s2 } drumsA = { \context DrumVoice << \global \drummode { \autoBeamOff \D sn8 \U tamb s | sn4 \D sn4 | \U tamb8 \D sn \U sn16 \D sn \U sn8 | \D sn8 \U tamb s | \U sn4 s8 \U tamb } >> } drumsB = \drummode { s4 bd8 s2*2 s4 bd8 s4 bd8 s } \layout { indent = 40\mm \context { \DrumStaff drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) } } \score { \new StaffGroup << \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = \markup \center-column { "Tambourine" "et" "caisse claire s. timbre" } } \drumsA \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "Grosse Caisse" }\drumsB >> }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Percussion example ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Positioning grace note beams at the height of normal note beams > ] |
Consentire l’interruzione del rigo all’interno di gruppi irregolari con travature
Questo esempio artificioso mostra come permettere interruzioni del rigo sia manuali che automatiche all’interno di un gruppo irregolare con travature. Si noti che le travature di questi gruppi irregolari fuori dal ritmo devono essere disposte manualmente.
\layout { \context { \Voice % Permit automatic line breaks within tuplets. \remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" % Allow beams to be broken at line breaks. \override Beam.breakable = ##t } } \relative c'' { <>^"manually forced line break" a8 \repeat unfold 5 { \tuplet 3/2 { c8[ b g16 a] } } \tuplet 3/2 { c8[ b \break g16 a] } \repeat unfold 5 { \tuplet 3/2 { c8[ b g16 a] } } c8 \bar "||" } \relative c'' { <>^"automatic line break" \repeat unfold 28 a16 \tuplet 11/8 { a16[ b c d e f e d c b a] } \repeat unfold 28 a16 \bar "||" }
Positioning grace note beams at the height of normal note beams
When notes are placed on ledger lines, their beams are usually centred on the stave. Grace notes beams are shorter and grace notes on ledger lines may well have beams outside the stave. You can override this beaming for grace notes.
\relative c { f8[ e] \grace { f8[ e] \override Stem.no-stem-extend = ##f f8[ e] \revert Stem.no-stem-extend } f8[ e] }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Positioning grace note beams at the height of normal note beams ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Posizionamento delle pause multiple > ] |
Posizionare gli abbellimenti con dello spazio fluttuante
Se si imposta la proprietà 'strict-grace-spacing, le colonne musicali
degli abbellimenti ’fluttuano’, ovvero si scollegano dalle note normali:
prima vengono spaziate le note normali, poi le colonne musicali degli
abbellimenti vengono messe a sinistra delle colonne delle note principali.
shiftedGrace = #(define-music-function (offset music) (number? ly:music?) #{ \override NoteHead.X-offset = #(- offset 0.85) \override Stem.X-offset = #offset \grace { $music } \revert NoteHead.X-offset \revert Stem.X-offset #}) \relative c'' << { g4 \shiftedGrace #-1.3 a32 \shiftedGrace #-0.5 { bes c d } es4 } { f,32 e d c f e d c f4 } >> \layout { \context { \Score \override SpacingSpanner.strict-grace-spacing = ##t } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Posizionare gli abbellimenti con dello spazio fluttuante ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Positioning opposing fermatas on a bar line > ] |
Posizionamento delle pause multiple
Diversamente dalle pause normali, non esiste un comando predefinito per cambiare la posizione sul rigo di un simbolo di pausa multipla di qualsiasi tipo connettendolo a una nota. Tuttavia, nella musica polifonica le pause multiple nelle voci dispari e pari sono separate verticalmente. Il posizionamento delle pause multiple si controlla nel modo seguente:
\relative c'' { % Multi-measure rests by default are set under the fourth line. R1 % They can be moved using an override. \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = -2 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 0 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 2 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 3 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 6 R1 \revert MultiMeasureRest.staff-position \break % In two Voices, odd-numbered voices are under the top line. << { R1 } \\ { a1 } >> % Even-numbered voices are under the bottom line. << { a1 } \\ { R1 } >> % Multi-measure rests in both voices remain separate. << { R1 } \\ { R1 } >> % Separating multi-measure rests in more than two voices % requires an override. << { R1 } \\ { R1 } \\ \once \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 0 { R1 } >> % Using compressed bars in multiple voices requires another override % in all voices to avoid multiple instances being printed. \compressMMRests << \revert MultiMeasureRest.direction { R1*3 } \\ \revert MultiMeasureRest.direction { R1*3 } >> }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Posizionamento delle pause multiple ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Preventing final mark from removing final tuplet > ] |
Positioning opposing fermatas on a bar line
This snippet demonstrates a command that prints fermatas both above and below a bar line. If there would not otherwise be a bar line, it adds a double bar line. Semantically, the command codes a longer-than-normal caesura, which might be considered misuse depending on the situation.
twoWayFermata = { \once \set Staff.caesuraType = #'((underlying-bar-line . "||")) \once \set Staff.caesuraTypeTransform = ##f \caesura ^\fermata _\fermata } music = { f'1 \twoWayFermata R1 f'2 \twoWayFermata f'2 R1 b'1 \twoWayFermata \fine } \new GrandStaff << \new Staff \music \new Staff \music >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Positioning opposing fermatas on a bar line ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Mostrare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari > ] |
Preventing final mark from removing final tuplet
Due to issue
#2362 the addition of a final mark can result in the loss of a
final tuplet marking. This can be overcome by setting
TupletBracket.full-length-to-extent to #f.
\new Staff { \set tupletFullLength = ##t \time 1/8 \tuplet 3/2 8 { c'16 c' c' c' c' c' c' c' c' } \tweak direction #DOWN \textEndMark "1234" } \new Staff { \set tupletFullLength = ##t \override TupletBracket.full-length-to-extent = ##f \time 1/8 \tuplet 3/2 8 { c'16 c' c' c' c' c' c' c' c' } \tweak direction #DOWN \textEndMark "1234" }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Preventing final mark from removing final tuplet ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Printing bar numbers for broken measures > ] |
Mostrare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari
Impostando la proprietà barNumberVisibility si possono far apparire
i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari. In questo esempio vengono
mostrati ogni due misure eccetto alla fine della linea.
\relative c' { \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible \set Score.currentBarNumber = 11 % Print a bar number every second measure \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) c1 | c | c | c | c \break c1 | c | c | c | c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Mostrare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi > ] |
Printing bar numbers for broken measures
By default, a bar number of a broken measure is not repeated at the
beginning of the new line. Use
first-bar-number-invisible-save-broken-bars for
barNumberVisibility to get a parenthesized BarNumber
there.
\layout { \context { \Score barNumberVisibility = #first-bar-number-invisible-save-broken-bars \override BarNumber.break-visibility = ##(#f #t #t) } } \relative c' { c1 | d | e | f2 \break fis2 | g1 | e2 \break <>^"reenabled default" % back to default - % \unset Score.barNumberVisibility would do so as well \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #first-bar-number-invisible-and-no-parenthesized-bar-numbers es2 | d1 | c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Printing bar numbers for broken measures ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Printing bar numbers using modulo-bar-number-visible > ] |
Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi
I numeri di battuta possono apparire anche all’interno di rettangoli o cerchi.
\relative c' { % Center bar numbers except at the beginning of a staff. \override Score.BarNumber.self-alignment-X = #(break-alignment-list CENTER CENTER 0.3) % Prevent bar numbers at the end of a line and permit them elsewhere. \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 4) % Increase the size of the bar number by 2. \override Score.BarNumber.font-size = 2 % Draw a circle round the following bar number(s). \override Score.BarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-circler 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) \repeat unfold 7 { c1 } \break % Draw a box round the following bar number(s). \override Score.BarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) \repeat unfold 7 { c1 } \bar "|." }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Stampare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari variabili > ] |
Printing bar numbers using modulo-bar-number-visible
If the remainder of the division of the current bar number by the first
argument of modulo-bar-number-visible equals its second
argument, print a bar number.
This is useful to print the bar number at certain distances. Some examples:
-
(modulo-bar-number-visible 3 2)→ prints 2, 5, 8, ... -
(modulo-bar-number-visible 4 2)→ prints 2, 6, 10, ... -
(modulo-bar-number-visible 2 1)→ prints 3, 5, 7, ... -
(modulo-bar-number-visible 5 0)→ prints 5, 10, 15, ...
\layout { \context { \Score \override BarNumber.break-visibility = ##(#f #t #t) barNumberVisibility = #(modulo-bar-number-visible 5 0) } } \relative c' { c1 | d | e | f \break g1 | e | d | c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Printing bar numbers using modulo-bar-number-visible ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo > ] |
Stampare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari variabili
Tramite la funzione di contesto {set-bar-number-visibility}
si possono modificare gli intervalli dei numeri di battuta.
\relative c' { \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible \context Score \applyContext #(set-bar-number-visibility 4) \repeat unfold 10 c'1 \context Score \applyContext #(set-bar-number-visibility 2) \repeat unfold 10 c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Stampare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari variabili ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Printing music with different time signatures > ] |
Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo
Di norma, il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata vengono posizionati sopra il
rigo. Per metterli sotto il rigo basta impostare correttamente la proprietà
direction di MetronomeMark o RehearsalMark.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } { % Metronome marks below the staff \override Score.MetronomeMark.direction = #DOWN \tempo 8. = 120 c''1 % Rehearsal marks below the staff \override Score.RehearsalMark.direction = #DOWN \mark \default c''1 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Mostrare il numero di battuta nella prima misura > ] |
Printing music with different time signatures
In the following snippet, two parts have a completely different time signature, yet remain synchronized.
The bar lines can no longer be printed at the Score level; to
allow independent bar lines in each part, the
Default_barline_engraver and Timing_translator are moved
from the Score context to the Staff context.
If bar numbers are required, the Bar_number_engraver should also
be moved, since it relies on properties set by the
Timing_translator; a \with block can be used to add bar
numbers to the relevant staff.
global = { \time 3/4 s2.*3 \break s2.*3 } \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Timing_translator" \remove "Bar_number_engraver" \override SpacingSpanner.uniform-stretching = ##t \override SpacingSpanner.strict-note-spacing = ##t proportionalNotationDuration = #1/64 } \context { \Staff \consists "Timing_translator" } \context { \Voice \remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" tupletFullLength = ##t } } Bassklarinette = \new Staff \with { \consists "Bar_number_engraver" barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) \override BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible } << \global { \clef treble \time 3/8 d''4. | \time 3/4 r8 des''2( c''8) | \time 7/8 r4. ees''2 ~ | \time 2/4 \tupletUp \tuplet 3/2 { ees''4 r4 d''4 ~ } | \time 3/8 \tupletUp \tuplet 4/3 { d''4 r4 } | \time 2/4 e''2 | \time 3/8 es''4. | \time 3/4 r8 d''2 r8 | } >> Perkussion = \new StaffGroup << \new Staff << \global { \clef percussion \time 3/4 r4 c'2 ~ | c'2. | R2. | r2 g'4 ~ | g'2. ~ | g'2. | } >> \new Staff << \global { \clef percussion \time 3/4 R2. | g'2. ~ | g'2. | r4 g'2 ~ | g'2 r4 | g'2. | } >> >> \score { << \Bassklarinette \Perkussion >> }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Printing music with different time signatures ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side > ] |
Mostrare il numero di battuta nella prima misura
Il primo numero di battuta di una partitura viene soppresso se è inferiore
o uguale a ‘1’. Se si imposta barNumberVisibility su
all-bar-numbers-visible, verrà mostrato il numero di battuta della
prima misura e di tutte quelle successive. Si noti che perché funzioni è
necessario inserire una stanghetta invisibile prima della prima nota.
\paper { line-width = 50\mm } \relative c' { \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #all-bar-numbers-visible c1 | d | e | f \break g1 | e | d | c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Mostrare il numero di battuta nella prima misura ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Ridefinire le impostazioni predefinite globali degli abbellimenti > ] |
Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side
Whichever option you choose for controlling the tuplet bracket
visibility, it will show or hide the tuplet bracket irrespectively of
tuplet bracket placement (stem side or note head side). However, when
placing the tuplet bracket on the note head side some authors recommend
always printing the tuplet bracket. The option
visible-over-note-heads can be used to achieve this.
music = \relative c'' { \tupletNeutral \tuplet 3/2 { c16[ d e } f8] \tupletUp \tuplet 3/2 { c8 d e } } \new Voice { \relative c' { \override TextScript.staff-padding = #2.5 \time 2/4 \override TupletBracket.visible-over-note-heads = ##t \override Score.TextMark.non-musical = ##f <>^\markup "default" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam <>^\markup \typewriter "if-no-beam" \music } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito > ] |
Ridefinire le impostazioni predefinite globali degli abbellimenti
Le impostazioni globali predefinite degli abbellimenti sono salvate ni seguenti identificatori:
startGraceMusic stopGraceMusic startAcciaccaturaMusic stopAcciaccaturaMusic startAppoggiaturaMusic stopAppoggiaturaMusic
Sono definiti nel file ly/grace-init.ly. Ridefinendoli si
possono ottenere effetti diversi.
startAcciaccaturaMusic = { <>( \override Flag.stroke-style = "grace" \slurDashed } stopAcciaccaturaMusic = { \revert Flag.stroke-style \slurSolid <>) } \relative c'' { \acciaccatura d8 c1 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Ridefinire le impostazioni predefinite globali degli abbellimenti ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Stili di pausa > ] |
Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito
I numeri di battuta possono essere tolti rimuovendo l’incisore
Bar_number_engraver dal contesto Score.
\layout { \context { \Score \omit BarNumber % or: % \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } \relative c'' { c4 c c c \break c4 c c c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Reverting default beam endings > ] |
Stili di pausa
Esistono vari stili di pausa.
restsA = { r\maxima r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 s32 s64 s128 s256 s512 s1024 s1024 } restsB = { r\maxima r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r256 r512 r1024 s1024 } \new Staff \relative c { \omit Score.TimeSignature \cadenzaOn \override Staff.Rest.style = #'mensural <>^\markup \typewriter { mensural } \restsA \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'neomensural <>^\markup \typewriter { neomensural } \restsA \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'classical <>^\markup \typewriter { classical } \restsB \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'z <>^\markup \typewriter { z-style } \restsB \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'default <>^\markup \typewriter { default } \restsB \bar "" \break }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Stili di pausa ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Rhythmic slashes > ] |
Reverting default beam endings
To typeset beams grouped 3-4-3-2 in 12/8 it is necessary first
to override the default beam endings in 12/8, and then to set up the
new beaming endings:
\relative c'' { \time 12/8 % Default beaming a8 a a a a a a a a a a a % Set new values for beam endings \set Score.beatStructure = 3,4,3,2 a8 a a a a a a a a a a a }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Reverting default beam endings ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Skips in lyric mode > ] |
Rhythmic slashes
In “simple” lead-sheets, sometimes no actual notes are written. Instead, only “rhythmic patterns” and chords above the measures are notated to represent the structure of a song. Such a feature can be useful while creating or transcribing the structure of a song, or when sharing lead sheets with guitarists or jazz musicians.
startPat = { \improvisationOn \omit Stem } stopPat = { \improvisationOff \undo \omit Stem } \new Voice \with { \consists Pitch_squash_engraver } { c'4 d' e' f' | \startPat 4 4 4 4 | \stopPat f'4 e' d' c' }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Rhythmic slashes ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Skips in lyric mode (2) > ] |
Skips in lyric mode
The ‘s’ syntax for skips is only available in note mode and
chord mode. In other situations, for example, when entering lyrics,
using the \skip command is recommended.
<< \relative c'' { a1 | a } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \skip1 bla1 } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Skips in lyric mode ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Stemlets > ] |
Skips in lyric mode (2)
Although ‘s’ skips cannot be used in \lyricmode (it
is taken to be a literal “s”, not a space), double quotes ("")
or underscores (_) are available.
<< \relative c'' { a4 b c d } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { a4 "" _ gap } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Skips in lyric mode (2) ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Travatura che segue strettamente il battito > ] |
Stemlets
In some notational conventions beams are allowed to extend over rests. Depending on preference, these beams may drop ‘stemlets’ to help the eye appreciate the rhythm better, and in some modern music the rest itself is omitted and only the stemlet remains.
This snippet shows a progression from traditional notation, to beams
over the rest, to stemlets over the rest, to stemlets alone. Stemlets
are generated by overriding the stemlet-length property of
Stem, and rests are hidden by using \hide.
Some \markup elements are included in the source to highlight
the different notations.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f } { c'16^\markup { traditional } d' r f' g'16[^\markup \column { "beams" "over rests" } f' r d'] % N.B. use Score.Stem to set for the whole score. \override Staff.Stem.stemlet-length = #0.75 c'16[^\markup \column { "stemlets" "over rests" } d' r f'] g'16[^\markup \column { "stemlets" "and no rests" } f' \once \hide Rest r16 d'] }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Stemlets ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Suddividere le travature > ] |
Travatura che segue strettamente il battito
Si possono impostare i tratti di suddivisione della travatura in modo che siano rivolti verso la relativa pulsazione. La prima travatura fa sì che non spuntino i tratti di suddivisione (comportamento predefinito); la seconda travatura è orientata verso la pulsazione.
\relative c'' { \time 6/8 a8. a16 a a \set strictBeatBeaming = ##t a8. a16 a a }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Travatura che segue strettamente il battito ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Tam-tam example > ] |
Suddividere le travature
Le travature di note consecutive di un sedicesimo (o più brevi) non
vengono suddivise, ovvero i tre (o più) tratti della travatura si
estendono, senza spezzarsi, sugli interi gruppi di note.
Questo comportamento può essere modificato in modo da suddividere le
travature in sottogruppi attraverso la proprietà
subdivideBeams. Se impostata, le travature che comprendono più
sottogruppi verranno suddivise a intervalli definiti dal
valore attuale di beatBase, riducendo le travature multiple
al numero di travature che indica il valore metrico della suddivisione.
Se il gruppo successivo alla suddivisione è più breve del valore
metrico corrente (di solito perché la travatura è incompleta), il
numero di travature riflette il gruppo di suddivisione più lungo
possibile. Tuttavia, se rimane una sola nota dopo la divisione, questa
restrizione non viene applicata.
Si noti che beatBase, se non impostata
esplicitamente, equivale a uno fratto il denominatore dell’attuale
indicazione di tempo. Deve quindi essere impostata su una frazione
che stabilisca la durata del sottogruppo di travature; lo si può fare
usando la funzione ly:make-moment, come è mostrato in questo
frammento di codice. Inoltre quando beatBase cambia, anche
beatStructure deve essere modificato per accordarsi con
beatBase:
\relative c'' { \time 1/4 <>^"default" c32 c c c c c c c <>^"with subdivision" \set subdivideBeams = ##t c32 c c c c c c c <>^"min 1/8" \once \set beamMinimumSubdivision = #1/8 c32 c c c c c c c <>^"max 1/16" \once \set beamMaximumSubdivision = #1/16 c32 c c c c c c c <>^"max 3/8" \once \set beamMaximumSubdivision = #3/8 \repeat unfold 16 c64 <>^"min 1/32, max 1/64" % Set maximum beam subdivision interval to 1/64 to limit % subdivision depth, despite not being metrically correct. \once \set beamMinimumSubdivision = #1/32 \once \set beamMaximumSubdivision = #1/64 \repeat unfold 32 c128 \break <>^"beams with incomplete subdivisions" c32 c c c c c c r32 c32 c c c c r16. <>^\markup { "the same with" \typewriter { "respectIncomplete=#t" } } \set respectIncompleteBeams = ##t % The incomplete subgroup extends the completed subgroup. c32 c c c c c c r32 % No visual change since we have only two stems in the % incomplete subgroup. c32 c c c c r16. }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Suddividere le travature ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Tambourine example > ] |
Tam-tam example
A tam-tam example, entered with ‘tt’.
#(define mydrums '((tamtam default #f 0))) \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = #"Tamtam" } \drummode { \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'( 0 ) \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5) tt 1 \pp \laissezVibrer }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Tam-tam example ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Three-sided box > ] |
Tambourine example
A tambourine example, entered with ‘tamb’.
#(define mydrums '((tambourine default #f 0))) \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = #"Tambourine" } \drummode { \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'( 0 ) \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5) \time 6/8 tamb8. 16 8 8 8 8 | tamb4. 8 8 8 | % The trick with the scaled duration and the shorter rest % is neccessary for the correct ending of the trill-span! tamb2.*5/6 \startTrillSpan s8 \stopTrillSpan | }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Tambourine example ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Time signature in brackets > ] |
Three-sided box
This example shows how to add a markup command to get a three-sided box around some text (or other markup).
% New command to add a three-sided box, with sides north, west, and south. % Based on the `box-stencil` command defined in `scm/stencil.scm`. % Note that ";;" is used to comment a line in Scheme. #(define-public (NWS-box-stencil stencil thickness padding) "Add a box around STENCIL, producing a new stencil." (let* ((x-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil X) padding)) (y-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil Y) padding)) (y-rule (make-filled-box-stencil (cons 0 thickness) y-ext)) (x-rule (make-filled-box-stencil (interval-widen x-ext thickness) (cons 0 thickness)))) ;; (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X 1 y-rule padding)) (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X LEFT y-rule padding)) (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y UP x-rule 0.0)) (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y DOWN x-rule 0.0)) stencil)) % The corresponding markup command, based on the `\box` command defined % in `scm/define-markup-commands.scm`. #(define-markup-command (NWS-box layout props arg) (markup?) #:properties ((thickness 0.1) (font-size 0) (box-padding 0.2)) "Draw a box round ARG. Look at THICKNESS, BOX-PADDING, and FONT-SIZE properties to determine line thickness and padding around the markup." (let ((pad (* (magstep font-size) box-padding)) (m (interpret-markup layout props arg))) (NWS-box-stencil m thickness pad))) \relative c' { c1^\markup { \NWS-box ABCD } c1^\markup { \NWS-box \note {4} #1.0 } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Three-sided box ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Time signature in parentheses > ] |
Time signature in brackets
The time signature can be enclosed within brackets.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.TimeSignature.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (bracketify-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) Y 0.1 0.2 0.1)) \time 2/4 a4 b8 c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Time signature in brackets ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Indicazione di tempo che mostra solo il numeratore (invece della frazione) > ] |
Time signature in parentheses
The time signature can be enclosed within parentheses.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.TimeSignature.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (parenthesize-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) 0.1 0.4 0.4 0.1)) \time 2/4 a4 b8 c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Time signature in parentheses ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano > ] |
Indicazione di tempo che mostra solo il numeratore (invece della frazione)
Talvolta un’indicazione di tempo non deve mostrare la frazione intera (ad esempio
7/4), ma solo il numeratore (numero 7 in questo caso). Si può ottenere
facilmente con \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'single-number,
che cambia lo stile in modo permanente. Con \revert
Staff.TimeSignature.style, questa impostazione può essere annullata. Per
applicare lo stile a cifra singola (single-number) a una sola indicazione
di tempo, si usa il comando \override preceduto da \once.
\relative c'' { \time 3/4 c4 c c % Change the style permanently \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'single-number \time 2/4 c4 c \time 3/4 c4 c c % Revert to default style: \revert Staff.TimeSignature.style \time 2/4 c4 c % single-number style only for the next time signature \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'single-number \time 5/4 c4 c c c c \time 2/4 c4 c }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Indicazione di tempo che mostra solo il numeratore (invece della frazione) ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ User-defined time signatures > ] |
Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano
L’aspetto di tutte le espressioni contenute nei blocchi \grace di un
brano può essere modificato con le funzioni add-grace-property e
remove-grace-property. L’esempio seguente toglie la definizione
della direzione di Stem nell’abbellimento, in modo che gli abbellimenti
non siano sempre rivolti in su, e barra le teste di nota.
\relative c'' { \new Staff { $(remove-grace-property 'Voice 'Stem 'direction) $(add-grace-property 'Voice 'NoteHead 'style 'cross) \new Voice { \acciaccatura { f16 } g4 \grace { d16 e } f4 \appoggiatura { f,32 g a } e2 } } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Using alternative flag styles > ] |
User-defined time signatures
New time signature styles can be defined. The time signature in the second measure is printed upside down in both staves.
#(add-simple-time-signature-style 'topsy-turvy (lambda (fraction) (make-rotate-markup 180 (make-compound-meter-markup fraction)))) << \new Staff { \time 3/4 f'2. \override Score.TimeSignature.style = #'topsy-turvy \time 3/4 R2. \bar "|." } \new Staff { R2. e'' } >>
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < User-defined time signatures ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Usare il gambo barrato degli abbellimenti con le teste normali > ] |
Using alternative flag styles
Alternative shapes for flags on eighth and shorter notes can be displayed by
overriding the stencil property of Flag. LilyPond provides
the following functions: modern-straight-flag,
old-straight-flag, and flat-flag. Use \revert to
restore the default shape.
To get stacked (i.e., vertically more compact) flags, call the command
\flagStyleStacked, which can be reset with
\flagStyleDefault.
Overriding the Flag stencil does not change how flag elements are
positioned vertically. This is especially noticeable for flat flags:
LilyPond doesn’t dynamically adjust the vertical gaps between flag elements
in the same way as it does for beams. A possible solution to harmonize the
appearance is to replace flat flags with half beams, as shown in the second
staff; however, this can’t be done automatically. In the code of this
snippet, such half beams are entered with @ as a prefix, for example
@c8.
Be aware that half beams are not Flag grobs. This means in
particular that modifying Flag properties won’t have any effect on
them (you have to use Beam properties instead), and properties for
their associated Stem grob will also behave beam-like.
"@" = #(define-music-function (music) (ly:music?) #{ \set stemLeftBeamCount = 0 $music [] #}) testnotes = { \autoBeamOff c8 d16 e''32 f64 \acciaccatura { g,,,8 } a128 b } \relative c' { \override TextScript.staff-padding = 6 \time 1/4 <>^"default" \testnotes \override Flag.stencil = #modern-straight-flag <>_"modern straight" \testnotes \override Flag.stencil = #old-straight-flag <>^"old straight" \testnotes \override Flag.stencil = #flat-flag <>_"flat" \testnotes \revert Flag.stencil \flagStyleStacked <>^"stacked" \testnotes \flagStyleDefault <>_"default" \testnotes } \relative c' { \time 3/4 \override Flag.stencil = #flat-flag <>^"flat" c8 c[ c] d16 d[ d] e''32 e[ e] f64 f[ f] \acciaccatura { g,,,8 } a128 a[ a a a a] <>^"beam-like" @c8 c[ c] @d16 d[ d] @e''32 e[ e] @f64 f[ f] \acciaccatura { g,,,8 } @a128 a[ a a a a] } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Score \override NonMusicalPaperColumn.line-break-permission = ##f } }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Using alternative flag styles ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Usare le legature di valore con un arpeggio > ] |
Usare il gambo barrato degli abbellimenti con le teste normali
Il gambo barrato presente nelle acciaccature può essere applicato in altre situazioni.
\relative c'' { \override Flag.stroke-style = "grace" c8( d2) e8( f4) }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Expressive marks >> ] |
| [ < Usare il gambo barrato degli abbellimenti con le teste normali ] | [ Up: Rhythms ] | [ Expressive marks > ] |
Usare le legature di valore con un arpeggio
Le legature di valore vengono usate talvolta per scrivere un arpeggio. In questo
caso, le due note da legare devono non essere consecutive. Per ottenere tale risultato
occorre impostare la proprietà tieWaitForNote su #t. Questa
funzionalità serve anche a legare un tremolo a un accordo e in generale
qualsiasi coppia di note consecutive.
\relative c' { \set tieWaitForNote = ##t \grace { c16[ ~ e ~ g] ~ } <c, e g>2 \repeat tremolo 8 { c32 ~ c' ~ } <c c,>1 e8 ~ c ~ a ~ f ~ <e' c a f>2 \tieUp c8 ~ a \tieDown \tieDotted g8 ~ c g2 }
| [ << Rhythms ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Usare le legature di valore con un arpeggio ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding parentheses around an expressive mark or chordal note > ] |
3 Expressive marks
See also Expressive marks.
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Expressive marks ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi > ] |
Adding parentheses around an expressive mark or chordal note
The \parenthesize function is a special tweak that encloses
objects in parentheses. The associated grob is Parentheses.
\relative c' { c2-\parenthesize -> \override Parentheses.padding = #0.1 \override Parentheses.font-size = #-4 <d \parenthesize f a>2 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Adding parentheses around an expressive mark or chordal note ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Adjusting slur positions vertically > ] |
Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi
I battiti saltati nei glissandi molto lunghi vengono talvolta segnalati con delle indicazioni di tempo, che consistono solitamente in dei gambi privi di teste di nota. Questi gambi possono essere usati anche per contenere segni di espressione intermedi.
Se i gambi non si allineano bene al glissando, può essere necessario riposizionarli leggermente.
glissandoSkipOn = { \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t \hide NoteHead \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##t } glissandoSkipOff = { \revert NoteColumn.glissando-skip \undo \hide NoteHead \revert NoteHead.no-ledgers } \relative c'' { r8 f8\glissando \glissandoSkipOn f4 g a a8\noBeam \glissandoSkipOff a8 r8 f8\glissando \glissandoSkipOn g4 a8 \glissandoSkipOff a8 | r4 f\glissando \< \glissandoSkipOn a4\f \> \glissandoSkipOff b8\! r | }
Adjusting slur positions vertically
Using \override Slur.positions it is possible to set the
vertical position of the start and end points of a slur to absolute
values (or rather, forcing LilyPond’s slur algorithm to consider these
values as desired). In many cases, this means a lot of trial and error
until good values are found. You probably have tried the
\offset command next just to find out that it doesn’t work for
slurs, emitting a warning instead.
The code in this snippet allows you to tweak the vertical start and end
positions by specifying relative changes, similar to
\offset.
Syntax: \offsetPositions #'(dy1 . dy2)
offsetPositions = #(define-music-function (offsets) (number-pair?) #{ \once \override Slur.control-points = #(lambda (grob) (match-let ((((_ . y1) _ _ (_ . y2)) (ly:slur::calc-control-points grob)) ((off1 . off2) offsets)) (set! (ly:grob-property grob 'positions) (cons (+ y1 off1) (+ y2 off2))) (ly:slur::calc-control-points grob))) #}) \relative c'' { c4(^"default" c, d2) \offsetPositions #'(0 . 1) c'4(^"(0 . 1)" c, d2) \offsetPositions #'(0 . 2) c'4(^"(0 . 2)" c, d2) \bar "||" g4(^"default" a d'2) \offsetPositions #'(1 . 0) g,,4(^"(1 . 0)" a d'2) \offsetPositions #'(2 . 0) g,,4(^"(2 . 0)" a d'2) }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting slur positions vertically ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Allineare le estremità delle forcelle alle direzioni di NoteColumn > ] |
Cambiare la forma dei portamenti indeterminati verso il basso o verso l’alto
La proprietà shortest-duration-space può essere modificata per cambiare
la forma dei portamenti indeterminati verso il basso o verso l’alto.
\relative c'' { \override Score.SpacingSpanner.shortest-duration-space = 4.0 c2-\bendAfter 5 c2-\bendAfter -4.75 c2-\bendAfter 8.5 c2-\bendAfter -6 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Cambiare la forma dei portamenti indeterminati verso il basso o verso l’alto ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Note brevi alternative > ] |
Allineare le estremità delle forcelle alle direzioni di NoteColumn
Le estremità delle forcelle possono essere allineate alle direzioni LEFT,
CENTER o RIGHT dei grob NoteColumn modificando la
proprietà endpoint-alignments, che è costituita da una coppia di
numeri che rappresentano le estremità sinistra e destra della forcella.
endpoint-alignments devono essere direzioni (-1, 0 o 1). Valori
diversi verranno trasformati emettendo un avviso. Non ha effetto quando
l’estremità destra di una forcella termina su una pausa; in questo caso termina
sempre sul margine sinistro della pausa.
{ c'2\< <c' d'>\! | \override Hairpin.endpoint-alignments = #'(1 . -1) c'2\< <c' d'>\! | \override Hairpin.endpoint-alignments = #`(,LEFT . ,CENTER) c'2\< <c' d'>\! | }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Allineare le estremità delle forcelle alle direzioni di NoteColumn ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Asymmetric slurs > ] |
Note brevi alternative
Le note brevi sono disponibili anche con due linee verticali su ciascun lato della testa invece di una sola e in stile barocco.
\relative c'' { \time 4/2 c\breve | \override Staff.NoteHead.style = #'altdefault b\breve \override Staff.NoteHead.style = #'baroque b\breve \revert Staff.NoteHead.style a\breve }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Note brevi alternative ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Breathing signs > ] |
Asymmetric slurs
Slurs can be made asymmetric to match an asymmetric pattern of notes better.
slurNotes = { d,8( a' d f a f' d, a) } \relative c' { \stemDown \slurUp \slurNotes \once \override Slur.eccentricity = #3.0 \slurNotes }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Asymmetric slurs ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Broken crescendo hairpin > ] |
Breathing signs
Breathing signs are available in different tastes: commas (default), ticks, vees and “railroad tracks” (caesura).
\new Staff \relative c'' { \key es \major \time 3/4 % this bar contains no \breathe << { g4 as g } \\ { es4 bes es } >> | % Modern notation: % by default, \breathe uses the rcomma, just as if saying: % \override BreathingSign.text = % #(make-musicglyph-markup "scripts.rcomma") << { g4 as g } \\ { es4 \breathe bes es } >> | % rvarcomma and lvarcomma are variations of the default rcomma % and lcomma % N.B.: must use Staff context here, since we start a Voice below \override Staff.BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.rvarcomma" } << { g4 as g } \\ { es4 \breathe bes es } >> | % raltcomma and laltcomma are alternative variations of the % default rcomma and lcomma \override Staff.BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.raltcomma" } << { g4 as g } \\ { es4 \breathe bes es } >> | % vee \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.uupbow" } es8[ d es f g] \breathe f | % caesura \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.curved" } es8[ d] \breathe es[ f g f] | es2 r4 \bar "||" }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Breathing signs ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata > ] |
Broken crescendo hairpin
In order to make parts of a crescendo hairpin invisible, the following method is used: A white rectangle is drawn on top of the respective part of the crescendo hairpin, making it invisible. The rectangle is defined as a text markup.
The markup command with-dimensions tells LilyPond to consider
only the bottom edge of the rectangle when spacing it against the
hairpin. The property staff-padding prevents the rectangle from
fitting between the hairpin and staff.
Make sure the hairpin is in a lower layer than the text markup to draw the rectangle over the hairpin.
\relative c' { << { \dynamicUp r2 r16 c'8.\pp r4 } \\ { \override DynamicLineSpanner.layer = #0 des,2\mf\< ~ \override TextScript.layer = #2 \once\override TextScript.staff-padding = #6 \once\override TextScript.vertical-skylines = #'() des16_\markup \with-dimensions #'(2 . 7) #'(0 . 0) \with-color #white \filled-box #'(2 . 7) #'(0 . 2) #0 r8. des4 ~ des16->\sff r8. } >> }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Broken crescendo hairpin ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Center text below hairpin dynamics > ] |
Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata
A caesura is sometimes denoted by a double “railtracks” breath mark with a fermata sign positioned above. This snippet shows an optically pleasing combination of railtracks and fermata.
\relative c'' { c2. % construct the symbol \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \override #'(direction . 1) \override #'(baseline-skip . 1.8) \dir-column { \translate #'(0.155 . 0) \center-align \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.curved" \center-align \musicglyph "scripts.ufermata" } } \breathe c4 % set the breath mark back to normal \revert BreathingSign.text c2. \breathe c4 \bar "|." }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Cambiare gli stili del testo e degli estensori per le dinamiche testuali > ] |
Center text below hairpin dynamics
This example provides a function to typeset a hairpin (de)crescendo
with some additional text below it, such as “molto” or “poco”. The
added text will change the direction according to the direction of the
hairpin. The Hairpin is aligned to a DynamicText grob.
The example also illustrates how to modify the way an object is normally printed, using some Scheme code.
hairpinWithCenteredText = #(define-music-function (text) (markup?) #{ \once \override Voice.Hairpin.after-line-breaking = #(lambda (grob) (let* ((stencil (ly:hairpin::print grob)) (par-y (ly:grob-parent grob Y)) (dir (ly:grob-property par-y 'direction)) (staff-line-thickness (ly:output-def-lookup (ly:grob-layout grob) 'line-thickness)) (new-stencil (ly:stencil-aligned-to (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:stencil-aligned-to stencil X CENTER) Y dir (ly:stencil-aligned-to (grob-interpret-markup grob (make-fontsize-markup (magnification->font-size (+ (ly:staff-symbol-staff-space grob) (/ staff-line-thickness 2))) text)) X CENTER)) X LEFT)) (staff-space (ly:output-def-lookup (ly:grob-layout grob) 'staff-space)) (par-x (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (dyn-text (grob::has-interface par-x 'dynamic-text-interface)) (dyn-text-stencil-x-length (if dyn-text (interval-length (ly:stencil-extent (ly:grob-property par-x 'stencil) X)) 0)) (x-shift (if dyn-text (- (+ staff-space dyn-text-stencil-x-length) (* 0.5 staff-line-thickness)) 0))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'Y-offset 0) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'stencil (ly:stencil-translate-axis new-stencil x-shift X)))) #}) hairpinMolto = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \italic molto } hairpinMore = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \larger moltissimo } \relative c' { \hairpinMolto c2\< c\f \hairpinMore c2\ppppp\< c\f \break \hairpinMolto c2^\< c\f \hairpinMore c2\ppppp\< c\f }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Center text below hairpin dynamics ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed > ] |
Cambiare gli stili del testo e degli estensori per le dinamiche testuali
Il testo usato per i crescendo e i decrescendo può essere cambiato
modificando le proprietà di contesto crescendoText e
decrescendoText.
Lo stile della linea dell’estensore può essere cambiato modificando la
proprietà 'style di DynamicTextSpanner. Il valore predefinito
è 'dashed-line; gli altri valori possibili sono 'line,
'dotted-line e 'none.
\relative c'' { \set crescendoText = \markup { \italic { cresc. poco } } \set crescendoSpanner = #'text \override DynamicTextSpanner.style = #'dotted-line a2\< a a2 a a2 a a2 a\mf }
Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed
The appearance of slurs may be changed from solid to dotted or dashed.
\relative c' { c4( d e c) \slurDotted c4( d e c) \slurSolid c4( d e c) \slurDashed c4( d e c) \slurSolid c4( d e c) }
Cambiare il simbolo del segno di respiro
Il glifo del respiro può essere modificato sovrascrivendo la proprietà
text dell’oggetto di formattazione BreathingSign con
qualsiasi testo incluso in un blocco markup.
\relative c'' { c2 \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.rvarcomma" } \breathe d2 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Cambiare il simbolo del segno di respiro ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Combining dynamics with markup texts > ] |
Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota
Il numero di punti di aumentazione su una singola nota può essere modificato in modo indipendente dai punti posizionati dopo la nota.
\relative c' { c4.. a16 r2 | \override Dots.dot-count = 4 c4.. a16 r2 | \override Dots.dot-count = 0 c4.. a16 r2 | \revert Dots.dot-count c4.. a16 r2 | }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Combining dynamics with markup texts (2) > ] |
Combining dynamics with markup texts
Some dynamics may involve text indications (such as “più f” or
“p subito”). These can be produced using a \markup
block; the resulting object behaves like a TextScript grob.
See also “Combining dynamics with markup texts (2)”.
piuF = \markup { \italic più \dynamic f } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \relative c'' { c2\f c-\piuF } }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Combining dynamics with markup texts ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Glissando contemporaneo > ] |
Combining dynamics with markup texts (2)
Some dynamics may involve text indications (such as “più f” or
“p subito”). These can be produced using the
make-dynamic-script Scheme function; the resulting object
behaves like a DynamicText grob.
See also “Combining dynamics with markup texts”.
piuF = #(make-dynamic-script #{ \markup { \normal-text \italic più \dynamic f } #}) \score { \relative c'' { c2\f c\piuF } }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Combining dynamics with markup texts (2) ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Controlling spanner visibility after a line break > ] |
Glissando contemporaneo
Un glissando contemporaneo senza una nota finale può essere creato usando una nota nascosta e un tempo di cadenza.
\relative c'' { \time 3/4 \override Glissando.style = #'zigzag c4 c \cadenzaOn c4\glissando \hideNotes c,,4 \unHideNotes \cadenzaOff \bar "|" }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Glissando contemporaneo ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo > ] |
Controlling spanner visibility after a line break
The visibility of spanners which end on the first note following a line
break is controlled by the after-line-breaking callback
ly:spanner::kill-zero-spanned-time.
For objects such as glissandos and hairpins, the default behaviour is to hide the spanner after a break; disabling the callback will allow the left-broken span to be shown.
Conversely, spanners which are usually visible, such as text spans, can be hidden by enabling the callback.
\paper { line-width = 50\mm } \relative c'' { \override Hairpin.to-barline = ##f \override Glissando.breakable = ##t % show hairpin \override Hairpin.after-line-breaking = ##t % hide text span \override TextSpanner.after-line-breaking = #ly:spanner::kill-zero-spanned-time e2\<\startTextSpan % show glissando \override Glissando.after-line-breaking = ##t f2\glissando \break f,1\!\stopTextSpan }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Controlling spanner visibility after a line break ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script > ] |
Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
Il posizionamento dei numeri della diteggiatura può essere regolato in modo preciso. Perché l’orientamento funzioni, occorre usare il costrutto per gli accordi <> anche per le note singole. Si può impostare in modo simile l’orientamento dei numeri di corda e delle diteggiature della mano destra.
\relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1>2 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <e-3>2 \set stringNumberOrientations = #'(up left down) <f\3 a\2 c\1>1 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(down right up) <c\rightHandFinger 1 e\rightHandFinger 2 c'\rightHandFinger 4 > }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics > ] |
Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script
L’ordine verticale degli script è determinato dalla proprietà
'script-priority. Più il numero è piccolo, più sarà posto
vicino alla nota. In questo esempio, il simbolo di diesis (oggetto
TextScript) ha prima la priorità più bassa, dunque è posto più
in basso nel primo esempio. Nel secondo, il trillo (oggetto Script) ha
la priorità più bassa, quindi si trova all’interno. Quando due oggetti hanno
la stessa priorità, l’ordine in cui sono inseriti determina quale viene
prima.
\relative c''' { \once \override TextScript.script-priority = -100 a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp } \once \override Script.script-priority = -100 a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp } \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-2 a-1>2 <a-1 c\tweak script-priority -100 -2>2 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creare un gruppetto ritardato > ] |
Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics
Although the easiest way to add parentheses to a dynamic mark is to use
a \markup block, this method has a downside: the created
objects behave like text markups and not like dynamics.
However, it is possible to create a similar object using the equivalent
Scheme code (as described in the Notation Reference), combined with the
make-dynamic-script function. This way, the markup is regarded
as a dynamic and therefore remains compatible with commands such as
\dynamicUp or \dynamicDown.
paren = #(define-event-function (dyn) (ly:event?) (make-dynamic-script #{ \markup \concat { \normal-text \italic \fontsize #2 ( \pad-x #0.2 #(ly:music-property dyn 'text) \normal-text \italic \fontsize #2 ) } #})) \relative c'' { c4\paren\f c c \dynamicUp c\paren\p }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano note appartenenti a voci diverse > ] |
Creare un gruppetto ritardato
Creare un gruppetto ritardato, dove la nota più bassa del gruppetto usa
l’alterazione, richiede vari \override. La proprietà
outside-staff-priority deve essere impostata su #f, perché
altrimenti questa avrebbe la precedenza sulla proprietà avoid-slur.
Cambiando la frazione 2/3 si aggiusta la posizione orizzontale.
\relative c'' { \after 2*2/3 \turn c2( d4) r | \after 4 \turn c4.( d8) \after 4 { \once \set suggestAccidentals = ##t \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.outside-staff-priority = ##f \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.avoid-slur = #'inside \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.font-size = -3 \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.script-priority = -1 \once \hideNotes cis8\turn \noBeam } d4.( e8) }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creare un gruppetto ritardato ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano il rigo del pianoforte > ] |
Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano note appartenenti a voci diverse
Si può disegnare un arpeggio che attraversa delle note in voci diverse
dello stesso rigo se si aggiunge l’incisore Span_arpeggio_engraver nel
contesto Staff:
\new Staff \with { \consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver" } \relative c' { \set Staff.connectArpeggios = ##t << { <e' g>4\arpeggio <d f> <d f>2 } \\ { <d, f>2\arpeggio <g b>2 } >> }
Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano il rigo del pianoforte
In un rigo per pianoforte (PianoStaff), è possibile far sì che un
arpeggio attraversi i righi impostando la proprietà PianoStaff.connectArpeggios.
\new PianoStaff \relative c'' << \set PianoStaff.connectArpeggios = ##t \new Staff { <c e g c>4\arpeggio <g c e g>4\arpeggio <e g c e>4\arpeggio <c e g c>4\arpeggio } \new Staff { \clef bass \repeat unfold 4 { <c,, e g c>4\arpeggio } } >>
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano il rigo del pianoforte ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creating double-digit fingerings > ] |
Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano i righi in altri contesti
Si possono creare arpeggi che attraversano i righi in contesti diversi da
GrandStaff, PianoStaff e StaffGroup se l’incisore
Span_arpeggio_engraver è incluso nel contesto Score.
<< \new PianoStaff << \new Voice \relative c' { <c e>2\arpeggio <d f>2\arpeggio <c e>1\arpeggio } \new Voice \relative c { \clef bass <c g'>2\arpeggio <b g'>2\arpeggio <c g'>1\arpeggio } >> \new Staff \relative c { \set Score.connectArpeggios = ##t \clef bass c2\arpeggio g\arpeggio c1\arpeggio } >> \layout { \context { \Score \consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver" } }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano i righi in altri contesti ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creating slurs across voices > ] |
Creating double-digit fingerings
Creating fingerings larger than 5 is possible.
\relative c' { c1-10 c1-50 c1-36 c1-29 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creating double-digit fingerings ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Creating text spanners > ] |
Creating slurs across voices
In some situations it is necessary to create slurs between notes from
different voices. The solution is to add invisible notes to one of the
voices, using \hideNotes.
This example is measure 235 of the Ciaconna from Bach’s second partita for solo violin, BWV 1004.
\relative c' { << { d16( a') s a s a[ s a] s a[ s a] } \\ { \slurUp bes,16[ s e]( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes f[( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes fis]( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes g[( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes gis]( \hideNotes a) } >> }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creating slurs across voices ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Dynamics spanner with custom text > ] |
Creating text spanners
The \startTextSpan and \stopTextSpan commands allow the
creation of text spanners as easily as pedal indications or
octavations. Override some properties of the TextSpanner object
to modify its output.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = #"bla" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = #"blu" a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.style = #'line \once \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) } \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . -2) } \once \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.padding = #-2 a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.dash-period = #10 \override TextSpanner.dash-fraction = #0.5 \override TextSpanner.thickness = #10 a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Creating text spanners ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Glissandi can skip grobs > ] |
Dynamics spanner with custom text
Postfix functions for custom crescendo text spanners. The spanners
should start on the first note of the measure. One has to use
-\mycresc, otherwise the spanner start will rather be assigned
to the next note.
% Two functions for (de)crescendo spanners where you can explicitly % give the spanner text. mycresc = #(define-music-function (mymarkup) (markup?) (make-music 'CrescendoEvent 'span-direction START 'span-type 'text 'span-text mymarkup)) mydecresc = #(define-music-function (mymarkup) (markup?) (make-music 'DecrescendoEvent 'span-direction START 'span-type 'text 'span-text mymarkup)) \relative c' { c4-\mycresc "custom cresc" c4 c4 c4 | c4 c4 c4 c4 | c4-\mydecresc "custom decresc" c4 c4 c4 | c4 c4 c4 c4 | c4 c4\! c4 c4 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Dynamics spanner with custom text ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Hairpins with different line styles > ] |
Glissandi can skip grobs
NoteColumn grobs can be skipped over by glissandi.
\relative c' { a2 \glissando \once \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t f''4 d, }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Glissandi can skip grobs ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Nascondere la linea di estensione per le dinamiche testuali > ] |
Hairpins with different line styles
Hairpins can take any style from line-interface:
dashed-line, dotted-line, line, trill, or
zigzag.
\relative c' { c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'dashed-line c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'dotted-line c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'line c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'trill c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'zigzag c2\< c\! \revert Hairpin.style c2\< c\! }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Hairpins with different line styles ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f” > ] |
Nascondere la linea di estensione per le dinamiche testuali
I cambi di dinamica in stile testuale (come cresc. e dim.) appaiono con una linea tratteggiata che mostra la loro estensione. Questa linea può essere soppressa nel modo seguente:
\relative c'' { \override DynamicTextSpanner.style = #'none \crescTextCresc c1\< | d | b | c\! }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Nascondere la linea di estensione per le dinamiche testuali ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Inserire una cesura > ] |
Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f”
Some dynamic expressions involve additional text, like “sempre pp”. Since dynamics are usually centered under the note, the \pp would be displayed way after the note it applies to.
To correctly align the “sempre pp” horizontally so that it is aligned as if it were only the \pp, there are several approaches:
- Simply use
\once\override DynamicText.X-offset = #-9.2before the note with the dynamics to manually shift it to the correct position. Drawback: This has to be done manually each time you use that dynamic markup... - Add some padding (
#:hspace 7.1) into the definition of your custom dynamic mark so that after LilyPond center-aligns it, it is already correctly aligned. Drawback: The padding really takes up that space and does not allow any other markup or dynamics to be shown in that position. - Shift the dynamic script
\once\override ... .X-offset = .... Drawback:\once\overrideis needed for every invocation! - Set the dimensions of the additional text to 0 (using
#:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0)). Drawback: For LilyPond, “sempre” has no extent now. This means it might put other stuff there, causing collisions (which are not detected by LilyPond’s collision detection algorithm!). There also seems to be some spacing, so it is not exactly the same alignment as without the additional text. - Add an explicit shift directly inside the scheme function for the dynamic script.
- Set an explicit alignment inside the dynamic script. By default, this
won’t have any effect, only if one sets
X-offset! Drawback: One needs to setDynamicText.X-offset, which will apply to all dynamic texts! Also, it is aligned at the right edge of the additional text, not at the center of \pp.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f indent = 5\cm } % Solution 1: Using a simple markup with a particular halign value % Drawback: It's a markup, not a dynamic command, so \dynamicDown % etc. will have no effect semppMarkup = \markup { \halign #1.4 \italic "sempre" \dynamic "pp" } % Solution 2: Using a dynamic script & shifting with % \once \override ...X-offset = .. % Drawback: \once \override needed for every invocation semppK = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) % Solution 3: Padding the dynamic script so the center-alignment % puts it at the correct position % Drawback: the padding really reserves the space, nothing else can be there semppT = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp" #:hspace 7.1))) % Solution 4: Dynamic, setting the dimensions of the additional text to 0 % Drawback: To lilypond "sempre" has no extent, so it might put % other stuff there => collisions % Drawback: Also, there seems to be some spacing, so it's not exactly the % same alignment as without the additional text semppM = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0) #:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) % Solution 5: Dynamic with explicit shifting inside the scheme function semppG = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:hspace 0 #:translate '(-18.85 . 0) #:line (#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) % Solution 6: Dynamic with explicit alignment. This has only effect % if one sets X-offset! % Drawback: One needs to set DynamicText.X-offset! % Drawback: Aligned at the right edge of the additional text, % not at the center of pp semppMII = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "standard" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\pp c\p c c | c\ff c c\pp c } \new Staff \with {instrumentName = "normal markup" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4-\semppMarkup c\p c c | c\ff c c-\semppMarkup c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "explicit shifting" } \relative c'' { \key es \major \once \override DynamicText.X-offset = #-9.2 c4\semppK c\p c c c4\ff c \once \override DynamicText.X-offset = #-9.2 c4\semppK c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "right padding" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppT c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppT c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "set dimension to zero" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppM c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppM c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "shift inside dynamics" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppG c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppG c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "alignment inside dynamics" } \relative c'' { \key es \major \override DynamicText.X-offset = #-1 c4\semppMII c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppMII c } >> \layout { \override Staff.InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #LEFT }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f” ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Laissez vibrer ties > ] |
Inserire una cesura
I segni di cesura possono essere creati sovrascrivendo la proprietà 'text
dell’oggetto BreathingSign. È disponibile anche un segno di cesura
curvo.
\relative c'' { \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.straight" } c8 e4. \breathe g8. e16 c4 \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.curved" } g8 e'4. \breathe g8. e16 c4 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Inserire una cesura ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Line arrows > ] |
Laissez vibrer ties
Laissez vibrer ties have a fixed size. Their positioning can be tuned
using the tie-configuration property.
See also snippet “Longer laissez vibrer ties”.
\relative c' { <c e g>4\laissezVibrer r <c f g>\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4.\laissezVibrer r8 <c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r \override LaissezVibrerTieColumn.tie-configuration = #`((-7 . ,DOWN) (-5 . ,DOWN) (-3 . ,UP) (-1 . ,UP)) <c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Laissez vibrer ties ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio > ] |
Line arrows
Arrows can be applied to text spanners and line spanners (such as glissandi).
\relative c'' { \override TextSpanner.bound-padding = #1.0 \override TextSpanner.style = #'line \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.arrow = ##t \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = #"fof" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = #"gag" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.padding = #0.6 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override Glissando.bound-details.right.arrow = ##t \override Glissando.arrow-length = #0.5 \override Glissando.arrow-width = #0.25 a8\startTextSpan gis a4 b\glissando b, g'4 c\stopTextSpan c2 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Line arrows ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Modificare i valori predefiniti per le abbreviazioni delle articolazioni > ] |
Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio
Le legature di portamento possono avere schemi di tratteggio complessi
definendo la proprietà dash-definition. dash-definition è
una lista di dash-elements. Un dash-element è una lista
di parametri che definiscono il comportamento del tratteggio per un
segmento della legatura.
La legatura di portamento è definita come il parametro t della curva di
bezier che va da 0 sul margine sinistro della legatura fino a 1 su quello
destro. dash-element è una lista di (inizio-t fine-t frazione-trattino
punto-trattino). La regione della legatura di portamento che va da inizio-t a
fine-t avrà una frazione frazione-trattino di ogni
punto-trattino nero. punto-trattino viene definito in spazi
rigo. frazione-trattino è impostato su 1 per una legatura di portamento
continua.
\relative c' { \once \override Slur.dash-definition = #'(( 0 0.3 0.1 0.75) (0.3 0.6 1 1 ) (0.65 1.0 0.4 0.75)) c4( d e f) \once \override Slur.dash-definition = #'((0 0.25 1 1 ) (0.3 0.7 0.4 0.75) (0.75 1.0 1 1 )) c4( d e f) }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Moving slur positions vertically > ] |
Modificare i valori predefiniti per le abbreviazioni delle articolazioni
Le abbreviazioni sono definite in ‘ly/script-init.ly’, dove sono
assegnati valori predefiniti alle variabili dashHat, dashPlus,
dashDash, dashBang, dashLarger, dashDot e
dashUnderscore. Questi valori predefiniti possono essere
modificati. Ad esempio, per associare l’abbreviazione -+ (dashPlus)
al simbolo del trillo invece che al simbolo + predefinito, si assegna il
valore trill alla variabile dashPlus:
\relative c'' { c1-+ } dashPlus = \trill \relative c'' { c1-+ }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Modificare i valori predefiniti per le abbreviazioni delle articolazioni ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Spostare le estremità delle forcelle > ] |
Moving slur positions vertically
The vertical position of a slur can be adjusted using the
positions property of Slur. The property has
2 parameters, the first referring to the left end of the slur and
the second to the right. The values of the parameters are not used by
LilyPond to make an exact movement of the slur - instead it selects
what placement of the slur looks best, taking into account the
parameter values. Positive values move the slur up, and are appropriate
for notes with stems down. Negative values move downward slurs further
down.
See also “Adjusting slur positions vertically”.
\relative c' { \stemDown e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(1 . 1) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(2 . 2) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(3 . 3) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(4 . 4) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(5 . 5) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(0 . 5) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(5 . 0) e4( a) \stemUp \override Slur.positions = #'(-5 . -5) e4( a) \stemDown \revert Slur.positions e4( a) }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Moving slur positions vertically ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Positioning arpeggios > ] |
Spostare le estremità delle forcelle
Le estremità delle forcelle possono essere spostate in modo relativo alla
loro posizione predefinita (offset) impostando la proprietà shorten-pair
dell’oggetto Hairpin. Valori positivi spostano le estremità a
destra, valori negativi le spostano a sinistra. Diversamente dalla
proprietà minimum-length, questa proprietà modifica solo l’aspetto
della forcella; non cambia la spaziatura orizzontale (inclusa la posizione
delle dinamiche confinanti). Questo metodo è quindi utile per ritoccare
una forcella entro lo spazio ad essa allocato.
{ c'1~\< c'2~ c'\! \once \override Hairpin.shorten-pair = #'(2 . 2) c'1~\< c'2~ c'\! \once \override Hairpin.shorten-pair = #'(-2 . -2) c'1~\< c'2~ c'\! c'1~\p-\tweak shorten-pair #'(2 . 0)\< c'2~ c'\ffff }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Spostare le estremità delle forcelle ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento > ] |
Positioning arpeggios
If you need to extend or shorten an arpeggio, you can modify the upper and lower start positions independently.
\relative c' { <c e g b>1\arpeggio \once \override Arpeggio.positions = #'(-5 . 0) <c e g b>1\arpeggio \once \override Arpeggio.positions = #'(0 . 5) <c e g b>1\arpeggio \once \override Arpeggio.positions = #'(-5 . 5) <c e g b>1\arpeggio }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Positioning arpeggios ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Stampare le forcelle in vari stili > ] |
Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento
I testi a margine devono avere la proprietà outside-staff-priority
impostata su false per poter apparire dentro le legature di portamento.
\relative c'' { \override TextScript.avoid-slur = #'inside \override TextScript.outside-staff-priority = ##f c2(^\markup { \halign #-10 \natural } d4.) c8 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Forcelle con notazione al niente > ] |
Stampare le forcelle in vari stili
Il segno di dinamica della forcella può avere diversi stili
\relative c'' { \override Hairpin.stencil = #flared-hairpin a4\< a a a\f a4\p\< a a a\ff a4\sfz\< a a a\! \override Hairpin.stencil = #constante-hairpin a4\< a a a\f a4\p\< a a a\ff a4\sfz\< a a a\! \override Hairpin.stencil = #flared-hairpin a4\> a a a\f a4\p\> a a a\ff a4\sfz\> a a a\! \override Hairpin.stencil = #constante-hairpin a4\> a a a\f a4\p\> a a a\ff a4\sfz\> a a a\! }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Stampare le forcelle in vari stili ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo > ] |
Forcelle con notazione al niente
Le forcelle di dinamica possono essere rappresentate con ua punta
tonda (notazione “al niente”) impostando la proprietà circled-tip
dell’oggetto Hairpin su #t.
\relative c'' { \override Hairpin.circled-tip = ##t c2\< c\! c4\> c\< c2\! }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Forcelle con notazione al niente ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette > ] |
Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo
Di norma, il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata vengono posizionati sopra il
rigo. Per metterli sotto il rigo basta impostare correttamente la proprietà
direction di MetronomeMark o RehearsalMark.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } { % Metronome marks below the staff \override Score.MetronomeMark.direction = #DOWN \tempo 8. = 120 c''1 % Rehearsal marks below the staff \override Score.RehearsalMark.direction = #DOWN \mark \default c''1 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Impostare la lunghezza minima delle forcelle > ] |
Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette
Se la nota che termina una forcella si trova sul primo battito di una
battuta, la forcella si ferma prima della stanghetta che precede la
nota. Si può controllare questo comportamento modificando la
proprietà 'to-barline.
\relative c'' { e4\< e2. e1\! \override Hairpin.to-barline = ##f e4\< e2. e1\! }
Impostare la lunghezza minima delle forcelle
Se le forcelle sono troppo corte, possono essere allungate modificando
la proprietà minimum-length dell’oggetto Hairpin.
<< { \after 4 \< \after 2 \> \after 2. \! f'1 \override Hairpin.minimum-length = 8 \after 4 \< \after 2 \> \after 2. \! f'1 } { \repeat unfold 8 c'4 } >>
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Impostare la lunghezza minima delle forcelle ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato) > ] |
Showing the same articulation above and below a note or chord
By default, LilyPond does not allow the same articulation (an accent, a
fermata, a flageolet, etc.) to be displayed above and below a note. For
example, c4_\fermata^\fermata only shows a fermata below. The
fermata above gets simply ignored.
However, one can stick scripts (just like fingerings) inside a chord,
which means it is possible to have as many articulations as desired.
This approach has the advantage that it ignores the stem and positions
the articulation relative to the note head. This can be seen in the
case of the flageolets in the snippet. To mimic the behaviour of
scripts outside a chord, add-stem-support would be required.
The solution is thus to write the note as a chord and add the
articulations inside of <...>, using the direction modifiers
^ and _ as appropriate.
\relative c' { <>^"Wrong" c2_\fermata^\fermata % The second fermata is ignored! <e d'>2^\flageolet_\flageolet \stopStaff s1 \startStaff <>^"Works if written inside a chord" <e_\flageolet d'^\flageolet>2 <e_\flageolet d'^\flageolet>2 <e_\flageolet^\flageolet>2 <e_\fermata^\fermata>2 }
Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato)
A snap pizzicato (also known as “Bartok pizzicato”) is a “strong pizzicato where the string is plucked vertically by snapping and rebounds off the fingerboard of the instrument” (Wikipedia). It is denoted by a circle with a vertical line going from the center upwards outside the circle.
\relative c' { c4\snappizzicato <c' e g>4\snappizzicato <c' e g>4^\snappizzicato <c, e g>4_\snappizzicato }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato) ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Usare un segno di spunta come simbolo di respiro > ] |
Using \arpeggioBracket to make divisi more visible
The \arpeggioBracket command can be used to indicate the
division of voices where there are no stems to provide the information.
This is often seen in choral music.
\include "english.ly" \score { \relative c'' { \key a \major \time 2/2 << \new Voice = "upper" << { \voiceOne \arpeggioBracket a2( b2 <b d>1\arpeggio) <cs e>\arpeggio ~ <cs e>4 } \addlyrics { \lyricmode { A -- men. } } >> \new Voice = "lower" { \voiceTwo a1 ~ a a ~ a4 \bar "|." } >> } }
Usare un segno di spunta come simbolo di respiro
La musica vocale e per fiati usa frequentemente il segno di spunta come segno di respiro. Questo indica un respiro che sottrae un po’ di tempo alla nota precedente invece di prendere una piccola pausa, indicata dal segno di respiro rappresentato dalla virgola. Il segno può essere spostato un po’ su per allontanarlo dal rigo.
\relative c'' { c2 \breathe d2 \override BreathingSign.Y-offset = #2.6 \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.tickmark" } c2 \breathe d2 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Usare un segno di spunta come simbolo di respiro ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Uso della proprietà whiteout > ] |
Uso delle doppie legature di portamento per gli accordi legati
Alcuni compositori scrivono due legature di portamento per indicare gli
accordi legati. Si può ottenere questo risultato impostando doubleSlurs.
\relative c' { \set doubleSlurs = ##t <c e>4( <d f> <c e> <d f>) }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Uso delle doppie legature di portamento per gli accordi legati ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark > ] |
Uso della proprietà whiteout
Qualsiasi oggetto grafico può essere posizionato sopra uno sfondo
bianco per mascherare parti degli oggetti che si trovano sotto.
Ciò può essere utile per migliorare l’aspetto delle collisioni in
situazioni complesse in cui il riposizionamento degli oggetti è
troppo difficile. Bisogna impostare esplicitamente la proprietà
layer (livello) per controllare quali oggetti debbano essere
mascherati dallo sfondo bianco.
In questo esempio la collisione della legatura di valore con l’indicazione
di tempo viene migliorata mascherando la parte della legatura che incrocia
l’indicazione di tempo impostando la proprietà whiteout di
TimeSignature. Per farlo si sposta TimeSignature su un
livello superiore a Tie, che viene lasciato al livello predefinito 1;
e StaffSymbol viene spostato su un livello superiore a TimeSignature
in modo che non venga mascherato.
{ \override Score.StaffSymbol.layer = 4 \override Staff.TimeSignature.layer = 3 b'2 b'~ \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.whiteout = ##t \time 3/4 b' r4 }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Uso della proprietà whiteout ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Vertically aligning dynamics across multiple notes > ] |
Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark
This short vertical line placed above the note is commonly used in baroque music. Its meaning can vary, but generally indicates notes that should be played with more “weight”. The following example demonstrates how to achieve such a notation.
upline = \tweak stencil #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup \draw-line #'(0 . 1) #})) \stopped \relative c' { a'4^\upline a( c d')_\upline }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Repeats >> ] |
| [ < Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark ] | [ Up: Expressive marks ] | [ Repeats > ] |
Vertically aligning dynamics across multiple notes
Dynamics that occur at, begin on, or end on the same note will be
vertically aligned. To ensure that dynamics are aligned when they do
not occur on the same note, increase the staff-padding property
of the DynamicLineSpanner object.
\relative c' { \override DynamicLineSpanner.staff-padding = #4 c2\p f\mf g2\< b4\> c\! }
| [ << Expressive marks ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Vertically aligning dynamics across multiple notes ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Changing the default bar lines > ] |
4 Repeats
See also Repeats.
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Repeats ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes > ] |
Changing the default bar lines
Default bar lines can be changed when re-defined in a Score
context.
\layout { \context { \Score % Changing the defaults from engraver-init.ly measureBarType = "!" startRepeatBarType = "[|:" endRepeatBarType = ":|]" doubleRepeatBarType = ":|][|:" } } { c'1 \repeat volta 2 { c' c' } \repeat volta 2 { c' c' \alternative { \volta 1 { c' } \volta 2 { c' } } } \bar "|." }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Changing the default bar lines ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Tremoli attraverso i righi > ] |
Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes
Using various properties of the StemTremolo grob it is possible
to control the appearance of tremolo slashes.
- Property
slopesets the slope for tremolo slashes. - Property
shapedetermines whether tremolo slashes look like rectangles (valuerectangle) or like very small beams (valuebeam-like). - Property
stylesets both the slope and the shape depending on whether the note has flags, beams, or only a plain stem. This is in contrast to the previous two properties, which change the slope and shape unconditionally. There are two styles defined.-
default: slashes for down-stem flags are longer and more sloped than slashes for up-stem flags; slashes on beamed notes have a rectangular shape and are parallel to the beam. -
constant: all slashes are beam-like and have the same slope except for down-stem flags.
-
music = { a''4:32 a': e''8: \noBeam e': a'':[ a':] f':[ g':] d':[ d':] } \new Staff { <>^\markup "default" \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "style = #'constant" \override StemTremolo.style = #'constant \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "shape = #'rectangle" \override StemTremolo.shape = #'rectangle \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "shape = #'beam-like" \override StemTremolo.shape = #'beam-like \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "slope = -0.2" \override StemTremolo.slope = -0.2 \music }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Engraving tremolos with floating beams > ] |
Tremoli attraverso i righi
Dato che \repeat tremolo si aspetta esattamente due argomenti musicali per
i tremoli di accordi, la nota o l’accordo che cambiano rigo in un tremolo che
attraversa i righi devono essere posti tra parentesi graffe insieme al
comando \change Staff.
\new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "up" \relative c'' { \key a \major \time 3/8 s4. } \new Staff = "down" \relative c'' { \key a \major \time 3/8 \voiceOne \repeat tremolo 6 { <a e'>32 { \change Staff = "up" \voiceTwo <cis a' dis>32 } } } >>
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Tremoli attraverso i righi ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Ripetizioni con segni di percentuale isolati > ] |
Engraving tremolos with floating beams
If a tremolo’s total duration is less than a quarter-note, or exactly a
half note, or between a half note and a whole note, it is normally
typeset with all beams touching the stems. Certain engraving styles
typeset some of these beams as centered floating beams that do not
touch the stems. The number of floating beams in this type of tremolo
is controlled with the gap-count property of the Beam
object, and the size of the gaps between beams and stems is set with
the gap property.
\relative c'' { \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #1 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #2 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #3 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap-count = #3 \override Beam.gap = #1.33 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap = #1 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap = #0.67 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } \override Beam.gap = #0.33 \repeat tremolo 8 { a32 f } }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Engraving tremolos with floating beams ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Measure counters > ] |
Ripetizioni con segni di percentuale isolati
Si possono stampare anche segni di percentuale isolati.
makePercent = #(define-music-function (note) (ly:music?) "Make a percent repeat the same length as NOTE." (make-music 'PercentEvent 'length (ly:music-length note))) \relative c'' { \makePercent s1 }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Ripetizioni con segni di percentuale isolati ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale > ] |
Measure counters
This snippet demonstrates the use of the
Measure_counter_engraver to number groups of successive
measures. Any stretch of measures may be numbered, whether consisting
of repetitions or not.
The engraver must be added to the appropriate context. Here, a
Staff context is used; another possibility is a Dynamics
context.
The counter is begun with \startMeasureCount and ended with
\stopMeasureCount. Numbering will start by default with 1,
but this behavior may be modified by overriding the count-from
property.
When a measure extends across a line break, the number will appear twice, the second time in parentheses.
\layout { \context { \Staff \consists #Measure_counter_engraver } } \new Staff { \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 7 { c'4 d' e' f' } \stopMeasureCount \bar "||" g'4 f' e' d' \override Staff.MeasureCounter.count-from = #2 \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 5 { g'4 f' e' d' } g'4 f' \bar "" \break e'4 d' \repeat unfold 7 { g'4 f' e' d' } \stopMeasureCount }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Measure counters ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Contatore della ripetizione con segno percentuale > ] |
Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale
I contatori della ripetizione con segno percentuale possono essere mostrati a
intervalli regolari impostando la proprietà di contesto repeatCountVisibility.
\relative c'' { \set countPercentRepeats = ##t \set repeatCountVisibility = #(every-nth-repeat-count-visible 5) \repeat percent 10 { c1 } \break \set repeatCountVisibility = #(every-nth-repeat-count-visible 2) \repeat percent 6 { c1 d1 } }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Positioning segno and coda (with line break) > ] |
Contatore della ripetizione con segno percentuale
Le ripetizioni di misura che hanno più di due ripetizioni possono avere un contatore se si cambia la proprietà opportuna, come mostra questo esempio:
\relative c'' { \set countPercentRepeats = ##t \repeat percent 4 { c1 } }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Contatore della ripetizione con segno percentuale ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Impostare la doppia ripetizione predefinita per le volte > ] |
Positioning segno and coda (with line break)
If you want to place an exiting segno sign and add text like “D.S. al Coda” next to it where usually the staff lines are you can use this snippet. The coda will resume in a new line. There is a variation documented in this snippet, where the coda will remain on the same line.
\relative c'' { c4 c c c | c c c c | \repeat segno 2 { c4 c c c | c c c c | \alternative { \volta 1 { c4 c c c | c c c c | % If you don't use \break at Coda, use \noBreak here % and after \bar "" below. \noBreak \section % double bar line \cadenzaOn % pause bar count \stopStaff % remove staff lines % Increasing the unfold counter will expand the staff-free space \repeat unfold 4 { s1 \bar "" } % Place JumpScript where the staff would normally be. \once \override Score.JumpScript.outside-staff-priority = ##f \once \override Score.JumpScript.Y-offset = 0 \startStaff % resume bar count \cadenzaOff % show staff lines again } } } \sectionLabel "Coda" % Show Coda on a new line \break \repeat unfold 6 { c4 c c c } \fine }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Positioning segno and coda (with line break) ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Accorciare le parentesi delle volte > ] |
Impostare la doppia ripetizione predefinita per le volte
Esistono tre diversi stili di doppie ripetizioni per le volte, che si
possono impostare con doubleRepeatBarType.
\relative c'' { \repeat volta 2 { c1 } \set Score.doubleRepeatBarType = ":..:" \repeat volta 2 { c1 } \set Score.doubleRepeatBarType = ":|.|:" \repeat volta 2 { c1 } \set Score.doubleRepeatBarType = ":|.:" \repeat volta 2 { c1 } }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Impostare la doppia ripetizione predefinita per le volte ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Unfolding tremolo repeats > ] |
Accorciare le parentesi delle volte
Per impostazione predefinita, le parentesi delle volte si estendono per
tutta l’alternativa, ma si possono accorciare impostando
voltaSpannerDuration. Nell’esempio seguente, la parentesi dura
una misura, che ha una durata di 3/4.
\fixed c'' { \time 3/4 c4 c c \repeat volta 5 { d4 d d \alternative { \volta 1,2,3,4 { \once \override Score.VoltaBracket.musical-length = \musicLength 2. e4 e e f4 f f } \volta 5 { g4 g g g2. } } } }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Accorciare le parentesi delle volte ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Volta sotto gli accordi > ] |
Unfolding tremolo repeats
Currently, note:duration, which is a more
or less a shortcut for \repeat tremolo, is not unfolded by
\unfoldRepeats (this is tracked in
issue #6145).
The function given in this snippet provides a workaround.
fixTremolos = #(define-music-function (music) (ly:music?) (music-map (lambda (m) (let ((event (any (lambda (a) (and (music-is-of-type? a 'tremolo-event) a)) (ly:music-property m 'articulations)))) (if event (let* ((total-tremolo-duration (ly:music-property m 'duration)) (tremolo-type (ly:music-property event 'tremolo-type)) (one-tremolo-note-duration (ly:make-duration (ly:intlog2 tremolo-type))) (tremolo-note-count (/ tremolo-type (expt 2 (ly:duration-log total-tremolo-duration))))) (set! (ly:music-property m 'duration) one-tremolo-note-duration) (set! (ly:music-property m 'articulations) (delete! event (ly:music-property m 'articulations))) (make-music 'TremoloRepeatedMusic 'repeat-count tremolo-note-count 'element m)) m))) music)) unfoldRepeats = \unfoldRepeats #'() \fixTremolos \etc music = { \repeat tremolo 8 c'16 c'2:16 } { \music \unfoldRepeats \music }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Unfolding tremolo repeats ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Volta brackets in multiple staves > ] |
Volta sotto gli accordi
Aggiungendo l’incisore Volta_engraver al rigo, è possibile
inserire le volte sotto gli accordi.
\score { << \chords { c1 c1 } \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 \alternative { c' } } } >> \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Volta_engraver" } } }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Volta sotto gli accordi ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Volta text markup using repeatCommands > ] |
Volta brackets in multiple staves
By adding the Volta_engraver to the relevant staff, volte can be
put over staves other than the topmost one in a score.
\repeat and related commands should be present in all staves.
voltaMusic = \relative c'' { \repeat volta 2 { c1 \alternative { \volta 1 { d1 } \volta 2 { e1 } } } } << \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \voltaMusic \new Staff \voltaMusic >> \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } \voltaMusic \new Staff \voltaMusic >> >>
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Simultaneous notes >> ] |
| [ < Volta brackets in multiple staves ] | [ Up: Repeats ] | [ Simultaneous notes > ] |
Volta text markup using repeatCommands
Though volte are best specified using \repeat volta, the
context property repeatCommands must be used in cases where the
volta text needs more advanced formatting with \markup.
Since repeatCommands takes a list, the simplest method of
including markup is to use an identifier for the text and embed it in
the command list using the Scheme syntax
#(list (list 'volta textIdentifier)). Start- and end-repeat
commands can be added as separate list elements:
voltaAdLib = \markup { \volta-number { 1. 2. 3... } \italic { ad lib. } } \relative c'' { c1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #(list (list 'volta voltaAdLib) 'start-repeat) c4 b d e \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f) (volta "4.") end-repeat) f1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f)) }
| [ << Repeats ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Volta text markup using repeatCommands ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Voci ulteriori per evitare le collisioni > ] |
5 Simultaneous notes
See also Simultaneous notes.
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Simultaneous notes ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Changing \partCombine texts > ] |
Voci ulteriori per evitare le collisioni
In alcuni casi di musica polifonica complessa sono necessarie delle voci
ulteriori per evitare le collisioni tra note. Se servono più di
quattro voci parallele, si possono aggiungere altre voci definendo
una variabile con la funzione Scheme function context-spec-music.
voiceFive = #(context-spec-music (make-voice-props-set 4) 'Voice) \relative c'' { \time 3/4 \key d \minor \partial 2 << \new Voice { \voiceOne a4. a8 e'4 e4. e8 f4 d4. c8 } \new Voice { \voiceTwo d,2 d4 cis2 d4 bes2 } \new Voice { \voiceThree f'2 bes4 a2 a4 s2 } \new Voice { \voiceFive s2 g4 g2 f4 f2 } >> }
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Voci ulteriori per evitare le collisioni ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Changing a single note’s size in a chord > ] |
Changing \partCombine texts
When using the automatic part combining feature, the printed text for the solo and unison sections may be changed.
\new Staff << \set Staff.soloText = "girl" \set Staff.soloIIText = "boy" \set Staff.aDueText = "together" \partCombine \relative c'' { g4 g r r a2 g } \relative c'' { r4 r a( b) a2 g } >>
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Changing \partCombine texts ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Clusters > ] |
Changing a single note’s size in a chord
Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
\tweak command inside a chord, by altering the font-size
property.
Inside the chord (within the brackets < >), before the note to
be altered, place the \tweak command, followed by
font-size and define the proper size like #-2 (a tiny
note head).
\relative c' { <\tweak font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak font-size #-2 e>1 ^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c } }
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Changing a single note’s size in a chord ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo > ] |
Clusters
Clusters are a device to denote that a complete range of notes is to be played.
fragment = \relative c' { c4 f <e d'>4 <g a>8 <e a> a4 c2 <d b>4 e2 c } << \new Staff \fragment \new Staff \makeClusters \fragment >>
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Clusters ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Displaying complex chords > ] |
Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo
Lo strumento di unione delle parti (il comando \partCombine) permette
di combinare varie parti sullo stesso rigo. Indicazioni testuali come
“solo” e “a2” sono aggiunte automaticamente; per toglierele basta
impostare la proprietà printPartCombineTexts su f.
Per le partiture vocali (inni), non c’è bisogno di aggiungere i testi
“solo/a2”, quindi dovrebbero essere disattivati. Tuttavia potrebbe
convenire non usarlo se c’è una qualche parte solista, perché non
verrebbe indicata. In tali casi è preferibile usare la notazione
polifonica normale.
Questo frammento illustra i tre modi con cui due parti possono essere stampate
su uno stesso rigo: normale polifonia, \partCombine senza testo e
\partCombine con testo.
musicUp = \relative c'' { \time 4/4 a4 c4.( g8) a4 | g4 e' g,( a8 b) | c b a2. } musicDown = \relative c'' { g4 e4.( d8) c4 | r2 g'4( f8 e) | d2 \stemDown a } \score { << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "standard polyphony" } << \musicUp \\ \musicDown >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = \markup { \typewriter "\\partCombine" without text} printPartCombineTexts = ##f } \partCombine \musicUp \musicDown \new Staff \with { instrumentName = \markup { \typewriter "\\partCombine" with text} } \partCombine \musicUp \musicDown >> \layout { indent = 6.0\cm \context { \Score % Setting this to a large value avoids a bar line at the % beginning that would connect the three staves otherwise. \override SystemStartBar.collapse-height = 30 } } }
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note > ] |
Displaying complex chords
Here is a way to display a chord where the same note is played twice with different accidentals.
fixA = { \once \override Stem.length = #12 } fixB = { \once \override NoteHead.X-offset = #1.7 \once \override Stem.length = #7 \once \override Stem.rotation = #'(45 0 0) \once \override Stem.extra-offset = #'(-0.1 . -0.2) \once \override Flag.style = #'no-flag \once \override Accidental.extra-offset = #'(4 . -.1) } \relative c' { << { \fixA <b d!>8 } \\ { \voiceThree \fixB dis } >> s }
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Displaying complex chords ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property > ] |
Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note
Quando il motore tipografico non riesce a risolvere una situazione, si può usare la sintassi che sovrascrive le decisioni tipografiche. L’unità di misura usata è lo spazio del rigo.
\relative c' << { <d g>2 <d g> } \\ { <b f'>2 \once \override NoteColumn.force-hshift = 1.7 <b f'>2 } >>
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Spostare le note puntate in polifonia > ] |
Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property
Setting the transparent property will cause an object to be
printed in “invisible ink”: the object is not printed, but all its
other behavior is retained. The object still takes up space, it takes
part in collisions, and slurs, ties and beams can be attached to it.
This snippet demonstrates how to connect different voices using ties. Normally, ties only connect two notes in the same voice. By introducing a tie in a different voice, and blanking the first up-stem in that voice, the tie appears to cross voices.
\relative { \time 2/4 << { \once \hide Stem \once \override Stem.length = #8 b'8 ~ 8\noBeam \once \hide Stem \once \override Stem.length = #8 g8 ~ 8\noBeam } \\ { b8 g g e } >> } \paper { line-width = 40\mm ragged-right = ##f }
Spostare le note puntate in polifonia
Quando una nota puntata della voce più alta viene spostata per evitare una
collisione con una nota di un’altra voce, il comportamento predefinito è
spostare la nota più alta a destra. Tale comportamento può essere
modificato tramite la proprietà prefer-dotted-right di
NoteCollision.
\new Staff \relative c' << { f2. f4 \override Staff.NoteCollision.prefer-dotted-right = ##f f2. f4 \override Staff.NoteCollision.prefer-dotted-right = ##t f2. f4 } \\ { e4 e e e e e e e e e e e } >>
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Spostare le note puntate in polifonia ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Two \partCombine pairs on one staff > ] |
Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns
If notes from two voices with stems in the same direction are placed at
the same position, and both voices have no shift or the same shift
specified, the error message “warning: ignoring too many clashing note
columns” appears when compiling the LilyPond file. This message can be
suppressed by setting the ignore-collision property of the
NoteColumn object to #t. Please note that this does not
just suppress warnings but stops LilyPond trying to resolve collisions
at all and so may have unintended results unless used with care.
ignore = \override NoteColumn.ignore-collision = ##t \relative c' { \new Staff << \new Voice { \ignore \stemDown f2 g } \new Voice { c2 \stemDown c, } >> }
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Staff notation >> ] |
| [ < Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns ] | [ Up: Simultaneous notes ] | [ Staff notation > ] |
Two \partCombine pairs on one staff
The \partCombine function takes two music expressions, each
containing a part, and distributes them among four Voice
contexts named “one”, “two”, “solo”, and “shared”, depending on when
and how the parts are merged into a common voice.
Variants of \partCombine are \partCombineUp and
\partCombineDown to produce up-stem and down-stem merging of
two voices, respectively. Combining them to squeeze four parts into a
single staff, however, need some special setup, which this snippet
defines accordingly.
customPartCombineUp = #(define-music-function (part1 part2) (ly:music? ly:music?) "Make an up-stem `VoiceBox` context that combines PART1 and PART2. The context is called 'Up'; internally, the function calls `\\partCombineUp`." #{ \new VoiceBox = "Up" << \context Voice = "one" { \voiceOne } \context Voice = "two" { \voiceThree } \context Voice = "shared" { \voiceOne } \context Voice = "solo" { \voiceOne } \context NullVoice = "null" {} \partCombine #part1 #part2 >> #}) customPartCombineDown = #(define-music-function (part3 part4) (ly:music? ly:music?) "Make a down-stem `VoiceBox` context that combines PART3 and PART4. The context is called 'Down'; internally, the function calls `\\partCombineDown`." #{ \new VoiceBox = "Down" << \set VoiceBox.soloText = #"Solo III" \set VoiceBox.soloIIText = #"Solo IV" \context Voice ="one" { \voiceFour } \context Voice ="two" { \voiceTwo } \context Voice ="shared" { \voiceFour } \context Voice ="solo" { \voiceFour } \context NullVoice = "null" {} \partCombine #part3 #part4 >> #}) soprano = { d'4 | cis' b e' d'8 cis' | cis'2 b } alto = { fis4 | e8 fis gis ais b4 b | b ais fis2 } tenor = { a8 b | cis' dis' e'4 b8 cis' d'4 | gis cis' dis'2 } bass = { fis8 gis | a4 gis g fis | eis fis b,2 } \new Staff << \key b\minor \clef alto \partial 4 \transpose b b' \customPartCombineUp \soprano \alto \customPartCombineDown \tenor \bass >> \layout { \context { \Staff \accepts "VoiceBox" } \context { \name "VoiceBox" \type "Engraver_group" \defaultchild "Voice" \accepts "Voice" \accepts "NullVoice" } }
| [ << Simultaneous notes ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Two \partCombine pairs on one staff ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Un ambitus per voce > ] |
6 Staff notation
See also Staff notation.
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Staff notation ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Adding an extra staff > ] |
Un ambitus per voce
L’ambitus può essere specificato per voce. In tal caso occorre spostarlo manualmente per evitare collisioni.
\new Staff << \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c'' { \override Ambitus.X-offset = 2.0 \voiceOne c4 a d e f1 } \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c' { \voiceTwo es4 f g as b1 } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Un ambitus per voce ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Adding an extra staff at a line break > ] |
Adding an extra staff
An extra staff can be added (possibly temporarily) after the start of a piece.
\score { << \new Staff \relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c | c } \new StaffGroup \relative c'' { \new Staff { c1 | c << { c1 | d } \new Staff { \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature c1 | b } >> c1 } } >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Adding an extra staff ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break > ] |
Adding an extra staff at a line break
When adding a new staff at a line break, some extra space is
unfortunately added at the end of the line before the break (to fit in
a key signature change, which will never be printed anyway). The
workaround is to set the explicitKeySignatureVisibility property
of the Staff grob as is shown in the example.
\score { \new StaffGroup \relative c'' { \new Staff \key f \major c1 c^"Unwanted extra space" \break << { c1 | c } \new Staff { \key f \major \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature c1 | c } >> c1 | c^"Fixed here" \break << { c1 | c } \new Staff { \once \set Staff.explicitKeySignatureVisibility = #end-of-line-invisible \key f \major \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature c1 | c } >> } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Adding an extra staff at a line break ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale > ] |
Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break
This snippet defines the commands \splitStaffBarLine,
\convUpStaffBarLine, and \convDownStaffBarLine. These
add arrows at a bar line to denote that several voices sharing a staff
will each continue on a staff of their own in the next system, or that
voices split in this way recombine.
Note that the implementation in this snippet draws dimensionless arrows into the right margin. For normal printing, this doesn’t cause problems. However, it is necessary to increase the bounding box horizontally if you render the code as an image to avoid cropping, as demonstrated below.
#(define-markup-command (arrow-at-angle layout props angle-deg length fill) (number? number? boolean?) (let* ((PI-OVER-180 (/ (atan 1 1) 34)) (degrees->radians (lambda (degrees) (* degrees PI-OVER-180))) (angle-rad (degrees->radians angle-deg)) (target-x (* length (cos angle-rad))) (target-y (* length (sin angle-rad)))) (interpret-markup layout props (markup #:translate (cons (/ target-x 2) (/ target-y 2)) #:rotate angle-deg #:translate (cons (/ length -2) 0) #:concat (#:draw-line (cons length 0) #:arrow-head X RIGHT fill))))) splitStaffBarLineMarkup = \markup \with-dimensions #'(0 . 0) #'(0 . 0) { \combine \arrow-at-angle #45 #(sqrt 8) ##t \arrow-at-angle #-45 #(sqrt 8) ##t } splitStaffBarLine = { \once \override Staff.BarLine.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:bar-line::print grob) X RIGHT (grob-interpret-markup grob splitStaffBarLineMarkup) 0)) \break } convDownStaffBarLine = { \once \override Staff.BarLine.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:bar-line::print grob) X RIGHT (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\with-dimensions #'(0 . 0) #'(0 . 0) { \translate #'(0 . -.13)\arrow-at-angle #-45 #(sqrt 8) ##t }#}) 0)) \break } convUpStaffBarLine = { \once \override Staff.BarLine.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:bar-line::print grob) X RIGHT (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\with-dimensions #'(0 . 0) #'(0 . 0) { \translate #'(0 . .14)\arrow-at-angle #45 #(sqrt 8) ##t }#}) 0)) \break } \paper { indent = 10\mm short-indent = 10\mm line-width = 8\cm } separateSopranos = { \set Staff.instrumentName = "AI AII" \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = "AI AII" \splitStaffBarLine \change Staff = "up" } convSopranos = { \convDownStaffBarLine \change Staff = "shared" \set Staff.instrumentName = "S A" \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = "S A" } sI = { \voiceOne \repeat unfold 4 f''2 \separateSopranos \repeat unfold 4 g''2 \convSopranos \repeat unfold 4 c''2 } sII = { s1*2 \voiceTwo \change Staff = "up" \repeat unfold 4 d''2 } aI = { \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 a'2 \voiceOne \repeat unfold 4 b'2 \convUpStaffBarLine \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 g'2 } aII = { s1*2 \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 g'2 } ten = { \voiceOne \repeat unfold 4 c'2 \repeat unfold 4 d'2 \repeat unfold 4 c'2 } bas = { \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 f2 \repeat unfold 4 g2 \repeat unfold 4 c2 } \markup \pad-x #3 % avoid cropping \score { << \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff = up \with { instrumentName = "SI SII" shortInstrumentName = "SI SII" } { s1*4 } \new Staff = shared \with { instrumentName = "S A" shortInstrumentName = "S A" } << \new Voice = sopI \sI \new Voice = sopII \sII \new Voice = altI \aI \new Voice = altII \aII >> \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = up } \lyricsto sopII { e f g h } \new Lyrics \lyricsto altI { a b c d e f g h i j k l } \new Staff = men \with { instrumentName = "T B" shortInstrumentName = "T B" } << \clef F \new Voice = ten \ten \new Voice = bas \bas >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto bas { a b c d e f g h i j k l } >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Numeri di battuta alternativi > ] |
Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale
L’esempio seguente mostra un approccio per simplificare l’aggiunta di
citazioni orchestrali a una riduzione per pianoforte di una partitura
vocale. La funzione musicale \cueWhile prende quattro argomenti:
la musica da cui prendere la citazione, come è definita da \addQuote,
il nome da inserire prima delle notine, poi o #UP o #DOWN per
specificare o \voiceOne col nome sopra il rigo o \voiceTwo
col nome sotto il rigo, e infine la musica per pianoforte che deve apparire
in parallelo alle notine. Il nome dello strumento citato è posto a sinistra
delle notine. Molti passaggi possono essere citati, ma non possono
sovrapporsi l’un l’altro nel tempo.
cueWhile = #(define-music-function (instrument name dir music) (string? string? ly:dir? ly:music?) #{ \cueDuring $instrument #dir { \once \override TextScript.self-alignment-X = #RIGHT \once \override TextScript.direction = $dir <>-\markup { \tiny #name } $music } #}) flute = \relative c'' { \transposition c' s4 s4 e g } \addQuote "flute" { \flute } clarinet = \relative c' { \transposition bes fis4 d d c } \addQuote "clarinet" { \clarinet } singer = \relative c'' { c4. g8 g4 bes4 } words = \lyricmode { here's the lyr -- ics } pianoRH = \relative c'' { \transposition c' \cueWhile "clarinet" "Clar." #DOWN { c4. g8 } \cueWhile "flute" "Flute" #UP { g4 bes4 } } pianoLH = \relative c { c4 <c' e> e, <g c> } \score { << \new Staff { \new Voice = "singer" { \singer } } \new Lyrics { \lyricsto "singer" \words } \new PianoStaff << \new Staff { \new Voice { \pianoRH } } \new Staff { \clef "bass" \pianoLH } >> >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave > ] |
Numeri di battuta alternativi
Si possono impostare due metodi alternativi di numerazione della battuta, utili specialmente per le ripetizioni.
music = \relative c' { \repeat volta 3 { c4 d e f | \alternative { \volta 1 { c4 d e f | c2 d \break } \volta 2 { f4 g a b | f4 g a b | f2 a | \break } \volta 3 { c4 d e f | c2 d } } } c1 \bar "|." } \markup "default" { \music } \markup \typewriter "numbers" { \set Score.alternativeNumberingStyle = #'numbers \music } \markup \typewriter "numbers-with-letters" { \set Score.alternativeNumberingStyle = #'numbers-with-letters \music }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Numeri di battuta alternativi ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Changing the default bar lines > ] |
Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
Per impostazione predefinita, gli ambitus sono posizionati a sinistra della chiave. La
funzione \ambitusAfter permette di cambiare questo posizionamento.
La sintassi è \ambitusAfter grob-interface (vedi
Graphical
Object Interfaces per un elenco dei possibili valori per
grob-interface.)
Un caso d’uso comune è il posizionamento dell’ambitus tra l’armatura di chiave e l’indicazione di tempo.
\new Staff \with { \consists Ambitus_engraver } \relative { \ambitusAfter key-signature \key d \major es'8 g bes cis d2 }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Changing the number of lines in a staff > ] |
Changing the default bar lines
Default bar lines can be changed when re-defined in a Score
context.
\layout { \context { \Score % Changing the defaults from engraver-init.ly measureBarType = "!" startRepeatBarType = "[|:" endRepeatBarType = ":|]" doubleRepeatBarType = ":|][|:" } } { c'1 \repeat volta 2 { c' c' } \repeat volta 2 { c' c' \alternative { \volta 1 { c' } \volta 2 { c' } } } \bar "|." }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Changing the default bar lines ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Changing the staff size > ] |
Changing the number of lines in a staff
The number of lines in a staff may changed by overriding the
StaffSymbol property line-count.
upper = \relative c'' { c4 d e f } lower = \relative c { \clef bass c4 b a g } \score { \context PianoStaff << \new Staff { \upper } \new Staff { \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-count = #4 \lower } >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Changing the number of lines in a staff ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Creating blank staves > ] |
Changing the staff size
Though the simplest way to resize staves is to use
#(set-global-staff-size size), an individual staff’s
size can be changed by scaling the properties staff-space and
fontSize.
<< \new Staff { \relative c'' { \dynamicDown c8\ff c c c c c c c } } \new Staff \with { fontSize = #-3 \override StaffSymbol.staff-space = #(magstep -3) } { \clef bass c8 c c c c\f c c c } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Changing the staff size ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Creating custom key signatures > ] |
Creating blank staves
To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
Bar_number_engraver from the Score context, and the
Time_signature_engraver, Clef_engraver and
Bar_engraver from the Staff context.
#(set-global-staff-size 10) % for the documentation % #(set-global-staff-size 20) % for letter and A4 \book { \score { { \repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break } } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Staff \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \remove "Clef_engraver" \remove "Bar_engraver" } \context { \Score \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } } % for the documentation \paper { #(set-paper-size "a6") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 90\mm left-margin = 7.5\mm bottom-margin = 5\mm top-margin = 5\mm tagline = ##f } % uncomment these lines for "letter" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "letter") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 7.5\in left-margin = 0.5\in bottom-margin = 0.25\in top-margin = 0.25\in tagline = ##f } %} % uncomment these lines for "A4" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "a4") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 180\mm left-margin = 15\mm bottom-margin = 10\mm top-margin = 10\mm tagline = ##f } %} }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Creating blank staves ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Cross-staff stems > ] |
Creating custom key signatures
LilyPond supports custom key signatures. In this example, print for D minor and D major with an extended range of shown flats.
\new Staff \with { \override StaffSymbol.line-count = #8 \override KeySignature.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeyCancellation.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeySignature.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override KeyCancellation.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override Clef.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\combine \musicglyph "clefs.C" \translate #'(-3 . -2) \musicglyph "clefs.F" #})) clefPosition = #3 middleCPosition = #3 middleCClefPosition = #3 } { \key d\minor f bes, f bes, | \key d\major fis b, fis b, | }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Creating custom key signatures ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema > ] |
Cross-staff stems
This snippet shows how to use Span_stem_engraver and
\crossStaff to connect stems across staves automatically.
The stem lengths need not be specified, as the variable distance between
noteheads and staves is calculated automatically. However, it is
important that \crossStaff is applied to the correct voice or
staff (i.e., on the opposite side of where a beam is or would be
positioned) to get the desired effect.
\layout { \context { \PianoStaff \consists "Span_stem_engraver" } } \new PianoStaff << \new Staff { <b d'>4 r d'16\> e'8. g8 r\! | e'8 f' g'4 \voiceTwo % Down to lower staff \crossStaff { e'8 e'8 } e'4 | } \new Staff { \clef bass \voiceOne % Up to upper staff \crossStaff { <e g>4 e, g16 a8. c8 } d | g8 f g4 \voiceTwo g8 g g4 | } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Cross-staff stems ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive > ] |
Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema
Se c’è un solo rigo in uno dei tipi di rigo ChoirStaff o
StaffGroup, la parentesi e la stanghetta iniziale non
appaiono. Si può modificare questo comportamento predefinito
sovrascrivendo collapse-height e impostando un valore
inferiore al numero di linee del rigo.
Nei contesti PianoStaff e GrandStaff, dove i sistemi
iniziano con una parentesi graffa invece di una parentesi quadra,
occorre impostare un’altra proprietà, come si vede nel secondo
sistema dell’esempio.
\score { \new StaffGroup << % Must be lower than the actual number of staff lines \override StaffGroup.SystemStartBracket.collapse-height = 4 \override Score.SystemStartBar.collapse-height = 4 \new Staff { c'1 } >> } \score { \new PianoStaff << \override PianoStaff.SystemStartBrace.collapse-height = 4 \override Score.SystemStartBar.collapse-height = 4 \new Staff { c'1 } >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Extending a trill spanner > ] |
Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive
In many orchestral scores it is custom to not show staves for
instruments that are silent for a while; this is called a ‘Frenched’
score. LilyPond provides this functionality via the
\RemoveEmptyStaves command.
When they play again it is often preferred to show the staves of
all instruments of such a group. This can be done by adding the
Keep_alive_together_engraver to the grouping context (e.g.,
GrandStaff or StaffGroup).
In the example below the violins are silent in the second system. Only the first violin plays the last measure in the third system but the staff of the second violin is also displayed.
\score { << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" shortInstrumentName = "Fl" } \relative c' { \repeat unfold 3 { c'4 c c c | c c c c | c c c c | \break } } \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_Strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "StaffViolinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" shortInstrumentName = "Vi I" } \relative c'' { a1 | R1*7 | \repeat unfold 12 a16 a4 | } \new Staff = "StaffViolinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" shortInstrumentName = "Vi II" } \relative c' { e1 | R1*8 | } >> \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" shortInstrumentName = "Ce" } \relative c { \clef bass \repeat unfold 9 { c1 } | } >> >> } \layout { indent = 3.0\cm short-indent = 1.5\cm \context { \GrandStaff \consists Keep_alive_together_engraver } \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } }
Extending a trill spanner
For TrillSpanner grobs, the minimum-length property
becomes effective only if the set-spacing-rods procedure is
called explicitly.
To do this, the springs-and-rods property should be set to
ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods.
\relative c' { \key c\minor \time 2/4 c16( as') c,-. des-. \once\override TrillSpanner.minimum-length = #15 \once\override TrillSpanner.springs-and-rods = #ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods \afterGrace es4\startTrillSpan { d16[(\stopTrillSpan es)] } c( c' g es c g' es d c8) }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Extending a trill spanner ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Flat ties > ] |
Estendere i glissandi sulle volte delle ripetizioni
Un glissando che si estende in vari blocchi \alternative può
essere simulato aggiungendo all’inizio di ogni blocco \alternative
una nota di abbellimento nascosta da cui inizia un glissando. La nota di
abbellimento deve avere la stessa altezza della nota da cui parte il
glissando iniziale. In questo frammento si usa una funzione musicale
che prende come argomento l’altezza della nota di abbellimento.
Attenzione: nella musica polifonica la nota di abbellimento deve avere una nota di abbellimento corrispondente in tutte le altre voci.
repeatGliss = #(define-music-function (grace) (ly:pitch?) #{ % the next two lines ensure the glissando is long enough % to be visible \once \override Glissando.springs-and-rods = #ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods \once \override Glissando.minimum-length = 3.5 \once \hideNotes \grace $grace \glissando #}) \score { \relative c'' { \repeat volta 3 { c4 d e f\glissando } \alternative { { g2 d } { \repeatGliss f g2 e } { \repeatGliss f e2 d } } } } music = \relative c' { \voiceOne \repeat volta 2 { g a b c\glissando } \alternative { { d1 } { \repeatGliss c \once \omit StringNumber e1\2 } } } \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff << \new Voice { \clef "G_8" \music } >> \new TabStaff << \new TabVoice { \clef "moderntab" \music } >> >> }
Flat ties
This snippet provides a function flared-tie to draw a tie that
consist of straight lines. It is intended as a replacement for the
default tie-drawing function (i.e., a replacement argument for the
stencil property of the Tie grob).
The argument of flared-tie is a list of coordinate pairs that
specify additional points between the first and last point to span up
the tie’s lines. The first and last point are identical to the original
tie’s start and end point, respectively. The X and
Y coordinate values are multiples of the bounding box length and
height of the original tie (also taking care of the tie’s direction);
consequently, the first point has coordinates (0,0), and the last point
(1,0).
The function flare-tie defines a shorthand for a flat tie.
Further tweaking of the shape is possible by overriding
Tie.details.height-limit or with \shape. It is also
possible to change the custom definition on the fly.
#(define ((flared-tie coords) grob) (define (pair-to-list pair) (list (car pair) (cdr pair))) (define (normalize-coords goods x y dir) (map (lambda (coord) (cons (* x (car coord)) (* y dir (cdr coord)))) goods)) (define (my-c-p-s points thick) (make-connected-path-stencil points thick 1.0 1.0 #f #f)) ;; Calling `ly:tie::print` and assigning its return value to a ;; variable in this outer `let` triggers LilyPond to position the ;; tie, allowing us to extract its extents. We only proceed, ;; however, if the tie doesn't get discarded (for whatever reason). (let ((sten (ly:tie::print grob))) (if (grob::is-live? grob) (let* ((layout (ly:grob-layout grob)) (line-thickness (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'line-thickness)) (thickness (ly:grob-property grob 'thickness 0.1)) (used-thick (* line-thickness thickness)) (dir (ly:grob-property grob 'direction)) (xex (ly:stencil-extent sten X)) (yex (ly:stencil-extent sten Y)) (lenx (interval-length xex)) (leny (interval-length yex)) (xtrans (car xex)) (ytrans (if (> dir 0)(car yex) (cdr yex))) ;; Add last point. (coord-list (append coords '((1.0 . 0.0)))) (uplist (map pair-to-list (normalize-coords coord-list lenx (* leny 2) dir)))) (ly:stencil-translate (my-c-p-s uplist used-thick) (cons xtrans ytrans))) '()))) % Define a default tie shape consisting of three straight lines. #(define flare-tie (flared-tie '((0.1 . 0.3) (0.9 . 0.3)))) \relative c' { a4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie a4~ a \break <a c e a c e a c e>~ q \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie q~ q\break <>^\markup \small \typewriter "height-limit = 14" \override Tie.details.height-limit = 14 a'4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie a4~ a \break <>^\markup \small \typewriter "height-limit = 0.5" \override Tie.details.height-limit = 0.5 a4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie a4~ a \break \revert Tie.details.height-limit <>^\markup \small \typewriter "\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -1) (0 . -1) (0 . 0))" \shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -1) (0 . -1) (0 . 0)) Tie a4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie \shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -1) (0 . -1) (0 . 0)) Tie a4~ a \break <>^\markup \small \typewriter "#(flared-tie '((0.2 . 2) (0.5 . -3) (0.8 . 1))" \once \override Tie.stencil = #(flared-tie '((0.2 . 2) (0.5 . -3) (0.8 . 1))) a4~ a <>_\markup \small \typewriter "#(flared-tie '((0.5 . 2)))" \once \override Tie.stencil = #(flared-tie '((0.5 . 2))) a'4~ a }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Flat ties ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Glissandi can skip grobs > ] |
Forcing measure width to adapt to a metronome mark’s width
By default, metronome marks do not influence horizontal spacing. This can be solved through a simple override, as shown in the second half of the example.
example = { R1 \tempo "Allegro molto" R1*6 \tempo "poco rit." R1*2 \tempo "a tempo" R1*8 \break } { \compressMMRests { \example \override Score.MetronomeMark.extra-spacing-width = #'(-3 . 0) \example } } \layout { ragged-right = ##t }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Forcing measure width to adapt to a metronome mark’s width ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Incipit > ] |
Glissandi can skip grobs
NoteColumn grobs can be skipped over by glissandi.
\relative c' { a2 \glissando \once \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t f''4 d, }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Glissandi can skip grobs ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Inserting score fragments above a staff, as markups > ] |
Incipit
Quando si trascrive musica mensurale, un incipit all’inizio del brano è utile per indicare il tempo e l’armatura di chiave originali. I musicisti oggi sono abituati alle stanghette, ma queste non erano note all’epoca della musica mensurale. Come compromesso, spesso le stanghette vengono poste tra i righi, uno stile di formattazione chiamato mensurstriche.
% A short excerpt from the Jubilate Deo by Orlande de Lassus global = { \set Score.skipBars = ##t \key g \major \time 4/4 % the actual music \skip 1*8 % let finis bar go through all staves \override Staff.BarLine.transparent = ##f % finis bar \bar "|." } discantusIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { \clef "petrucci-c1" \key f \major \time 2/2 c''1. } discantusNotes = { \transpose c' c'' { \clef "treble" d'2. d'4 | b e' d'2 | c'4 e'4.( d'8 c' b | a4) b a2 | b4.( c'8 d'4) c'4 | \once \hide NoteHead c'1 | b\breve | } } discantusLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi -- la -- te De -- o, om -- nis ter -- ra, __ om- "..." -us. } altusIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { \clef "petrucci-c3" \key f \major \time 2/2 e'1\rest f'1. } altusNotes = { \transpose c' c'' { \clef "treble" r2 g2. e4 fis g | a2 g4 e | fis g4.( fis16 e fis4) | g1 | \once \hide NoteHead g1 | g\breve | } } altusLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi -- la -- te De -- o, om -- nis ter -- ra, "..." -us. } tenorIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { \clef "petrucci-c4" \key f \major \time 2/2 r\longa r\breve r1 c'1. } tenorNotes = { \transpose c' c' { \clef "treble_8" R1 | R1 | R1 | % two measures r2 d'2. d'4 b e' | \once \hide NoteHead e'1 | d'\breve | } } tenorLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi -- la -- te "..." -us. } bassusIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { % The original print shows the b flat % for the f major key signature twice. \override Staff.KeySignature.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \clef "mensural-f" \key f\major \time 2/2 \tweak Y-offset #1 r\longa \tweak Y-offset #1 r\longa f1. } bassusNotes = { \transpose c' c' { \clef "bass" R1 | R1 | R1 | R1 | g2. e4 | \once \hide NoteHead e1 | g\breve | } } bassusLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi- "..." -us. } \score { << \new StaffGroup = choirStaff << \new Voice = "discantusNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Discantus" \incipit #1 \discantusIncipit \global \discantusNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto discantusNotes { \discantusLyrics } \new Voice = "altusNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Altus" \global \incipit #1 \altusIncipit \altusNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto altusNotes { \altusLyrics } \new Voice = "tenorNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Tenor" \global \incipit #1 \tenorIncipit \tenorNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto tenorNotes { \tenorLyrics } \new Voice = "bassusNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Bassus" \global \incipit #1 \bassusIncipit \bassusNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto bassusNotes { \bassusLyrics } >> >> \layout { \context { \Score %% no bar lines in staves or lyrics \hide BarLine } %% the next two instructions keep the lyrics between the bar lines \context { \Lyrics \consists "Bar_engraver" \consists "Separating_line_group_engraver" } \context { \Voice %% no slurs \hide Slur %% Comment in the below "\remove" command to allow line %% breaking also at those bar lines where a note overlaps %% into the next measure. The command is commented out in this %% short example score, but especially for large scores, you %% will typically yield better line breaking and thus improve %% overall spacing if you comment in the following command. %%\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" } indent = 5\cm incipit-width = 2.5\cm } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Incipit ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom > ] |
Inserting score fragments above a staff, as markups
The \markup command is quite versatile. In this snippet, it
contains a \score block instead of texts or marks.
tuning = \markup \score { \new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" } { \clef bass <c, g, d g>1 } \layout { indent = 0\cm } } \header { title = "Solo Cello Suites" subtitle = "Suite IV" subsubtitle = \markup { Originalstimmung: \raise #0.5 \tuning } tagline = ##f } \layout { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { \time 4/8 \tuplet 3/2 { c8 d e } \tuplet 3/2 { c d e } \tuplet 3/2 { c8 d e } \tuplet 3/2 { c d e } g8 a g a g8 a g a }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Inserting score fragments above a staff, as markups ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Letter tablature formatting > ] |
Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom
In tablatures, the first string is usually printed topmost. If you want
to have it at the bottom, set the stringOneTopmost context
property to #f. For a context-wide setting this could be done in
the \layout block as well.
%\layout { % \context { % \Score % stringOneTopmost = ##f % } % \context { % \TabStaff % tablatureFormat = #fret-letter-tablature-format % } %} m = { \cadenzaOn e, b, e gis! b e' \bar "||" } << \new Staff { \clef "G_8" <>_"default" \m <>_"italian (historic)"\m } \new TabStaff { \m \set Score.stringOneTopmost = ##f \set TabStaff.tablatureFormat = #fret-letter-tablature-format \m } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo > ] |
Letter tablature formatting
Tablature can be formatted using letters instead of numbers.
music = \relative c { c4 d e f g4 a b c d4 e f g } << \new Staff { \clef "G_8" \music } \new TabStaff \with { tablatureFormat = #fret-letter-tablature-format } { \music } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Letter tablature formatting ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre > ] |
Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo
Per permettere a un glissando di andare a capo se capita su un’interruzione di
riga, si impostano le proprietà breakable e after-line-breaking
su #t:
glissandoSkipOn = { \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t \hide NoteHead \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##t } music = { \repeat unfold 16 f8 | f1\glissando | a4 r2. | \repeat unfold 16 f8 | f1\glissando \once\glissandoSkipOn | a2 a4 r4 | \repeat unfold 16 f8 } \relative c'' { <>^\markup { \typewriter Glissando.breakable set to \typewriter "#t" } \override Glissando.breakable = ##t \override Glissando.after-line-breaking = ##t \music } \relative c'' { <>^\markup { \typewriter Glissando.breakable not set } \music } \paper { line-width = 100\mm }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Measure counters > ] |
Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre
In ambito didattico può essere utile rendere più spesso una linea del
rigo (per esempio, la linea centrale, o per sottolineare la linea
della chiave di Sol). Per farlo si possono aggiungere altre linee
e posizionarle molto vicino alla linea che deve essere evidenziata,
usando la proprietà line-positions dell’oggetto StaffSymbol.
{ \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'(-4 -2 -0.2 0 0.2 2 4) d'4 e' f' g' }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi) > ] |
Measure counters
This snippet demonstrates the use of the
Measure_counter_engraver to number groups of successive
measures. Any stretch of measures may be numbered, whether consisting
of repetitions or not.
The engraver must be added to the appropriate context. Here, a
Staff context is used; another possibility is a Dynamics
context.
The counter is begun with \startMeasureCount and ended with
\stopMeasureCount. Numbering will start by default with 1,
but this behavior may be modified by overriding the count-from
property.
When a measure extends across a line break, the number will appear twice, the second time in parentheses.
\layout { \context { \Staff \consists #Measure_counter_engraver } } \new Staff { \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 7 { c'4 d' e' f' } \stopMeasureCount \bar "||" g'4 f' e' d' \override Staff.MeasureCounter.count-from = #2 \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 5 { g'4 f' e' d' } g'4 f' \bar "" \break e'4 d' \repeat unfold 7 { g'4 f' e' d' } \stopMeasureCount }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Measure counters ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava > ] |
Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
La formattazione mensurale, in cui le stanghette non appaiono sui righi ma
nello spazio tra i righi, si può ottenere usando StaffGroup al posto
di ChoirStaff. La stanghetta sui righi viene nascosta con
\hide.
\layout { \context { \Staff measureBarType = "-span|" } } music = \fixed c'' { c1 d2 \section e2 f1 \fine } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \music \new Staff \music >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi) ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Annidare i righi > ] |
Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava
È possibile cambiare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.OttavaBracket.stencil = #ly:line-spanner::print \override Staff.OttavaBracket.bound-details = #`((left . ((Y . 0) (attach-dir . ,LEFT) (padding . 0) (stencil-align-dir-y . ,CENTER))) (right . ((Y . 5.0) ; Change the number here (padding . 0) (attach-dir . ,RIGHT) (text . ,(make-draw-dashed-line-markup (cons 0 -1.2)))))) \override Staff.OttavaBracket.left-bound-info = #ly:horizontal-line-spanner::calc-left-bound-info-and-text \override Staff.OttavaBracket.right-bound-info = #ly:horizontal-line-spanner::calc-right-bound-info \ottava 1 c1 c'''1 }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Armature di chiave non tradizionali > ] |
Annidare i righi
Si può usare la proprietà systemStartDelimiterHierarchy per creare
gruppi di righi annidati più complessi. Il comando \set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy prende come argomento una lista
alfabetica dell’insieme di righi prodotti. Prima di ogni rigo si può
assegnare un delimitatore di inizio del sistema. Deve essere racchiuso
tra parentesi e collega tutti i righi compresi tra le parentesi. Gli
elementi nella lista possono essere omessi, ma la prima parentesi quadra
collega sempre tutti i righi. Le possibilità sono SystemStartBar,
SystemStartBracket, SystemStartBrace e
SystemStartSquare.
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' << \override StaffGroup.SystemStartSquare.collapse-height = 4 \set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy = #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a (SystemStartSquare b)) c) d) \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Annidare i righi ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte > ] |
Armature di chiave non tradizionali
Il comando \key comunemente usato imposta la proprietà
keyAlterations del contesto Staff.
Per creare armature di chiave non standard, tale proprietà va
impostata esplicitamente.
Il formato di questo comando è una lista:
\set Staff.keyAlterations = #`(((ottava . grado) . alterazione) ((ottava
. grado) . alterazione) ...)
dove, per ogni elemento della lista, ottava indica l’ottava (0 è
l’ottava dal Do centrale al Si precedente), grado indica la nota
all’interno dell’ottava (0 significa Do e 6 significa Si) e alterazione
può essere ,SHARP ,FLAT ,DOUBLE-SHARP etc.
Altrimenti, usando il formato breve per ogni elemento della lista,
(grado . alterazione), ciò indica che la stessa alterazione deve
essere presente in tutte le ottave. Per le scale microtonalidove un
“diesis” non è 100 centesimi, alterazione si riferisce alla
proporzione di un duecentesimo di tono intero.
\include "arabic.ly" \relative do' { \set Staff.keyAlterations = #`((0 . ,SEMI-FLAT) (1 . ,SEMI-FLAT) (2 . ,FLAT) (5 . ,FLAT) (6 . ,SEMI-FLAT)) % \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f re reb \dwn reb resd dod dob dosd \dwn dob | dobsb dodsd do do | }
Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
Questo modello mostra come usare i contesti annidati StaffGroup e
GrandStaff per creare sottogruppi degli strumenti dello stesso
tipo. Mostra anche come usare \transpose in modo che le variabili
mantengano la musica per gli strumenti traspositori nell’intonazione reale.
#(set-global-staff-size 17) \paper { indent = 3.0\cm % add space for instrumentName short-indent = 1.5\cm % add less space for shortInstrumentName } fluteMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } % Pitches as written on a manuscript for Clarinet in A % are transposed to concert pitch. clarinetMusic = \transpose c' a \relative c'' { \key bes \major bes1 d } trumpetMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } % Key signature is often omitted for horns hornMusic = \transpose c' f \relative c { d'1 fis } percussionMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g1 b } sopranoMusic = \relative c'' { \key g \major g'1 b } sopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { Lyr -- ics } altoIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoILyrics = \sopranoLyrics altoIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoIILyrics = \lyricmode { Ah -- ah } tenorMusic = \relative c' { \clef "treble_8" \key g \major g1 b } tenorLyrics = \sopranoLyrics pianoRHMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } pianoLHMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } violinIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violinIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violaMusic = \relative c { \clef alto \key g \major g'1 b } celloMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } bassMusic = \relative c { \clef "bass_8" \key g \major g,1 b } \book { \score { << \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_woodwinds" << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" } \fluteMusic \new Staff = "Staff_clarinet" \with { instrumentName = \markup { \concat { "Clarinet in B" \flat } } } % Declare that written Middle C in the music % to follow sounds a concert B flat, for % output using sounded pitches such as MIDI. %\transposition bes % Print music for a B-flat clarinet \transpose bes c' \clarinetMusic >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_brass" << \new Staff = "Staff_hornI" \with { instrumentName = "Horn in F" } % \transposition f \transpose f c' \hornMusic \new Staff = "Staff_trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet in C" } \trumpetMusic >> \new RhythmicStaff = "RhythmicStaff_percussion" \with { instrumentName = "Percussion" } \percussionMusic \new PianoStaff \with { instrumentName = "Piano" } << \new Staff { \pianoRHMusic } \new Staff { \pianoLHMusic } >> \new ChoirStaff = "ChoirStaff_choir" << \new Staff = "Staff_soprano" \with { instrumentName = "Soprano" } \new Voice = "soprano" \sopranoMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "soprano" { \sopranoLyrics } \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_altos" \with { \accepts Lyrics } << \new Staff = "Staff_altoI" \with { instrumentName = "Alto I" } \new Voice = "altoI" \altoIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoI" { \altoILyrics } \new Staff = "Staff_altoII" \with { instrumentName = "Alto II" } \new Voice = "altoII" \altoIIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoII" { \altoIILyrics } >> \new Staff = "Staff_tenor" \with { instrumentName = "Tenor" } \new Voice = "tenor" \tenorMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "tenor" { \tenorLyrics } >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "Staff_violinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" } \violinIMusic \new Staff = "Staff_violinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" } \violinIIMusic >> \new Staff = "Staff_viola" \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } \violaMusic \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } \celloMusic \new Staff = "Staff_bass" \with { instrumentName = "Double Bass" } \bassMusic >> >> } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Putting lyrics inside the staff > ] |
Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note
To print subsequent ChordNames only differing in its bass note
as slash and bass note, use the Scheme engraver defined in this
snippet. The behaviour may be controlled in detail by the
chordChanges context property.
#(define Bass_changes_equal_root_engraver (lambda (ctx) "For sequential `ChordNames` with the same root but a different bass, the root markup is dropped: D D/C D/B -> D /C /B. The behaviour may be controlled by setting the `chordChanges` context property." (let ((chord-pitches '()) (last-chord-pitches '()) (bass-pitch #f)) (make-engraver ((initialize this-engraver) (let ((chord-note-namer (ly:context-property ctx 'chordNoteNamer))) ;; Set 'chordNoteNamer, respect user setting if already done (ly:context-set-property! ctx 'chordNoteNamer (if (procedure? chord-note-namer) chord-note-namer note-name->markup)))) (listeners ((note-event this-engraver event) (let* ((pitch (ly:event-property event 'pitch)) (pitch-name (ly:pitch-notename pitch)) (pitch-alt (ly:pitch-alteration pitch)) (bass (ly:event-property event 'bass #f)) (inversion (ly:event-property event 'inversion #f))) ;; Collect notes of the chord ;; - to compare inversed chords we need to collect the ;; bass note as usual member of the chord, whereas an ;; added bass must be treated separate from the usual ;; chord-notes ;; - notes are stored as pairs containing their ;; pitch-name (an integer), i.e. disregarding their ;; octave and their alteration (cond (bass (set! bass-pitch pitch)) (inversion (set! bass-pitch pitch) (set! chord-pitches (cons (cons pitch-name pitch-alt) chord-pitches))) (else (set! chord-pitches (cons (cons pitch-name pitch-alt) chord-pitches))))))) (acknowledgers ((chord-name-interface this-engraver grob source-engraver) (let ((chord-changes (ly:context-property ctx 'chordChanges #f))) ;; If subsequent chords are equal apart from their bass, ;; reset the 'text-property. ;; Equality is done by comparing the sorted lists of this ;; chord's elements and the previous chord. Sorting is ;; needed because inverted chords may have a different ;; order of pitches. `chord-changes` needs to be true. (if (and bass-pitch chord-changes (equal? (sort chord-pitches car<) (sort last-chord-pitches car<))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'text (make-line-markup (list (ly:context-property ctx 'slashChordSeparator) ((ly:context-property ctx 'chordNoteNamer) bass-pitch (ly:context-property ctx 'chordNameLowercaseMinor)))))) (set! last-chord-pitches chord-pitches) (set! chord-pitches '()) (set! bass-pitch #f)))) ((finalize this-engraver) (set! last-chord-pitches '())))))) myChords = \chordmode { % \germanChords \set chordChanges = ##t d2:m d:m/cis d:m/c \set chordChanges = ##f d:m/b e1:7 \set chordChanges = ##t e \break \once \set chordChanges = ##f e1/f e2/gis e/+gis e e:m/f d:m d:m/cis d:m/c \set chordChanges = ##f d:m/b } << \new ChordNames \with { \consists #Bass_changes_equal_root_engraver } \myChords \new Staff \myChords >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Quoting another voice > ] |
Putting lyrics inside the staff
Lyrics can be moved vertically to place them inside the staff. The
lyrics are moved with
\override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . dy), and
there are similar commands to move the extenders and hyphens. A good
value for dy must be found by trial and error.
<< \new Staff << \new Voice = "voc" \relative c' { \stemDown a bes c8 b c4 } >> \new Lyrics \with { \override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) \override LyricExtender.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) \override LyricHyphen.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) } \lyricsto "voc" { La la -- la __ _ la } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Putting lyrics inside the staff ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Quoting another voice with transposition > ] |
Quoting another voice
The quotedEventTypes context property determines which music
event types should be quoted. The default value is
(note-event rest-event tie-event beam-event tuplet-span-event),
which means that only notes, rests, ties, beams, and tuplets of a
quoted voice appear in the \quoteDuring expression.
In the following example, a 16th rest is not quoted since
rest-event is not in the redefined value of
quotedEventTypes.
For a list of event types, consult the “Music classes” section of the Internals Reference.
quoteMe = \relative c' { fis4 r16 a8.-> b4\ff c } \addQuote quoteMe \quoteMe original = \relative c'' { c8 d s2 \once \override NoteColumn.ignore-collision = ##t es8 gis8 } << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "quoteMe" } \quoteMe \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "orig" } \original \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "orig+quote" quotedEventTypes = #'(note-event articulation-event) } \relative c'' << \original \new Voice { s4 \set fontSize = #-4 \override Stem.length-fraction = #(magstep -4) \quoteDuring "quoteMe" { \skip 2. } } >> >>
Quoting another voice with transposition
Quotations take into account the transposition of both source and
target. In this example, all instruments play sounding middle c;
the target is an instrument in f. The target part may be
transposed using \transpose. In this case, all the pitches
(including the quoted ones) are transposed.
\addQuote clarinet { \transposition bes \repeat unfold 8 { d'16 d' d'8 } } \addQuote sax { \transposition es' \repeat unfold 16 { a8 } } quoteTest = { % french horn \transposition f g'4 << \quoteDuring "clarinet" { \skip 4 } s4^"clar." >> << \quoteDuring "sax" { \skip 4 } s4^"sax." >> g'4 } { \new Staff \with { instrumentName = \markup { \column { Horn "in F" } } } \quoteTest \transpose c' d' << \quoteTest s4_"up a tone" >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Quoting another voice with transposition ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Removing brace on first line of piano score > ] |
Reconciliating bar lines thickness when staves are of different sizes (TODO duplicates snippet in Documentation/en/notation/spacing.itely)
A regularly occurring problem in ensemble or chamber music scores, particularly with piano, is that when some of the staves are printed in a smaller size, their bar lines do not not match those of larger staves. This may become particularly egregious for closing double bar lines, as demonstrated here.
There are different solutions, which all involve correcting some of the
properties overridden by the \magnifyStaff command: namely,
kern thick-thickness and hair-thickness (the
latter of which also governs ordinary bar lines). These are properties
of the BarLine graphical object (“grob”), which resides
in the Staff context.
This can be done by using either the \revert command, or more
advanced commands such as revert-props. Alternatively, some
effects of \magnifyStaff may be replicated on other staves
through the scale-props command, which may be used to harmonize
all bar lines either to their appearance on the smallest staves, or to
some intermediate value.
%% This snippet relies on some internal commands that are not part of the %% most common and stable syntax generally recommended to regular users. \markup \fontsize #-3 { \center-column { \vspace #0.3 Default: \vspace #1.7 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 } { b1 b \bar "|."} \new Staff { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { "Reverting only the" "final bar line:" \vspace #1.2 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 } { b1 b \revert Staff.BarLine.thick-thickness \revert Staff.BarLine.hair-thickness \revert Staff.BarLine.kern \bar "|." } \new Staff { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { \line {Cancelling \typewriter "\magnifyStaff"} "only for bar lines:" \vspace #1.1 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 #(revert-props 'magnifyStaff 0 '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b1 b \bar "|."} \new Staff { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { \line {Mimicking \typewriter "\magnifyStaff"} "on the other staves:" \vspace #1.3 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 } { b1 b \bar "|." } \new Staff \with { #(scale-props 'magnifyStaff 1/2 #t '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { "Applying an intermediate" "value to all staves:" \vspace #1.3 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 #(scale-props 'magnifyStaff 3/2 #t '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b1 b \bar "|." } \new Staff \with { #(scale-props 'magnifyStaff 3/4 #t '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b b } >> } } } \layout { indent = 0 }
Removing brace on first line of piano score
This snippet removes the first brace from a PianoStaff or a
GrandStaff, together with the clefs. It may be useful when
cutting and pasting the engraved image into existing music.
The code uses \alterBroken to hide the brace delimiter at the
beginning.
someMusic = { \once \omit Staff.Clef \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature \repeat unfold 3 c1 \break \repeat unfold 5 c1 \break \repeat unfold 5 c1 } \score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "right" \relative c'' \someMusic \new Staff = "left" \relative c' { \clef F \someMusic } >> \layout { indent=75\mm \context { \PianoStaff \alterBroken transparent #'(#t) SystemStartBrace } } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Removing brace on first line of piano score ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Eliminare la prima linea vuota > ] |
Removing connecting bar lines on StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or GrandStaff
By default, bar lines in StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or
GrandStaff contexts are connected between the staves, i.e., a
span bar is printed. This behaviour can be overridden on a
staff-by-staff basis.
\relative c' { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff { e1 | e \once \override Staff.BarLine.allow-span-bar = ##f e1 | e | e } \new Staff { c1 | c | c \once \override Staff.BarLine.allow-span-bar = ##f c1 | c } \new Staff { a1 | a | a | a | a } >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Removing connecting bar lines on StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or GrandStaff ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Setting system separators > ] |
Eliminare la prima linea vuota
Il primo rigo vuoto si può togliere dalla partitura impostando la proprietà
remove-first di VerticalAxisGroup. Questa impostazione
agisce a livello globale se posta nel blocco \layout, a livello
locale se posta nel rigo specifico che deve essere tolto. Nel secondo
caso, si deve specificare il contesto (Staff si applica solo al
rigo corrente) prima della proprietà.
Il rigo inferiore del secondo gruppo di righi non viene rimosso, perché l’impostazione ha effetto solo sul rigo in cui si trova.
\layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves % To use the setting globally, uncomment the following line: % \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \relative c' { e4 f g a \break c1 } \new Staff { % To use the setting globally, comment this line, % uncomment the line in the \layout block above \override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t R1 \break R } >> \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \relative c' { e4 f g a \break c1 } \new Staff { R1 \break R } >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Eliminare la prima linea vuota ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Shape individual ties in chords > ] |
Setting system separators
System separators can be inserted between systems. Any markup can be
used, but \slashSeparator has been provided as a sensible
default.
#(set-default-paper-size "a5") \paper { system-separator-markup = \slashSeparator tagline = ##f } notes = \relative c' { c1 | c \break c1 | c \break c1 | c } \book { \score { \new GrandStaff << \new Staff \notes \new Staff \notes >> } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Setting system separators ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Tick bar lines > ] |
Shape individual ties in chords
To shape individual ties in chords use the method demonstrated below.
{ \textMark "Chords can be tied note by note." <c'~ e'~ g'~ c''~>2 q } { \textMark \markup \override #'(baseline-skip . 3) \wordwrap { Modifying those ties with \typewriter "\\shape" does not succeed, because \typewriter TieColumn positions them on its own behalf, ignoring \typewriter "\\shape" input more or less. You may circumvent this by setting \typewriter positioning-done to \typewriter "#t" – alas, \typewriter positioning-done is an internal property, and setting it to \typewriter "#t" means: all positioning is done, don’t do anything further. The next example demonstrates a case where the positioning is not finished: all tie directions are down, and the thickness is not accurate. } <c'~ e'~ g'~ c''~>2 \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark "To fix that, enter ties with explicit direction modifiers." <c'_~ e'_~ g'_~ c''^~>2 \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark \markup { Now you can use \typewriter "\\shape" for each tie as usual. } <c'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0)) _~ e'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0)) _~ g'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0)) _~ c''-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0)) ^~ >2 \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark "This also works at line breaks." <c'-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0))) _~ e'-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0))) _~ g'-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0))) _~ c''-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0))) ^~ >2 \break \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark \markup { It also works with the \typewriter tieWaitForNote property. } \set tieWaitForNote = ##t c'4-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0)) _~ e'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0)) _~ g'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0)) _~ c''-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0)) ^~ \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t <c' e' g' c''>1 } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Score \override TextMark.padding = #4 \override TextMark.break-align-symbols = #'(left-edge) } } \paper { score-system-spacing.padding = 3 }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Shape individual ties in chords ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Time signature in brackets > ] |
Tick bar lines
‘Tick’ bar lines are often used in music where the bar line is used only for coordination and is not meant to imply any rhythmic stress.
\relative c' { \set Score.measureBarType = #"'" c4 d e f g4 f e d c4 d e f g4 f e d \bar "|." }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Tick bar lines ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Time signature in parentheses > ] |
Time signature in brackets
The time signature can be enclosed within brackets.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.TimeSignature.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (bracketify-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) Y 0.1 0.2 0.1)) \time 2/4 a4 b8 c }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Time signature in brackets ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave > ] |
Time signature in parentheses
The time signature can be enclosed within parentheses.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.TimeSignature.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (parenthesize-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) 0.1 0.4 0.4 0.1)) \time 2/4 a4 b8 c }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Time signature in parentheses ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Two \partCombine pairs on one staff > ] |
Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave
Cambiando il glifo della chiave, la sua posizione o l’ottavazione non
cambia la posizione delle note successive nel rigo. Per far sì che
le armature di chiave si trovino sulle linee del rigo corrette, bisogna
specificare anche middleCPosition, con valori positivi o negativi
che spostano il Do centrale rispettivamente su o giù in senso
relativo alla linea centrale del rigo.
Per esempio, \clef "treble_8" equivale a impostare
clefGlyph, clefPosition (che regola la posizione
verticale della chiave), middleCPosition e
clefTransposition. Viene stampata una chiave quando cambia una
di queste proprietà, eccetto middleCPosition.
Gli esempi seguenti mostrano le possibilità date dall’impostazione manuale di tali proprietà. Sulla prima linea le modifiche manuali preservano il posizionamento relativo standard di chiavi e note, mentre sulla seconda linea non lo fanno.
{ % The default treble clef. \key f \major c'1 % The standard bass clef \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.F" \set Staff.clefPosition = 2 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 6 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 6 \key g \major c'1 % The baritone clef. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.C" \set Staff.clefPosition = 4 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 4 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 4 \key f \major c'1 % The standard choral tenor clef. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.G" \set Staff.clefPosition = -2 \set Staff.clefTransposition = -7 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 1 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 1 \key f \major c'1 % A non-standard clef. \set Staff.clefPosition = 0 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 0 \set Staff.middleCPosition = -4 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = -4 \key g \major c'1 \break % The following clef changes do not preserve % the normal relationship between notes, key signatures % and clefs. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.F" \set Staff.clefPosition = 2 c'1 \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.G" c'1 \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.C" c'1 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 7 c'1 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 0 \set Staff.clefPosition = 0 c'1 % Return to the normal clef. \set Staff.middleCPosition = 0 c'1 }
Two \partCombine pairs on one staff
The \partCombine function takes two music expressions, each
containing a part, and distributes them among four Voice
contexts named “one”, “two”, “solo”, and “shared”, depending on when
and how the parts are merged into a common voice.
Variants of \partCombine are \partCombineUp and
\partCombineDown to produce up-stem and down-stem merging of
two voices, respectively. Combining them to squeeze four parts into a
single staff, however, need some special setup, which this snippet
defines accordingly.
customPartCombineUp = #(define-music-function (part1 part2) (ly:music? ly:music?) "Make an up-stem `VoiceBox` context that combines PART1 and PART2. The context is called 'Up'; internally, the function calls `\\partCombineUp`." #{ \new VoiceBox = "Up" << \context Voice = "one" { \voiceOne } \context Voice = "two" { \voiceThree } \context Voice = "shared" { \voiceOne } \context Voice = "solo" { \voiceOne } \context NullVoice = "null" {} \partCombine #part1 #part2 >> #}) customPartCombineDown = #(define-music-function (part3 part4) (ly:music? ly:music?) "Make a down-stem `VoiceBox` context that combines PART3 and PART4. The context is called 'Down'; internally, the function calls `\\partCombineDown`." #{ \new VoiceBox = "Down" << \set VoiceBox.soloText = #"Solo III" \set VoiceBox.soloIIText = #"Solo IV" \context Voice ="one" { \voiceFour } \context Voice ="two" { \voiceTwo } \context Voice ="shared" { \voiceFour } \context Voice ="solo" { \voiceFour } \context NullVoice = "null" {} \partCombine #part3 #part4 >> #}) soprano = { d'4 | cis' b e' d'8 cis' | cis'2 b } alto = { fis4 | e8 fis gis ais b4 b | b ais fis2 } tenor = { a8 b | cis' dis' e'4 b8 cis' d'4 | gis cis' dis'2 } bass = { fis8 gis | a4 gis g fis | eis fis b,2 } \new Staff << \key b\minor \clef alto \partial 4 \transpose b b' \customPartCombineUp \soprano \alto \customPartCombineDown \tenor \bass >> \layout { \context { \Staff \accepts "VoiceBox" } \context { \name "VoiceBox" \type "Engraver_group" \defaultchild "Voice" \accepts "Voice" \accepts "NullVoice" } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Two \partCombine pairs on one staff ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Using \autoChange with more than one voice > ] |
Usare una parentesi quadra all’inizio di un gruppo di righi
Si può usare il segno SystemStartSquare (uno dei segni che delimitano
l’inizio del sistema) impostandolo esplicitamente in un contesto
StaffGroup o ChoirStaff.
\score { \new StaffGroup { << \set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiter = #'SystemStartSquare \new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' } \new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' } >> } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Usare una parentesi quadra all’inizio di un gruppo di righi ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Using mark lines in a Frenched score > ] |
Using \autoChange with more than one voice
Here is a demonstration of how to use \autoChange with more
than one voice.
\score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "up" { << \set Timing.beamExceptions = #'() \set Timing.beatStructure = #'(4) \new Voice { \voiceOne \autoChange \relative c' { g8 a b c d e f g g,8 a b c d e f g } } \new Voice { \voiceTwo \autoChange \relative c' { g8 a b c d e f g g,,8 a b c d e f g } } >> } \new Staff = "down" { \clef bass } >> }
Using mark lines in a Frenched score
Using MarkLine contexts (such as in “Placing rehearsal marks
other than above the top staff”) in a Frenched score can be problematic
if all the staves between two MarkLines are removed in one
system. The Keep_alive_together_engraver can be used within each
StaffGroup to keep the MarkLine alive only as long as the
other staves in the group stay alive.
bars = { \tempo "Allegro" 4=120 s1*2 \repeat unfold 5 { \mark \default s1*2 } \bar "||" \tempo "Adagio" 4=40 s1*2 \repeat unfold 8 { \mark \default s1*2 } \bar "|." } winds = \repeat unfold 120 { c''4 } trumpet = { \repeat unfold 8 g'2 R1*16 \repeat unfold 4 g'2 R1*8 } trombone = { \repeat unfold 4 c'1 R1*8 d'1 R1*17 } strings = \repeat unfold 240 { c''8 } #(set-global-staff-size 16) \paper { systems-per-page = 5 ragged-last-bottom = ##f tagline = ##f } \layout { indent = 16\mm short-indent = 5\mm \context { \name MarkLine \type Engraver_group \consists Output_property_engraver \consists Axis_group_engraver \consists Mark_engraver \consists Metronome_mark_engraver \consists Staff_collecting_engraver \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-empty = ##t \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-layer = #'any \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN \override VerticalAxisGroup.nonstaff-relatedstaff-spacing.padding = 1 keepAliveInterfaces = #'() } \context { \Staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-empty = ##t \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-layer = ##f } \context { \StaffGroup \accepts MarkLine \consists Keep_alive_together_engraver } \context { \Score \remove Mark_engraver \remove Metronome_mark_engraver \remove Staff_collecting_engraver \override BarNumber.Y-offset = #3 } } \score { << \new StaffGroup = "winds" \with { instrumentName = "Winds" shortInstrumentName = "W." } << \new MarkLine \bars \new Staff \winds >> \new StaffGroup = "brass" << \new MarkLine \bars \new Staff = "trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet" shortInstrumentName = "Tp." } \trumpet \new Staff = "trombone" \with { instrumentName = "Trombone" shortInstrumentName = "Tb." } \trombone >> \new StaffGroup = "strings" \with { instrumentName = "Strings" shortInstrumentName = "Str." } << \new MarkLine \bars \new Staff = "strings" { \strings } >> >> }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Using mark lines in a Frenched score ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Volta sotto gli accordi > ] |
Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar
This snippet shows how to achieve vertically aligned StaffGroups
with a SystemStartBar for each StaffGroup, but without
connecting them.
Note that this only works properly for music that can be printed as a single system.
#(set-global-staff-size 15) \paper { ragged-right = ##f print-all-headers = ##t tagline = ##f } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \StaffGroup \consists Text_mark_engraver \consists Staff_collecting_engraver systemStartDelimiterHierarchy = #'(SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a b)) } \context { \Score \remove Text_mark_engraver \remove Staff_collecting_engraver \override SystemStartBrace.style = #'bar-line \omit SystemStartBar \override SystemStartBrace.padding = #-0.1 \override SystemStartBrace.thickness = #1.6 \override StaffGrouper.staffgroup-staff-spacing.basic-distance = #15 } } %%%% EXAMPLE txt = \lyricmode { Wer4 nur den lie -- ben Gott läßt wal2 -- ten4 und4 hof -- fet auf ihn al -- le Zeit2. } % First StaffGroup "exercise" eI = \relative c' { \textMark \markup { \bold Teacher: This is a simple setting of the choral. Please improve it. } \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceOne \partial 4 e4 a b c b a b gis2 e4\fermata g! g f e a a gis a2.\fermata \bar ":|." } eII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceTwo \partial 4 c4 e e e gis a f e2 b4 b d d c c d d c2. \bar ":|." } eIII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceOne \partial 4 a4 c b a b c d b2 gis4 g g b c a f e e2. } eIV = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceTwo \partial 4 a,4 a' gis a e a, d e2 e,4\fermata e' b g c f d e a,2.\fermata \bar ":|." } exercise = \new StaffGroup = "exercise" << \new Staff << \new Voice \eI \new Voice \eII >> \new Lyrics \txt \new Staff << \new Voice \eIII \new Voice \eIV >> >> % Second StaffGroup "simple Bach" sbI = \relative c' { \textMark \markup { \bold" Pupil:" Here's my version! } \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceOne \partial 4 e4 a b c b a b gis2 e4\fermata g! g f e a a gis a2.\fermata \bar ":|." } sbII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceTwo \partial 4 c8 d e4 e e8 f g4 f f e2 b4 b8 c d4 d e8 d c4 b8 c d4 c2. \bar ":|." } sbIII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceOne \partial 4 a8 b c4 b a b8 c d4 d8 c b2 gis4 g g8 a b4 b a8 g f4 e e2. } sbIV = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceTwo \partial 4 a,4 a' gis a e f8 e d4 e2 e,4\fermata e' b a8 g c4 f8 e d4 e a,2.\fermata \bar ":|." } simpleBach = \new StaffGroup = "simple Bach" << \new Staff << \new Voice \sbI \new Voice \sbII >> \new Lyrics \txt \new Staff << \new Voice \sbIII \new Voice \sbIV >> >> % Third StaffGroup "chromatic Bach" cbI = \relative c' { \textMark \markup { \bold "Teacher:" \column { "Well, you simply copied and transposed a version of J.S.Bach." "Do you know this one?" } } \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceOne \partial 4 e4 a b c b a b gis4. fis8 e4\fermata g! g f e a a8 b gis4 a2.\fermata \bar ":|." } cbII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceTwo \partial 4 c8 d e4 e e8 fis gis4 a8 g! f!4 e2 b4 e e d d8[ cis] d dis e fis e4 e2. \bar ":|." } cbIII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceOne \partial 4 a8 b c[ b] a gis8 a4 d, e8[ e'] d c b4. a8 gis4 b c d8 c b[ a] a b c b b c16 d c2. } cbIV = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceTwo \partial 4 a4 c, e a, b c d e2 e4\fermata e a b8 c gis[ g] fis f e dis e4 a,2.\fermata \bar ":|." } chromaticBach = \new StaffGroup = "chromatic Bach" << \new Staff << \new Voice \cbI \new Voice \cbII >> \new Lyrics \txt \new Staff << \new Voice \cbIII \new Voice \cbIV >> >> % Score \score { << \exercise \simpleBach \chromaticBach >> \header { title = \markup \column { \combine \null \vspace #1 "Exercise: Improve the given choral" " " } } \layout { \context { \Lyrics \override LyricText.X-offset = #-1 } } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Volta brackets in multiple staves > ] |
Volta sotto gli accordi
Aggiungendo l’incisore Volta_engraver al rigo, è possibile
inserire le volte sotto gli accordi.
\score { << \chords { c1 c1 } \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 \alternative { c' } } } >> \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Volta_engraver" } } }
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Editorial annotations >> ] |
| [ < Volta sotto gli accordi ] | [ Up: Staff notation ] | [ Editorial annotations > ] |
Volta brackets in multiple staves
By adding the Volta_engraver to the relevant staff, volte can be
put over staves other than the topmost one in a score.
\repeat and related commands should be present in all staves.
voltaMusic = \relative c'' { \repeat volta 2 { c1 \alternative { \volta 1 { d1 } \volta 2 { e1 } } } } << \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \voltaMusic \new Staff \voltaMusic >> \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } \voltaMusic \new Staff \voltaMusic >> >>
| [ << Staff notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Volta brackets in multiple staves ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding fingerings to a score > ] |
7 Editorial annotations
See also Editorial annotations.
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Editorial annotations ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Adding links to objects > ] |
Adding fingerings to a score
Fingering instructions can be entered using a simple syntax.
\relative c'' { c4-1 d-2 f-4 e-3 }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Adding fingerings to a score ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Adding markups in a tablature > ] |
Adding links to objects
To add a link to a grob stencil you can use add-link as defined
here. It works both with \override and \tweak.
Drawback: point-and-click is disturbed for the linked grobs.
Limitation: Works for PDF only.
The linked objects are colored with a separate command.
#(define (add-link url-strg) (lambda (grob) (let* ((stil (ly:grob-property grob 'stencil))) (if (ly:stencil? stil) (let* ((x-ext (ly:stencil-extent stil X)) (y-ext (ly:stencil-extent stil Y)) (url-expr `(url-link ,url-strg ,x-ext ,y-ext)) (new-stil (ly:stencil-add (ly:make-stencil url-expr x-ext y-ext) stil))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'stencil new-stil)))))) %%%% test %% For easier maintenance of this snippet the URL is formatted to use the %% actually used LilyPond version. %% Of course a literal URL would work as well. #(define major.minor-version (string-join (take (string-split (lilypond-version) #\.) 2) ".")) urlI = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/writing-pitches" major.minor-version) urlII = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/rhythms" major.minor-version) urlIII = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/note-heads" major.minor-version) urlIV = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/beams" major.minor-version) urlV = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/note-head-styles" major.minor-version) urlVI = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/writing-pitches" major.minor-version) \relative c' { \key cis \minor \once \override Staff.Clef.color = #green \once \override Staff.Clef.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlI) \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.color = #green \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlII) \once \override NoteHead.color = #green \once \override NoteHead.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlIII) cis'1 \once \override Beam.color = #green \once \override Beam.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlIV) cis8 dis e fis gis2 <gis, \tweak Accidental.color #green \tweak Accidental.after-line-breaking #(add-link urlVI) \tweak color #green \tweak after-line-breaking #(add-link urlV) \tweak style #'harmonic bis dis fis >1 <cis, cis' e> }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Adding links to objects ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo > ] |
Adding markups in a tablature
By default, markups are not displayed in a tablature.
To make them appear, revert the stencil property of the
TextScript grob in the TabStaff context.
high = { r4 r8 <g c'> q r8 r4 } low = { c4 r4 c8 r8 g,8 b, } pulse = { s8^"1" s^"&" s^"2" s^"&" s^"3" s^"&" s^"4" s^"&" } \score { \new TabStaff { \repeat unfold 2 << \high \\ \low \\ \pulse >> } \layout { \context { \TabStaff \clef moderntab \revert TextScript.stencil \override TextScript.font-series = #'bold \override TextScript.font-size = #-2 \override TextScript.color = #red } \context { \Score proportionalNotationDuration = #1/8 } } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Adding markups in a tablature ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Numeri di battuta alternativi > ] |
Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo
Per impostazione predefinita, le diteggiature orientate verticalmente sono poste fuori dal rigo; questo comportamento tuttavia può essere disabilitato. Occorre fare attenzione alle situazioni in cui le diteggiature e i gambi sono rivolti nella stessa direzione: normalmente le diteggiature evitano soltanto i gambi con travature. Questa impostazione predefinita può essere cambiata in modo da evitare tutti i gambi oppure nessuno. L’esempio seguente mostra queste due opzioni, così come tornare al comportamento predefinito.
\relative c' { <c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2 \override Fingering.staff-padding = #'() <c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>4 g'-0 a8[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = ##f a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = ##t a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = #only-if-beamed a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo > ] |
Numeri di battuta alternativi
Si possono impostare due metodi alternativi di numerazione della battuta, utili specialmente per le ripetizioni.
music = \relative c' { \repeat volta 3 { c4 d e f | \alternative { \volta 1 { c4 d e f | c2 d \break } \volta 2 { f4 g a b | f4 g a b | f2 a | \break } \volta 3 { c4 d e f | c2 d } } } c1 \bar "|." } \markup "default" { \music } \markup \typewriter "numbers" { \set Score.alternativeNumberingStyle = #'numbers \music } \markup \typewriter "numbers-with-letters" { \set Score.alternativeNumberingStyle = #'numbers-with-letters \music }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Numeri di battuta alternativi ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Parentesi analitiche con etichette > ] |
Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo
Delle semplici parentesi analitiche orizzontali vengono aggiunte, per impostazione predefinita, sotto il rigo. L’esempio seguente mostra un modo per posizionarle sopra il rigo.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver" } } \relative c'' { \once \override HorizontalBracket.direction = #UP c2\startGroup d2\stopGroup }
Parentesi analitiche con etichette
Si può aggiungere del testo alle parentesi analitiche tramite la proprietà
text del grob HorizontalBracketText. L’aggiunta di vari frammenti
di testo alle parentesi che iniziano nello stesso momento musicale richiede
l’uso del comando \tweak.
Dopo un’interruzione di linea il testo viene messo tra parentesi.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver" \override HorizontalBracket.direction = #UP } } { \once\override HorizontalBracketText.text = "a" c''\startGroup d''\stopGroup \once\override HorizontalBracketText.text = "a'" e''\startGroup d''\stopGroup | c''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text \markup \bold \huge "b" \startGroup -\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text "a" \startGroup d''\stopGroup e''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text "a'" \startGroup d''\stopGroup\stopGroup | c''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text foo \startGroup d'' e'' f'' | \break g'' a'' b'' c'''\stopGroup }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Parentesi analitiche con etichette ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command > ] |
Applicazione degli stili delle teste di nota in base al grado della scala
La proprietà shapeNoteStyles può essere usata per definire vari
stili di teste di nota per ogni grado della scala (definita dall’armatura
di chiave o dalla proprietà tonic). Questa proprietà richiede un
insieme di simboli, che può essere puramente arbitrario (sono permesse
espressioni geometriche come triangle, cross e xcircle)
o basato sull’antica tradizione tipografica americana (sono consentiti
anche alcuni nomi di nota latini).
Detto questo, per imitare gli antichi canzionieri americani, ci sono vari
stili predefiniti disponibili attraverso dei comodi comandi come
\aikenHeads o \sacredHarpHeads.
Questo esempio mostra modi diversi di ottenere teste di nota di varie forme e illustra la possibilità di trasporre una melodia senza perdere la corrispondenza tra le funzioni armoniche e gli stili delle teste.
fragment = { \key c \major c2 d e2 f g2 a b2 c } \new Staff { \transpose c d \relative c' { \set shapeNoteStyles = ##(do re mi fa #f la ti) \fragment } \break \relative c' { \set shapeNoteStyles = ##(cross triangle fa #f mensural xcircle diamond) \fragment } }
Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command
The \whiteout command underlays a markup with a white box.
Since staff lines are in a lower layer than most other grobs, this
white box will not overlap any other grob.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c' { \override TextScript.extra-offset = #'(2 . 4) c2-\markup { \whiteout \pad-markup #0.5 "middle C" } c }
Changing a single note’s size in a chord
Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
\tweak command inside a chord, by altering the font-size
property.
Inside the chord (within the brackets < >), before the note to
be altered, place the \tweak command, followed by
font-size and define the proper size like #-2 (a tiny
note head).
\relative c' { <\tweak font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak font-size #-2 e>1 ^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Changing a single note’s size in a chord ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Coloring notes depending on their pitch > ] |
Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed
The appearance of slurs may be changed from solid to dotted or dashed.
\relative c' { c4( d e c) \slurDotted c4( d e c) \slurSolid c4( d e c) \slurDashed c4( d e c) \slurSolid c4( d e c) }
Coloring notes depending on their pitch
It is possible to color note heads depending on their pitch and/or their names: the function used in this example even makes it possible to distinguish enharmonics.
% Association list of pitches to colors. #(define color-mapping (list (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 0 NATURAL) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 0 SHARP) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 1 FLAT) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 2 NATURAL) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 2 SHARP) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 3 FLAT) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 3 NATURAL) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 4 SHARP) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 5 NATURAL) (x11-color 'green)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 5 FLAT) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 6 SHARP) (x11-color 'red)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 1 NATURAL) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 3 SHARP) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 4 FLAT) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 5 SHARP) (x11-color 'blue)) (cons (ly:make-pitch 0 6 FLAT) (x11-color 'blue)))) % Compare pitch and alteration (not octave). #(define (pitch-equals? p1 p2) (and (= (ly:pitch-alteration p1) (ly:pitch-alteration p2)) (= (ly:pitch-notename p1) (ly:pitch-notename p2)))) #(define (pitch-to-color pitch) (let ((color (assoc pitch color-mapping pitch-equals?))) (if color (cdr color)))) #(define (color-notehead grob) (pitch-to-color (ly:event-property (event-cause grob) 'pitch))) \score { \new Staff \relative c' { \override NoteHead.color = #color-notehead c8 b d dis ees f g aes } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Coloring notes depending on their pitch ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Creare un gruppetto ritardato > ] |
Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
Il posizionamento dei numeri della diteggiatura può essere regolato in modo preciso. Perché l’orientamento funzioni, occorre usare il costrutto per gli accordi <> anche per le note singole. Si può impostare in modo simile l’orientamento dei numeri di corda e delle diteggiature della mano destra.
\relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1>2 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <e-3>2 \set stringNumberOrientations = #'(up left down) <f\3 a\2 c\1>1 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(down right up) <c\rightHandFinger 1 e\rightHandFinger 2 c'\rightHandFinger 4 > }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Creating blank staves > ] |
Creare un gruppetto ritardato
Creare un gruppetto ritardato, dove la nota più bassa del gruppetto usa
l’alterazione, richiede vari \override. La proprietà
outside-staff-priority deve essere impostata su #f, perché
altrimenti questa avrebbe la precedenza sulla proprietà avoid-slur.
Cambiando la frazione 2/3 si aggiusta la posizione orizzontale.
\relative c'' { \after 2*2/3 \turn c2( d4) r | \after 4 \turn c4.( d8) \after 4 { \once \set suggestAccidentals = ##t \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.outside-staff-priority = ##f \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.avoid-slur = #'inside \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.font-size = -3 \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.script-priority = -1 \once \hideNotes cis8\turn \noBeam } d4.( e8) }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Creare un gruppetto ritardato ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Creating double-digit fingerings > ] |
Creating blank staves
To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
Bar_number_engraver from the Score context, and the
Time_signature_engraver, Clef_engraver and
Bar_engraver from the Staff context.
#(set-global-staff-size 10) % for the documentation % #(set-global-staff-size 20) % for letter and A4 \book { \score { { \repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break } } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Staff \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \remove "Clef_engraver" \remove "Bar_engraver" } \context { \Score \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } } % for the documentation \paper { #(set-paper-size "a6") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 90\mm left-margin = 7.5\mm bottom-margin = 5\mm top-margin = 5\mm tagline = ##f } % uncomment these lines for "letter" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "letter") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 7.5\in left-margin = 0.5\in bottom-margin = 0.25\in top-margin = 0.25\in tagline = ##f } %} % uncomment these lines for "A4" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "a4") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 180\mm left-margin = 15\mm bottom-margin = 10\mm top-margin = 10\mm tagline = ##f } %} }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Creating blank staves ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Direzione predefinita dei gambi sulla linea centrale del rigo > ] |
Creating double-digit fingerings
Creating fingerings larger than 5 is possible.
\relative c' { c1-10 c1-50 c1-36 c1-29 }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Creating double-digit fingerings ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Different font size settings for instrumentName and shortInstrumentName > ] |
Direzione predefinita dei gambi sulla linea centrale del rigo
La direzione predefinita dei gambi sulla linea centrale del rigo si
imposta con la proprietà neutral-direction dell’oggetto Stem.
\relative c'' { a4 b c b \override Stem.neutral-direction = #up a4 b c b \override Stem.neutral-direction = #down a4 b c b }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Direzione predefinita dei gambi sulla linea centrale del rigo ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Drawing boxes around grobs > ] |
Different font size settings for instrumentName and shortInstrumentName
Choose different font sizes for instrumentName and
shortInstrumentName as a context override.
InstrumentNameFontSize = #(define-music-function (font-size-pair) (pair?) "Set the font size of `InstrumentName` grobs. The first value of FONT-SIZE-PAIR sets the font size of the initial `instrumentName` property, the second value sets the font size of `shortInstrumentName`." ;; This code could be changed or extended to set different values ;; for each occurrence of `shortInstrumentName'. #{ \override InstrumentName.after-line-breaking = #(lambda (grob) (let* ((orig (ly:grob-original grob)) (siblings (if (ly:grob? orig) (ly:spanner-broken-into orig) '()))) (when (pair? siblings) (ly:grob-set-property! (car siblings) 'font-size (car font-size-pair)) (for-each (lambda (g) (ly:grob-set-property! g 'font-size (cdr font-size-pair))) (cdr siblings))))) #}) \layout { indent = 3\cm short-indent = 0.8\cm \context { \Staff \InstrumentNameFontSize #'(6 . -3) } } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Flute" shortInstrumentName = "Fl." } { c''1 \break c'' \break c'' } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin" shortInstrumentName = "Vl." } { c''1 \break c'' \break c'' } >>
Drawing boxes around grobs
The stencil property can be overridden to draw a box around
arbitrary grobs, either using \override or \tweak.
\relative c'' { \once \override TextScript.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.3 ly:text-interface::print) c'4^"foo" \tweak Stem.stencil #(make-stencil-boxer 0.05 0.25 ly:stem::print) b8 c4.^"bar" c4 \override Score.RehearsalMark.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.15 0.3 ly:text-interface::print) \mark \default c1 }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Drawing boxes around grobs ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Drawing circles around various objects > ] |
Drawing circles around note heads
A circle can be drawn around a note head by providing a custom Scheme
function to temporarily override the stencil property.
circle = \tweak NoteHead.stencil #(lambda (grob) (let* ((note (ly:note-head::print grob)) (combo-stencil (ly:stencil-add note (circle-stencil note 0.1 0.8)))) (ly:make-stencil (ly:stencil-expr combo-stencil) (ly:stencil-extent note X) (ly:stencil-extent note Y)))) \etc { \circle c'' }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Drawing circles around note heads ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block > ] |
Drawing circles around various objects
The \circle command draws circles around \markup
objects. For other objects, specific tweaks may be required, as
demonstrated for rehearsal marks and measure numbers.
\relative c' { c1 \set Score.rehearsalMarkFormatter = #(lambda (mark context) (make-circle-markup (format-mark-numbers mark context))) \mark \default c2 d^\markup { \override #'(thickness . 3) { \circle foo } } \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #all-visible \override Score.BarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-circler 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Drawing circles around various objects ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Generate special note head shapes > ] |
Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block
PostScript code can be directly inserted inside a \markup
block.
In general it is recommended to use LilyPond’s native graphical markup
commands like \polygon instead, which can be used with all
LilyPond backends.
\relative c'' { a2-\markup \postscript "0 3 moveto 5 2 rlineto stroke" -\markup \postscript "[1 1] 0 setdash 0 0 moveto 5 2 rlineto stroke" b2-\markup \postscript "1 1 moveto 0 0 1 2 8 4 10 2 rcurveto stroke" a'1 }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia > ] |
Generate special note head shapes
When a note head with a special shape cannot easily be generated with
graphic markup, a drawing specification for ly:make-stencil can
be used to generate the shape. This example gives an example for a
parallelogram-shaped note head.
Unfortunately, the available commands in a drawing specification are
currently not
documented; in any case, the used path sub-command has the
following signature, quite similar to the make-path-stencil
Scheme function.
(path thickness command-list line-cap-style line-join-style fill)
The commands in command-list resemble PostScript drawing commands but with arguments after the command name.
parallelogram = #(ly:make-stencil '(path 0.1 (rmoveto 0 0.25 lineto 1.2 0.75 lineto 1.2 -0.25 lineto 0 -0.75 lineto 0 0.25) round round #t) (cons -0.05 1.25) (cons -.75 .75)) myNoteHeads = \override NoteHead.stencil = \parallelogram normalNoteHeads = \revert NoteHead.stencil \relative c'' { \myNoteHeads g4 d' \normalNoteHeads <f, \tweak stencil \parallelogram b e>4 d }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Generate special note head shapes ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization > ] |
Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia
L’aspetto delle linee della griglia può essere modificato sovrascrivendo alcune delle loro proprietà.
\new ChoirStaff << \new Staff { \relative c'' { \stemUp c'4. d8 e8 f g4 } } \new Staff { \relative c { % this moves them up one staff space from the default position \override Score.GridLine.extra-offset = #'(0.0 . 1.0) \stemDown \clef bass \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 5.0 c4 \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 1.0 g'4 \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 3.0 f4 \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 5.0 e4 } } >> \layout { \context { \Staff % set up grids \consists "Grid_point_engraver" % set the grid interval to one quarter note gridInterval = #1/4 } \context { \Score \consists "Grid_line_span_engraver" % this moves them to the right half a staff space \override NoteColumn.X-offset = -0.5 } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Martellato e strappato > ] |
Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization
Regular vertical lines can be drawn between staves to show note synchronization; however, in case of monophonic music, you may want to make the second stave invisible, and make the lines shorter like in this snippet.
\new ChoirStaff { \relative c'' << \new Staff { \time 12/8 \stemUp c4. d8 e8 f g4 f8 e8. d16 c8 } \new Staff { % hides staff and notes so that only the grid lines are visible \hideNotes \hide Staff.BarLine \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-count = #0 \hide Staff.TimeSignature \hide Staff.Clef % dummy notes to force regular note spacing \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #4.0 c8 c c \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #3.0 c8 c c \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #4.0 c8 c c \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #3.0 c8 c c } >> } \layout { \context { \Score \consists "Grid_line_span_engraver" % center grid lines horizontally below note heads \override NoteColumn.X-offset = #-0.5 } \context { \Staff \consists "Grid_point_engraver" gridInterval = #1/8 % set line length and positioning: % two staff spaces above center line on hidden staff % to four spaces below center line on visible staff \override GridPoint.Y-extent = #'(2 . -4) } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Martellato e strappato usando accordi > ] |
Martellato e strappato
Il martellato (hammer on) e lo strappato (pull off) si possono ottenere con le legature di portamento.
\new TabStaff { \relative c' { d4( e\2) a( g) } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Martellato e strappato ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Martellato e strappato usando le voci > ] |
Martellato e strappato usando accordi
Quando il martellato o lo strappato si applicano a delle note in un accordo, viene disegnato
un solo arco. Ma è possibile avere un “doppio arco” impostando la proprietà
doubleSlurs su #t.
\new TabStaff { \relative c' { % chord hammer-on and pull-off \set doubleSlurs = ##t <g' b>8( <a c> <g b>) } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Martellato e strappato usando accordi ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre > ] |
Martellato e strappato usando le voci
L’arco del martellato o dello strappato è rivolto in alto nella prima e terza voce, mentre è rivolto in basso nella seconda e quarta voce.
\new TabStaff { \relative c' { << { \voiceOne g2( a) } \\ { \voiceTwo a,( b) } >> \oneVoice } }
Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre
In ambito didattico può essere utile rendere più spesso una linea del
rigo (per esempio, la linea centrale, o per sottolineare la linea
della chiave di Sol). Per farlo si possono aggiungere altre linee
e posizionarle molto vicino alla linea che deve essere evidenziata,
usando la proprietà line-positions dell’oggetto StaffSymbol.
{ \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'(-4 -2 -0.2 0 0.2 2 4) d'4 e' f' g' }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Measure counters > ] |
Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme)
This example shows how to put crosses on stems. Mark the beginning of a
spoken section with the command \speakOn and end it with
\speakOff.
speakOn = \override Stem.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (let* ((x-parent (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (is-rest? (ly:grob? (ly:grob-object x-parent 'rest)))) (if is-rest? empty-stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:stem::print grob) Y (- (ly:grob-property grob 'direction)) (grob-interpret-markup grob (markup #:center-align #:fontsize -4 #:musicglyph "noteheads.s2cross")) -1.7)))) speakOff = \revert Stem.stencil \new Staff { \relative c'' { a4 b a c \speakOn g4 f r g8 a b4 r r8 d e4 \speakOff c4 a g f } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme) ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Measure spanner > ] |
Measure counters
This snippet demonstrates the use of the
Measure_counter_engraver to number groups of successive
measures. Any stretch of measures may be numbered, whether consisting
of repetitions or not.
The engraver must be added to the appropriate context. Here, a
Staff context is used; another possibility is a Dynamics
context.
The counter is begun with \startMeasureCount and ended with
\stopMeasureCount. Numbering will start by default with 1,
but this behavior may be modified by overriding the count-from
property.
When a measure extends across a line break, the number will appear twice, the second time in parentheses.
\layout { \context { \Staff \consists #Measure_counter_engraver } } \new Staff { \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 7 { c'4 d' e' f' } \stopMeasureCount \bar "||" g'4 f' e' d' \override Staff.MeasureCounter.count-from = #2 \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 5 { g'4 f' e' d' } g'4 f' \bar "" \break e'4 d' \repeat unfold 7 { g'4 f' e' d' } \stopMeasureCount }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Measure counters ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Positioning fingering indications precisely > ] |
Measure spanner
Measure spanners are an alternate way to print annotated brackets. As opposed to horizontal brackets, they extend between two bar lines rather than two notes. The text is displayed in the center of the bracket.
\layout { \context { \Staff \consists Measure_spanner_engraver } } << \new Staff \relative c'' { \key d \minor R1*2 \tweak text "Answer" \startMeasureSpanner \tuplet 3/2 8 { a16[ b c] d[ c b] c[ d e] f[ e d] } e8 a gis g fis f e d~ d c b e \stopMeasureSpanner } \new Staff \relative c' { \key d \minor \tweak text "Subject" \tweak direction #DOWN \startMeasureSpanner \tuplet 3/2 8 { d16[ e f] g[ f e] f[ g a] bes[ a g] } a8 d cis c b bes a g~ g f e a \stopMeasureSpanner \tweak text "Counter-subject" \tweak direction #DOWN \startMeasureSpanner f8 e a r r16 b, c d e fis g e a gis a b c fis, b a gis e a4 g8 \stopMeasureSpanner } >>
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Measure spanner ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento > ] |
Positioning fingering indications precisely
The semi-automatic positioning of fingering within a chords works usally well, but if one of the indications needs to be positioned more precisely the following tweak may be used. This is particularly useful for correcting the positioning when intervals of a second are involved.
\markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 d-2 a'-5>4 <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 0.2)-2 a'-5> \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 d-2 a'-5> <c-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . -1.1)-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-1.2 . -1.8)-2 a'-5> | \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-0.3 . 0)-2 a'-5>4 <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-1 . 1.2)-2 a'-5> \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 1.1)-2 a'-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 1)-5> <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-1.2 . 1.5)-2 a'-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 1.4)-5> | } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Positioning fingering indications precisely ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Printing text from right to left > ] |
Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento
I testi a margine devono avere la proprietà outside-staff-priority
impostata su false per poter apparire dentro le legature di portamento.
\relative c'' { \override TextScript.avoid-slur = #'inside \override TextScript.outside-staff-priority = ##f c2(^\markup { \halign #-10 \natural } d4.) c8 }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ String number extender lines > ] |
Printing text from right to left
It is possible to print text from right to left in a markup object, as demonstrated here.
{ b1^\markup { \line { i n g i r u m i m u s n o c t e } } f'_\markup { \override #'(text-direction . -1) \line { i n g i r u m i m u s n o c t e } } }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < Printing text from right to left ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Uso della proprietà whiteout > ] |
String number extender lines
Make an extender line for string number indications, showing that a series of notes is supposed to be played all on the same string.
stringNumberSpanner = #(define-music-function (StringNumber) (string?) #{ \override TextSpanner.style = #'solid \override TextSpanner.font-size = #-5 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \circle \number $StringNumber } #}) \relative c { \clef "treble_8" \textSpannerDown \stringNumberSpanner "5" a8\startTextSpan b c d e f\stopTextSpan \stringNumberSpanner "4" g\startTextSpan a | bes4 a g2\stopTextSpan }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Text >> ] |
| [ < String number extender lines ] | [ Up: Editorial annotations ] | [ Text > ] |
Uso della proprietà whiteout
Qualsiasi oggetto grafico può essere posizionato sopra uno sfondo
bianco per mascherare parti degli oggetti che si trovano sotto.
Ciò può essere utile per migliorare l’aspetto delle collisioni in
situazioni complesse in cui il riposizionamento degli oggetti è
troppo difficile. Bisogna impostare esplicitamente la proprietà
layer (livello) per controllare quali oggetti debbano essere
mascherati dallo sfondo bianco.
In questo esempio la collisione della legatura di valore con l’indicazione
di tempo viene migliorata mascherando la parte della legatura che incrocia
l’indicazione di tempo impostando la proprietà whiteout di
TimeSignature. Per farlo si sposta TimeSignature su un
livello superiore a Tie, che viene lasciato al livello predefinito 1;
e StaffSymbol viene spostato su un livello superiore a TimeSignature
in modo che non venga mascherato.
{ \override Score.StaffSymbol.layer = 4 \override Staff.TimeSignature.layer = 3 b'2 b'~ \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.whiteout = ##t \time 3/4 b' r4 }
| [ << Editorial annotations ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Uso della proprietà whiteout ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding markups in a tablature > ] |
8 Text
See also Text.
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Text ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Adding the current date to a score > ] |
Adding markups in a tablature
By default, markups are not displayed in a tablature.
To make them appear, revert the stencil property of the
TextScript grob in the TabStaff context.
high = { r4 r8 <g c'> q r8 r4 } low = { c4 r4 c8 r8 g,8 b, } pulse = { s8^"1" s^"&" s^"2" s^"&" s^"3" s^"&" s^"4" s^"&" } \score { \new TabStaff { \repeat unfold 2 << \high \\ \low \\ \pulse >> } \layout { \context { \TabStaff \clef moderntab \revert TextScript.stencil \override TextScript.font-series = #'bold \override TextScript.font-size = #-2 \override TextScript.color = #red } \context { \Score proportionalNotationDuration = #1/8 } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Adding markups in a tablature ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics > ] |
Adding the current date to a score
With a little Scheme code, the current date can easily be added to a score.
\paper { tagline = ##f } % first, define a variable to hold the formatted date: date = #(strftime "%d-%m-%Y" (localtime (current-time))) % use it in the title block: \header { title = "Including the date!" subtitle = \date } \score { \relative c'' { c4 c c c } } % and use it in a \markup block: \markup { \date }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Adding the current date to a score ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Aligning and centering instrument names > ] |
Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
% Default layout: << \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } \new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } % Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics: \new Lyrics \with { \override VerticalAxisGroup.nonstaff-relatedstaff-spacing = #'((basic-distance . 1)) } \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } >>
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Aligning syllables with melisma > ] |
Aligning and centering instrument names
The horizontal alignment of instrument names is tweaked by changing the
self-alignment-X property of the InstrumentName grob
(usually in the Staff context). The \layout variables
indent and short-indent define the space in which the
instrument names are aligned before the first and the following
systems, respectively.
\paper { left-margin = 3\cm } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #LEFT instrumentName = \markup \left-column { "Left aligned" "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Left" } { c''1 \break c''1 } \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #CENTER instrumentName = \markup \center-column { Centered "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Centered" } { g'1 g'1 } \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #RIGHT instrumentName = \markup \right-column { "Right aligned" "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Right" } { e'1 e'1 } >> \layout { indent = 4\cm short-indent = 2\cm line-width = 6.5\cm }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Aligning and centering instrument names ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Aligning text marks to notes > ] |
Aligning syllables with melisma
By default, lyrics syllables that start a melisma are left-aligned on
their note. The alignment can be altered using the
lyricMelismaAlignment property.
<< \new Staff { \new Voice = "vocal" \relative c'' { \override TextScript.staff-padding = #2 c d~^\markup default d e c d~^\markup "right aligned" d e c d~^\markup "center aligned" d e c d~^\markup "reset to default" d e } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "vocal" { word word word \set lyricMelismaAlignment = #RIGHT word word word \set lyricMelismaAlignment = #CENTER word word word \unset lyricMelismaAlignment word word word } >> \layout { ragged-right = ##f }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Aligning syllables with melisma ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command > ] |
Aligning text marks to notes
By default, TextMark objects are aligned to so-called
NonMusicalPaperColumn grobs, like the left edge of the staff or
a bar line. They can be aligned to a note instead by setting the
non-musical property to #f.
\layout { line-length = 80\mm } { \textMark "mark a" c'1 | \textMark "mark b" c'1 | \break \override Score.TextMark.non-musical = ##f \textMark "mark c" c'1 | \textMark "mark d" c'1 | }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Aligning text marks to notes ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Center text below hairpin dynamics > ] |
Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command
The \whiteout command underlays a markup with a white box.
Since staff lines are in a lower layer than most other grobs, this
white box will not overlap any other grob.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c' { \override TextScript.extra-offset = #'(2 . 4) c2-\markup { \whiteout \pad-markup #0.5 "middle C" } c }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Changing ottava text > ] |
Center text below hairpin dynamics
This example provides a function to typeset a hairpin (de)crescendo
with some additional text below it, such as “molto” or “poco”. The
added text will change the direction according to the direction of the
hairpin. The Hairpin is aligned to a DynamicText grob.
The example also illustrates how to modify the way an object is normally printed, using some Scheme code.
hairpinWithCenteredText = #(define-music-function (text) (markup?) #{ \once \override Voice.Hairpin.after-line-breaking = #(lambda (grob) (let* ((stencil (ly:hairpin::print grob)) (par-y (ly:grob-parent grob Y)) (dir (ly:grob-property par-y 'direction)) (staff-line-thickness (ly:output-def-lookup (ly:grob-layout grob) 'line-thickness)) (new-stencil (ly:stencil-aligned-to (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:stencil-aligned-to stencil X CENTER) Y dir (ly:stencil-aligned-to (grob-interpret-markup grob (make-fontsize-markup (magnification->font-size (+ (ly:staff-symbol-staff-space grob) (/ staff-line-thickness 2))) text)) X CENTER)) X LEFT)) (staff-space (ly:output-def-lookup (ly:grob-layout grob) 'staff-space)) (par-x (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (dyn-text (grob::has-interface par-x 'dynamic-text-interface)) (dyn-text-stencil-x-length (if dyn-text (interval-length (ly:stencil-extent (ly:grob-property par-x 'stencil) X)) 0)) (x-shift (if dyn-text (- (+ staff-space dyn-text-stencil-x-length) (* 0.5 staff-line-thickness)) 0))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'Y-offset 0) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'stencil (ly:stencil-translate-axis new-stencil x-shift X)))) #}) hairpinMolto = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \italic molto } hairpinMore = \hairpinWithCenteredText \markup { \larger moltissimo } \relative c' { \hairpinMolto c2\< c\f \hairpinMore c2\ppppp\< c\f \break \hairpinMolto c2^\< c\f \hairpinMore c2\ppppp\< c\f }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Center text below hairpin dynamics ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Changing the default text font family > ] |
Changing ottava text
Internally, \ottava sets the properties ottavation (for
example, to 8va or 8vb) and middleCPosition. To
override the text of the bracket, set ottavation after invoking
\ottava.
Short text is especially useful when a brief ottava is used.
{ c'2 \ottava 1 \set Staff.ottavation = "8" c''2 \ottava 0 c'1 \ottava 1 \set Staff.ottavation = "Text" c''1 }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Changing ottava text ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Combining dynamics with markup texts > ] |
Changing the default text font family
The default font families for text can be overridden.
%{ You may have to install additional fonts. Red Hat Fedora dejavu-fonts-all Debian GNU/Linux, Ubuntu fonts-dejavu-core fonts-dejavu-extra %} \paper { %{ run lilypond -dshow-available-fonts to show all fonts available in the process log. %} property-defaults.fonts.serif = "DejaVu Serif" property-defaults.fonts.sans = "DejaVu Sans" property-defaults.fonts.typewriter = "DejaVu Sans Mono" } { g'''4^\markup { DejaVu Serif: \bold bold \italic italic \italic \bold { bold italic } } g4_\markup { \override #'(font-family . sans) { DejaVu Sans: \bold bold \italic italic \italic \bold { bold italic } } } g''2^\markup { \override #'(font-family . typewriter) { DejaVu Sans Mono: \bold bold \italic italic \italic \bold { bold italic } } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Changing the default text font family ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Combining dynamics with markup texts (2) > ] |
Combining dynamics with markup texts
Some dynamics may involve text indications (such as “più f” or
“p subito”). These can be produced using a \markup
block; the resulting object behaves like a TextScript grob.
See also “Combining dynamics with markup texts (2)”.
piuF = \markup { \italic più \dynamic f } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \relative c'' { c2\f c-\piuF } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Combining dynamics with markup texts ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo > ] |
Combining dynamics with markup texts (2)
Some dynamics may involve text indications (such as “più f” or
“p subito”). These can be produced using the
make-dynamic-script Scheme function; the resulting object
behaves like a DynamicText grob.
See also “Combining dynamics with markup texts”.
piuF = #(make-dynamic-script #{ \markup { \normal-text \italic più \dynamic f } #}) \score { \relative c'' { c2\f c\piuF } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Combining dynamics with markup texts (2) ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics > ] |
Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo
Lo strumento di unione delle parti (il comando \partCombine) permette
di combinare varie parti sullo stesso rigo. Indicazioni testuali come
“solo” e “a2” sono aggiunte automaticamente; per toglierele basta
impostare la proprietà printPartCombineTexts su f.
Per le partiture vocali (inni), non c’è bisogno di aggiungere i testi
“solo/a2”, quindi dovrebbero essere disattivati. Tuttavia potrebbe
convenire non usarlo se c’è una qualche parte solista, perché non
verrebbe indicata. In tali casi è preferibile usare la notazione
polifonica normale.
Questo frammento illustra i tre modi con cui due parti possono essere stampate
su uno stesso rigo: normale polifonia, \partCombine senza testo e
\partCombine con testo.
musicUp = \relative c'' { \time 4/4 a4 c4.( g8) a4 | g4 e' g,( a8 b) | c b a2. } musicDown = \relative c'' { g4 e4.( d8) c4 | r2 g'4( f8 e) | d2 \stemDown a } \score { << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "standard polyphony" } << \musicUp \\ \musicDown >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = \markup { \typewriter "\\partCombine" without text} printPartCombineTexts = ##f } \partCombine \musicUp \musicDown \new Staff \with { instrumentName = \markup { \typewriter "\\partCombine" with text} } \partCombine \musicUp \musicDown >> \layout { indent = 6.0\cm \context { \Score % Setting this to a large value avoids a bar line at the % beginning that would connect the three staves otherwise. \override SystemStartBar.collapse-height = 30 } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Creating text spanners > ] |
Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics
Although the easiest way to add parentheses to a dynamic mark is to use
a \markup block, this method has a downside: the created
objects behave like text markups and not like dynamics.
However, it is possible to create a similar object using the equivalent
Scheme code (as described in the Notation Reference), combined with the
make-dynamic-script function. This way, the markup is regarded
as a dynamic and therefore remains compatible with commands such as
\dynamicUp or \dynamicDown.
paren = #(define-event-function (dyn) (ly:event?) (make-dynamic-script #{ \markup \concat { \normal-text \italic \fontsize #2 ( \pad-x #0.2 #(ly:music-property dyn 'text) \normal-text \italic \fontsize #2 ) } #})) \relative c'' { c4\paren\f c c \dynamicUp c\paren\p }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Demonstrating all \header fields > ] |
Creating text spanners
The \startTextSpan and \stopTextSpan commands allow the
creation of text spanners as easily as pedal indications or
octavations. Override some properties of the TextSpanner object
to modify its output.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = #"bla" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = #"blu" a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.style = #'line \once \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) } \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . -2) } \once \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.padding = #-2 a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.dash-period = #10 \override TextSpanner.dash-fraction = #0.5 \override TextSpanner.thickness = #10 a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Creating text spanners ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block > ] |
Demonstrating all \header fields
A demonstration of all header fields that LilyPond defines by default.
Thanks to setting print-all-headers to #t, much more
fields as usual are displayed, indicating the hiearchy of
\header blocks.
\paper { #(set-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) print-all-headers = ##t } \book { \header { title = "title" subtitle = "subtitle" composer = "composer" arranger = "arranger" instrument = "instrument" meter = "meter" opus = "opus" piece = "piece" poet = "poet" copyright = "copyright" tagline = "tagline" } \bookpart { \score { \relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c } \header { title = "localtitle" subtitle = "localsubtitle" composer = "localcomposer" arranger = "localarranger" instrument = "localinstrument" meter = "localmeter" opus = "localopus" piece = "localpiece" poet = "localpoet" copyright = "localcopyright" tagline = "localtagline" } } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Demonstrating all \header fields ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale > ] |
Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block
PostScript code can be directly inserted inside a \markup
block.
In general it is recommended to use LilyPond’s native graphical markup
commands like \polygon instead, which can be used with all
LilyPond backends.
\relative c'' { a2-\markup \postscript "0 3 moveto 5 2 rlineto stroke" -\markup \postscript "[1 1] 0 setdash 0 0 moveto 5 2 rlineto stroke" b2-\markup \postscript "1 1 moveto 0 0 1 2 8 4 10 2 rcurveto stroke" a'1 }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ How to put ties between syllables in lyrics > ] |
Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale
La modalità markup può essere usata per formattare le singole sillabe del testo vocale.
mel = \relative c'' { c4 c c c c1 } lyr = \lyricmode { Your lyrics \markup { \italic can } \markup { \with-color #red contain } \markup { \fontsize #8 \bold Markup! } } << \new Voice = "melody" \mel \new Lyrics \lyricsto "melody" \lyr >>
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Allineamento del testo vocale > ] |
How to put ties between syllables in lyrics
This can be achieved by separating those syllables by tildes.
\lyrics { wa~o~a }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < How to put ties between syllables in lyrics ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Markup list > ] |
Allineamento del testo vocale
L’allineamento orizzontale del testo vocale si imposta attraverso la
proprietà self-alignment-X dell’oggetto LyricText.
#-1 è sinistra, #0 è centro e #1 è destra;
si possono usare anche #LEFT, #CENTER e #RIGHT.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { c1 c c c } \addlyrics { \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #LEFT "left-aligned" \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #CENTER "centered" \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = 1 "right-aligned" \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #-1.5 "very right" }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Allineamento del testo vocale ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Testo a margine delle pause multiple > ] |
Markup list
Text that can spread over pages is entered with the \markuplist
command. The \paragraph markup command defined in the snippet
indents its argument before calling \justified-lines.
#(set-default-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) \paper { line-width = 11\cm tagline = ##f } #(define-markup-list-command (paragraph layout props args) (markup-list?) (interpret-markup-list layout props (make-justified-lines-markup-list (cons (make-hspace-markup 2) args)))) \book { % for correct rendering in the PDF documentation % Candide, Voltaire \markuplist { \override-lines #'(baseline-skip . 2.5) { \paragraph { Il y avait en Westphalie, dans le château de M. le baron de Thunder-ten-tronckh, un jeune garçon à qui la nature avait donné les mœurs les plus douces. Sa physionomie annonçait son âme. Il avait le jugement assez droit, avec l'esprit le plus \concat { simple \hspace #.3 ; } c'est, je crois, pour cette raison qu'on le nommait Candide. Les anciens domestiques de la maison soupçonnaient qu'il était fils de la sœur de monsieur le baron et d'un bon et honnête gentilhomme du voisinage, que cette demoiselle ne voulut jamais épouser parce qu'il n'avait pu prouver que soixante et onze quartiers, et que le reste de son arbre généalogique avait été perdu par l'injure du temps. } \vspace #.3 \paragraph { Monsieur le baron était un des plus puissants seigneurs de la Westphalie, car son château avait une porte et des fenêtres. Sa grande salle même était ornée d'une tapisserie. Tous les chiens de ses basses-cours composaient une meute dans le \concat { besoin \hspace #.3 ; } ses palefreniers étaient ses \concat { piqueurs \hspace #.3 ; } le vicaire du village était son grand-aumônier. Ils l'appelaient tous monseigneur, et ils riaient quand il faisait des contes. } } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Markup list ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Of the ubiquity of markup objects > ] |
Testo a margine delle pause multiple
Il testo a margine di una pausa multipla viene centrato sopra o sotto di essa. Se il testo è lungo, la misura non si espanderà. Per espandere la pausa multipla in modo che si allinei col testo, conviene usare un accordo vuoto con del testo attaccato prima della pausa multipla.
Il testo così attaccato a una nota spaziatrice viene allineato a sinistra della posizione in cui la nota sarebbe posta nella misura, ma se la lunghezza della misura è determinata dalla lunghezza del testo, il testo verrà centrato.
\relative c' { \compressMMRests { \textLengthOn <>^\markup { [MAJOR GENERAL] } R1*19 <>_\markup { \italic { Cue: ... it is yours } } <>^\markup { A } R1*30^\markup { [MABEL] } \textLengthOff c4^\markup { CHORUS } d f c } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Testo a margine delle pause multiple ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Outputting the version number > ] |
Of the ubiquity of markup objects
Text objects are entered either as simple strings between double quotes
or as \markup blocks that can accept a variety of advanced text
formatting and graphical enhancements.
As such, markup blocks may be used:
- in any
TextScriptobject (attached to notes with-,^or_), - any
TextMarkintroduced with the\textMarkkeyword, or\textEndMarkcommand, or other similar objects such as MetronomeMark introduced with\tempo, - as standalone markup blocks, entered at the top level outside of any
\scoreblock, - in any definition inside the
\headerblock (e.g. title, subtitle, composer) or in some variables defined inside the\paperblock such asevenHeaderMarkupfor page numbers.
\markup may additionally be used for lyrics, in chord names,
and as dynamics. In fact, it is possible to use \markup to
customize the appearance of virtually any object, as demonstrated in
this example using various methods.
%% Thanks to Aaron Hill https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/lilypond-user/2019-01/msg00437.html \paper { paper-width = 8\cm paper-height = 8\cm } \header { title = \markup "Header" tagline = \markup "(tagline)" } \markup "Top-level markup" dyn = #(make-dynamic-script #{ \markup \serif "DynamicText" #}) \score { << \new ChordNames \with { majorSevenSymbol = \markup "majorSevenSymbol" } \chordmode { c1:maj7 } \new Staff { \tempo \markup "MetronomeMark" \textMark "TextMark" \once \override TupletNumber.text = \markup "TupletNumber" \tuplet 3/2 { \once \override NoteHead.stencil = #ly:text-interface::print \once \override NoteHead.text = \markup \lower #0.5 "NoteHead" c''8^\markup "TextScript" \once \override Rest.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup "Rest" #})) r4 } } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \markup "LyricText" 1 } \new Dynamics { s1\dyn } >> }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Of the ubiquity of markup objects ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro > ] |
Outputting the version number
It is possible to print the version number of LilyPond in markup.
\markup { Processed with LilyPond version #(lilypond-version) }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Outputting the version number ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo > ] |
Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro
Invece di destinare un rigo a parte alla linea melodica e al suo testo, è possibile collocare il testo al centro di un doppio pentagramma per pianoforte.
upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } \score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = upper { \new Voice = "singer" \upper } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "singer" \text \new Staff = lower { \lower } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Printing text from right to left > ] |
Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo
Sebbene le indicazioni testuali siano di norma collocate solo sopra il rigo più alto, è possibile farle apparire su ogni rigo.
\score { << \new Staff { \mark \default c''1 \textMark "molto" c'' } \new Staff { \mark \default c'1 \textMark "molto" c' } >> \layout { \context { \Score \remove Mark_engraver \remove Text_mark_engraver \remove Staff_collecting_engraver } \context { \Staff \consists Mark_engraver \consists Text_mark_engraver \consists Staff_collecting_engraver } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Putting lyrics inside the staff > ] |
Printing text from right to left
It is possible to print text from right to left in a markup object, as demonstrated here.
{ b1^\markup { \line { i n g i r u m i m u s n o c t e } } f'_\markup { \override #'(text-direction . -1) \line { i n g i r u m i m u s n o c t e } } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Printing text from right to left ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Testo separato su due colonne > ] |
Putting lyrics inside the staff
Lyrics can be moved vertically to place them inside the staff. The
lyrics are moved with
\override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . dy), and
there are similar commands to move the extenders and hyphens. A good
value for dy must be found by trial and error.
<< \new Staff << \new Voice = "voc" \relative c' { \stemDown a bes c8 b c4 } >> \new Lyrics \with { \override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) \override LyricExtender.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) \override LyricHyphen.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) } \lyricsto "voc" { La la -- la __ _ la } >>
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Putting lyrics inside the staff ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ String number extender lines > ] |
Testo separato su due colonne
Il testo separato può essere disposto su varie colonne con i comandi di
\markup:
\markup { \fill-line { \hspace #1 \column { \line { O sacrum convivium } \line { in quo Christus sumitur, } \line { recolitur memoria passionis ejus, } \line { mens impletur gratia, } \line { futurae gloriae nobis pignus datur. } \line { Amen. } } \hspace #2 \column \italic { \line { O sacred feast } \line { in which Christ is received, } \line { the memory of His Passion is renewed, } \line { the mind is filled with grace, } \line { and a pledge of future glory is given to us. } \line { Amen. } } \hspace #1 } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Testo separato su due colonne ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Three-sided box > ] |
String number extender lines
Make an extender line for string number indications, showing that a series of notes is supposed to be played all on the same string.
stringNumberSpanner = #(define-music-function (StringNumber) (string?) #{ \override TextSpanner.style = #'solid \override TextSpanner.font-size = #-5 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \circle \number $StringNumber } #}) \relative c { \clef "treble_8" \textSpannerDown \stringNumberSpanner "5" a8\startTextSpan b c d e f\stopTextSpan \stringNumberSpanner "4" g\startTextSpan a | bes4 a g2\stopTextSpan }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < String number extender lines ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ UTF-8 > ] |
Three-sided box
This example shows how to add a markup command to get a three-sided box around some text (or other markup).
% New command to add a three-sided box, with sides north, west, and south. % Based on the `box-stencil` command defined in `scm/stencil.scm`. % Note that ";;" is used to comment a line in Scheme. #(define-public (NWS-box-stencil stencil thickness padding) "Add a box around STENCIL, producing a new stencil." (let* ((x-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil X) padding)) (y-ext (interval-widen (ly:stencil-extent stencil Y) padding)) (y-rule (make-filled-box-stencil (cons 0 thickness) y-ext)) (x-rule (make-filled-box-stencil (interval-widen x-ext thickness) (cons 0 thickness)))) ;; (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X 1 y-rule padding)) (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil X LEFT y-rule padding)) (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y UP x-rule 0.0)) (set! stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge stencil Y DOWN x-rule 0.0)) stencil)) % The corresponding markup command, based on the `\box` command defined % in `scm/define-markup-commands.scm`. #(define-markup-command (NWS-box layout props arg) (markup?) #:properties ((thickness 0.1) (font-size 0) (box-padding 0.2)) "Draw a box round ARG. Look at THICKNESS, BOX-PADDING, and FONT-SIZE properties to determine line thickness and padding around the markup." (let ((pad (* (magstep font-size) box-padding)) (m (interpret-markup layout props arg))) (NWS-box-stencil m thickness pad))) \relative c' { c1^\markup { \NWS-box ABCD } c1^\markup { \NWS-box \note {4} #1.0 } }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Three-sided box ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi > ] |
UTF-8
Various scripts may be used for texts (like titles and lyrics) by entering them in UTF-8 encoding, and using a Pango based backend. Depending on the fonts installed, this fragment will render Bulgarian (Cyrillic), Hebrew, Japanese and Portuguese.
%{ You may have to install additional fonts. Red Hat Fedora linux-libertine-fonts (Latin, Cyrillic, Hebrew) google-noto-serif-jp-fonts (Japanese) Debian GNU/Linux, Ubuntu fonts-linuxlibertine (Latin, Cyrillic, Hebrew) fonts-noto-cjk (Japanese) %} % 'Linux Libertine' fonts also contain Cyrillic and Hebrew glyphs. \paper { property-defaults.fonts.serif = "Linux Libertine O, Noto Serif CJK JP, Noto Serif JP" } bulgarian = \lyricmode { Жълтата дюля беше щастлива, че пухът, който цъфна, замръзна като гьон. } hebrew = \lyricmode { זה כיף סתם לשמוע איך תנצח קרפד עץ טוב בגן. } japanese = \lyricmode { いろはにほへど ちりぬるを わがよたれぞ つねならむ うゐのおくや まけふこえて あさきゆめみじ ゑひもせず } % "a nice song for you" portuguese = \lyricmode { à vo -- cê uma can -- ção le -- gal } \relative c' { c2 d e2 f g2 f e2 d } \addlyrics { \bulgarian } \addlyrics { \hebrew } \addlyrics { \japanese } \addlyrics { \portuguese }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < UTF-8 ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Volta text markup using repeatCommands > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi
Questo modello è fondamentalmente analogo al semplice modello “Complesso vocale”,
con l’unica differenza che qui tutti i versi del testo sono posizionati
usando alignAboveContext e alignBelowContext.
global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative c'' { c4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative c' { e4 f d e } altoWords = \lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative c' { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative c { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = "women" } \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = "women" } \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords % we could remove the line about this with the line below, since % we want the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway. % \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = "men" } \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = "men" } \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords % again, we could replace the line above this with the line below. % \new Lyrics \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Vocal music >> ] |
| [ < Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi ] | [ Up: Text ] | [ Vocal music > ] |
Volta text markup using repeatCommands
Though volte are best specified using \repeat volta, the
context property repeatCommands must be used in cases where the
volta text needs more advanced formatting with \markup.
Since repeatCommands takes a list, the simplest method of
including markup is to use an identifier for the text and embed it in
the command list using the Scheme syntax
#(list (list 'volta textIdentifier)). Start- and end-repeat
commands can be added as separate list elements:
voltaAdLib = \markup { \volta-number { 1. 2. 3... } \italic { ad lib. } } \relative c'' { c1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #(list (list 'volta voltaAdLib) 'start-repeat) c4 b d e \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f) (volta "4.") end-repeat) f1 \set Score.repeatCommands = #'((volta #f)) }
| [ << Text ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Volta text markup using repeatCommands ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Un ambitus per voce > ] |
9 Vocal music
See also Vocal music.
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Vocal music ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break > ] |
Un ambitus per voce
L’ambitus può essere specificato per voce. In tal caso occorre spostarlo manualmente per evitare collisioni.
\new Staff << \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c'' { \override Ambitus.X-offset = 2.0 \voiceOne c4 a d e f1 } \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c' { \voiceTwo es4 f g as b1 } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Un ambitus per voce ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale > ] |
Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break
This snippet defines the commands \splitStaffBarLine,
\convUpStaffBarLine, and \convDownStaffBarLine. These
add arrows at a bar line to denote that several voices sharing a staff
will each continue on a staff of their own in the next system, or that
voices split in this way recombine.
Note that the implementation in this snippet draws dimensionless arrows into the right margin. For normal printing, this doesn’t cause problems. However, it is necessary to increase the bounding box horizontally if you render the code as an image to avoid cropping, as demonstrated below.
#(define-markup-command (arrow-at-angle layout props angle-deg length fill) (number? number? boolean?) (let* ((PI-OVER-180 (/ (atan 1 1) 34)) (degrees->radians (lambda (degrees) (* degrees PI-OVER-180))) (angle-rad (degrees->radians angle-deg)) (target-x (* length (cos angle-rad))) (target-y (* length (sin angle-rad)))) (interpret-markup layout props (markup #:translate (cons (/ target-x 2) (/ target-y 2)) #:rotate angle-deg #:translate (cons (/ length -2) 0) #:concat (#:draw-line (cons length 0) #:arrow-head X RIGHT fill))))) splitStaffBarLineMarkup = \markup \with-dimensions #'(0 . 0) #'(0 . 0) { \combine \arrow-at-angle #45 #(sqrt 8) ##t \arrow-at-angle #-45 #(sqrt 8) ##t } splitStaffBarLine = { \once \override Staff.BarLine.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:bar-line::print grob) X RIGHT (grob-interpret-markup grob splitStaffBarLineMarkup) 0)) \break } convDownStaffBarLine = { \once \override Staff.BarLine.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:bar-line::print grob) X RIGHT (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\with-dimensions #'(0 . 0) #'(0 . 0) { \translate #'(0 . -.13)\arrow-at-angle #-45 #(sqrt 8) ##t }#}) 0)) \break } convUpStaffBarLine = { \once \override Staff.BarLine.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:bar-line::print grob) X RIGHT (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\with-dimensions #'(0 . 0) #'(0 . 0) { \translate #'(0 . .14)\arrow-at-angle #45 #(sqrt 8) ##t }#}) 0)) \break } \paper { indent = 10\mm short-indent = 10\mm line-width = 8\cm } separateSopranos = { \set Staff.instrumentName = "AI AII" \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = "AI AII" \splitStaffBarLine \change Staff = "up" } convSopranos = { \convDownStaffBarLine \change Staff = "shared" \set Staff.instrumentName = "S A" \set Staff.shortInstrumentName = "S A" } sI = { \voiceOne \repeat unfold 4 f''2 \separateSopranos \repeat unfold 4 g''2 \convSopranos \repeat unfold 4 c''2 } sII = { s1*2 \voiceTwo \change Staff = "up" \repeat unfold 4 d''2 } aI = { \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 a'2 \voiceOne \repeat unfold 4 b'2 \convUpStaffBarLine \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 g'2 } aII = { s1*2 \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 g'2 } ten = { \voiceOne \repeat unfold 4 c'2 \repeat unfold 4 d'2 \repeat unfold 4 c'2 } bas = { \voiceTwo \repeat unfold 4 f2 \repeat unfold 4 g2 \repeat unfold 4 c2 } \markup \pad-x #3 % avoid cropping \score { << \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff = up \with { instrumentName = "SI SII" shortInstrumentName = "SI SII" } { s1*4 } \new Staff = shared \with { instrumentName = "S A" shortInstrumentName = "S A" } << \new Voice = sopI \sI \new Voice = sopII \sII \new Voice = altI \aI \new Voice = altII \aII >> \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = up } \lyricsto sopII { e f g h } \new Lyrics \lyricsto altI { a b c d e f g h i j k l } \new Staff = men \with { instrumentName = "T B" shortInstrumentName = "T B" } << \clef F \new Voice = ten \ten \new Voice = bas \bas >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto bas { a b c d e f g h i j k l } >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics > ] |
Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale
L’esempio seguente mostra un approccio per simplificare l’aggiunta di
citazioni orchestrali a una riduzione per pianoforte di una partitura
vocale. La funzione musicale \cueWhile prende quattro argomenti:
la musica da cui prendere la citazione, come è definita da \addQuote,
il nome da inserire prima delle notine, poi o #UP o #DOWN per
specificare o \voiceOne col nome sopra il rigo o \voiceTwo
col nome sotto il rigo, e infine la musica per pianoforte che deve apparire
in parallelo alle notine. Il nome dello strumento citato è posto a sinistra
delle notine. Molti passaggi possono essere citati, ma non possono
sovrapporsi l’un l’altro nel tempo.
cueWhile = #(define-music-function (instrument name dir music) (string? string? ly:dir? ly:music?) #{ \cueDuring $instrument #dir { \once \override TextScript.self-alignment-X = #RIGHT \once \override TextScript.direction = $dir <>-\markup { \tiny #name } $music } #}) flute = \relative c'' { \transposition c' s4 s4 e g } \addQuote "flute" { \flute } clarinet = \relative c' { \transposition bes fis4 d d c } \addQuote "clarinet" { \clarinet } singer = \relative c'' { c4. g8 g4 bes4 } words = \lyricmode { here's the lyr -- ics } pianoRH = \relative c'' { \transposition c' \cueWhile "clarinet" "Clar." #DOWN { c4. g8 } \cueWhile "flute" "Flute" #UP { g4 bes4 } } pianoLH = \relative c { c4 <c' e> e, <g c> } \score { << \new Staff { \new Voice = "singer" { \singer } } \new Lyrics { \lyricsto "singer" \words } \new PianoStaff << \new Staff { \new Voice { \pianoRH } } \new Staff { \clef "bass" \pianoLH } >> >> }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Aligning syllables with melisma > ] |
Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
% Default layout: << \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } \new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } % Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics: \new Lyrics \with { \override VerticalAxisGroup.nonstaff-relatedstaff-spacing = #'((basic-distance . 1)) } \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Ambitus > ] |
Aligning syllables with melisma
By default, lyrics syllables that start a melisma are left-aligned on
their note. The alignment can be altered using the
lyricMelismaAlignment property.
<< \new Staff { \new Voice = "vocal" \relative c'' { \override TextScript.staff-padding = #2 c d~^\markup default d e c d~^\markup "right aligned" d e c d~^\markup "center aligned" d e c d~^\markup "reset to default" d e } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "vocal" { word word word \set lyricMelismaAlignment = #RIGHT word word word \set lyricMelismaAlignment = #CENTER word word word \unset lyricMelismaAlignment word word word } >> \layout { ragged-right = ##f }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Aligning syllables with melisma ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave > ] |
Ambitus
Ambitus indicate pitch ranges for voices.
Accidentals only show up if they are not part of the key signature.
AmbitusNoteHead grobs also have ledger lines.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } } << \new Staff { \relative c' { \time 2/4 c4 f' } } \new Staff { \relative c' { \time 2/4 \key d \major cis4 as' } } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Ambitus su più voci > ] |
Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
Per impostazione predefinita, gli ambitus sono posizionati a sinistra della chiave. La
funzione \ambitusAfter permette di cambiare questo posizionamento.
La sintassi è \ambitusAfter grob-interface (vedi
Graphical
Object Interfaces per un elenco dei possibili valori per
grob-interface.)
Un caso d’uso comune è il posizionamento dell’ambitus tra l’armatura di chiave e l’indicazione di tempo.
\new Staff \with { \consists Ambitus_engraver } \relative { \ambitusAfter key-signature \key d \major es'8 g bes cis d2 }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music > ] |
Ambitus su più voci
Se si aggiunge l’incisore Ambitus_engraver al contesto Staff viene
creato un solo ambitus per il rigo, anche nel caso di righi che hanno più
voci.
\new Staff \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } << \new Voice \relative c'' { \voiceOne c4 a d e f1 } \new Voice \relative c' { \voiceTwo es4 f g as b1 } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Ambitus su più voci ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per salmo anglicano > ] |
Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music
This example demonstrates how to do modern transcription of Gregorian music. Gregorian music has no measure, no stems; it uses only half and quarter note heads, and special marks, indicating rests of different length.
chant = \relative c' { \set Score.timing = ##f f4 a2 \divisioMinima g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior g4( f) f( g f) a2 \finalis \break f4 a2 \divisioMinima g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior g4( f) f( g a) g2( f) \finalis } verba = \lyricmode { Lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met, lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met. } \score { \new GregorianTranscriptionStaff << \new GregorianTranscriptionVoice = "melody" \chant \new GregorianTranscriptionLyrics = "one" \lyricsto melody \verba >> }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Arranging separate lyrics on a single line > ] |
Modello per salmo anglicano
Questo modello presenta un modo per impostare un salmo anglicano. Mostra anche come le strofe possano essere aggiunte come testo separato al di sotto della musica. Le due strofe sono scritte con stili diversi per illustrare le varie possibilità.
SopranoMusic = \relative g' { g1 | c2 b | a1 | \bar "||" a1 | d2 c | c b | c1 | \bar "||" } AltoMusic = \relative c' { e1 | g2 g | f1 | f1 | f2 e | d d | e1 | } TenorMusic = \relative a { c1 | c2 c | c1 | d1 | g,2 g | g g | g1 | } BassMusic = \relative c { c1 | e2 e | f1 | d1 | b2 c | g' g | c,1 | } global = { \time 2/2 } dot = \markup { \raise #0.7 \musicglyph "dots.dot" } tick = \markup { \raise #1 \fontsize #-5 \musicglyph "scripts.rvarcomma" } % Use markup to center the chant on the page \markup \fill-line { \score { % centered \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff << \global \clef "treble" \new Voice = "Soprano" << \voiceOne \SopranoMusic >> \new Voice = "Alto" << \voiceTwo \AltoMusic >> >> \new Staff << \clef "bass" \global \new Voice = "Tenor" << \voiceOne \TenorMusic >> \new Voice = "Bass" << \voiceTwo \BassMusic >> >> >> \layout { \context { \Score \override SpacingSpanner.base-shortest-duration = \musicLength 2 } \context { \Staff \remove "Time_signature_engraver" } } } % End score } % End markup \markup \fill-line { \left-column { \null \null \null \line { \fontsize #5 O \fontsize #3 come let us \bold sing | unto \dot the | Lord : let } \line { us heartily \concat { re \bold joice } in the | strength of | our } \line { sal | vation. } \null \line { \hspace #2.5 8. Today if ye will hear his voice * } \line { \concat { \bold hard en } \tick not your \tick hearts : as in the pro- } \line { vocation * and as in the \bold day of tempt- \tick } \line { -ation \tick in the \tick wilderness. } } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per salmo anglicano ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Changing stanza fonts > ] |
Arranging separate lyrics on a single line
Sometimes you may want to put lyrics for different performers on a
single line: where there is rapidly alternating text, for example. This
snippet shows how it can be done with adjusting the
nonstaff-nonstaff-spacing property of the
VerticalAxisGroup grob.
\layout { \context { \Lyrics \override VerticalAxisGroup .nonstaff-nonstaff-spacing .minimum-distance = ##f } } aliceSings = \markup { \smallCaps "Alice" } eveSings = \markup { \smallCaps "Eve" } << \new Staff << \new Voice = "alice" { f'4^\aliceSings g' r2 | s1 | f'4^\aliceSings g' r2 | s1 | \break % ... \voiceOne s2 a'8^\aliceSings a' b'4 | \oneVoice g'1 } \new Voice = "eve" { s1 | a'2^\eveSings g' | s1 | a'2^\eveSings g' % ... \voiceTwo f'4^\eveSings a'8 g' f'4 e' | \oneVoice s1 } >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "alice" { may -- be sec -- ond % ... Shut up, you fool! } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "eve" { that the words are % ... …and then I was like– } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Arranging separate lyrics on a single line ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Chant or psalm notation > ] |
Changing stanza fonts
Fonts can be changed independently for each stanza, including the font used for printing the stanza number.
%{ You may have to install additional fonts. Red Hat Fedora dejavu-fonts-all Debian GNU/Linux, Ubuntu fonts-dejavu-core fonts-dejavu-extra %} \relative c'' { \time 3/4 g2 e4 a2 f4 g2. } \addlyrics { \set stanza = #"1. " Hi, my name is Bert. } \addlyrics { \override StanzaNumber.fonts.serif = "DejaVu Sans" \set stanza = #"2. " \override LyricText.font-family = #'typewriter Oh, ché -- ri, je t'aime }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Changing stanza fonts ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Forcing hyphens to be shown > ] |
Chant or psalm notation
This form of notation is used for psalm chant, where verses aren’t always of the same length.
stemOff = \hide Staff.Stem stemOn = \undo \stemOff \score { \new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" } { \key g \minor \cadenzaOn \stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4 \stemOn a'2 \section \stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4 \stemOn f'2 \section \stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe } \stemOn g'2 \fine } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Chant or psalm notation ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale > ] |
Forcing hyphens to be shown
If LilyPond does not think there is space for a hyphen, it will be
omitted. This behaviour can be overridden with the
minimum-distance property of LyricHyphen.
\relative c'' { c32 c c c c32 c c c c32 c c c c32 c c c } \addlyrics { syl -- lab word word \override LyricHyphen.minimum-distance = #1.0 syl -- lab word word \override LyricHyphen.minimum-distance = #2.0 syl -- lab word word \revert LyricHyphen.minimum-distance syl -- lab word word }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Forcing hyphens to be shown ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ How to put ties between syllables in lyrics > ] |
Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale
La modalità markup può essere usata per formattare le singole sillabe del testo vocale.
mel = \relative c'' { c4 c c c c1 } lyr = \lyricmode { Your lyrics \markup { \italic can } \markup { \with-color #red contain } \markup { \fontsize #8 \bold Markup! } } << \new Voice = "melody" \mel \new Lyrics \lyricsto "melody" \lyr >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per inno > ] |
How to put ties between syllables in lyrics
This can be achieved by separating those syllables by tildes.
\lyrics { wa~o~a }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < How to put ties between syllables in lyrics ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Allineamento del testo vocale > ] |
Modello per inno
Il codice seguente presenta un modo di impostare un inno in cui ogni verso inizia e finisce con una misura parziale. Mostra anche come aggiungere delle strofe come testo separato sotto la musica.
Timeline = { \time 4/4 \tempo 4=96 \partial 2 s2 | s1 | s2 \breathe s2 | s1 | s2 \caesura \break s2 | s1 | s2 \breathe s2 | s1 | s2 \fine } SopranoMusic = \relative g' { g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 } AltoMusic = \relative c' { d4 d | d d d d | d d d d | d d d d | d2 d4 d | d d d d | d d d d | d d d d | d2 } TenorMusic = \relative a { b4 b | b b b b | b b b b | b b b b | b2 b4 b | b b b b | b b b b | b b b b | b2 } BassMusic = \relative g { g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 } global = { \key g \major } \score { % Start score \new PianoStaff << % Start pianostaff \new Staff << % Start Staff = RH \global \clef "treble" \new Voice = "Soprano" << % Start Voice = "Soprano" \Timeline \voiceOne \SopranoMusic >> % End Voice = "Soprano" \new Voice = "Alto" << % Start Voice = "Alto" \Timeline \voiceTwo \AltoMusic >> % End Voice = "Alto" >> % End Staff = RH \new Staff << % Start Staff = LH \global \clef "bass" \new Voice = "Tenor" << % Start Voice = "Tenor" \Timeline \voiceOne \TenorMusic >> % End Voice = "Tenor" \new Voice = "Bass" << % Start Voice = "Bass" \Timeline \voiceTwo \BassMusic >> % End Voice = "Bass" >> % End Staff = LH >> % End pianostaff } % End score \markup \fill-line { \left-column { "This is line one of the first verse" "This is line two of the same" \null "And here's line one of the second verse" "And the next line of the same" } } \layout { \context { \Score caesuraType = #'((bar-line . "||")) fineBarType = "||" } } \paper { % Start paper block indent = 0 % don't indent first system line-width = 130 % shorten line length to suit music tagline = ##f % Don't print tag line, can be removed } % End paper block
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per inno ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme) > ] |
Allineamento del testo vocale
L’allineamento orizzontale del testo vocale si imposta attraverso la
proprietà self-alignment-X dell’oggetto LyricText.
#-1 è sinistra, #0 è centro e #1 è destra;
si possono usare anche #LEFT, #CENTER e #RIGHT.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { c1 c c c } \addlyrics { \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #LEFT "left-aligned" \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #CENTER "centered" \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = 1 "right-aligned" \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #-1.5 "very right" }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Allineamento del testo vocale ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte > ] |
Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme)
This example shows how to put crosses on stems. Mark the beginning of a
spoken section with the command \speakOn and end it with
\speakOff.
speakOn = \override Stem.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (let* ((x-parent (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (is-rest? (ly:grob? (ly:grob-object x-parent 'rest)))) (if is-rest? empty-stencil (ly:stencil-combine-at-edge (ly:stem::print grob) Y (- (ly:grob-property grob 'direction)) (grob-interpret-markup grob (markup #:center-align #:fontsize -4 #:musicglyph "noteheads.s2cross")) -1.7)))) speakOff = \revert Stem.stencil \new Staff { \relative c'' { a4 b a c \speakOn g4 f r g8 a b4 r r8 d e4 \speakOff c4 a g f } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme) ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo > ] |
Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
Questo modello mostra come usare i contesti annidati StaffGroup e
GrandStaff per creare sottogruppi degli strumenti dello stesso
tipo. Mostra anche come usare \transpose in modo che le variabili
mantengano la musica per gli strumenti traspositori nell’intonazione reale.
#(set-global-staff-size 17) \paper { indent = 3.0\cm % add space for instrumentName short-indent = 1.5\cm % add less space for shortInstrumentName } fluteMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } % Pitches as written on a manuscript for Clarinet in A % are transposed to concert pitch. clarinetMusic = \transpose c' a \relative c'' { \key bes \major bes1 d } trumpetMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } % Key signature is often omitted for horns hornMusic = \transpose c' f \relative c { d'1 fis } percussionMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g1 b } sopranoMusic = \relative c'' { \key g \major g'1 b } sopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { Lyr -- ics } altoIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoILyrics = \sopranoLyrics altoIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoIILyrics = \lyricmode { Ah -- ah } tenorMusic = \relative c' { \clef "treble_8" \key g \major g1 b } tenorLyrics = \sopranoLyrics pianoRHMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } pianoLHMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } violinIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violinIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violaMusic = \relative c { \clef alto \key g \major g'1 b } celloMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } bassMusic = \relative c { \clef "bass_8" \key g \major g,1 b } \book { \score { << \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_woodwinds" << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" } \fluteMusic \new Staff = "Staff_clarinet" \with { instrumentName = \markup { \concat { "Clarinet in B" \flat } } } % Declare that written Middle C in the music % to follow sounds a concert B flat, for % output using sounded pitches such as MIDI. %\transposition bes % Print music for a B-flat clarinet \transpose bes c' \clarinetMusic >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_brass" << \new Staff = "Staff_hornI" \with { instrumentName = "Horn in F" } % \transposition f \transpose f c' \hornMusic \new Staff = "Staff_trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet in C" } \trumpetMusic >> \new RhythmicStaff = "RhythmicStaff_percussion" \with { instrumentName = "Percussion" } \percussionMusic \new PianoStaff \with { instrumentName = "Piano" } << \new Staff { \pianoRHMusic } \new Staff { \pianoLHMusic } >> \new ChoirStaff = "ChoirStaff_choir" << \new Staff = "Staff_soprano" \with { instrumentName = "Soprano" } \new Voice = "soprano" \sopranoMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "soprano" { \sopranoLyrics } \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_altos" \with { \accepts Lyrics } << \new Staff = "Staff_altoI" \with { instrumentName = "Alto I" } \new Voice = "altoI" \altoIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoI" { \altoILyrics } \new Staff = "Staff_altoII" \with { instrumentName = "Alto II" } \new Voice = "altoII" \altoIIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoII" { \altoIILyrics } >> \new Staff = "Staff_tenor" \with { instrumentName = "Tenor" } \new Voice = "tenor" \tenorMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "tenor" { \tenorLyrics } >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "Staff_violinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" } \violinIMusic \new Staff = "Staff_violinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" } \violinIIMusic >> \new Staff = "Staff_viola" \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } \violaMusic \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } \celloMusic \new Staff = "Staff_bass" \with { instrumentName = "Double Bass" } \bassMusic >> >> } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Putting lyrics inside the staff > ] |
Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo
Ecco un tipico formato per canzoni: un rigo con linea melodica e testo, e sotto l’accompagnamento per pianoforte.
melody = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } \score { << \new Voice = "mel" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto mel \text \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "upper" \upper \new Staff = "lower" \lower >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } } \midi { } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi > ] |
Putting lyrics inside the staff
Lyrics can be moved vertically to place them inside the staff. The
lyrics are moved with
\override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . dy), and
there are similar commands to move the extenders and hyphens. A good
value for dy must be found by trial and error.
<< \new Staff << \new Voice = "voc" \relative c' { \stemDown a bes c8 b c4 } >> \new Lyrics \with { \override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) \override LyricExtender.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) \override LyricHyphen.extra-offset = #'(0 . 8.6) } \lyricsto "voc" { La la -- la __ _ la } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Putting lyrics inside the staff ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi > ] |
Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi
Modello per coro SATB (quattro righi)
global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 \dynamicUp } sopranonotes = \relative c'' { c2 \p \< d c d \f } sopranowords = \lyricmode { do do do do } altonotes = \relative c'' { c2\p d c d } altowords = \lyricmode { re re re re } tenornotes = { \clef "G_8" c2\mp d c d } tenorwords = \lyricmode { mi mi mi mi } bassnotes = { \clef bass c2\mf d c d } basswords = \lyricmode { mi mi mi mi } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff << \new Voice = "soprano" << \global \sopranonotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "soprano" \sopranowords >> \new Staff << \new Voice = "alto" << \global \altonotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "alto" \altowords >> \new Staff << \new Voice = "tenor" << \global \tenornotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "tenor" \tenorwords >> \new Staff << \new Voice = "bass" << \global \bassnotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "bass" \basswords >> >> }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi
Ecco il modello di un comune spartito semplificato (lead sheet): include linea melodica, testo vocale e sigle degli accordi.
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } harmonies = \chordmode { a2 c } \score { << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \harmonies } \new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo > ] |
Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets
Here is a simple lead sheet template with melody, lyrics, chords, and fret diagrams.
verseI = \lyricmode { \set stanza = #"1." This is the first verse } verseII = \lyricmode { \set stanza = #"2." This is the second verse. } theChords = \chordmode { % insert chords for chordnames and fretboards here c2 g4 c } staffMelody = \relative c' { \key c \major \clef treble % Type notes for melody here c4 d8 e f4 g \bar "|." } \score { << \context ChordNames { \theChords } \context FretBoards { \theChords } \new Staff { \context Voice = "voiceMelody" { \staffMelody } } \new Lyrics = "lyricsI" { \lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseI } \new Lyrics = "lyricsII" { \lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseII } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Skips in lyric mode > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo
Questo piccolo modello presenta una semplice linea melodica con un testo. Copialo e incollalo, aggiungi le note e le parole. Questo esempio disabilita la disposizione automatica delle travature, come è consuetudine per le parti vocali. Per usare la disposizione automatica delle travature, cambia o commenta la relativa linea di codice.
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } \score{ << \new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Skips in lyric mode (2) > ] |
Skips in lyric mode
The ‘s’ syntax for skips is only available in note mode and
chord mode. In other situations, for example, when entering lyrics,
using the \skip command is recommended.
<< \relative c'' { a1 | a } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \skip1 bla1 } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Skips in lyric mode ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Using \arpeggioBracket to make divisi more visible > ] |
Skips in lyric mode (2)
Although ‘s’ skips cannot be used in \lyricmode (it
is taken to be a literal “s”, not a space), double quotes ("")
or underscores (_) are available.
<< \relative c'' { a4 b c d } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { a4 "" _ gap } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Skips in lyric mode (2) ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente > ] |
Using \arpeggioBracket to make divisi more visible
The \arpeggioBracket command can be used to indicate the
division of voices where there are no stems to provide the information.
This is often seen in choral music.
\include "english.ly" \score { \relative c'' { \key a \major \time 2/2 << \new Voice = "upper" << { \voiceOne \arpeggioBracket a2( b2 <b d>1\arpeggio) <cs e>\arpeggio ~ <cs e>4 } \addlyrics { \lyricmode { A -- men. } } >> \new Voice = "lower" { \voiceTwo a1 ~ a a ~ a4 \bar "|." } >> } }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Using \arpeggioBracket to make divisi more visible ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale > ] |
Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente
Usando le etichette (tag), è possibile usare la stessa musica per produrre sia
la musica mensurale che quella moderna. In questo frammento, viene introdotta
la funzione menrest, che permette alle pause mensurali di essere
posizionate precisamente sul rigo come nell’originale, ma con le pause moderne
nella posizione standard. Le etichette vengono usate per produrre diversi
tipi di stanghetta alla fine della musica, ma possono essere usate anche
quando sono necessarie altre differenze: per esempio se si vogliono usare
“pause d’intero” (R1, R\breve, etc.) nella musica moderna, ma pause
normali (r1, r\breve, etc.) nella versione mensurale. La conversione di
musica mensurale nel suo equivalente moderno viene solitamente chiamata
trascrizione.
\layout { line-width = 150\mm } menrest = #(define-music-function (note) (ly:music?) #{ \tag #'mens $(make-music 'RestEvent note) \tag #'mod $(make-music 'RestEvent note 'pitch '()) #}) Be = \tag #'mod #(begin (ly:expect-warning (G_ "stem does not fit in beam")) (ly:expect-warning (G_ "beam was started here")) (make-span-event 'BeamEvent START)) Am = \tag #'mod ] MenStyle = { \override Score.BarNumber.transparent = ##t \override Stem.neutral-direction = #up \omit Slur \omit Beam } finalis = \section Music = \relative c'' { \key f \major g1 d'2 \menrest bes4 bes a2 \menrest r4 g4 fis4. fis8 fis4 fis g e f4.([ g8] a4[ g8 f] g2.\Be fis8 e\Am fis2) g\breve \finalis } MenLyr = \lyricmode { So farre, deere life, deare life, from thy bright beames ab- ſen- ted, } ModLyr = \lyricmode { So far, dear life, dear life, from your bright beams ab -- sen -- ted, __ } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \keepWithTag #'mens { << \new PetrucciStaff { \new PetrucciVoice = "Cantus" { \clef "petrucci-c1" \time 4/4 \MenStyle \Music } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "Cantus" \MenLyr >> } \layout { \context { \PetrucciVoice % No longer necessary starting with version 2.25.23. \override Flag.style = #'mensural } } } \markup\vspace #1 \score { \keepWithTag #'mod { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff { \new Voice = "Sop" \with { \remove "Note_heads_engraver" \consists "Completion_heads_engraver" \remove "Rest_engraver" \consists "Completion_rest_engraver" } \shiftDurations 1 0 { \time 2/4 \autoBeamOff \Music } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "Sop" \ModLyr >> } }
Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale
Questo frammento mostra come usare le proprietà di contesto
alignBelowContext e alignAboveContext per
controllare il posizionamento del testo vocale e degli ossia.
\relative c' << \new Staff = "1" { c4 c c c } \new Staff = "2" { d4 d d d } \new Staff = "3" { e4 e e e } { \skip 2 << \lyrics { \set alignBelowContext = "1" lyrics4 below } \new Staff \with { alignAboveContext = "3" fontSize = -2 \override StaffSymbol.staff-space = #(magstep -2) \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-staff-spacing = #'((minimum-distance . 0) (basic-distance . 0) (padding . 1)) } { \tuplet 6/4 { \override TextScript.padding = 2 c8[^"ossia above" d e d e f] } } >> } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Vertically centered common lyrics > ] |
Vertically aligning stanza numbers of different staves
It can happen that stanza numbers don’t align vertically if the verses
are attached to different staves. To fix that, override the
self-alignment-X property of the LyricText grob.
\markup { default behavior } << \new Staff { b b b b } \lyrics { \set stanza = "3." a a a a } \new Staff { b b b b } \lyrics { \set stanza = "1." aaaaaaaaaa a a a } \lyrics { \set stanza = "2." a a a a } >> \markup \vspace #1 \markup { using \typewriter "self-alignment-X = #LEFT" } << \new Staff { b b b b } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \set stanza = "3." a a a a } \new Staff { b b b b } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \set stanza = "1." \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #LEFT aaaaaaaaaa a a a } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \set stanza = "2." a a a a } >>
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Vertically aligning stanza numbers of different staves ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per complesso vocale > ] |
Vertically centered common lyrics
In a vocal piece where there are several (two, four or more) lines of lyrics and common lyrics for all voices at some point, the common lyrics may be made to appear vertically centered, as shown in the following example:
dropLyrics = { \override LyricText.extra-offset = #'(0 . -4.5) \override LyricHyphen.extra-offset = #'(0 . -4.5) \override LyricExtender.extra-offset = #'(0 . -4.5) \override StanzaNumber.extra-offset = #'(0 . -4.5) } raiseLyrics = { \revert LyricText.extra-offset \revert LyricHyphen.extra-offset \revert LyricExtender.extra-offset \revert StanzaNumber.extra-offset } skipFour = \repeat unfold 4 { \skip 8 } lyricsA = \lyricmode { The first verse has \dropLyrics \set stanza = #" All:" the com -- mon __ words \raiseLyrics used in all four. } lyricsB = \lyricmode { In stan -- za two, \skipFour al -- so ap -- pear. } lyricsC = \lyricmode { By the third verse, \skipFour are get -- ting dull. } lyricsD = \lyricmode { Last stan -- za, and \skipFour get used once more. } melody = \relative c' { c4 d e f | g f e8( e f) d | c4 e d c | } \score { << \new Voice = m \melody \new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsA \new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsB \new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsC \new Lyrics \lyricsto m \lyricsD >> }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Vertically centered common lyrics ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica > ] |
Modello per complesso vocale
Ecco una tipica partitura corale a quattro parti, SATB. Se il complesso è più ampio, è spesso comodo scrivere gli elementi comuni in un’unica sezione, che verrà poi inclusa in tutte le parti. Ad esempio, l’indicazione di tempo e l’armatura di chiave sono quasi sempre le stesse per tutte le parti. Come nel modello dell’“Inno”, le quattro voci sono ripartite in due soli righi.
\paper { top-system-spacing.basic-distance = 10 score-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 last-bottom-spacing.basic-distance = 10 } global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative { c''4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative { e'4 f d e } altoWords = \lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Lyrics = "sopranos" \with { % this is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "altos" \new Lyrics = "tenors" \with { % this is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "basses" \context Lyrics = "sopranos" \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \context Lyrics = "altos" \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \context Lyrics = "tenors" \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \context Lyrics = "basses" \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per complesso vocale ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica
Questo modello aggiunge una riduzione automatica per pianoforte alla tipica
partitura vocale SATB illustrata in “Modello per complesso vocale”. Si
dimostra così uno dei punti di forza di LilyPond – è possibile usare una
definizione musicale più di una volta. Qualsiasi modifica venga fatta alle note
delle voci (ad esempio, tenorMusic) verrà applicata anche alla riduzione
per pianoforte.
\paper { top-system-spacing.basic-distance = 10 score-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 last-bottom-spacing.basic-distance = 10 } global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative { c''4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative { e'4 f d e } altoWords =\lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { << \new ChoirStaff << \new Lyrics = "sopranos" \with { % This is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "altos" \new Lyrics = "tenors" \with { % This is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "basses" \context Lyrics = "sopranos" \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \context Lyrics = "altos" \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \context Lyrics = "tenors" \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \context Lyrics = "basses" \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> \new PianoStaff << \new Staff << \set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f \partCombine << \global \sopMusic >> << \global \altoMusic >> >> \new Staff << \clef bass \set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f \partCombine << \global \tenorMusic >> << \global \bassMusic >> >> >> >> }
Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi
Questo modello è fondamentalmente analogo al semplice modello “Complesso vocale”,
con l’unica differenza che qui tutti i versi del testo sono posizionati
usando alignAboveContext e alignBelowContext.
global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative c'' { c4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative c' { e4 f d e } altoWords = \lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative c' { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative c { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = "women" } \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = "women" } \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords % we could remove the line about this with the line below, since % we want the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway. % \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = "men" } \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = "men" } \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords % again, we could replace the line above this with the line below. % \new Lyrics \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> }
| [ << Vocal music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Chord notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi ] | [ Up: Vocal music ] | [ Chord notation > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello
Questo modello crea una partitura che inizia con una sezione solistica e
prosegue in un ritornello a due voci. Illustra anche l’uso delle
pause spaziatrici all’interno della variabile \global per definire
i cambi di tempo (e altri elementi comuni a tutte le parti) nel corso di
tutta la partitura.
global = { \key g \major % verse \time 3/4 s2.*2 \break % refrain \time 2/4 s2*2 \bar "|." } SoloNotes = \relative g' { \clef "treble" % verse g4 g g | b4 b b | % refrain R2*2 | } SoloLyrics = \lyricmode { One two three | four five six | } SopranoNotes = \relative c'' { \clef "treble" % verse R2.*2 | % refrain c4 c | g4 g | } SopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { la la | la la | } BassNotes = \relative c { \clef "bass" % verse R2.*2 | % refrain c4 e | d4 d | } BassLyrics = \lyricmode { dum dum | dum dum | } \score { << \new Voice = "SoloVoice" << \global \SoloNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "SoloVoice" \SoloLyrics \new ChoirStaff << \new Voice = "SopranoVoice" << \global \SopranoNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "SopranoVoice" \SopranoLyrics \new Voice = "BassVoice" << \global \BassNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "BassVoice" \BassLyrics >> >> \layout { ragged-right = ##t \context { \Staff % these lines prevent empty staves from being printed \RemoveEmptyStaves \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } }
10 Chord notation
See also Chord notation.
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Chord notation ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames > ] |
Adding a figured bass above or below the notes
When writing figured bass, you can place the figures above or below the
bass notes by using the commands \bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown
and \bassFigureStaffAlignmentUp. Prepend \once to the
command if you want to modify only the next figured bass.
The command \bassFigureStaffAlignmentNeutral resets the
direction of figured bass to the default value.
bass = { \clef bass g4 b, c d | e d8 c d2 } continuo = \figuremode { <_>4 <6>4 <5/>4 \bassFigureStaffAlignmentUp <_+>4 <6> | \set Staff.useBassFigureExtenders = ##t \bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown <4>4. <4>8 <_+>4 } \score { << \new Staff = bassStaff \bass \context Staff = bassStaff \continuo >> }
Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames
Per mostrare le stanghette nel contesto ChordNames, aggiungere
l’incisore Bar_engraver.
\new ChordNames \with { \override BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1 . 3) \consists "Bar_engraver" } \chordmode { f1:maj7 f:7 bes:7 }
Adjusting figured bass alteration glyphs
In figured bass, specially designed glyphs for 6\\,
7\\, and 9\\ are used by default. Similarly,
specially designed glyphs for symbols 2\+, 4\+, and
5\+ are used by default if plus signs appear after the number.
To change that, pass an alist to figuredBassPlusStrokedAlist and
set the glyph in question to #f (or omit it).
#(set-global-staff-size 26) \figures { \set figuredBassPlusDirection = #RIGHT <6\\> <7\\> <9\\> r <2\+> <4\+> <5\+> r \set figuredBassPlusStrokedAlist = #'((2 . "figbass.twoplus") ;; (4 . "figbass.fourplus") ;; (5 . "figbass.fiveplus") (6 . "figbass.sixstroked") ;; (7 . "figbass.sevenstroked") ;; (9 . "figbass.ninestroked") ) <6\\> <7\\> <9\\> r <2\+> <4\+> <5\+> r }
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting figured bass alteration glyphs ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Modifica del separatore dell’accordo > ] |
Changing a single note’s size in a chord
Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
\tweak command inside a chord, by altering the font-size
property.
Inside the chord (within the brackets < >), before the note to
be altered, place the \tweak command, followed by
font-size and define the proper size like #-2 (a tiny
note head).
\relative c' { <\tweak font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak font-size #-2 e>1 ^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c } }
Modifica del separatore dell’accordo
L’elemento che separa le diverse parti di un accordo può essere impostato su qualsiasi testo di tipo markup.
\chords { c:7sus4 \set chordNameSeparator = \markup { \typewriter | } c:7sus4 }
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Modifica del separatore dell’accordo ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Eccezioni dei nomi degli accordi > ] |
Cambiare la posizione delle alterazioni del basso continuo
Le alterazioni e i segni più possono apparire prima o dopo i numeri, a
seconda delle proprietà figuredBassAlterationDirection e
figuredBassPlusDirection.
#(set-global-staff-size 26) \figures { <5\+> <5+ 4\+> <6 4- 2\+> r \set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #RIGHT <5\+> <5+ 4\+> <6 4- 2\+> r \set figuredBassPlusDirection = #RIGHT <5\+> <5+ 4\+> <6 4- 2\+> r \set figuredBassAlterationDirection = #LEFT <5\+> <5+ 4\+> <6 4- 2\+> r }
Eccezioni dei nomi degli accordi
La proprietà chordNameExceptions permette di salvare un elenco di
notazioni speciali per accordi specifici.
% Step 1: Define music with chords and markup for maj9 and 6(add9). chExceptionMusic = { <c e g b d'>-\markup { \super "maj9" } <c e g a d'>-\markup { \super "6(add9)" } } % Step 2: Create extended exception list. chExceptions = #(append (sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions chExceptionMusic #t) ignatzekExceptions) theMusic = \chordmode { g1:maj9 g1:6.9 % Step 3: Register extended exception list. \set chordNameExceptions = #chExceptions g1:maj9 g1:6.9 } \layout { ragged-right = ##t } << \new ChordNames \theMusic \new Voice \theMusic >>
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Eccezioni dei nomi degli accordi ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Chord names alternative > ] |
Nome dell’accordo di settima maggiore
La formattazione dell’accordo di settima maggiore può essere regolata
con la proprietà majorSevenSymbol.
\chords { c:7+ \set majorSevenSymbol = \markup { j7 } c:7+ }
Chord names alternative
Chord names are generated from a list of pitches. The functions which construct these names can be customised.
Here are shown chords following Ignatzek (pp. 17-18, 1995), used by default since LilyPond 1.7.20, compared with an alternative Jazz chord notation and Harald Banter’s (1987) notation. A smaller font is used in the latter case, as these tend to be overly verbose.
This mirrors the mechanism originally used in early LilyPond versions (pre-1.7); not having been properly maintained, however, some features have been lost (mainly chord exception lists) and bugs have been introduced.
%%%% Legacy chord naming functions (formerly in scm/chord-generic-names.scm) %%%% Copyright (C) 2003--2023 Jan Nieuwenhuizen <janneke@gnu.org> #(set-global-staff-size 19.7) #(define-public (banter-chordnames pitches bass inversion context) (old_chord->markup 'banter pitches bass inversion context)) #(define-public (jazz-chordnames pitches bass inversion context) (old_chord->markup 'jazz pitches bass inversion context)) #(define (define-translator-property symbol type? description) (if (not (and (symbol? symbol) (procedure? type?) (string? description))) (ly:error "error in call of define-translator-property")) (if (not (equal? (object-property symbol 'translation-doc) #f)) (ly:error (G_ "symbol ~S redefined") symbol)) (set-object-property! symbol 'translation-type? type?) (set-object-property! symbol 'translation-doc description) symbol) #(for-each (lambda (x) (apply define-translator-property x)) `((chordNameExceptionsFull ,list? "An alist of full chord exceptions. Contains @code{(@var{chord} . @var{markup})} entries.") (chordNameExceptionsPartial ,list? "An alist of partial chord exceptions. Contains @code{(@var{chord} . (@var{prefix-markup} @var{suffix-markup}))} entries."))) #(define-public (old_chord->markup style pitches bass inversion context) "Entry point for @code{Chord_name_engraver}. @var{pitches}, @var{bass}, and @var{inversion} are lily pitches." (define (default-note-namer pitch) (note-name->markup pitch #f)) (define (markup-or-empty-markup markup) "Return MARKUP if markup, else empty-markup" (if (markup? markup) markup empty-markup)) (define (accidental->markup alteration) "Return accidental markup for ALTERATION." (if (= alteration 0) (make-line-markup (list empty-markup)) (conditional-kern-before (alteration->text-accidental-markup alteration) (= alteration FLAT) 0.094725))) (define (list-minus a b) "Return list of elements in A that are not in B." (lset-difference eq? a b)) (define (markup-join markups sep) "Return line-markup of MARKUPS, joining them with markup SEP" (if (pair? markups) (make-line-markup (list-insert-separator markups sep)) empty-markup)) (define (conditional-kern-before markup bool amount) "Add AMOUNT of space before MARKUP if BOOL is true." (if bool (make-line-markup (list (make-hspace-markup amount) markup)) markup)) (define (step-nr pitch) (let* ((pitch-nr (+ (* 7 (ly:pitch-octave pitch)) (ly:pitch-notename pitch))) (root-nr (+ (* 7 (ly:pitch-octave (car pitches))) (ly:pitch-notename (car pitches))))) (+ 1 (- pitch-nr root-nr)))) (define (next-third pitch) (+ pitch (ly:make-pitch 0 2 (if (or (= (step-nr pitch) 3) (= (step-nr pitch) 5)) FLAT 0)))) (define (step-alteration pitch) (let* ((normalized-pitch (- pitch (car pitches))) (alteration (ly:pitch-alteration normalized-pitch))) (if (= (step-nr pitch) 7) (+ alteration SEMI-TONE) alteration))) (define (pitch-unalter pitch) (let ((alteration (step-alteration pitch))) (if (= alteration 0) pitch (ly:make-pitch (ly:pitch-octave pitch) (ly:pitch-notename pitch) (- (ly:pitch-alteration pitch) alteration))))) (define (step-even-or-altered? pitch) (let ((nr (step-nr pitch))) (if (!= (modulo nr 2) 0) (!= (step-alteration pitch) 0) #t))) (define (step->markup-plusminus pitch) (let ((alt (step-alteration pitch))) (make-line-markup (list (number->string (step-nr pitch)) (cond ((= alt DOUBLE-FLAT) "--") ((= alt FLAT) "-") ((= alt NATURAL) "") ((= alt SHARP) "+") ((= alt DOUBLE-SHARP) "++")))))) (define (step->markup-accidental pitch) (make-line-markup (list (accidental->markup (step-alteration pitch)) (make-simple-markup (number->string (step-nr pitch)))))) (define (step->markup-ignatzek pitch) (make-line-markup (if (and (= (step-nr pitch) 7) (= (step-alteration pitch) 1)) (list (ly:context-property context 'majorSevenSymbol)) (list (accidental->markup (step-alteration pitch)) (make-simple-markup (number->string (step-nr pitch))))))) ;; tja, kennok (define (make-sub->markup step->markup) (lambda (pitch) (make-line-markup (list (make-simple-markup "no") (step->markup pitch))))) (define (step-based-sub->markup step->markup pitch) (make-line-markup (list (make-simple-markup "no") (step->markup pitch)))) (define (get-full-list pitch) (if (<= (step-nr pitch) (step-nr (last pitches))) (cons pitch (get-full-list (next-third pitch))) '())) (define (get-consecutive nr pitches) (if (pair? pitches) (let* ((pitch-nr (step-nr (car pitches))) (next-nr (if (!= (modulo pitch-nr 2) 0) (+ pitch-nr 2) nr))) (if (<= pitch-nr nr) (cons (car pitches) (get-consecutive next-nr (cdr pitches))) '())) '())) ;;; FIXME -- exceptions no longer work. -vv (define (full-match exceptions) (if (pair? exceptions) (let* ((e (car exceptions)) (e-pitches (car e))) (if (equal? e-pitches pitches) e (full-match (cdr exceptions)))) #f)) (define (partial-match exceptions) (if (pair? exceptions) (let* ((e (car exceptions)) (e-pitches (car e))) (if (equal? e-pitches (take pitches (length e-pitches))) e (partial-match (cdr exceptions)))) #f)) ;; FIXME: exceptions don't work anyway. (if #f (begin (write-me "pitches: " pitches))) (let* ((full-exceptions (ly:context-property context 'chordNameExceptionsFull)) (full-exception (full-match full-exceptions)) (full-markup (if full-exception (cadr full-exception) '())) (partial-exceptions (ly:context-property context 'chordNameExceptionsPartial)) (partial-exception (partial-match partial-exceptions)) (partial-pitches (if partial-exception (car partial-exception) '())) (partial-markup-prefix (if partial-exception (markup-or-empty-markup (cadr partial-exception)) empty-markup)) (partial-markup-suffix (if (and partial-exception (pair? (cddr partial-exception))) (markup-or-empty-markup (caddr partial-exception)) empty-markup)) (root (car pitches)) (full (get-full-list root)) ;; kludge alert: replace partial matched lower part of all with ;; 'normal' pitches from full ;; (all pitches) (all (append (take full (length partial-pitches)) (drop pitches (length partial-pitches)))) (highest (last all)) (missing (list-minus full (map pitch-unalter all))) (consecutive (get-consecutive 1 all)) (rest (list-minus all consecutive)) (altered (filter step-even-or-altered? all)) (cons-alt (filter step-even-or-altered? consecutive)) (base (list-minus consecutive altered))) (if #f (begin (write-me "full:" full) ;; (write-me "partial-pitches:" partial-pitches) (write-me "full-markup:" full-markup) (write-me "partial-markup-perfix:" partial-markup-prefix) (write-me "partial-markup-suffix:" partial-markup-suffix) (write-me "all:" all) (write-me "altered:" altered) (write-me "missing:" missing) (write-me "consecutive:" consecutive) (write-me "rest:" rest) (write-me "base:" base))) (case style ((banter) ;; root ;; + steps:altered + (highest all -- if not altered) ;; + subs:missing (let* ((root->markup default-note-namer) (step->markup step->markup-plusminus) (sub->markup (lambda (x) (step-based-sub->markup step->markup x))) (sep (make-simple-markup "/"))) (if (pair? full-markup) (make-line-markup (list (root->markup root) full-markup)) (make-line-markup (list (root->markup root) partial-markup-prefix (make-super-markup (markup-join (append (map step->markup (append altered (if (and (> (step-nr highest) 5) (not (step-even-or-altered? highest))) (list highest) '()))) (list partial-markup-suffix) (map sub->markup missing)) sep))))))) ((jazz) ;; root ;; + steps:(highest base) + cons-alt ;; + 'add' ;; + steps:rest (let* ((root->markup default-note-namer) (step->markup step->markup-ignatzek) (sep (make-simple-markup " ")) (add-prefix (make-simple-markup " add"))) (if (pair? full-markup) (make-line-markup (list (root->markup root) full-markup)) (make-line-markup (list (root->markup root) partial-markup-prefix (make-super-markup (make-line-markup (list ;; kludge alert: omit <= 5 ;;(markup-join (map step->markup ;; (cons (last base) cons-alt)) sep) ;; This fixes: ;; c C5 -> C ;; c:2 C5 2 -> C2 ;; c:3- Cm5 -> Cm ;; c:6.9 C5 6add9 -> C6 add 9 (add?) ;; ch = \chords { c c:2 c:3- c:6.9^7 } (markup-join (map step->markup (let ((tb (last base))) (if (> (step-nr tb) 5) (cons tb cons-alt) cons-alt))) sep) (if (pair? rest) add-prefix empty-markup) (markup-join (map step->markup rest) sep) partial-markup-suffix)))))))) (else empty-markup)))) %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%%% %%%% Here begins the actual snippet: chs = \transpose c' c' { <c e g>1 <c es g> % m = minor triad <c e gis> <c es ges> \break <c e g bes> <c es g bes> <c e g b> % triangle = maj <c es ges beses> <c es ges b> \break <c e gis bes> <c es g b> <c e gis b> <c es ges bes> \break <c e g a> % 6 = major triad with added sixth <c es g a> % m6 = minor triad with added sixth <c e g bes d'> <c es g bes d'> \break <c es g bes d' f' a' > <c es g bes d' f' > <c es ges bes d' > <c e g bes des' > \break <c e g bes dis'> <c e g bes d' f'> <c e g bes d' fis'> <c e g bes d' f' a'> \break <c e g bes d' fis' as'> <c e gis bes dis'> <c e g bes dis' fis'> <c e g bes d' f' as'> \break <c e g bes des' f' as'> <c e g bes d' fis'> <c e g b d'> <c e g bes d' f' as'> \break <c e g bes des' f' as'> <c e g bes des' f' a'> <c e g b d'> <c e g b d' f' a'> \break <c e g b d' fis'> <c e g bes des' f ' a'> <c f g> <c f g bes> \break <c f g bes d'> <c e g d'> % add9 <c es g f'> <c e g b fis'> % Lydian <c e g bes des' ees' fis' aes'> % altered chord } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % alternate Jazz notation efullmusicJazzAlt = { <c e gis>1-\markup { "+" } <c e g b>-\markup { \normal-size-super % \override #'(font-family . math) "N" \override #'(font-family . math) "M" } %%c:3.5.7 = \markup { \override #'(font-family . math) "M" } %%c:3.5.7 = \markup { \normal-size-super "maj7" } <c es ges>-\markup { \super "o" } % should be $\circ$ ? <c es ges bes>-\markup { \super \combine "o" "/" } <c es ges beses>-\markup { \super "o7" } } efullJazzAlt = #(sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions efullmusicJazzAlt #f) epartialmusicJazzAlt = { <c d>1-\markup { \normal-size-super "2" } <c es>-\markup { "m" } <c f>-\markup { \normal-size-super "sus4" } <c g>-\markup { \normal-size-super "5" } %% TODO, partial exceptions <c es f>-\markup { "m" }-\markup { \normal-size-super "sus4" } <c d es>-\markup { "m" }-\markup { \normal-size-super "sus2" } } epartialJazzAlt = #(sequential-music-to-chord-exceptions epartialmusicJazzAlt #f) %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \score { << \new ChordNames { %% Already set by default: %\set chordNameFunction = #ignatzek-chord-names \set instrumentName = "Ignatzek" \set shortInstrumentName = "Def" \chs } \new ChordNames { \set chordNameFunction = #jazz-chordnames \set majorSevenSymbol = \whiteTriangleMarkup \set chordNameSeparator = "/" \set chordNameExceptionsFull = \efullJazzAlt \set chordNameExceptionsPartial = \epartialJazzAlt \set instrumentName = "Alternative" \set shortInstrumentName = "Alt" \chs } %% This is the Banter (1987) style. It gives exceedingly %% verbose (wide) names, making the output file take up to 4 pages. \new ChordNames { \set chordNameFunction = #banter-chordnames \override ChordName.font-size = -3 \set instrumentName = "Banter" \set shortInstrumentName = "Ban" \chs } \new Staff \transpose c c' { \chs } >> \layout { #(layout-set-staff-size 16) system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 0 \context { \ChordNames \consists "Instrument_name_engraver" } \context { \Score \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } }
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Chord names alternative ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Clusters > ] |
Chords with stretched fingering for FretBoards and TabVoice
Sometimes chords with a stretched fingering are required. If not
otherwise specified the context property maximumFretStretch is
set to value 4, though, resulting in a warning about “No string
for pitch ...”, and the note is omitted. You may set
maximumFretStretch to an approppriate value or explicitly assign
string numbers to all notes of a chord to fix that.
% The code below prints two warnings for the second chord, % which may be omitted by uncommenting the following line. % % #(for-each (lambda (x) (ly:expect-warning "No string for pitch")) (iota 2)) mus = { <c' bes'> <c'\2 bes'> \set maximumFretStretch = 5 <c' bes'> <c'\2 bes'\1> } << \new FretBoards \mus \new TabVoice \mus >>
Clusters
Clusters are a device to denote that a complete range of notes is to be played.
fragment = \relative c' { c4 f <e d'>4 <g a>8 <e a> a4 c2 <d b>4 e2 c } << \new Staff \fragment \new Staff \makeClusters \fragment >>
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Clusters ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround > ] |
Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
Il posizionamento dei numeri della diteggiatura può essere regolato in modo preciso. Perché l’orientamento funzioni, occorre usare il costrutto per gli accordi <> anche per le note singole. Si può impostare in modo simile l’orientamento dei numeri di corda e delle diteggiature della mano destra.
\relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1>2 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <e-3>2 \set stringNumberOrientations = #'(up left down) <f\3 a\2 c\1>1 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(down right up) <c\rightHandFinger 1 e\rightHandFinger 2 c'\rightHandFinger 4 > }
Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround
Sometimes it is better to use stems from the ‘other’ staff for creating cross-staff chords to trick LilyPond’s beam collision detector. In the following snippet, if the stems from the lower staff were used instead, it would be necessary to explicitly use
\override Staff.Beam.collision-voice-only = ##t
so that LilyPond doesn’t move the beams.
\new PianoStaff << \new Staff = up \relative c' << { r4 \override Stem.cross-staff = ##t \override Stem.length = #19 % this is in half-spaces, % so it makes stems 9.5 staffspaces long \override Stem.Y-offset = #-6 % stems are normally lengthened % upwards, so here we must lower the stem by the amount % equal to the lengthening - in this case (19 - 7) / 2 % (7 is default stem length) e e e } { s4 \change Staff = "bottom" \override NoteColumn.ignore-collision = ##t c, c c } >> \new Staff = bottom \relative c' { \clef bass \voiceOne g8 a g a g a g a } >>
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Customizing the no-chord symbol > ] |
Customizing the chord grid style
Custom divisions of chord squares can be defined through the
measure-division-lines-alist and
measure-division-chord-placement-alist properties of
ChordSquare. These are both alists. Their keys are measure
divisions, namely lists which give the fraction of the measure that
each chord (or rest, or skip) represents. More precisely, a measure
division alist is made of positive, exact numbers adding up to 1,
for example: '(1/2 1/4 1/4). The exactness requirement means
that, e.g., 1/2 is valid but not 0.5.
The values in measure-division-lines-alist are lists of lines,
which are represented as
(x1 y1 x2 y2). The
line starts at the point (x1 . y1) and
ends at (x2 . y2). Coordinates are
expressed in the [-1, 1] scale relative to the extent of the
square.
The values in measure-division-chord-placement-alist are lists
of (x . y) pairs giving the placement
of the respective chords.
This example defines a peculiar chord grid style that has a rule for measures divided in three equal parts.
\paper { line-width = 10\cm ragged-right = ##f } \new ChordGrid \with { \override ChordSquare.measure-division-lines-alist = #'(((1) . ()) ((1/3 1/3 1/3) . ((-1 -0.4 0 1) (0 -1 1 0.4)))) \override ChordSquare.measure-division-chord-placement-alist = #'(((1) . ((0 . 0))) ((1/3 1/3 1/3) . ((-0.7 . 0.5) (0 . 0) (0.7 . -0.5)))) } \chordmode { \time 3/4 c2. c4 c4 c4 }
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Customizing the chord grid style ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Display non-English chord names > ] |
Customizing the no-chord symbol
By default, rests in a ChordNames context cause the text “N.C.”
to be printed. This markup can be customized by setting the
noChordSymbol context property.
<< \chords { R1 \set noChordSymbol = "—" R1 \set noChordSymbol = \markup \italic "Ssh!" R1 } { R1*3 } >>
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Customizing the no-chord symbol ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Displaying complex chords > ] |
Display non-English chord names
The default English naming of chords can be changed to other languages, as demonstrated in this snippet.
scm = \chordmode { c1/c | cis/cis b1/b | bis/bis | bes/bes } \layout { indent = 3\cm ragged-right = ##f \context { \ChordNames \consists "Instrument_name_engraver" } \context { \Score \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-Y = -1.2 \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #RIGHT } } << \new ChordNames { \set instrumentName = #"default" \scm } \new ChordNames { \set instrumentName = #"german" \germanChords \scm } \new ChordNames { \set instrumentName = #"semi-german" \semiGermanChords \scm } \new ChordNames { \set instrumentName = #"italian" \italianChords \scm } \new ChordNames { \set instrumentName = #"french" \frenchChords \scm } \context Voice { \scm } >>
Displaying complex chords
Here is a way to display a chord where the same note is played twice with different accidentals.
fixA = { \once \override Stem.length = #12 } fixB = { \once \override NoteHead.X-offset = #1.7 \once \override Stem.length = #7 \once \override Stem.rotation = #'(45 0 0) \once \override Stem.extra-offset = #'(-0.1 . -0.2) \once \override Flag.style = #'no-flag \once \override Accidental.extra-offset = #'(4 . -.1) } \relative c' { << { \fixA <b d!>8 } \\ { \voiceThree \fixB dis } >> s }
Manually break figured bass extenders for only some numbers
Figured bass often uses extenders to indicate continuation of the
corresponding step. LilyPond tries to make extenders as long as
possible, which is not always wanted. To break individual extenders,
append the modifier \! to a number.
bassfigures = \figuremode { \set useBassFigureExtenders = ##t <6 4>4 <6 4\!> <6 4\!> <6 4\!> | <6\! 4\!> <6 4> <6 4\!> <6 4> } << \new Staff \relative c'' { c1 c1 } \new FiguredBass \bassfigures >>
Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note
To print subsequent ChordNames only differing in its bass note
as slash and bass note, use the Scheme engraver defined in this
snippet. The behaviour may be controlled in detail by the
chordChanges context property.
#(define Bass_changes_equal_root_engraver (lambda (ctx) "For sequential `ChordNames` with the same root but a different bass, the root markup is dropped: D D/C D/B -> D /C /B. The behaviour may be controlled by setting the `chordChanges` context property." (let ((chord-pitches '()) (last-chord-pitches '()) (bass-pitch #f)) (make-engraver ((initialize this-engraver) (let ((chord-note-namer (ly:context-property ctx 'chordNoteNamer))) ;; Set 'chordNoteNamer, respect user setting if already done (ly:context-set-property! ctx 'chordNoteNamer (if (procedure? chord-note-namer) chord-note-namer note-name->markup)))) (listeners ((note-event this-engraver event) (let* ((pitch (ly:event-property event 'pitch)) (pitch-name (ly:pitch-notename pitch)) (pitch-alt (ly:pitch-alteration pitch)) (bass (ly:event-property event 'bass #f)) (inversion (ly:event-property event 'inversion #f))) ;; Collect notes of the chord ;; - to compare inversed chords we need to collect the ;; bass note as usual member of the chord, whereas an ;; added bass must be treated separate from the usual ;; chord-notes ;; - notes are stored as pairs containing their ;; pitch-name (an integer), i.e. disregarding their ;; octave and their alteration (cond (bass (set! bass-pitch pitch)) (inversion (set! bass-pitch pitch) (set! chord-pitches (cons (cons pitch-name pitch-alt) chord-pitches))) (else (set! chord-pitches (cons (cons pitch-name pitch-alt) chord-pitches))))))) (acknowledgers ((chord-name-interface this-engraver grob source-engraver) (let ((chord-changes (ly:context-property ctx 'chordChanges #f))) ;; If subsequent chords are equal apart from their bass, ;; reset the 'text-property. ;; Equality is done by comparing the sorted lists of this ;; chord's elements and the previous chord. Sorting is ;; needed because inverted chords may have a different ;; order of pitches. `chord-changes` needs to be true. (if (and bass-pitch chord-changes (equal? (sort chord-pitches car<) (sort last-chord-pitches car<))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'text (make-line-markup (list (ly:context-property ctx 'slashChordSeparator) ((ly:context-property ctx 'chordNoteNamer) bass-pitch (ly:context-property ctx 'chordNameLowercaseMinor)))))) (set! last-chord-pitches chord-pitches) (set! chord-pitches '()) (set! bass-pitch #f)))) ((finalize this-engraver) (set! last-chord-pitches '())))))) myChords = \chordmode { % \germanChords \set chordChanges = ##t d2:m d:m/cis d:m/c \set chordChanges = ##f d:m/b e1:7 \set chordChanges = ##t e \break \once \set chordChanges = ##f e1/f e2/gis e/+gis e e:m/f d:m d:m/cis d:m/c \set chordChanges = ##f d:m/b } << \new ChordNames \with { \consists #Bass_changes_equal_root_engraver } \myChords \new Staff \myChords >>
Mostrare gli accordi nei cambi
Per impostazione predefinita, ogni accordo inserito viene visualizzato; tale comportamento può essere modificato in modo che i nomi degli accordi siano mostrati solo all’inizio delle linee e quando l’accordo cambia.
harmonies = \chordmode { c'1:m c:m \break c'1:m c:m d } << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \harmonies } \new Staff { \harmonies } >>
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Mostrare gli accordi nei cambi ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi > ] |
Canzoniere semplice
Mettendo insieme nomi degli accordi, melodia e testo si ottiene un canzoniere (in inglese “lead sheet”):
<< \chords { c2 g:sus4 f e } \new Staff \relative c'' { a4 e c8 e r4 b2 c4( d) } \addlyrics { One day this shall be free __ } >>
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Canzoniere semplice ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi
Ecco il modello di un comune spartito semplificato (lead sheet): include linea melodica, testo vocale e sigle degli accordi.
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } harmonies = \chordmode { a2 c } \score { << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \harmonies } \new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text >> \layout { } \midi { } }
Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets
Here is a simple lead sheet template with melody, lyrics, chords, and fret diagrams.
verseI = \lyricmode { \set stanza = #"1." This is the first verse } verseII = \lyricmode { \set stanza = #"2." This is the second verse. } theChords = \chordmode { % insert chords for chordnames and fretboards here c2 g4 c } staffMelody = \relative c' { \key c \major \clef treble % Type notes for melody here c4 d8 e f4 g \bar "|." } \score { << \context ChordNames { \theChords } \context FretBoards { \theChords } \new Staff { \context Voice = "voiceMelody" { \staffMelody } } \new Lyrics = "lyricsI" { \lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseI } \new Lyrics = "lyricsII" { \lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseII } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi
Vuoi preparare uno spartito semplificato (lead sheet) con melodia e accordi? La tua ricerca è finita!
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 f4 e8[ c] d4 g | a2 ~ a } harmonies = \chordmode { c4:m f:min7 g:maj c:aug | d2:dim b4:5 e:sus } \score { << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \harmonies } \new Staff \melody >> \layout{ } \midi { } }
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi ] | [ Up: Chord notation ] | [ Volta sotto gli accordi > ] |
Vertically centering paired figured bass extenders
Where figured bass extender lines are being used by setting
useBassFigureExtenders to #t, pairs of congruent figured
bass extender lines are vertically centered if
figuredBassCenterContinuations is set to #t.
<< \relative c' { \repeat unfold 3 { c8 c b b a a c16 c b b } } \figures { \set useBassFigureExtenders = ##t <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 r <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 <4 3+>16 r \set figuredBassCenterContinuations = ##t <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 r <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 <4 3+>16 r \set figuredBassCenterContinuations = ##f <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 r <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 <4 3+>16 r } >>
Volta sotto gli accordi
Aggiungendo l’incisore Volta_engraver al rigo, è possibile
inserire le volte sotto gli accordi.
\score { << \chords { c1 c1 } \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 \alternative { c' } } } >> \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Volta_engraver" } } }
| [ << Chord notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Volta sotto gli accordi ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Simboli di registro della fisarmonica > ] |
11 Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments
See also Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments.
Simboli di registro della fisarmonica
I simboli di registro della fisarmonica sono disponibili sia come \markup
sia come eventi musicali autonomi (perché i cambi di registro capitano
solitamente tra reali eventi musicali). I registri bassi non sono troppo
standardizzati. I comandi disponibili si trovano nella sezione
«Registri della fisarmonica» della Guida alla notazione.
#(use-modules (lily accreg)) \new PianoStaff << \new Staff \relative { \clef treble \discant "10" r8 s32 f'[ bes f] s e[ a e] s d[ g d] s16 e32[ a] << { r16 <f bes> r <e a> r <d g> } \\ { d r a r bes r } >> | <cis e a>1 } \new Staff \relative { \clef treble \freeBass "1" r8 d'32 s16. c32 s16. bes32 s16. a32[ cis] s16 \clef bass \stdBass "Master" << { r16 <f, bes d>^"b" r <e a c>^"am" r <d g bes>^"gm" | <e a cis>1^"a" } \\ { d8_"D" c_"C" bes_"B" | a1_"A" } >> } >>
| [ << Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Simboli di registro della fisarmonica ] | [ Up: Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Clusters > ] |
Changing the text for sustain markings
With the pedalSustainStrings context property it is possible to
set the text used for pedal down and up. Note that the only valid
strings are those found in the list of pedal glyphs – the values shown
in this snippet constitute an exhaustive list.
sustainNotes = { c4\sustainOn d e\sustainOff\sustainOn f\sustainOff } \relative c' { \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("P" "P-" "-") \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("d" "de" "e") \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("M" "M-" "-") \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("Ped" "*Ped" "*") \sustainNotes } \layout { ragged-right = ##f }
Clusters
Clusters are a device to denote that a complete range of notes is to be played.
fragment = \relative c' { c4 f <e d'>4 <g a>8 <e a> a4 c2 <d b>4 e2 c } << \new Staff \fragment \new Staff \makeClusters \fragment >>
| [ << Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Clusters ] | [ Up: Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Creating slurs across voices > ] |
Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
Il posizionamento dei numeri della diteggiatura può essere regolato in modo preciso. Perché l’orientamento funzioni, occorre usare il costrutto per gli accordi <> anche per le note singole. Si può impostare in modo simile l’orientamento dei numeri di corda e delle diteggiature della mano destra.
\relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1>2 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <e-3>2 \set stringNumberOrientations = #'(up left down) <f\3 a\2 c\1>1 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(down right up) <c\rightHandFinger 1 e\rightHandFinger 2 c'\rightHandFinger 4 > }
Creating slurs across voices
In some situations it is necessary to create slurs between notes from
different voices. The solution is to add invisible notes to one of the
voices, using \hideNotes.
This example is measure 235 of the Ciaconna from Bach’s second partita for solo violin, BWV 1004.
\relative c' { << { d16( a') s a s a[ s a] s a[ s a] } \\ { \slurUp bes,16[ s e]( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes f[( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes fis]( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes g[( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes gis]( \hideNotes a) } >> }
| [ << Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Creating slurs across voices ] | [ Up: Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Tremoli attraverso i righi > ] |
Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround
Sometimes it is better to use stems from the ‘other’ staff for creating cross-staff chords to trick LilyPond’s beam collision detector. In the following snippet, if the stems from the lower staff were used instead, it would be necessary to explicitly use
\override Staff.Beam.collision-voice-only = ##t
so that LilyPond doesn’t move the beams.
\new PianoStaff << \new Staff = up \relative c' << { r4 \override Stem.cross-staff = ##t \override Stem.length = #19 % this is in half-spaces, % so it makes stems 9.5 staffspaces long \override Stem.Y-offset = #-6 % stems are normally lengthened % upwards, so here we must lower the stem by the amount % equal to the lengthening - in this case (19 - 7) / 2 % (7 is default stem length) e e e } { s4 \change Staff = "bottom" \override NoteColumn.ignore-collision = ##t c, c c } >> \new Staff = bottom \relative c' { \clef bass \voiceOne g8 a g a g a g a } >>
Tremoli attraverso i righi
Dato che \repeat tremolo si aspetta esattamente due argomenti musicali per
i tremoli di accordi, la nota o l’accordo che cambiano rigo in un tremolo che
attraversa i righi devono essere posti tra parentesi graffe insieme al
comando \change Staff.
\new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "up" \relative c'' { \key a \major \time 3/8 s4. } \new Staff = "down" \relative c'' { \key a \major \time 3/8 \voiceOne \repeat tremolo 6 { <a e'>32 { \change Staff = "up" \voiceTwo <cis a' dis>32 } } } >>
Fine-tuning pedal brackets
The appearance of pedal brackets may be altered in different ways.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { c2\sostenutoOn c c2\sostenutoOff c c2\tweak shorten-pair #'(-7 . -2) \sostenutoOn c c2\sostenutoOff c c2\tweak edge-height #'(0 . 3) \sostenutoOn c c2\sostenutoOff c }
| [ << Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Fine-tuning pedal brackets ] | [ Up: Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Modello per combo jazz > ] |
Indicare accordi trasversali al rigo con la parentesi quadrata dell’arpeggio
Una parentesi quadrata dell’arpeggio può indicare che delle note su due righi
diversi devono essere suonate con la stessa mano. Per farlo, bisogna far sì che
PianoStaff accetti gli arpeggi trasversali ai righi e gli arpeggi siano
impostati nella forma della parentesi quadrata nel contesto PianoStaff.
(Debussy, Les collines d’Anacapri, m. 65)
\new PianoStaff << \set PianoStaff.connectArpeggios = ##t \override PianoStaff.Arpeggio.stencil = #ly:arpeggio::brew-chord-bracket \new Staff \relative c' { \key b \major \time 6/8 b8-.(\arpeggio fis'-.\> cis-. e-. gis-. b-.)\!\fermata^\laissezVibrer \bar "||" } \new Staff \relative c' { \clef bass \key b \major << { <a e cis>2.\arpeggio } \\ { <a, e a,>2. } >> } >>
Modello per combo jazz
Ecco un modello piuttosto complesso, per un gruppo jazz. Si noti che tutti
gli strumenti sono in \key c \major. Si tratta della tonalità
reale; sarà trasposta automaticamente includendo la
musica all’interno di una sezione \transpose.
\header { title = "Song" subtitle = "(tune)" composer = "Me" meter = "moderato" piece = "Swing" tagline = \markup \column { "LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf," "Berlin 07/07/2003" } } % To make the example display properly in the documentation. \paper { paper-width = 130\mm paper-height = 205\mm } % #(set-global-staff-size 16) \include "english.ly" %%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% sl = { \override NoteHead.style = #'slash \hide Stem } nsl = { \revert NoteHead.style \undo \hide Stem } crOn = \override NoteHead.style = #'cross crOff = \revert NoteHead.style % Insert chord name style stuff here. jazzChords = { } %%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% global = { \time 4/4 } Key = { \key c \major } % ############ Horns ############ % ------ Trumpet ------ trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' { \Key c1 | c | c | } trpHarmony = \transpose c' d { \jazzChords } trumpet = { \global \clef treble \trpt } % ------ Alto Saxophone ------ alto = \transpose c a \relative c' { \Key c1 | c | c | } altoHarmony = \transpose c' a { \jazzChords } altoSax = { \global \clef treble \alto } % ------ Baritone Saxophone ------ bari = \transpose c a' \relative c { \Key c1 | c1 | \sl d4^"Solo" d d d \nsl | } bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | s | d2:maj e:m7 | } bariSax = { \global \clef treble \bari } % ------ Trombone ------ tbone = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } tboneHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords } trombone = { \global \clef bass \tbone } % ############ Rhythm Section ############# % ------ Guitar ------ gtr = \relative c'' { \Key c1 | \sl b4 b b b \nsl | c1 | } gtrHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | c2:min7+ d2:maj9 | s1 | } guitar = { \global \clef treble \gtr } %% ------ Piano ------ rhUpper = \relative c'' { \voiceOne \Key c1 | c | c | } rhLower = \relative c' { \voiceTwo \Key e1 | e | e | } lhUpper = \relative c' { \voiceOne \Key g1 | g | g | } lhLower = \relative c { \voiceTwo \Key c1 | c | c | } PianoRH = { \clef treble \global << \new Voice = "one" \rhUpper \new Voice = "two" \rhLower >> } PianoLH = { \clef bass \global << \new Voice = "one" \lhUpper \new Voice = "two" \lhLower >> } piano = << \new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH \new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH >> % ------ Bass Guitar ------ Bass = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } bass = { \global \clef bass \Bass } % ------ Drums ------ up = \drummode { \voiceOne hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | } down = \drummode { \voiceTwo bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | } drumContents = { \global << \new DrumVoice \up \new DrumVoice \down >> } %%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \book { % For the LilyPond documentation. \score { << \new StaffGroup = "horns" << \new Staff = "trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet" } \trumpet \new Staff = "altosax" \with { instrumentName = "Alto Sax" } \altoSax \new ChordNames = "barichords" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariHarmony \new Staff = "barisax" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariSax \new Staff = "trombone" \with { instrumentName = "Trombone" } \trombone >> \new StaffGroup = "rhythm" << \new ChordNames = "chords" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \gtrHarmony \new Staff = "guitar" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \guitar \new PianoStaff = "piano" \with { instrumentName = "Piano" midiInstrument = "acoustic grand" } \piano \new Staff = "bass" \with { instrumentName = "Bass" } \bass \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "Drums" } \drumContents >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } \context { \Score \override BarNumber.padding = 3 \override RehearsalMark.padding = 2 skipBars = ##t } } \midi { } } }
| [ << Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Modello per combo jazz ] | [ Up: Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Modello per pianoforte (semplice) > ] |
Laissez vibrer ties
Laissez vibrer ties have a fixed size. Their positioning can be tuned
using the tie-configuration property.
See also snippet “Longer laissez vibrer ties”.
\relative c' { <c e g>4\laissezVibrer r <c f g>\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4.\laissezVibrer r8 <c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r \override LaissezVibrerTieColumn.tie-configuration = #`((-7 . ,DOWN) (-5 . ,DOWN) (-3 . ,UP) (-1 . ,UP)) <c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r }
Modello per pianoforte (semplice)
Ecco un comune doppio pentagramma per pianoforte con un po’ di note.
upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } \score { \new PianoStaff \with { instrumentName = "Piano" } << \new Staff = "upper" \upper \new Staff = "lower" \lower >> \layout { } \midi { } }
Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro
Invece di destinare un rigo a parte alla linea melodica e al suo testo, è possibile collocare il testo al centro di un doppio pentagramma per pianoforte.
upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } \score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = upper { \new Voice = "singer" \upper } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "singer" \text \new Staff = lower { \lower } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo
Ecco un tipico formato per canzoni: un rigo con linea melodica e testo, e sotto l’accompagnamento per pianoforte.
melody = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } \score { << \new Voice = "mel" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto mel \text \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "upper" \upper \new Staff = "lower" \lower >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } } \midi { } }
Removing brace on first line of piano score
This snippet removes the first brace from a PianoStaff or a
GrandStaff, together with the clefs. It may be useful when
cutting and pasting the engraved image into existing music.
The code uses \alterBroken to hide the brace delimiter at the
beginning.
someMusic = { \once \omit Staff.Clef \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature \repeat unfold 3 c1 \break \repeat unfold 5 c1 \break \repeat unfold 5 c1 } \score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "right" \relative c'' \someMusic \new Staff = "left" \relative c' { \clef F \someMusic } >> \layout { indent=75\mm \context { \PianoStaff \alterBroken transparent #'(#t) SystemStartBrace } } }
Using \autoChange with more than one voice
Here is a demonstration of how to use \autoChange with more
than one voice.
\score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "up" { << \set Timing.beamExceptions = #'() \set Timing.beatStructure = #'(4) \new Voice { \voiceOne \autoChange \relative c' { g8 a b c d e f g g,8 a b c d e f g } } \new Voice { \voiceTwo \autoChange \relative c' { g8 a b c d e f g g,,8 a b c d e f g } } >> } \new Staff = "down" { \clef bass } >> }
| [ << Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Percussion >> ] |
| [ < Using \autoChange with more than one voice ] | [ Up: Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments ] | [ Percussion > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica
Questo modello aggiunge una riduzione automatica per pianoforte alla tipica
partitura vocale SATB illustrata in “Modello per complesso vocale”. Si
dimostra così uno dei punti di forza di LilyPond – è possibile usare una
definizione musicale più di una volta. Qualsiasi modifica venga fatta alle note
delle voci (ad esempio, tenorMusic) verrà applicata anche alla riduzione
per pianoforte.
\paper { top-system-spacing.basic-distance = 10 score-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 last-bottom-spacing.basic-distance = 10 } global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative { c''4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative { e'4 f d e } altoWords =\lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { << \new ChoirStaff << \new Lyrics = "sopranos" \with { % This is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "altos" \new Lyrics = "tenors" \with { % This is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "basses" \context Lyrics = "sopranos" \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \context Lyrics = "altos" \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \context Lyrics = "tenors" \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \context Lyrics = "basses" \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> \new PianoStaff << \new Staff << \set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f \partCombine << \global \sopMusic >> << \global \altoMusic >> >> \new Staff << \clef bass \set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f \partCombine << \global \tenorMusic >> << \global \bassMusic >> >> >> >> }
12 Percussion
See also Percussion.
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Percussion ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Cow and ride bell example > ] |
Adding drum parts
Using the powerful pre-configured tools such as the \drummode
function and the DrumStaff context, inputting drum parts is
quite easy: drums are placed at their own staff positions (with a
special clef symbol) and have note heads according to the drum.
Attaching an extra symbol to the drum or restricting the number of
lines is possible.
drh = \drummode { cymc4.^"crash" hhc16^"h.h." hh hhc8 hho hhc8 hh16 hh hhc4 r4 r2 } drl = \drummode { bd4 sn8 bd bd4 << bd ss >> bd8 tommh tommh bd toml toml bd tomfh16 tomfh } timb = \drummode { timh4 ssh timl8 ssh r timh r4 ssh8 timl r4 cb8 cb } \score { << \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "timbales" drumStyleTable = #timbales-style \override StaffSymbol.line-count = #2 \override BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1 . 1) } << \timb >> \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "drums" } << \new DrumVoice { \stemUp \drh } \new DrumVoice { \stemDown \drl } >> >> \layout { } \midi { \tempo 4 = 120 } }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Adding drum parts ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Heavily customized polymetric time signatures > ] |
Cow and ride bell example
Two different bells, entered with ‘cb’ (cow bell) and ‘rb’ (ride bell).
#(define mydrums '((ridebell default #f 3) (cowbell default #f -2))) \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = #"Different Bells" } \drummode { \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \set DrumStaff.clefPosition = 0.5 \override DrumStaff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'(-2 3) \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.0 . 1.5) \time 2/4 rb8 8 cb8 16 rb16-> ~ | 16 8 16 cb8 8 | }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Cow and ride bell example ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ High and low woodblock example > ] |
Heavily customized polymetric time signatures
Though the polymetric time signature shown is not the most essential item here, it has been included to show the beat of this piece (which is the template of a real Balkan song, by the way).
melody = \relative c'' { \key g \major \compoundMeter #'((3 8) (2 8) (2 8) (3 8) (2 8) (2 8) (2 8) (2 8) (3 8) (2 8) (2 8)) \set Timing.beamExceptions = #'() \set Timing.beatStructure = 3,2,2,3,2,2,2,2,3,2,2 c8 c c d4 c8 c b c b a4 g fis8 e d c b' c d e4-^ fis8 g \break c,4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 c4. d4 c4 d4. c4 d c2 d4. e4-^ d4 \break } drum = \new DrumStaff \drummode { \repeat volta 2 { bd4.^\markup { Drums } sn4 bd \bar ";" sn4. bd4 sn \bar ";" bd sn bd4. sn4 bd } } \new Staff { \melody \drum }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Heavily customized polymetric time signatures ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Modello per combo jazz > ] |
High and low woodblock example
Two Woodblocks, entered with ‘wbh’ (high woodblock) and ‘wbl’ (low
woodblock). The length of the bar line has been altered with an
\override command, otherwise it would be too short. The
positions of the two staff lines also have to be explicitly defined.
% These lines define the position of the woodblocks in the stave; % if you like, you can change it or you can use special note heads % for the woodblocks. #(define mydrums '((hiwoodblock default #f 3) (lowoodblock default #f -2))) woodstaff = { % This defines a staff with only two lines. % It also defines the positions of the two lines. \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'(-2 3) % This is necessary; if not entered, % the barline would be too short! \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.0 . 1.5) % small correction for the clef: \set DrumStaff.clefPosition = 0.5 } \new DrumStaff { % with this you load your new drum style table \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \woodstaff \drummode { \time 2/4 wbh8 16 16 8-> 8 | wbl8 16 16-> ~ 16 16 r8 | } }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < High and low woodblock example ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Percussion beaters > ] |
Modello per combo jazz
Ecco un modello piuttosto complesso, per un gruppo jazz. Si noti che tutti
gli strumenti sono in \key c \major. Si tratta della tonalità
reale; sarà trasposta automaticamente includendo la
musica all’interno di una sezione \transpose.
\header { title = "Song" subtitle = "(tune)" composer = "Me" meter = "moderato" piece = "Swing" tagline = \markup \column { "LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf," "Berlin 07/07/2003" } } % To make the example display properly in the documentation. \paper { paper-width = 130\mm paper-height = 205\mm } % #(set-global-staff-size 16) \include "english.ly" %%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% sl = { \override NoteHead.style = #'slash \hide Stem } nsl = { \revert NoteHead.style \undo \hide Stem } crOn = \override NoteHead.style = #'cross crOff = \revert NoteHead.style % Insert chord name style stuff here. jazzChords = { } %%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% global = { \time 4/4 } Key = { \key c \major } % ############ Horns ############ % ------ Trumpet ------ trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' { \Key c1 | c | c | } trpHarmony = \transpose c' d { \jazzChords } trumpet = { \global \clef treble \trpt } % ------ Alto Saxophone ------ alto = \transpose c a \relative c' { \Key c1 | c | c | } altoHarmony = \transpose c' a { \jazzChords } altoSax = { \global \clef treble \alto } % ------ Baritone Saxophone ------ bari = \transpose c a' \relative c { \Key c1 | c1 | \sl d4^"Solo" d d d \nsl | } bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | s | d2:maj e:m7 | } bariSax = { \global \clef treble \bari } % ------ Trombone ------ tbone = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } tboneHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords } trombone = { \global \clef bass \tbone } % ############ Rhythm Section ############# % ------ Guitar ------ gtr = \relative c'' { \Key c1 | \sl b4 b b b \nsl | c1 | } gtrHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | c2:min7+ d2:maj9 | s1 | } guitar = { \global \clef treble \gtr } %% ------ Piano ------ rhUpper = \relative c'' { \voiceOne \Key c1 | c | c | } rhLower = \relative c' { \voiceTwo \Key e1 | e | e | } lhUpper = \relative c' { \voiceOne \Key g1 | g | g | } lhLower = \relative c { \voiceTwo \Key c1 | c | c | } PianoRH = { \clef treble \global << \new Voice = "one" \rhUpper \new Voice = "two" \rhLower >> } PianoLH = { \clef bass \global << \new Voice = "one" \lhUpper \new Voice = "two" \lhLower >> } piano = << \new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH \new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH >> % ------ Bass Guitar ------ Bass = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } bass = { \global \clef bass \Bass } % ------ Drums ------ up = \drummode { \voiceOne hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | } down = \drummode { \voiceTwo bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | } drumContents = { \global << \new DrumVoice \up \new DrumVoice \down >> } %%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \book { % For the LilyPond documentation. \score { << \new StaffGroup = "horns" << \new Staff = "trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet" } \trumpet \new Staff = "altosax" \with { instrumentName = "Alto Sax" } \altoSax \new ChordNames = "barichords" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariHarmony \new Staff = "barisax" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariSax \new Staff = "trombone" \with { instrumentName = "Trombone" } \trombone >> \new StaffGroup = "rhythm" << \new ChordNames = "chords" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \gtrHarmony \new Staff = "guitar" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \guitar \new PianoStaff = "piano" \with { instrumentName = "Piano" midiInstrument = "acoustic grand" } \piano \new Staff = "bass" \with { instrumentName = "Bass" } \bass \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "Drums" } \drumContents >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } \context { \Score \override BarNumber.padding = 3 \override RehearsalMark.padding = 2 skipBars = ##t } } \midi { } } }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Modello per combo jazz ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Percussion example > ] |
Percussion beaters
Graphic symbols for percussion instruments are not natively supported; however it is possible to include such symbols, either as an external EPS file or as embedded PostScript code inside a markup, as demonstrated in this example.
stick = \markup \with-dimensions #'(0.80 . 5.2) #'(0.85 . 5.2) { \postscript " 0 6 translate 0.8 -0.8 scale 0 0 0 setrgbcolor [] 0 setdash 1 setlinewidth 0 setlinejoin 0 setlinecap gsave [1 0 0 1 0 0] concat gsave [1 0 0 1 -3.5406095 -199.29342] concat gsave 0 0 0 setrgbcolor newpath 7.1434065 200.94354 moveto 7.2109628 200.90454 7.2785188 200.86554 7.3460747 200.82654 curveto 8.2056347 202.31535 9.0651946 203.80414 9.9247546 205.29295 curveto 9.8571989 205.33195 9.7896429 205.37095 9.7220864 205.40996 curveto 8.8625264 203.92115 8.0029664 202.43233 7.1434065 200.94354 curveto closepath eofill grestore gsave 0 0 0 setrgbcolor newpath 4.9646672 203.10444 moveto 5.0036707 203.03688 5.0426744 202.96933 5.0816777 202.90176 curveto 6.5704792 203.76133 8.0592809 204.6209 9.5480824 205.48045 curveto 9.5090791 205.54801 9.4700754 205.61556 9.4310717 205.68311 curveto 7.94227 204.82356 6.4534687 203.96399 4.9646672 203.10444 curveto closepath eofill grestore gsave << /ShadingType 3 /ColorSpace /DeviceRGB /Coords [113.13708 207.87465 0 113.13708 207.87465 16.162441] /Extend [true true] /Domain [0 1] /Function << /FunctionType 3 /Functions [ << /FunctionType 2 /Domain [0 1] /C0 [1 1 1] /C1 [0.72941178 0.72941178 0.72941178] /N 1 >> ] /Domain [0 1] /Bounds [ ] /Encode [ 0 1 ] >> >> newpath 7.6422017 200.76488 moveto 7.6505696 201.02554 7.3905363 201.24867 7.1341335 201.20075 curveto 6.8759501 201.16916 6.6949602 200.87978 6.7801462 200.63381 curveto 6.8480773 200.39155 7.1438307 200.25377 7.3728389 200.35861 curveto 7.5332399 200.42458 7.6444521 200.59122 7.6422017 200.76488 curveto closepath clip gsave [ 0.052859054 0.063089841 -0.020912282 0.017521108 5.7334261 189.76443 ] concat shfill grestore grestore 0 0 0 setrgbcolor [] 0 setdash 0.027282091 setlinewidth 0 setlinejoin 0 setlinecap newpath 7.6422017 200.76488 moveto 7.6505696 201.02554 7.3905363 201.24867 7.1341335 201.20075 curveto 6.8759501 201.16916 6.6949602 200.87978 6.7801462 200.63381 curveto 6.8480773 200.39155 7.1438307 200.25377 7.3728389 200.35861 curveto 7.5332399 200.42458 7.6444521 200.59122 7.6422017 200.76488 curveto closepath stroke gsave << /ShadingType 3 /ColorSpace /DeviceRGB /Coords [113.13708 207.87465 0 113.13708 207.87465 16.162441] /Extend [true true] /Domain [0 1] /Function << /FunctionType 3 /Functions [ << /FunctionType 2 /Domain [0 1] /C0 [1 1 1] /C1 [0.72941178 0.72941178 0.72941178] /N 1 >> ] /Domain [0 1] /Bounds [ ] /Encode [ 0 1 ] >> >> newpath 5.2721217 202.83181 moveto 5.2804896 203.09247 5.0204563 203.3156 4.7640539 203.26768 curveto 4.5058701 203.23609 4.3248803 202.94671 4.4100662 202.70074 curveto 4.4779975 202.45848 4.7737511 202.3207 5.0027593 202.42554 curveto 5.1631598 202.49149 5.2743721 202.65813 5.2721217 202.83181 curveto closepath clip gsave [ 0.052859054 0.063089841 -0.020912282 0.017521108 3.363346 191.83136 ] concat shfill grestore grestore 0 0 0 setrgbcolor [] 0 setdash 0.027282091 setlinewidth 0 setlinejoin 0 setlinecap newpath 5.2721217 202.83181 moveto 5.2804896 203.09247 5.0204563 203.3156 4.7640539 203.26768 curveto 4.5058701 203.23609 4.3248803 202.94671 4.4100662 202.70074 curveto 4.4779975 202.45848 4.7737511 202.3207 5.0027593 202.42554 curveto 5.1631598 202.49149 5.2743721 202.65813 5.2721217 202.83181 curveto closepath stroke grestore grestore " } \score { b1^\stick }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Percussion beaters ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Printing music with different time signatures > ] |
Percussion example
A short example taken from Stravinsky’s L’histoire du Soldat.
#(define mydrums '((bassdrum default #f 4) (snare default #f -4) (tambourine default #f 0))) U = \stemUp D = \stemDown global = { \time 3/8 s4. \time 2/4 s2*2 \time 3/8 s4. \time 2/4 s2 } drumsA = { \context DrumVoice << \global \drummode { \autoBeamOff \D sn8 \U tamb s | sn4 \D sn4 | \U tamb8 \D sn \U sn16 \D sn \U sn8 | \D sn8 \U tamb s | \U sn4 s8 \U tamb } >> } drumsB = \drummode { s4 bd8 s2*2 s4 bd8 s4 bd8 s } \layout { indent = 40\mm \context { \DrumStaff drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) } } \score { \new StaffGroup << \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = \markup \center-column { "Tambourine" "et" "caisse claire s. timbre" } } \drumsA \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "Grosse Caisse" }\drumsB >> }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Percussion example ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Tam-tam example > ] |
Printing music with different time signatures
In the following snippet, two parts have a completely different time signature, yet remain synchronized.
The bar lines can no longer be printed at the Score level; to
allow independent bar lines in each part, the
Default_barline_engraver and Timing_translator are moved
from the Score context to the Staff context.
If bar numbers are required, the Bar_number_engraver should also
be moved, since it relies on properties set by the
Timing_translator; a \with block can be used to add bar
numbers to the relevant staff.
global = { \time 3/4 s2.*3 \break s2.*3 } \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Timing_translator" \remove "Bar_number_engraver" \override SpacingSpanner.uniform-stretching = ##t \override SpacingSpanner.strict-note-spacing = ##t proportionalNotationDuration = #1/64 } \context { \Staff \consists "Timing_translator" } \context { \Voice \remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" tupletFullLength = ##t } } Bassklarinette = \new Staff \with { \consists "Bar_number_engraver" barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) \override BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible } << \global { \clef treble \time 3/8 d''4. | \time 3/4 r8 des''2( c''8) | \time 7/8 r4. ees''2 ~ | \time 2/4 \tupletUp \tuplet 3/2 { ees''4 r4 d''4 ~ } | \time 3/8 \tupletUp \tuplet 4/3 { d''4 r4 } | \time 2/4 e''2 | \time 3/8 es''4. | \time 3/4 r8 d''2 r8 | } >> Perkussion = \new StaffGroup << \new Staff << \global { \clef percussion \time 3/4 r4 c'2 ~ | c'2. | R2. | r2 g'4 ~ | g'2. ~ | g'2. | } >> \new Staff << \global { \clef percussion \time 3/4 R2. | g'2. ~ | g'2. | r4 g'2 ~ | g'2 r4 | g'2. | } >> >> \score { << \Bassklarinette \Perkussion >> }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Printing music with different time signatures ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Tambourine example > ] |
Tam-tam example
A tam-tam example, entered with ‘tt’.
#(define mydrums '((tamtam default #f 0))) \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = #"Tamtam" } \drummode { \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'( 0 ) \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5) tt 1 \pp \laissezVibrer }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Fretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Tam-tam example ] | [ Up: Percussion ] | [ Fretted string instruments > ] |
Tambourine example
A tambourine example, entered with ‘tamb’.
#(define mydrums '((tambourine default #f 0))) \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = #"Tambourine" } \drummode { \set DrumStaff.drumStyleTable = #(alist->hash-table mydrums) \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-positions = #'( 0 ) \override Staff.BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1.5 . 1.5) \time 6/8 tamb8. 16 8 8 8 8 | tamb4. 8 8 8 | % The trick with the scaled duration and the shorter rest % is neccessary for the correct ending of the trill-span! tamb2.*5/6 \startTrillSpan s8 \stopTrillSpan | }
| [ << Percussion ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Tambourine example ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding fingerings to a score > ] |
13 Fretted string instruments
See also Fretted string instruments.
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Fretted string instruments ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Adding fingerings to tablatures > ] |
Adding fingerings to a score
Fingering instructions can be entered using a simple syntax.
\relative c'' { c4-1 d-2 f-4 e-3 }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Adding fingerings to a score ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Adding markups in a tablature > ] |
Adding fingerings to tablatures
To add fingerings to tablatures, use a combination of \markup
and \finger.
one = \markup { \finger 1 } two = \markup { \finger 2 } threeTwo = \markup { \override #'(baseline-skip . 2) \column { \finger 3 \finger 2 } } \score { \new TabStaff { \tabFullNotation \stemUp e8\4^\one b\2 <g\3 e'\1>^>[ b\2 e\4] <a\3 fis'\1>^>^\threeTwo[ b\2 e\4] } }
Adding markups in a tablature
By default, markups are not displayed in a tablature.
To make them appear, revert the stencil property of the
TextScript grob in the TabStaff context.
high = { r4 r8 <g c'> q r8 r4 } low = { c4 r4 c8 r8 g,8 b, } pulse = { s8^"1" s^"&" s^"2" s^"&" s^"3" s^"&" s^"4" s^"&" } \score { \new TabStaff { \repeat unfold 2 << \high \\ \low \\ \pulse >> } \layout { \context { \TabStaff \clef moderntab \revert TextScript.stencil \override TextScript.font-series = #'bold \override TextScript.font-size = #-2 \override TextScript.color = #red } \context { \Score proportionalNotationDuration = #1/8 } } }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Adding markups in a tablature ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Automatic fretboards barré > ] |
Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo
Per impostazione predefinita, le diteggiature orientate verticalmente sono poste fuori dal rigo; questo comportamento tuttavia può essere disabilitato. Occorre fare attenzione alle situazioni in cui le diteggiature e i gambi sono rivolti nella stessa direzione: normalmente le diteggiature evitano soltanto i gambi con travature. Questa impostazione predefinita può essere cambiata in modo da evitare tutti i gambi oppure nessuno. L’esempio seguente mostra queste due opzioni, così come tornare al comportamento predefinito.
\relative c' { <c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2 \override Fingering.staff-padding = #'() <c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>4 g'-0 a8[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = ##f a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = ##t a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = #only-if-beamed a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r }
Automatic fretboards barré
When automatic fretboards are used, barré indicators are drawn whenever one finger is responsible for multiple strings.
If no finger indications are given in the chord from which the automatic fretboard is created, no barré indicators are included, because there is no way to identify where barrés should be placed.
\new FretBoards { <f,-1 c-3 f-4 a-2 c'-1 f'-1>1 <f, c f a c' f'>1 }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Automatic fretboards barré ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Chord changes for fretboards > ] |
Cambiare l’orientamento della tastiera
I diagrammi dei tasti possono essere orientati in tre modi.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" << \chords { c1 c1 c1 } \new FretBoards \chordmode { c1 \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.orientation = #'landscape c1 \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.orientation = #'opposing-landscape c1 } \new Voice { c'1 c'1 c' } >>
Chord changes for fretboards
Fretboards can be set to display only when the chord changes, or at the beginning of a new line.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" myChords = \chordmode { c1 c1 \break \set chordChanges = ##t c1 c1 \break c1 c1 } << \new ChordNames { \myChords } \new FretBoards { \myChords } \new Staff { \myChords } >>
Glissando di accordi in intavolatura
I glissati (o slide) di accordi vengono indicati sia nel rigo (contesto
Staff) sia nell’intavolatura (contesto TabStaff). I numeri
di corda sono necessari per TabStaff, perché i calcoli automatici
della corda sono diversi per gli accordi e per le note singole.
myMusic = \relative c' { <c e g>1 \glissando <f a c> <cis, eis gis>1 \glissando <f a c> <cis eis gis>1 \glissando <f a c\3> } \score { << \new Staff { \clef "treble_8" \omit StringNumber \myMusic } \new TabStaff \myMusic >> } \score { << \new Staff { \clef "treble_8" \omit StringNumber \myMusic } \new TabStaff \with { \override Glissando.style = #'none } { \myMusic } >> }
Chords with stretched fingering for FretBoards and TabVoice
Sometimes chords with a stretched fingering are required. If not
otherwise specified the context property maximumFretStretch is
set to value 4, though, resulting in a warning about “No string
for pitch ...”, and the note is omitted. You may set
maximumFretStretch to an approppriate value or explicitly assign
string numbers to all notes of a chord to fix that.
% The code below prints two warnings for the second chord, % which may be omitted by uncommenting the following line. % % #(for-each (lambda (x) (ly:expect-warning "No string for pitch")) (iota 2)) mus = { <c' bes'> <c'\2 bes'> \set maximumFretStretch = 5 <c' bes'> <c'\2 bes'\1> } << \new FretBoards \mus \new TabVoice \mus >>
Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
Il posizionamento dei numeri della diteggiatura può essere regolato in modo preciso. Perché l’orientamento funzioni, occorre usare il costrutto per gli accordi <> anche per le note singole. Si può impostare in modo simile l’orientamento dei numeri di corda e delle diteggiature della mano destra.
\relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 e-3 a-5>4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1>2 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <e-3>2 \set stringNumberOrientations = #'(up left down) <f\3 a\2 c\1>1 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(down right up) <c\rightHandFinger 1 e\rightHandFinger 2 c'\rightHandFinger 4 > }
Personalizzare la tastiera del diagramma dei tasti
Le proprietà del diagramma dei tasti possono essere impostate tramite
'fret-diagram-details. Per i diagrammi dell’oggetto FretBoard,
gli override vengono applicati all’oggetto FretBoards.FretBoard.
Come Voice, FretBoards è un contesto di basso livello,
dunque può essere omesso negli override delle proprietà.
% begin verbatim \include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \chordmode { c' } #guitar-tuning "x;1-1-(;3-2;3-3;3-4;1-1-);" % shorthand oo = #(define-music-function (grob-path value) (list? scheme?) #{ \once \override $grob-path = #value #}) << \new ChordNames { \chordmode { c1 | c | c | d | bes } } \new FretBoards { % Set global properties of fret diagram \override FretBoards.FretBoard.size = 1.2 \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code = #'in-dot \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color = #'white \chordmode { c \oo FretBoard.size #1.0 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-type #'straight \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color #'black \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code #'below-string c' \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-type #'none \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.number-type #'arabic \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.orientation #'landscape \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.mute-string "M" \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.label-dir #LEFT \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color #'black c' \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code #'below-string \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-radius #0.35 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-position #0.5 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.fret-count #3 d \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-type #'straight \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code #'none \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-radius #0.25 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color #'black \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.string-overhang #0. \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-thickness #2. bes } } \new Voice { c'1 | c' | c' | d' | bes } >>
Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup
Le proprietà del diagramma dei tasti si possono impostare tramite
'fret-diagram-details. Per diagrammi di tipo markup, gli
override possono essere applicati all’oggetto Voice.TextScript o
direttamente al markup.
<< \chords { c1 | c | c | d } \new Voice = "mel" { \textLengthOn % Set global properties of fret diagram \override TextScript.size = 1.2 \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details.finger-code = #'in-dot \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details.dot-color = #'white %% C major for guitar, no barre, using defaults % terse style c'1^\markup { \fret-diagram-terse "x;3-3;2-2;o;1-1;o;" } %% C major for guitar, barred on third fret % verbose style % size 1.0 % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre c'1^\markup { % standard size \override #'(size . 1.0) { \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ( (number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . in-dot) (barre-type . straight))) { \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) } } } %% C major for guitar, barred on third fret % verbose style % landscape orientation, arabic numbers, M for mute string % no barre, fret label down or left, small mute label font c'1^\markup { \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ( (finger-code . below-string) (number-type . arabic) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (orientation . landscape) (barre-type . none) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) { \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) } } %% simple D chord % terse style % larger dots, centered dots, fewer frets % label below string d'1^\markup { \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ( (finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) { \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" } } } >>
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Flamenco notation > ] |
Diteggiature, indicazioni di corda e diteggiature della mano destra
Questo esempio combina la diteggiatura per la mano sinistra, le indicazioni di stringa e la diteggiatura della mano destra.
#(define RH rightHandFinger) \relative c { \clef "treble_8" <c-3\5\RH 1 >4 <e-2\4\RH 2 >4 <g-0\3\RH 3 >4 <c-1\2\RH 4 >4 }
Flamenco notation
For flamenco guitar, some special notation is used.
- A golpe symbol indicates a slap on the guitar body with the nail of the ring finger.
- An arrow indicates (the direction of) strokes.
- Different letters for fingering are used (“p”: thumb, “i”: index finger, “m”: middle finger, “a”: ring finger and “x”: little finger).
- Marking 3- and 4-finger rasgueados: stroke upwards with all fingers, ending with an up- and down using the index finger.
- Abanicos are strokes (in tuples) with thumb (down), little and index finger (both up). There’s also an abanico 2 where middle and ring finger are used instead of the little finger.
- Alza pua indicates fast playing with the thumb.
Most figures use arrows in combination with fingering; with abanicos and rasgueados, note heads are printed only for the first chord.
This snippet contains some header-like code that can be copied as
flamenco.ly and included in source files.
%%%%%%% Cut here ----- Start of `flamenco.ly`. % Text indicators. abanico = ^\markup \small { \italic Abanico } rasgueado = ^\markup \small { \italic Ras. } alzapua = ^\markup \small { \italic Alzapua } % Finger stroke symbols. strokeUp = \markup { \combine \override #'(thickness . 1.3) \draw-line #'(0 . 2) \raise #2 \arrow-head #Y #UP ##f } strokeDown = \markup { \combine \arrow-head #Y #DOWN ##f \override #'(thickness . 1.3) \draw-line #'(0 . 2) } % Golpe symbol. golpe = \markup { \filled-box #'(0 . 1) #'(0 . 1) #0 \hspace #-1.6 \with-color #white \filled-box #'(0.15 . 0.85) #'(0.15 . 0.85) #0 } % Strokes, fingers, and golpe command. RHp = \rightHandFinger #1 RHi = \rightHandFinger #2 RHm = \rightHandFinger #3 RHa = \rightHandFinger #4 RHx = \rightHandFinger #5 RHu = \rightHandFinger \strokeUp RHd = \rightHandFinger \strokeDown RHg = \rightHandFinger \golpe % Various shorthands. tupletOff = { \once \omit TupletNumber \once \omit TupletBracket } tupletsOff = { \omit TupletNumber \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam } tupletsOn = { \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = #'default \undo \omit TupletNumber } headsOff = { \hide TabNoteHead \hide NoteHead \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##t } headsOn = { \override TabNoteHead.transparent = ##f \override NoteHead.transparent = ##f \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##f } %%%%%%% Cut here ----- End of `flamenco.ly`. part = \relative c' { \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up) \key a\major <a, e' a cis e\RHu\RHi>8 <a e' a cis e\RHd\RHi>8 r4 r2^\markup\golpe | <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHi>8 <a e' a cis e\RHd\RHi>8 <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHi\RHg>8 <a e' a cis e\RHd\RHi>8 r2 | <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHa>16\rasgueado \headsOff <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHm> <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHi> <a e' a cis e\RHd\RHi>~ \headsOn <a e' a cis e>2 r4 | \tupletOff \tuplet 5/4 { <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHx>16\rasgueado \headsOff <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHa> <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHm> <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHi> <a e' a cis e\RHd\RHi>~ \headsOn } <a e' a cis e>2 r4 | <>\abanico \tupletsOff \repeat unfold 4 { \tuplet 3/2 { <a e' a cis e\RHd\RHp>8 \headsOff <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHx> <a e' a cis e\RHu\RHi> \headsOn } } \tupletsOff | <>\alzapua \override Beam.positions = #'(2 . 2) \repeat unfold 4 { \tuplet 3/2 { a8\RHp <e' a\RHu\RHg> <e a\RHd> } } \tupletsOn | <a, e' a\RHu\RHm>1 \bar "|." } \score { \new StaffGroup << \context Staff = "part" { \clef "G_8" \part } \context TabStaff { \part } >> \layout { ragged-right = ##t } }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Flamenco notation ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Tabelle alternative per i diagrammi dei tasti > ] |
Fret diagrams explained and developed
This snippet shows many possibilities for obtaining and tweaking fret diagrams.
<< \chords { a1 a \bar "||" \break \repeat unfold 3 { c c c d d \bar "||" \break } } \new Voice { % Set global properties of fret diagram \override TextScript.size = 1.2 \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .finger-code = #'below-string \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .dot-color = #'black % 1 % % A chord for ukulele. a'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((string-count . 4) (dot-color . white) (finger-code . in-dot))) \fret-diagram "4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;" % 2 % % A chord for ukulele, with formatting defined in definition % string: 1.2 * size, 4 strings, 4 frets, fingerings below, % string dot radius .35 of fret spacing, dot position 0.55 of % fret spacing. a'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((dot-color . white) (open-string . "o"))) \fret-diagram "s:1.2;w:4;h:3;f:2;d:0.35;p:0.55;4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;" %% %% These chords will be in normal orientation %% % 3 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: verbose style, % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . below-string) (barre-type . straight))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) % 4 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: double barre used % to test barre function, verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . arabic) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . in-dot) (fret-label-font-mag . 0.6) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 4 2 5) (barre 5 1 3)) % 5 % % C major for guitar, with capo on third fret: verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-upper) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . none) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0.5) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (capo 3) (open 5) (place-fret 4 5 1) (place-fret 3 5 2) (place-fret 2 5 3) (open 1)) % 6 % % Simple D chord. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (string-thickness-factor . 0.3) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" % 7 % % Simple D chord, large top fret thickness. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (top-fret-thickness . 7) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" %% %% These chords will be in landscape orientation %% \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .orientation = #'landscape % 8 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: verbose style, % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight % barre. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . below-string) (barre-type . straight))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) % 9 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: Double barre % used to test barre function, verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . arabic) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . in-dot) (fret-label-font-mag . 0.6) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 4 2 5) (barre 5 1 3)) % 10 % % C major for guitar, with capo on third fret: verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-upper) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . none) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0.5) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (capo 3) (open 5) (place-fret 4 5 1) (place-fret 3 5 2) (place-fret 2 5 3) (open 1)) % 11 % % Simple D chord. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" % 12 % % Simple D chord, large top fret thickness. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (top-fret-thickness . 7) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" %% %% These chords will be in opposing-landscape orientation. %% \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .orientation = #'opposing-landscape % 13 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: verbose style, % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight % barre. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . below-string) (barre-type . straight))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) % 14 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: double barre % used to test barre function, verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . arabic) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . in-dot) (fret-label-font-mag . 0.6) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 4 2 5) (barre 5 1 3)) % 15 % % C major for guitar, with capo on third fret: verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-upper) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . none) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0.5) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (capo 3) (open 5) (place-fret 4 5 1) (place-fret 3 5 2) (place-fret 2 5 3) (open 1)) % 16 % % Simple D chord. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" % 17 % % Simple D chord, large top fret thickness. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (top-fret-thickness . 7) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" } >> \paper { ragged-right = ##t system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 } \layout { \context { \Score \override SpacingSpanner.spacing-increment = 3 } }
Tabelle alternative per i diagrammi dei tasti
Si possono creare tabelle alternative per i diagrammi dei tasti. Queste possono essere usate per avere diagrammi alternativi per uno stesso accordo.
Per poter usare una tabella alternativa, deve prima essere creata. Quindi si aggiungono i diagrammi alla tabella.
La tabella può essere vuota oppure ricopiata da una tabella esistente.
La tabella da usare nel mostrare i diagrammi predefiniti viene selezionata
dalla proprietà \predefinedDiagramTable.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" % Make a blank new fretboard table. #(define custom-fretboard-table-one (make-fretboard-table)) % Make a new fretboard table as a copy of `default-fret-table`. #(define custom-fretboard-table-two (make-fretboard-table default-fret-table)) % Add a chord to `custom-fretboard-table-one`. \storePredefinedDiagram #custom-fretboard-table-one \chordmode {c} #guitar-tuning "3-(;3;5;5;5;3-);" % Add a chord to `custom-fretboard-table-two`. \storePredefinedDiagram #custom-fretboard-table-two \chordmode {c} #guitar-tuning "x;3;5;5;5;o;" << \chords { c1 | d1 | c1 | d1 | c1 | d1 | } \new FretBoards { \chordmode { \set predefinedDiagramTable = #default-fret-table c1 | d1 | \set predefinedDiagramTable = #custom-fretboard-table-one c1 | d1 | \set predefinedDiagramTable = #custom-fretboard-table-two c1 | d1 | } } \new Staff { \clef "treble_8" << \chordmode { c1 | d1 | c1 | d1 | c1 | d1 | } { s1_\markup "Default table" | s1 | s1_\markup \column { "New table" "from empty" } | s1 | s1_\markup \column { "New table" "from default" } | s1 | } >> } >>
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Tabelle alternative per i diagrammi dei tasti ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Guitar slides > ] |
Armonici su corde premute in intavolatura
Questo frammento mostra come scrivere su intavolatura armonici su corde premute.
pinchedHarmonics = { \textSpannerDown \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup {\halign #-0.5 \teeny "PH" } \override TextSpanner.style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner.dash-period = 0.6 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.attach-dir = 1 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) } \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.padding = -0.5 } harmonics = { % artificial harmonics (AH) \textLengthOn <\parenthesize b b'\harmonic>4_\markup { \teeny "AH 16" } <\parenthesize g g'\harmonic>4_\markup { \teeny "AH 17" } <\parenthesize d' d''\harmonic>2_\markup { \teeny "AH 19" } % pinched harmonics (PH) \pinchedHarmonics <a'\harmonic>2\startTextSpan <d''\harmonic>4 <e'\harmonic>4\stopTextSpan % tapped harmonics (TH) <\parenthesize g\4 g'\harmonic>4_\markup { \teeny "TH 17" } <\parenthesize a\4 a'\harmonic>4_\markup { \teeny "TH 19" } <\parenthesize c'\3 c''\harmonic>2_\markup { \teeny "TH 17" } % touch harmonics (TCH) a4( <e''\harmonic>2. )_\markup { \teeny "TCH" } } frettedStrings = { % artificial harmonics (AH) \harmonicByFret 4 g4\3 \harmonicByFret 5 d4\4 \harmonicByFret 7 g2\3 % pinched harmonics (PH) \harmonicByFret 7 d2\4 \harmonicByFret 5 d4\4 \harmonicByFret 7 a4\5 % tapped harmonics (TH) \harmonicByFret 5 d4\4 \harmonicByFret 7 d4\4 \harmonicByFret 5 g2\3 % touch harmonics (TCH) a4 \harmonicByFret 9 g2.\3 } \score { << \new Staff \with { \omit StringNumber } { \new Voice { \clef "treble_8" \harmonics } } \new TabStaff { \new TabVoice { \frettedStrings } } >> }
Guitar slides
Unlike glissandos, slides may go from an imprecise point of the fretboard to a specific fret. A good way to do this is to add a hidden grace note before the note which is actually played, as demonstrated in the following example.
% Hide fret number: useful to draw slide into/from a casual point of % the fretboard. hideFretNumber = { \once \hide TabNoteHead \once \hide NoteHead \once \omit Stem \once \omit Flag \once \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##t \once \override Glissando.bound-details.left.padding = #0.3 } music= \relative c' { \grace { \hideFretNumber d8\2 \glissando s2 } g2\2 \grace { \hideFretNumber g8\2 \glissando s2 } d2 | \grace { \hideFretNumber c,8 \glissando s } f4\5^\markup \tiny { Slide into } \grace { \hideFretNumber f8 \glissando s } a4\4 \grace { \hideFretNumber e'8\3 \glissando s } b4\3^\markup \tiny { Slide from } \grace { \hideFretNumber b'8 \glissando s2 } g4 | } \score { << \new Staff { \clef "G_8" \music } \new TabStaff { \music } >> }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Guitar slides ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Martellato e strappato > ] |
Ritmi di accompagnamento per chitarra
Per la musica per chitarra, è possibile mostrare i ritmi di accompagnamento, insieme alle note della melodia e ai nomi e ai diagrammi degli accordi.
\include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" << \new ChordNames \chordmode { c1 | f | g | c } \new FretBoards \chordmode { c1 | f | g | c } \new Voice \with { \consists "Pitch_squash_engraver" } \relative c'' { \improvisationOn c4 c8 c c4 c8 c f4 f8 f f4 f8 f g4 g8 g g4 g8 g c4 c8 c c4 c8 c } \new Voice = "melody" \relative c'' { c2 e4 e4 f2. r4 g2. a4 e4 c2. } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "melody" { This is my song. I like to sing. } >>
Martellato e strappato
Il martellato (hammer on) e lo strappato (pull off) si possono ottenere con le legature di portamento.
\new TabStaff { \relative c' { d4( e\2) a( g) } }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Martellato e strappato ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Martellato e strappato usando le voci > ] |
Martellato e strappato usando accordi
Quando il martellato o lo strappato si applicano a delle note in un accordo, viene disegnato
un solo arco. Ma è possibile avere un “doppio arco” impostando la proprietà
doubleSlurs su #t.
\new TabStaff { \relative c' { % chord hammer-on and pull-off \set doubleSlurs = ##t <g' b>8( <a c> <g b>) } }
Martellato e strappato usando le voci
L’arco del martellato o dello strappato è rivolto in alto nella prima e terza voce, mentre è rivolto in basso nella seconda e quarta voce.
\new TabStaff { \relative c' { << { \voiceOne g2( a) } \\ { \voiceTwo a,( b) } >> \oneVoice } }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Martellato e strappato usando le voci ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Modello per combo jazz > ] |
How to change fret diagram position
If you want to move the position of a fret diagram, for example, to avoid collision, or to place it between two notes, you have various possibilities.
1) Modify the value of the padding or extra-offset
property (as shown in the first line).
2) You can add an invisible voice and attach the fret diagrams to the invisible notes in that voice (as shown in the second line).
If you need to move the fret according with a rythmic position inside the bar (in the example, the third beat of the measure) the second example is better, because the fret is aligned with the third beat itself.
harmonies = \chordmode { a8:13 \once \override ChordNames.ChordName.extra-offset = #'(10 . 0) b8:13 s4. | s2 b2:13 } \score { << \new ChordNames \harmonies \new Staff { % Method 1. a8^\markup \fret-diagram "6-x;5-0;4-2;3-0;2-0;1-2;" \once \override TextScript.extra-offset = #'(10 . 0) b4.~^\markup \fret-diagram "6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" b4. a8 | \break % Method 2. << { a8 b4.~ b4. a8 } { s2 s2^\markup \fret-diagram "6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" } >> | } >> }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < How to change fret diagram position ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Laissez vibrer ties > ] |
Modello per combo jazz
Ecco un modello piuttosto complesso, per un gruppo jazz. Si noti che tutti
gli strumenti sono in \key c \major. Si tratta della tonalità
reale; sarà trasposta automaticamente includendo la
musica all’interno di una sezione \transpose.
\header { title = "Song" subtitle = "(tune)" composer = "Me" meter = "moderato" piece = "Swing" tagline = \markup \column { "LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf," "Berlin 07/07/2003" } } % To make the example display properly in the documentation. \paper { paper-width = 130\mm paper-height = 205\mm } % #(set-global-staff-size 16) \include "english.ly" %%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% sl = { \override NoteHead.style = #'slash \hide Stem } nsl = { \revert NoteHead.style \undo \hide Stem } crOn = \override NoteHead.style = #'cross crOff = \revert NoteHead.style % Insert chord name style stuff here. jazzChords = { } %%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% global = { \time 4/4 } Key = { \key c \major } % ############ Horns ############ % ------ Trumpet ------ trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' { \Key c1 | c | c | } trpHarmony = \transpose c' d { \jazzChords } trumpet = { \global \clef treble \trpt } % ------ Alto Saxophone ------ alto = \transpose c a \relative c' { \Key c1 | c | c | } altoHarmony = \transpose c' a { \jazzChords } altoSax = { \global \clef treble \alto } % ------ Baritone Saxophone ------ bari = \transpose c a' \relative c { \Key c1 | c1 | \sl d4^"Solo" d d d \nsl | } bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | s | d2:maj e:m7 | } bariSax = { \global \clef treble \bari } % ------ Trombone ------ tbone = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } tboneHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords } trombone = { \global \clef bass \tbone } % ############ Rhythm Section ############# % ------ Guitar ------ gtr = \relative c'' { \Key c1 | \sl b4 b b b \nsl | c1 | } gtrHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | c2:min7+ d2:maj9 | s1 | } guitar = { \global \clef treble \gtr } %% ------ Piano ------ rhUpper = \relative c'' { \voiceOne \Key c1 | c | c | } rhLower = \relative c' { \voiceTwo \Key e1 | e | e | } lhUpper = \relative c' { \voiceOne \Key g1 | g | g | } lhLower = \relative c { \voiceTwo \Key c1 | c | c | } PianoRH = { \clef treble \global << \new Voice = "one" \rhUpper \new Voice = "two" \rhLower >> } PianoLH = { \clef bass \global << \new Voice = "one" \lhUpper \new Voice = "two" \lhLower >> } piano = << \new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH \new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH >> % ------ Bass Guitar ------ Bass = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } bass = { \global \clef bass \Bass } % ------ Drums ------ up = \drummode { \voiceOne hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | } down = \drummode { \voiceTwo bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | } drumContents = { \global << \new DrumVoice \up \new DrumVoice \down >> } %%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \book { % For the LilyPond documentation. \score { << \new StaffGroup = "horns" << \new Staff = "trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet" } \trumpet \new Staff = "altosax" \with { instrumentName = "Alto Sax" } \altoSax \new ChordNames = "barichords" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariHarmony \new Staff = "barisax" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariSax \new Staff = "trombone" \with { instrumentName = "Trombone" } \trombone >> \new StaffGroup = "rhythm" << \new ChordNames = "chords" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \gtrHarmony \new Staff = "guitar" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \guitar \new PianoStaff = "piano" \with { instrumentName = "Piano" midiInstrument = "acoustic grand" } \piano \new Staff = "bass" \with { instrumentName = "Bass" } \bass \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "Drums" } \drumContents >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } \context { \Score \override BarNumber.padding = 3 \override RehearsalMark.padding = 2 skipBars = ##t } } \midi { } } }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Modello per combo jazz ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom > ] |
Laissez vibrer ties
Laissez vibrer ties have a fixed size. Their positioning can be tuned
using the tie-configuration property.
See also snippet “Longer laissez vibrer ties”.
\relative c' { <c e g>4\laissezVibrer r <c f g>\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4\laissezVibrer r <c d f g>4.\laissezVibrer r8 <c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r \override LaissezVibrerTieColumn.tie-configuration = #`((-7 . ,DOWN) (-5 . ,DOWN) (-3 . ,UP) (-1 . ,UP)) <c d e f>4\laissezVibrer r }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Laissez vibrer ties ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Letter tablature formatting > ] |
Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom
In tablatures, the first string is usually printed topmost. If you want
to have it at the bottom, set the stringOneTopmost context
property to #f. For a context-wide setting this could be done in
the \layout block as well.
%\layout { % \context { % \Score % stringOneTopmost = ##f % } % \context { % \TabStaff % tablatureFormat = #fret-letter-tablature-format % } %} m = { \cadenzaOn e, b, e gis! b e' \bar "||" } << \new Staff { \clef "G_8" <>_"default" \m <>_"italian (historic)"\m } \new TabStaff { \m \set Score.stringOneTopmost = ##f \set TabStaff.tablatureFormat = #fret-letter-tablature-format \m } >>
Letter tablature formatting
Tablature can be formatted using letters instead of numbers.
music = \relative c { c4 d e f g4 a b c d4 e f g } << \new Staff { \clef "G_8" \music } \new TabStaff \with { tablatureFormat = #fret-letter-tablature-format } { \music } >>
Armonici su corde a vuoto in intavolatura
Questo frammento mostra come scrivere armonici su corde a vuoto.
openStringHarmonics = { \textSpannerDown \override TextSpanner.staff-padding = 3 \override TextSpanner.dash-fraction = 0.3 \override TextSpanner.dash-period = 1 % first harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "1st harm. " \harmonicByFret 12 e,2\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/2 e,\6\stopTextSpan % second harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "2nd harm. " \harmonicByFret 7 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/3 e,\6 \harmonicByFret 19 e,\6 \harmonicByRatio #2/3 e,\6\stopTextSpan %\harmonicByFret 19 < e,\6 a,\5 d\4 > %\harmonicByRatio #2/3 < e,\6 a,\5 d\4 > % third harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "3rd harm. " \harmonicByFret 5 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/4 e,\6 \harmonicByFret 24 e,\6 \harmonicByRatio #3/4 e,\6\stopTextSpan \break % fourth harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "4th harm. " \harmonicByFret 4 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/5 e,\6 \harmonicByFret 9 e,\6 \harmonicByRatio #2/5 e,\6 \harmonicByFret 16 e,\6 \harmonicByRatio #3/5 e,\6\stopTextSpan % fifth harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "5th harm. " \harmonicByFret 3 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/6 e,\6\stopTextSpan \break % sixth harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "6th harm. " \harmonicByFret 2.7 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/7 e,\6\stopTextSpan % seventh harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "7th harm. " \harmonicByFret 2.3 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/8 e,\6\stopTextSpan % eighth harmonic \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup\small "8th harm. " \harmonicByFret 2 e,\6\startTextSpan \harmonicByRatio #1/9 e,\6\stopTextSpan } \score { << \new Staff \with { \omit StringNumber } { \new Voice { \clef "treble_8" \openStringHarmonics } } \new TabStaff { \new TabVoice { \openStringHarmonics } } >> }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Armonici su corde a vuoto in intavolatura ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Polifonia in intavolatura > ] |
Posizionamento delle diteggiature della mano destra
È possibile avere un maggior controllo sul posizionamento delle diteggiature della mano destra impostando una specifica proprietà, come illustrato nell’esempio seguente.
#(define RH rightHandFinger) \relative c { \clef "treble_8" \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up down) <c\RH 1 e\RH 2 g\RH 3 c\RH 4 >4 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(up right down) <c\RH 1 e\RH 2 g\RH 3 c\RH 4 >4 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(left) <c\RH 1 e\RH 2 g\RH 3 c\RH 4 >2 \set strokeFingerOrientations = #'(right) c\RH 1 }
Polifonia in intavolatura
La polifonia in TabStaff funziona proprio come nel rigo normale.
upper = \relative c' { \time 12/8 \key e \minor \voiceOne r4. r8 e, fis g16 b g e e' b c b a g fis e } lower = \relative c { \key e \minor \voiceTwo r16 e d c b a g4 fis8 e fis g a b c } \score { \new StaffGroup = "tab with traditional" << \new Staff = "guitar traditional" << \clef "treble_8" \new Voice = "upper" \upper \new Voice = "lower" \lower >> \new TabStaff = "guitar tab" << \new TabVoice = "upper" \upper \new TabVoice = "lower" \lower >> >> }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Polifonia in intavolatura ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ Slides in tablature > ] |
Setting up predefined fretboards for other instruments
Predefined fret diagrams can be added for new instruments in addition to the standard diagrams used for guitar. This file shows how this is done by defining a new string tuning and a few predefined fretboards for the Venezuelan cuatro.
This file also shows how fingerings can be included in the chords used
as reference points for the chord lookup, and displayed in the fret
diagram and the TabStaff, but not the music.
These fretboards are not transposable because they contain string information. This is planned to be corrected in the future.
% Add fretboards for the cuatro. % % Note: This section could be put into a separate file % `predefined-cuatro-fretboards.ly` % and be \included into each of your compositions. cuatroTuning = #`(,(ly:make-pitch 0 6 0) ,(ly:make-pitch 1 3 SHARP) ,(ly:make-pitch 1 1 0) ,(ly:make-pitch 0 5 0)) dSix = { <a\4 b\1 d\3 fis\2> } dMajor = { <a\4 d\1 d\3 fis \2> } aMajSeven = { <a\4 cis\1 e\3 g\2> } dMajSeven = { <a\4 c\1 d\3 fis\2> } gMajor = { <b\4 b\1 d\3 g\2> } \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \dSix #cuatroTuning "o;o;o;o;" \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \dMajor #cuatroTuning "o;o;o;3-3;" \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \aMajSeven #cuatroTuning "o;2-2;1-1;2-3;" \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \dMajSeven #cuatroTuning "o;o;o;1-1;" \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \gMajor #cuatroTuning "2-2;o;1-1;o;" % End of potential include file `predefined-cuatro-fretboards.ly`. #(set-global-staff-size 16) primerosNames = \chordmode { d:6 d a:maj7 d:maj7 g } primeros = { \dSix \dMajor \aMajSeven \dMajSeven \gMajor } \score { << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \primerosNames } \new Staff { \new Voice \with { \remove "New_fingering_engraver" } \relative c'' { \primeros } } \new FretBoards { \set Staff.stringTunings = #cuatroTuning % \override FretBoard % #'(fret-diagram-details string-count) = 4 \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code = #'in-dot \primeros } \new TabStaff \relative c'' { \set TabStaff.stringTunings = #cuatroTuning \primeros } >> \layout { \context { \Score \override SpacingSpanner.base-shortest-duration = \musicLength 16 } } \midi { } }
Slides in tablature
Slides can be typeset in both Staff and TabStaff
contexts.
slides = { c'8\3(\glissando d'8\3) c'8\3\glissando d'8\3 \hideNotes \grace { g16\glissando } \unHideNotes c'4\3 \afterGrace d'4\3\glissando { \stemDown \hideNotes g16 } \unHideNotes } \score { << \new Staff { \clef "treble_8" \slides } \new TabStaff { \slides } >> \layout { \context { \Score \override Glissando.minimum-length = 4 \override Glissando.springs-and-rods = #ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods \override Glissando.thickness = 2 \omit StringNumber % or: %\override StringNumber.stencil = ##f } } }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Unfretted string instruments >> ] |
| [ < Slides in tablature ] | [ Up: Fretted string instruments ] | [ String number extender lines > ] |
Comportamento di gambi e travature in intavolatura
La direzione dei gambi nell’intavolatura è regolata nello stesso modo della notazione tradizionale. Le travature possono essere rese orizzontali, come illustrato in questo esempio.
\new TabStaff { \relative c { \tabFullNotation g16 b d g b d g b \stemDown \override Beam.concaveness = 10000 g,,16 b d g b d g b } }
String number extender lines
Make an extender line for string number indications, showing that a series of notes is supposed to be played all on the same string.
stringNumberSpanner = #(define-music-function (StringNumber) (string?) #{ \override TextSpanner.style = #'solid \override TextSpanner.font-size = #-5 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \circle \number $StringNumber } #}) \relative c { \clef "treble_8" \textSpannerDown \stringNumberSpanner "5" a8\startTextSpan b c d e f\stopTextSpan \stringNumberSpanner "4" g\startTextSpan a | bes4 a g2\stopTextSpan }
| [ << Fretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Wind instruments >> ] |
| [ < String number extender lines ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Creating slurs across voices > ] |
14 Unfretted string instruments
See also Unfretted string instruments.
| Creating slurs across voices | ||
| Dotted harmonics | ||
| Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato) | ||
| Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice) | ||
| Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate |
| [ << Unfretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Wind instruments >> ] |
| [ < Unfretted string instruments ] | [ Up: Unfretted string instruments ] | [ Dotted harmonics > ] |
Creating slurs across voices
In some situations it is necessary to create slurs between notes from
different voices. The solution is to add invisible notes to one of the
voices, using \hideNotes.
This example is measure 235 of the Ciaconna from Bach’s second partita for solo violin, BWV 1004.
\relative c' { << { d16( a') s a s a[ s a] s a[ s a] } \\ { \slurUp bes,16[ s e]( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes f[( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes fis]( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes g[( \hideNotes a) \unHideNotes gis]( \hideNotes a) } >> }
| [ << Unfretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Wind instruments >> ] |
| [ < Creating slurs across voices ] | [ Up: Unfretted string instruments ] | [ Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato) > ] |
Dotted harmonics
Artificial harmonics using \harmonic do not show dots. To
override this behavior, set the context property harmonicDots.
\relative c''' { \time 3/4 \key f \major \set harmonicDots = ##t <bes f'\harmonic>2. ~ <bes f'\harmonic>4. <a e'\harmonic>8( <gis dis'\harmonic> <g d'\harmonic>) <fis cis'\harmonic>2. <bes f'\harmonic>2. }
| [ << Unfretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Wind instruments >> ] |
| [ < Dotted harmonics ] | [ Up: Unfretted string instruments ] | [ Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice) > ] |
Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato)
A snap pizzicato (also known as “Bartok pizzicato”) is a “strong pizzicato where the string is plucked vertically by snapping and rebounds off the fingerboard of the instrument” (Wikipedia). It is denoted by a circle with a vertical line going from the center upwards outside the circle.
\relative c' { c4\snappizzicato <c' e g>4\snappizzicato <c' e g>4^\snappizzicato <c, e g>4_\snappizzicato }
Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice)
Questo modello presenta un semplice quartetto d’archi. Impiega anche una
sezione \global per definire il tempo e l’armatura di chiave.
global= { \time 4/4 \key c \major } violinOne = \new Voice \relative c'' { c2 d e1 \bar "|." } violinTwo = \new Voice \relative c'' { g2 f e1 \bar "|." } viola = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef alto e2 d c1 \bar "|." } cello = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef bass c2 b a1 \bar "|." } \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 1" } << \global \violinOne >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 2" } << \global \violinTwo >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } << \global \viola >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } << \global \cello >> >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Unfretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Wind instruments >> ] |
| [ < Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice) ] | [ Up: Unfretted string instruments ] | [ Wind instruments > ] |
Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate
Il frammento di codice del “Modello per quartetto d’archi” crea un bel
quartetto, ma cosa fare se si ha bisogno di creare le singole parti? Questo
nuovo modello mostra come usare la funzionalità \tag per dividere
facilmente un pezzo in parti staccate.
Occorre dividere questo modello in file separati; i nomi dei file sono
indicati nei commenti all’inizio di ogni file. piece.ly
contiene tutte le definizioni musicali. Gli altri file – score.ly,
vn1.ly, vn2.ly, vla.ly e vlc.ly –
creano ciascuna parte.
Non dimenticare di togliere i commenti quando usi i file separati!
% piece.ly % (This is the global definitions file.) global= { \time 4/4 \key c \major } Violinone = \new Voice \relative c'' { c2 d e1 \bar "|." } Violintwo = \new Voice \relative c'' { g2 g e1 \bar "|." } Viola = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef alto e2 d c1 \bar "|." } Cello = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef bass c2 b a1 \bar "|." } music = << \tag #'score \tag #'vn1 \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 1" } << \global \Violinone >> \tag #'score \tag #'vn2 \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 2" } << \global \Violintwo >> \tag #'score \tag #'vla \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } << \global \Viola >> \tag #'score \tag #'vlc \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } << \global \Cello >> >> % These are the other files you need to save on your computer % score.ly % (This is the main file.) % Uncomment the line below when using a separate file. % \include "piece.ly" #(set-global-staff-size 14) \score { \new StaffGroup \keepWithTag #'score \music \layout { } \midi { } } %{ Uncomment this block when using separate files. % vn1.ly % (This is the Violin 1 part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vn1 \music \layout { } } % vn2.ly % (This is the Violin 2 part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vn2 \music \layout { } } % vla.ly % (This is the Viola part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vla \music \layout { } } % vlc.ly % (This is the Cello part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vlc \music \layout { } } %}
| [ << Unfretted string instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Cambiare la dimensione dei diagrammi per legni > ] |
15 Wind instruments
See also Wind instruments.
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Wind instruments ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Simboli di diteggiatura per strumenti aerofoni > ] |
Cambiare la dimensione dei diagrammi per legni
La dimensione e lo spessore dei diagrammi per legni possono essere modificati.
\relative c'' { \textLengthOn c1^\markup \woodwind-diagram #'piccolo #'() c^\markup \override #'(size . 1.5) \woodwind-diagram #'piccolo #'() c^\markup \override #'(thickness . 0.15) \woodwind-diagram #'piccolo #'() }
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Cambiare la dimensione dei diagrammi per legni ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Flute slap notation > ] |
Simboli di diteggiatura per strumenti aerofoni
Si possono ottenere simboli speciali combinando glifi esistenti; ciò è utile per gli strumenti aerofoni.
lineup = \tweak outside-staff-padding #0 \tweak staff-padding #0 \tweak padding #0.2 \tweak parent-alignment-X #CENTER \tweak self-alignment-X #CENTER \etc \relative c' { g\open g\lineup ^\markup \combine \musicglyph "scripts.open" \musicglyph "scripts.tenuto" g\lineup ^\markup \combine \musicglyph "scripts.open" \musicglyph "scripts.stopped" g\stopped }
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Simboli di diteggiatura per strumenti aerofoni ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Diagrammi grafici e testuali per i legni > ] |
Flute slap notation
It is possible to indicate special articulation techniques such as a
flute “tongue slap” by replacing the note head with the appropriate
glyph. For that we can draw the accent-like note head with
\markup.
slap = #(define-music-function (music) (ly:music?) #{ \temporary \override NoteHead.stencil = #ly:text-interface::print \temporary \override NoteHead.text = \markup \translate #'(1 . 0) \override #'(thickness . 1.4) \overlay { \draw-line #'(-1.2 . 0.4) \draw-line #'(-1.2 . -0.4) } \temporary \override NoteHead.stem-attachment = #(lambda (grob) (let* ((stem (ly:grob-object grob 'stem)) (dir (ly:grob-property stem 'direction UP)) (is-up (eqv? dir UP))) (cons dir (if is-up 0 -0.8)))) #music \revert NoteHead.stencil \revert NoteHead.text \revert NoteHead.stem-attachment #}) \relative c' { c4 \slap c d r \slap { g4 a } b r }
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Flute slap notation ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Grafico della diteggiatura per flauto dolce > ] |
Diagrammi grafici e testuali per i legni
In molti casi, le chiavi diverse da quelle della colonna centrale possono essere visualizzate per nome oltre che in forma grafica.
\relative c'' { \textLengthOn c1^\markup \woodwind-diagram #'piccolo #'((cc . (one three)) (lh . (gis)) (rh . (ees))) c^\markup \override #'(graphical . #f) \woodwind-diagram #'piccolo #'((cc . (one three)) (lh . (gis)) (rh . (ees))) }
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Diagrammi grafici e testuali per i legni ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Elenco delle chiavi dei diagrammi per legni > ] |
Grafico della diteggiatura per flauto dolce
L’esempio seguente illustra come realizzare grafici delle diteggiature per strumenti aerofoni.
% range chart for paetzold contrabass recorder centermarkup = { \once \override TextScript.self-alignment-X = #CENTER \once \override TextScript.X-offset = #(lambda (g) (+ (ly:self-alignment-interface::centered-on-x-parent g) (ly:self-alignment-interface::x-aligned-on-self g))) } \new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \omit Stem \omit Flag \consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver" } { \clef bass \set Score.timing = ##f f,1*1/4 \glissando \clef violin gis'1*1/4 a'4^\markup "1)" \centermarkup \once \override TextScript.padding = 2 bes'1*1/4_\markup \override #'(baseline-skip . 1.7) \column { \fontsize #-5 \slashed-digit #0 \finger 1 \finger 2 \finger 3 \finger 4 \finger 5 \finger 6 \finger 7 } b'1*1/4 c''4^\markup "1)" cis''1*1/4 deh''1*1/4 \centermarkup \once \override TextScript.padding = 2 \once \override Staff.HorizontalBracket.direction = #UP e''1*1/4_\markup \override #'(baseline-skip . 1.7) \column { \fontsize #-5 \slashed-digit #0 \finger 1 \finger 2 \finger 4 \finger 5 } \startGroup f''1*1/4^\markup "2)" \stopGroup }
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Grafico della diteggiatura per flauto dolce ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Elenco dei diagrammi per i legni > ] |
Elenco delle chiavi dei diagrammi per legni
Il seguente frammento produce un elenco di tutte le possibili chiavi e delle
loro impostazioni per i diagrammi per legni, come sono definite in
scm/define-woodwind-diagrams.scm. L’elenco sarà visualizzato
nel file di log, ma non nello spartito. Se si desidera che l’output appaia
nella console, omettere dai comandi (current-error-port).
#(print-keys-verbose 'piccolo (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'flute (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'flute-b-extension (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'tin-whistle (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'oboe (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'clarinet (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'bass-clarinet (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'low-bass-clarinet (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'saxophone (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'soprano-saxophone (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'alto-saxophone (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'tenor-saxophone (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'baritone-saxophone (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'bassoon (current-error-port)) #(print-keys-verbose 'contrabassoon (current-error-port)) \score {c''1}
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Ancient notation >> ] |
| [ < Elenco delle chiavi dei diagrammi per legni ] | [ Up: Wind instruments ] | [ Ancient notation > ] |
Elenco dei diagrammi per i legni
L’esempio seguente mostra tutti i diagrammi per i legni attualmente definiti in LilyPond.
\relative c' { \textLengthOn c1^\markup \center-column { "tin whistle" " " \woodwind-diagram #'tin-whistle #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "piccolo" " " \woodwind-diagram #'piccolo #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "flute" " " \woodwind-diagram #'flute #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "oboe" " " \woodwind-diagram #'oboe #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "clarinet" " " \woodwind-diagram #'clarinet #'() } \break c1^\markup \center-column { "bass clarinet" " " \woodwind-diagram #'bass-clarinet #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "saxophone" " " \woodwind-diagram #'saxophone #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "bassoon" " " \woodwind-diagram #'bassoon #'() } c1^\markup \center-column { "contrabassoon" " " \woodwind-diagram #'contrabassoon #'() } } \paper { system-system-spacing.padding = 5 }
| [ << Wind instruments ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Elenco dei diagrammi per i legni ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding a figured bass above or below the notes > ] |
16 Ancient notation
See also Ancient notation.
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Ancient notation ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Ancient fonts > ] |
Adding a figured bass above or below the notes
When writing figured bass, you can place the figures above or below the
bass notes by using the commands \bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown
and \bassFigureStaffAlignmentUp. Prepend \once to the
command if you want to modify only the next figured bass.
The command \bassFigureStaffAlignmentNeutral resets the
direction of figured bass to the default value.
bass = { \clef bass g4 b, c d | e d8 c d2 } continuo = \figuremode { <_>4 <6>4 <5/>4 \bassFigureStaffAlignmentUp <_+>4 <6> | \set Staff.useBassFigureExtenders = ##t \bassFigureStaffAlignmentDown <4>4. <4>8 <_+>4 } \score { << \new Staff = bassStaff \bass \context Staff = bassStaff \continuo >> }
Ancient fonts
This snippets shows many of the symbols contained in the Emmentaler font that are used by LilyPond for typesetting ancient notation.
m = { c1 e f ges cis' \bar "||" } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \new VaticanaVoice { \clef "vaticana-fa2" \key es \major \textMark \markup \rounded-box "Vaticana clefs, custos and note heads" \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.punctum <>^"vaticana.punctum" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.inclinatum <>^"vaticana.inclinatum" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.quilisma <>^"vaticana.quilisma" \m \clef "vaticana-fa1" \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.plica <>^"vaticana.plica" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.reverse.plica <>^"vaticana.reverse.plica" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.punctum.cavum <>^"vaticana.punctum.cavum" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.lpes <>^"vaticana.punctum.lpes" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.upes <>^"vaticana.punctum.upes" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.vupes <>^"vaticana.punctum.vupes" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.linea.punctum <>^"vaticana.punctum.linea" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.epiphonus <>^"vaticana.punctum.epiphonus" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'vaticana.cephalicus <>^"vaticana.punctum.cephalicus" \m \break \textMark \markup \rounded-box "Medicaea clefs, custos and note heads" \set VaticanaStaff.alterationGlyphs = #alteration-medicaea-glyph-name-alist \override VaticanaStaff.Custos.style = #'medicaea \clef "medicaea-fa2" \override NoteHead.style = #'medicaea.punctum <>^"medicaea.punctum" \m \clef "medicaea-do2" \override NoteHead.style = #'medicaea.inclinatum <>^"medicaea.inclinatum" \m \override NoteHead.style = #'medicaea.virga <>^"medicaea.virga" \m \clef "medicaea-fa1" \override NoteHead.style = #'medicaea.rvirga <>^"medicaea.rvirga" \m \break \textMark \markup \rounded-box "Hufnagel clefs, custos and note heads" \set Staff.alterationGlyphs = #alteration-hufnagel-glyph-name-alist \override VaticanaStaff.Custos.style = #'hufnagel \clef "hufnagel-fa2" \break \override NoteHead.style = #'hufnagel.punctum <>^"hufnagel.punctum" \m \clef "hufnagel-do2" \override NoteHead.style = #'hufnagel.lpes <>^"hufnagel.lpes" \m \clef "hufnagel-do-fa" \override NoteHead.style = #'hufnagel.virga <>^"hufnagel.virga" \m } \layout { \context { \Score \override TextScript.font-size = #-2 \override TextMark.break-align-symbols = #'(left-edge clef staff-bar) \override TextMark.padding = 4 \omit BarNumber } \context { \VaticanaStaff alterationGlyphs = #alteration-vaticana-glyph-name-alist } } }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Ancient fonts ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Ancient time signatures > ] |
Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music
This example demonstrates how to do modern transcription of Gregorian music. Gregorian music has no measure, no stems; it uses only half and quarter note heads, and special marks, indicating rests of different length.
chant = \relative c' { \set Score.timing = ##f f4 a2 \divisioMinima g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior g4( f) f( g f) a2 \finalis \break f4 a2 \divisioMinima g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior g4( f) f( g a) g2( f) \finalis } verba = \lyricmode { Lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met, lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met. } \score { \new GregorianTranscriptionStaff << \new GregorianTranscriptionVoice = "melody" \chant \new GregorianTranscriptionLyrics = "one" \lyricsto melody \verba >> }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Chant or psalm notation > ] |
Ancient time signatures
Time signatures may also be engraved in an old style.
{ \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'neomensural s1 }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Ancient time signatures ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Custodes > ] |
Chant or psalm notation
This form of notation is used for psalm chant, where verses aren’t always of the same length.
stemOff = \hide Staff.Stem stemOn = \undo \stemOff \score { \new Staff \with { \remove "Time_signature_engraver" } { \key g \minor \cadenzaOn \stemOff a'\breve bes'4 g'4 \stemOn a'2 \section \stemOff a'\breve g'4 a'4 \stemOn f'2 \section \stemOff a'\breve^\markup { \italic flexe } \stemOn g'2 \fine } }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Chant or psalm notation ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Incipit > ] |
Custodes
Custodes may be engraved in various styles.
\layout { ragged-right = ##t } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \new Staff \with { \consists "Custos_engraver" } \relative c' { \override Staff.Custos.neutral-position = #4 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'hufnagel c1^"hufnagel" \break <d a' f'>1 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'medicaea c1^"medicaea" \break <d a' f'>1 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'vaticana c1^"vaticana" \break <d a' f'>1 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'mensural c1^"mensural" \break <d a' f'>1 } }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Custodes ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi) > ] |
Incipit
Quando si trascrive musica mensurale, un incipit all’inizio del brano è utile per indicare il tempo e l’armatura di chiave originali. I musicisti oggi sono abituati alle stanghette, ma queste non erano note all’epoca della musica mensurale. Come compromesso, spesso le stanghette vengono poste tra i righi, uno stile di formattazione chiamato mensurstriche.
% A short excerpt from the Jubilate Deo by Orlande de Lassus global = { \set Score.skipBars = ##t \key g \major \time 4/4 % the actual music \skip 1*8 % let finis bar go through all staves \override Staff.BarLine.transparent = ##f % finis bar \bar "|." } discantusIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { \clef "petrucci-c1" \key f \major \time 2/2 c''1. } discantusNotes = { \transpose c' c'' { \clef "treble" d'2. d'4 | b e' d'2 | c'4 e'4.( d'8 c' b | a4) b a2 | b4.( c'8 d'4) c'4 | \once \hide NoteHead c'1 | b\breve | } } discantusLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi -- la -- te De -- o, om -- nis ter -- ra, __ om- "..." -us. } altusIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { \clef "petrucci-c3" \key f \major \time 2/2 e'1\rest f'1. } altusNotes = { \transpose c' c'' { \clef "treble" r2 g2. e4 fis g | a2 g4 e | fis g4.( fis16 e fis4) | g1 | \once \hide NoteHead g1 | g\breve | } } altusLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi -- la -- te De -- o, om -- nis ter -- ra, "..." -us. } tenorIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { \clef "petrucci-c4" \key f \major \time 2/2 r\longa r\breve r1 c'1. } tenorNotes = { \transpose c' c' { \clef "treble_8" R1 | R1 | R1 | % two measures r2 d'2. d'4 b e' | \once \hide NoteHead e'1 | d'\breve | } } tenorLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi -- la -- te "..." -us. } bassusIncipit = \new PetrucciStaff { % The original print shows the b flat % for the f major key signature twice. \override Staff.KeySignature.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \clef "mensural-f" \key f\major \time 2/2 \tweak Y-offset #1 r\longa \tweak Y-offset #1 r\longa f1. } bassusNotes = { \transpose c' c' { \clef "bass" R1 | R1 | R1 | R1 | g2. e4 | \once \hide NoteHead e1 | g\breve | } } bassusLyrics = \lyricmode { Ju -- bi- "..." -us. } \score { << \new StaffGroup = choirStaff << \new Voice = "discantusNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Discantus" \incipit #1 \discantusIncipit \global \discantusNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto discantusNotes { \discantusLyrics } \new Voice = "altusNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Altus" \global \incipit #1 \altusIncipit \altusNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto altusNotes { \altusLyrics } \new Voice = "tenorNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Tenor" \global \incipit #1 \tenorIncipit \tenorNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto tenorNotes { \tenorLyrics } \new Voice = "bassusNotes" << \set Staff.instrumentName = "Bassus" \global \incipit #1 \bassusIncipit \bassusNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto bassusNotes { \bassusLyrics } >> >> \layout { \context { \Score %% no bar lines in staves or lyrics \hide BarLine } %% the next two instructions keep the lyrics between the bar lines \context { \Lyrics \consists "Bar_engraver" \consists "Separating_line_group_engraver" } \context { \Voice %% no slurs \hide Slur %% Comment in the below "\remove" command to allow line %% breaking also at those bar lines where a note overlaps %% into the next measure. The command is commented out in this %% short example score, but especially for large scores, you %% will typically yield better line breaking and thus improve %% overall spacing if you comment in the following command. %%\remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" } indent = 5\cm incipit-width = 2.5\cm } }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Incipit ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Stili di pausa > ] |
Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
La formattazione mensurale, in cui le stanghette non appaiono sui righi ma
nello spazio tra i righi, si può ottenere usando StaffGroup al posto
di ChoirStaff. La stanghetta sui righi viene nascosta con
\hide.
\layout { \context { \Staff measureBarType = "-span|" } } music = \fixed c'' { c1 d2 \section e2 f1 \fine } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \music \new Staff \music >>
Stili di pausa
Esistono vari stili di pausa.
restsA = { r\maxima r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 s32 s64 s128 s256 s512 s1024 s1024 } restsB = { r\maxima r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r256 r512 r1024 s1024 } \new Staff \relative c { \omit Score.TimeSignature \cadenzaOn \override Staff.Rest.style = #'mensural <>^\markup \typewriter { mensural } \restsA \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'neomensural <>^\markup \typewriter { neomensural } \restsA \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'classical <>^\markup \typewriter { classical } \restsB \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'z <>^\markup \typewriter { z-style } \restsB \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'default <>^\markup \typewriter { default } \restsB \bar "" \break }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Stili di pausa ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark > ] |
Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente
Usando le etichette (tag), è possibile usare la stessa musica per produrre sia
la musica mensurale che quella moderna. In questo frammento, viene introdotta
la funzione menrest, che permette alle pause mensurali di essere
posizionate precisamente sul rigo come nell’originale, ma con le pause moderne
nella posizione standard. Le etichette vengono usate per produrre diversi
tipi di stanghetta alla fine della musica, ma possono essere usate anche
quando sono necessarie altre differenze: per esempio se si vogliono usare
“pause d’intero” (R1, R\breve, etc.) nella musica moderna, ma pause
normali (r1, r\breve, etc.) nella versione mensurale. La conversione di
musica mensurale nel suo equivalente moderno viene solitamente chiamata
trascrizione.
\layout { line-width = 150\mm } menrest = #(define-music-function (note) (ly:music?) #{ \tag #'mens $(make-music 'RestEvent note) \tag #'mod $(make-music 'RestEvent note 'pitch '()) #}) Be = \tag #'mod #(begin (ly:expect-warning (G_ "stem does not fit in beam")) (ly:expect-warning (G_ "beam was started here")) (make-span-event 'BeamEvent START)) Am = \tag #'mod ] MenStyle = { \override Score.BarNumber.transparent = ##t \override Stem.neutral-direction = #up \omit Slur \omit Beam } finalis = \section Music = \relative c'' { \key f \major g1 d'2 \menrest bes4 bes a2 \menrest r4 g4 fis4. fis8 fis4 fis g e f4.([ g8] a4[ g8 f] g2.\Be fis8 e\Am fis2) g\breve \finalis } MenLyr = \lyricmode { So farre, deere life, deare life, from thy bright beames ab- ſen- ted, } ModLyr = \lyricmode { So far, dear life, dear life, from your bright beams ab -- sen -- ted, __ } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \keepWithTag #'mens { << \new PetrucciStaff { \new PetrucciVoice = "Cantus" { \clef "petrucci-c1" \time 4/4 \MenStyle \Music } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "Cantus" \MenLyr >> } \layout { \context { \PetrucciVoice % No longer necessary starting with version 2.25.23. \override Flag.style = #'mensural } } } \markup\vspace #1 \score { \keepWithTag #'mod { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff { \new Voice = "Sop" \with { \remove "Note_heads_engraver" \consists "Completion_heads_engraver" \remove "Rest_engraver" \consists "Completion_rest_engraver" } \shiftDurations 1 0 { \time 2/4 \autoBeamOff \Music } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "Sop" \ModLyr >> } }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ World music >> ] |
| [ < Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente ] | [ Up: Ancient notation ] | [ World music > ] |
Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark
This short vertical line placed above the note is commonly used in baroque music. Its meaning can vary, but generally indicates notes that should be played with more “weight”. The following example demonstrates how to achieve such a notation.
upline = \tweak stencil #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup \draw-line #'(0 . 1) #})) \stopped \relative c' { a'4^\upline a( c d')_\upline }
| [ << Ancient notation ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Contexts and engravers >> ] |
| [ < Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Improvvisazione araba > ] |
17 World music
See also World music.
| Improvvisazione araba | ||
| Esempio di makam | ||
| Printing text from right to left | ||
| Turkish Makam example |
| [ << World music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Contexts and engravers >> ] |
| [ < World music ] | [ Up: World music ] | [ Esempio di makam > ] |
Improvvisazione araba
Per improvvisazioni o taqasim a tempo libero, si può omettere l’indicazione
di tempo e usare \cadenzaOn. Può essere necessaria la modifica
dello stile delle alterazioni, perché l’assenza delle stanghette farà
sì che l’alterazione sia contrassegnata una volta sola. Ecco un esempio
di quello che potrebbe essere l’inizio di un’improvvisazione hijaz:
\include "arabic.ly" \relative sol' { \key re \kurd \accidentalStyle forget \cadenzaOn sol4 sol sol sol fad mib sol1 fad8 mib re4. r8 mib1 fad sol }
| [ << World music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Contexts and engravers >> ] |
| [ < Improvvisazione araba ] | [ Up: World music ] | [ Printing text from right to left > ] |
Esempio di makam
Makam è un tipo di melodia proveniente dalla Turchia che usa alterazioni microtonali di 1/9. Consultare il file di inizializzazione ‘ly/makam.ly’ per vedere come sono definiti i nomi delle altezze e le alterazioni.
\include "makam.ly" \relative c' { \set Staff.keyAlterations = #`((6 . ,(- KOMA)) (3 . ,BAKIYE)) c4 cc db fk gbm4 gfc gfb efk fk4 db cc c }
| [ << World music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Contexts and engravers >> ] |
| [ < Esempio di makam ] | [ Up: World music ] | [ Turkish Makam example > ] |
Printing text from right to left
It is possible to print text from right to left in a markup object, as demonstrated here.
{ b1^\markup { \line { i n g i r u m i m u s n o c t e } } f'_\markup { \override #'(text-direction . -1) \line { i n g i r u m i m u s n o c t e } } }
| [ << World music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Contexts and engravers >> ] |
| [ < Printing text from right to left ] | [ Up: World music ] | [ Contexts and engravers > ] |
Turkish Makam example
This template uses the start of a well-known Turkish Saz Semai that is familiar in the repertoire in order to illustrate some of the elements of Turkish music notation.
#(set-default-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) \include "turkish-makam.ly" \header { title = "Hüseyni Saz Semaisi" composer = "Lavtacı Andon" tagline = ##f } \relative { \set Staff.extraNatural = ##f \set Staff.autoBeaming = ##f \key a \huseyni \time 10/8 a'4 g'16[ fb] e8.[ d16] d[ c d e] c[ d c8] bfc | a16[ bfc a8] bfc c16[ d c8] d16[ e d8] e4 fb8 | d4 a'8 a16[ g fb e] fb8[ g] a8.[ b16] a16[ g] | g4 g16[ fb] fb8.[ e16] e[ g fb e] e4 r8 | } \layout { indent = 0 }
| [ << World music ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Turkish Makam example ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Un ambitus per voce > ] |
18 Contexts and engravers
See also Changing defaults and Contexts and engravers.
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Contexts and engravers ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Adding an extra staff > ] |
Un ambitus per voce
L’ambitus può essere specificato per voce. In tal caso occorre spostarlo manualmente per evitare collisioni.
\new Staff << \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c'' { \override Ambitus.X-offset = 2.0 \voiceOne c4 a d e f1 } \new Voice \with { \consists "Ambitus_engraver" } \relative c' { \voiceTwo es4 f g as b1 } >>
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Un ambitus per voce ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Adding an extra staff at a line break > ] |
Adding an extra staff
An extra staff can be added (possibly temporarily) after the start of a piece.
\score { << \new Staff \relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c | c } \new StaffGroup \relative c'' { \new Staff { c1 | c << { c1 | d } \new Staff { \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature c1 | b } >> c1 } } >> }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Adding an extra staff ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames > ] |
Adding an extra staff at a line break
When adding a new staff at a line break, some extra space is
unfortunately added at the end of the line before the break (to fit in
a key signature change, which will never be printed anyway). The
workaround is to set the explicitKeySignatureVisibility property
of the Staff grob as is shown in the example.
\score { \new StaffGroup \relative c'' { \new Staff \key f \major c1 c^"Unwanted extra space" \break << { c1 | c } \new Staff { \key f \major \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature c1 | c } >> c1 | c^"Fixed here" \break << { c1 | c } \new Staff { \once \set Staff.explicitKeySignatureVisibility = #end-of-line-invisible \key f \major \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature c1 | c } >> } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Adding an extra staff at a line break ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave > ] |
Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames
Per mostrare le stanghette nel contesto ChordNames, aggiungere
l’incisore Bar_engraver.
\new ChordNames \with { \override BarLine.bar-extent = #'(-1 . 3) \consists "Bar_engraver" } \chordmode { f1:maj7 f:7 bes:7 }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Parentesi analitiche con etichette > ] |
Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
Per impostazione predefinita, gli ambitus sono posizionati a sinistra della chiave. La
funzione \ambitusAfter permette di cambiare questo posizionamento.
La sintassi è \ambitusAfter grob-interface (vedi
Graphical
Object Interfaces per un elenco dei possibili valori per
grob-interface.)
Un caso d’uso comune è il posizionamento dell’ambitus tra l’armatura di chiave e l’indicazione di tempo.
\new Staff \with { \consists Ambitus_engraver } \relative { \ambitusAfter key-signature \key d \major es'8 g bes cis d2 }
Parentesi analitiche con etichette
Si può aggiungere del testo alle parentesi analitiche tramite la proprietà
text del grob HorizontalBracketText. L’aggiunta di vari frammenti
di testo alle parentesi che iniziano nello stesso momento musicale richiede
l’uso del comando \tweak.
Dopo un’interruzione di linea il testo viene messo tra parentesi.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver" \override HorizontalBracket.direction = #UP } } { \once\override HorizontalBracketText.text = "a" c''\startGroup d''\stopGroup \once\override HorizontalBracketText.text = "a'" e''\startGroup d''\stopGroup | c''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text \markup \bold \huge "b" \startGroup -\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text "a" \startGroup d''\stopGroup e''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text "a'" \startGroup d''\stopGroup\stopGroup | c''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text foo \startGroup d'' e'' f'' | \break g'' a'' b'' c'''\stopGroup }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Parentesi analitiche con etichette ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Impostare l’output MIDI su un canale per voce > ] |
Cambiare automaticamente la direzione del gambo della nota centrale in base alla melodia
LilyPond può modificare la direzione del gambo della nota centrale di un
rigo in modo che segua la melodia: occorre aggiungere l’incisore
Melody_engraver al contesto Voice.
La proprietà di contesto suspendMelodyDecisions può essere usata
per disattivare questo comportamento localmente.
\relative c'' { \time 3/4 a8 b g f b g | \set suspendMelodyDecisions = ##t a b g f b g | \unset suspendMelodyDecisions c b d c b c | } \layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Melody_engraver" \autoBeamOff } }
Impostare l’output MIDI su un canale per voce
Nella creazione del file di output MIDI, il comportamento predefinito prevede che ogni rigo sia assegnato a un canale MIDI, con tutte le voci del rigo amalgamate in un canale. Ciò diminuisce il rischio di esaurire i canali MIDI disponibili, dato che ce ne sono solo 16 per traccia.
Tuttavia, spostando Staff_performer nel contesto Voice, ogni
voce in un rigo può avere il proprio canale MIDI, come è illustrato
nell’esempio seguente: sebbene le voci siano sullo stesso rigo, vengono
creati due canali MIDI, ciascuno con un diverso strumento MIDI
(midiInstrument).
\score { \new Staff << \new Voice \relative c''' { \set midiInstrument = "flute" \voiceOne \key g \major \time 2/2 r2 g-"Flute" ~ g fis ~ fis4 g8 fis e2 ~ e4 d8 cis d2 } \new Voice \relative c'' { \set midiInstrument = "clarinet" \voiceTwo b1-"Clarinet" a2. b8 a g2. fis8 e fis2 r } >> \layout { } \midi { \context { \Staff \remove "Staff_performer" } \context { \Voice \consists "Staff_performer" } \tempo 2 = 72 } }
Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using \scaleDurations
Flexible polymeter with unaligned measures
To support explicit creation of independently measured contexts, remove the
Timing_translator from Score context and define a
TimingStaffGroup context that has Timing_translator. This makes
Timing an alias for TimingStaffGroup, targeting \time
commands to the enclosing TimingStaffGroup.
Unlike LilyPond’s built-in \enablePerStaffTiming command, this approach
requires the explicit creation of TimingStaffGroup contexts; in exchange,
it allows creating multiple Staff contexts that jointly follow the
measure defined in their enclosing TimingStaffGroup.
Locally scaled time signatures
Use the unscalable \time command to establish a measure of the desired
length in Timing, a.k.a. TimingStaffGroup. In this snippet, all
staves below TimingStaffGroup use a scaled time signature, so any time
signature with the desired measure length is as good as any other. If there
were an enclosed context that did not use a scaled time signature, the choice of
time signature to set in Timing would matter in that context.
Use the \polymetric \time command to set scalable metric properties in
contexts below Timing, and use the \scaleDurations command to
scale both the local meter and the notes to fit the measure.
\layout { \context { \Score \remove "Timing_translator" \accepts TimingStaffGroup } \context { \StaffGroup \name TimingStaffGroup \alias StaffGroup \consists "Timing_translator" } } << \new TimingStaffGroup << \new Staff { \scaleDurations 8/5 { \time 6/5 % to set measure length in Timing \context Staff \polymetric \time 6/8 b8 b b b b b \time 4/5 % to set measure length in Timing \context Staff \polymetric \time 2/4 b4 b } } >> \new TimingStaffGroup << \new Staff { \clef bass \time 2/4 c2 d e f } >> >>
Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano note appartenenti a voci diverse
Si può disegnare un arpeggio che attraversa delle note in voci diverse
dello stesso rigo se si aggiunge l’incisore Span_arpeggio_engraver nel
contesto Staff:
\new Staff \with { \consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver" } \relative c' { \set Staff.connectArpeggios = ##t << { <e' g>4\arpeggio <d f> <d f>2 } \\ { <d, f>2\arpeggio <g b>2 } >> }
Creating blank staves
To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
Bar_number_engraver from the Score context, and the
Time_signature_engraver, Clef_engraver and
Bar_engraver from the Staff context.
#(set-global-staff-size 10) % for the documentation % #(set-global-staff-size 20) % for letter and A4 \book { \score { { \repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break } } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Staff \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \remove "Clef_engraver" \remove "Bar_engraver" } \context { \Score \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } } % for the documentation \paper { #(set-paper-size "a6") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 90\mm left-margin = 7.5\mm bottom-margin = 5\mm top-margin = 5\mm tagline = ##f } % uncomment these lines for "letter" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "letter") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 7.5\in left-margin = 0.5\in bottom-margin = 0.25\in top-margin = 0.25\in tagline = ##f } %} % uncomment these lines for "A4" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "a4") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 180\mm left-margin = 15\mm bottom-margin = 10\mm top-margin = 10\mm tagline = ##f } %} }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Creating blank staves ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Creating custom key signatures > ] |
Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano i righi in altri contesti
Si possono creare arpeggi che attraversano i righi in contesti diversi da
GrandStaff, PianoStaff e StaffGroup se l’incisore
Span_arpeggio_engraver è incluso nel contesto Score.
<< \new PianoStaff << \new Voice \relative c' { <c e>2\arpeggio <d f>2\arpeggio <c e>1\arpeggio } \new Voice \relative c { \clef bass <c g'>2\arpeggio <b g'>2\arpeggio <c g'>1\arpeggio } >> \new Staff \relative c { \set Score.connectArpeggios = ##t \clef bass c2\arpeggio g\arpeggio c1\arpeggio } >> \layout { \context { \Score \consists "Span_arpeggio_engraver" } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano i righi in altri contesti ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Cross-staff stems > ] |
Creating custom key signatures
LilyPond supports custom key signatures. In this example, print for D minor and D major with an extended range of shown flats.
\new Staff \with { \override StaffSymbol.line-count = #8 \override KeySignature.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeyCancellation.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeySignature.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override KeyCancellation.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override Clef.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\combine \musicglyph "clefs.C" \translate #'(-3 . -2) \musicglyph "clefs.F" #})) clefPosition = #3 middleCPosition = #3 middleCClefPosition = #3 } { \key d\minor f bes, f bes, | \key d\major fis b, fis b, | }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Creating custom key signatures ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Defining an engraver in Scheme: ambitus engraver > ] |
Cross-staff stems
This snippet shows how to use Span_stem_engraver and
\crossStaff to connect stems across staves automatically.
The stem lengths need not be specified, as the variable distance between
noteheads and staves is calculated automatically. However, it is
important that \crossStaff is applied to the correct voice or
staff (i.e., on the opposite side of where a beam is or would be
positioned) to get the desired effect.
\layout { \context { \PianoStaff \consists "Span_stem_engraver" } } \new PianoStaff << \new Staff { <b d'>4 r d'16\> e'8. g8 r\! | e'8 f' g'4 \voiceTwo % Down to lower staff \crossStaff { e'8 e'8 } e'4 | } \new Staff { \clef bass \voiceOne % Up to upper staff \crossStaff { <e g>4 e, g16 a8. c8 } d | g8 f g4 \voiceTwo g8 g g4 | } >>
Defining an engraver in Scheme: ambitus engraver
This example demonstrates how the ambitus engraver may be defined on
the user side, with a Scheme engraver. This is basically a rewrite in
Scheme of the code from lily/ambitus-engraver.cc.
#(use-modules (oop goops)) %%% %%% Grob utilities %%% %%% These are literal rewrites of some C++ methods used by the ambitus %%% engraver. #(define (ly:separation-item::add-conditional-item grob grob-item) "Add GROB-ITEM to the array of conditional elements of GROB. This is a rewrite of function `Separation_item::add_conditional_item` from file `lily/separation-item.cc`." (ly:pointer-group-interface::add-grob grob 'conditional-elements grob-item)) #(define (ly:accidental-placement::accidental-pitch accidental-grob) "Get the pitch from the grob cause of ACCIDENTAL-GROB. This is a rewrite of function `accidental_pitch` from file `lily/accidental-placement.cc`." (ly:event-property (ly:grob-property (ly:grob-parent accidental-grob Y) 'cause) 'pitch)) #(define (ly:accidental-placement::add-accidental grob accidental-grob) "Add ACCIDENTAL-GROB to the list of accidentals grobs of GROB. ACCIDENTAL-GROB is an `Accidental` grob; GROB is an `AccidentalPlacement` grob. This is a rewrite of function `Accidental_placement::add_accidental` from file `lily/accidental-placement.cc`." (let ((pitch (ly:accidental-placement::accidental-pitch accidental-grob))) (set! (ly:grob-parent accidental-grob X) grob) (let* ((accidentals (ly:grob-object grob 'accidental-grobs)) (handle (assq (ly:pitch-notename pitch) accidentals)) (entry (if handle (cdr handle) '()))) (set! (ly:grob-object grob 'accidental-grobs) (assq-set! accidentals (ly:pitch-notename pitch) (cons accidental-grob entry)))))) %%% %%% Ambitus data structures. %%% %%% The <ambitus> class holds the various grobs that are created to %%% print an ambitus: %%% %%% - `ambitus-group`: the grob that groups all the components of an %%% ambitus (`Ambitus` grob); %%% - `ambitus-line`: the vertical line between the upper and lower %%% ambitus notes (`AmbitusLine` grob); %%% - `ambitus-up-note` and `ambitus-down-note`: the note head and %%% accidental for the lower and upper note of the ambitus (see %%% `<ambitus-note>` class below). %%% %%% The other slots define the key and clef context of the engraver: %%% %%% - `start-c0`: position of middle c at the beginning of the piece. %%% It is used to place the ambitus notes according to their pitch; %%% - `start-key-sig`: the key signature at the beginning of the %%% piece. It is used to determine whether accidentals shall be %%% printed next to ambitus notes. #(define-class <ambitus> () (ambitus-group #:accessor ambitus-group) (ambitus-line #:accessor ambitus-line) (ambitus-up-note #:getter ambitus-up-note #:init-form (make <ambitus-note>)) (ambitus-down-note #:getter ambitus-down-note #:init-form (make <ambitus-note>)) (start-c0 #:accessor ambitus-start-c0 #:init-value #f) (start-key-sig #:accessor ambitus-start-key-sig #:init-value '())) %%% Accessor for the lower and upper note data of an ambitus. #(define-method (ambitus-note (ambitus <ambitus>) direction) "Return lower or upper note of AMBITUS depending on DIRECTION." (if (= direction UP) (ambitus-up-note ambitus) (ambitus-down-note ambitus))) %%% The `<ambitus-note>` class holds the grobs that are specific to %%% ambitus (lower and upper) notes: %%% %%% - `head`: an `AmbitusNoteHead` grob; %%% - `accidental`: an `AmbitusAccidental` grob, to be possibly %%% printed next to the ambitus note head. %%% %%% Moreover, %%% %%% - `pitch` is the absolute pitch of the note; %%% - `cause` is the note event that causes this ambitus note, i.e., %%% the lower or upper note of the considered music sequence. #(define-class <ambitus-note> () (head #:accessor ambitus-note-head #:init-value #f) (accidental #:accessor ambitus-note-accidental #:init-value #f) (cause #:accessor ambitus-note-cause #:init-value #f) (pitch #:accessor ambitus-note-pitch #:init-value #f)) %%% %%% Ambitus engraving logic. %%% %%% This is rewrite of the code from file `lily/ambitus-engraver.cc`. #(define (make-ambitus translator) "Build an ambitus object: initialize all the grobs and their relations. The `Ambitus` grob contains all other grobs: Ambitus |- AmbitusLine |- AmbitusNoteHead for upper note |- AmbitusAccidental for upper note |- AmbitusNoteHead for lower note |- AmbitusAccidental for lower note The parent of an accidental is the corresponding note head, and the accidental is set as the `accidental-grob` property of the note head so that is printed by the function that prints notes." ;; Make the ambitus object. (let ((ambitus (make <ambitus>))) ;; Build the `Ambitus` grob, which will contain all other grobs. (set! (ambitus-group ambitus) (ly:engraver-make-grob translator 'Ambitus '())) ;; Build the `AmbitusLine` grob (the line between lower and upper ;; note). (set! (ambitus-line ambitus) (ly:engraver-make-grob translator 'AmbitusLine '())) ;; Build the upper and lower `AmbitusNoteHead` and ;; `AmbitusAccidental`. (for-each (lambda (direction) (let ((head (ly:engraver-make-grob translator 'AmbitusNoteHead '())) (accidental (ly:engraver-make-grob translator 'AmbitusAccidental '())) (group (ambitus-group ambitus))) ;; The parent of the `AmbitusAccidental` grob is the ;; `AmbitusNoteHead` grob. (set! (ly:grob-parent accidental Y) head) ;; The `AmbitusAccidental` grob is set as the ;; `accidental-grob` object of `AmbitusNoteHead`. This is ;; later used by the function that prints notes. (set! (ly:grob-object head 'accidental-grob) accidental) ;; Both the note head and the accidental grobs are added to ;; the main ambitus grob. (ly:axis-group-interface::add-element group head) (ly:axis-group-interface::add-element group accidental) ;; The note head and the accidental grobs are added to the ;; ambitus object. (set! (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) head) (set! (ambitus-note-accidental (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) accidental))) (list DOWN UP)) ;; The parent of the ambitus line is the lower ambitus note head. (set! (ly:grob-parent (ambitus-line ambitus) X) (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus DOWN))) ;; The ambitus line is added to the ambitus main grob. (ly:axis-group-interface::add-element (ambitus-group ambitus) (ambitus-line ambitus)) ambitus)) #(define-method (initialize-ambitus-state (ambitus <ambitus>) translator) "Initialize the state of AMBITUS by getting the starting position of middle C and key signature from TRANSLATOR's context." (if (not (ambitus-start-c0 ambitus)) (begin (set! (ambitus-start-c0 ambitus) (ly:context-property (ly:translator-context translator) 'middleCPosition 0)) (set! (ambitus-start-key-sig ambitus) (ly:context-property (ly:translator-context translator) 'keyAlterations))))) #(define-method (update-ambitus-notes (ambitus <ambitus>) note-grob) "Update upper and lower ambitus pitches of AMBITUS using NOTE-GROB." ;; Get the event that caused the `note-grob` creation and check ;; that it is a `note-event`. (let ((note-event (ly:grob-property note-grob 'cause))) (if (ly:in-event-class? note-event 'note-event) ;; Get the pitch from the note event. (let ((pitch (ly:event-property note-event 'pitch))) ;; If this pitch is lower than the current ambitus' lower ;; note pitch (or it has not been initialized yet), then ;; this pitch is the new ambitus' lower pitch. The same is ;; done for the upper pitch (but in the opposite ;; direction). (for-each (lambda (direction pitch-compare) (if (or (not (ambitus-note-pitch (ambitus-note ambitus direction))) (pitch-compare pitch (ambitus-note-pitch (ambitus-note ambitus direction)))) (begin (set! (ambitus-note-pitch (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) pitch) (set! (ambitus-note-cause (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) note-event)))) (list DOWN UP) (list ly:pitch<? (lambda (p1 p2) (ly:pitch<? p2 p1)))))))) #(define-method (typeset-ambitus (ambitus <ambitus>) translator) "Typeset AMBITUS. - Place the lower and upper ambitus notes according to their pitch and the position of the middle C. - Typeset or delete the note accidentals, according to the key signature. An accidental, if it is to be printed, is added to an `AccidentalPlacement` grob (a grob dedicated to the placement of accidentals near a chord). - Both note heads are added to the ambitus line grob so that a line gets printed between them." ;; Check whether there are lower and upper pitches. (if (and (ambitus-note-pitch (ambitus-note ambitus UP)) (ambitus-note-pitch (ambitus-note ambitus DOWN))) ;; Make an `AccidentalPlacement` grob, for placement of note ;; accidentals. (let ((accidental-placement (ly:engraver-make-grob translator 'AccidentalPlacement (ambitus-note-accidental (ambitus-note ambitus DOWN))))) ;; For lower and upper ambitus notes. (for-each (lambda (direction) (let ((pitch (ambitus-note-pitch (ambitus-note ambitus direction)))) ;; Set the cause and the staff position of the ambitus ;; note according to the associated pitch. (set! (ly:grob-property (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) 'cause) (ambitus-note-cause (ambitus-note ambitus direction))) (set! (ly:grob-property (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) 'staff-position) (+ (ambitus-start-c0 ambitus) (ly:pitch-steps pitch))) ;; Determine whether an accidental shall be printed for ;; this note, according to the key signature. (let* ((handle (or (assoc (cons (ly:pitch-octave pitch) (ly:pitch-notename pitch)) (ambitus-start-key-sig ambitus)) (assoc (ly:pitch-notename pitch) (ambitus-start-key-sig ambitus)))) (sig-alter (if handle (cdr handle) 0))) (cond ((= (ly:pitch-alteration pitch) sig-alter) ;; The note alteration is in the key signature ;; => it does not have to be printed. (ly:grob-suicide! (ambitus-note-accidental (ambitus-note ambitus direction))) (set! (ly:grob-object (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) 'accidental-grob) '())) (else ;; Otherwise the accidental shall be printed. (set! (ly:grob-property (ambitus-note-accidental (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) 'alteration) (ly:pitch-alteration pitch))))) ;; Add the `AccidentalPlacement` grob to the conditional ;; items of the `AmbitusNoteHead`. (ly:separation-item::add-conditional-item (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction)) accidental-placement) ;; Add the `AmbitusAccidental` to the list of the ;; `AccidentalPlacement` grob accidentals. (ly:accidental-placement::add-accidental accidental-placement (ambitus-note-accidental (ambitus-note ambitus direction))) ;; Add the `AmbitusNoteHead` grob to the `AmbitusLine` grob. (ly:pointer-group-interface::add-grob (ambitus-line ambitus) 'note-heads (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction))))) (list DOWN UP)) ;; Add the `AccidentalPlacement` grob to the main `Ambitus` grob. (ly:axis-group-interface::add-element (ambitus-group ambitus) accidental-placement)) ;; No lower and upper pitches => nothing to print. (begin (for-each (lambda (direction) (ly:grob-suicide! (ambitus-note-accidental (ambitus-note ambitus direction))) (ly:grob-suicide! (ambitus-note-head (ambitus-note ambitus direction)))) (list DOWN UP)) (ly:grob-suicide! ambitus-line)))) %%% %%% Ambitus engraver definition. %%% #(define ambitus-engraver (lambda (context) (let ((ambitus #f)) ;; When music is processed, make the ambitus object if not ;; already built. (make-engraver ((process-music translator) (if (not ambitus) (set! ambitus (make-ambitus translator)))) ;; Set the ambitus clef and key signature state. ((stop-translation-timestep translator) (if ambitus (initialize-ambitus-state ambitus translator))) ;; When a note head grob is built, update the ambitus notes. (acknowledgers ((note-head-interface engraver grob source-engraver) (if ambitus (update-ambitus-notes ambitus grob)))) ;; Finally, typeset the ambitus according to its upper and ;; lower notes (if any). ((finalize translator) (if ambitus (typeset-ambitus ambitus translator))))))) %%% %%% Example %%% \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff { c'4 des' e' fis' gis' } \new Staff { \clef "bass" c4 des ~ des ees b, } >> \layout { \context { \Staff \consists #ambitus-engraver } } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Defining an engraver in Scheme: ambitus engraver ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Engravers one by one > ] |
Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive
In many orchestral scores it is custom to not show staves for
instruments that are silent for a while; this is called a ‘Frenched’
score. LilyPond provides this functionality via the
\RemoveEmptyStaves command.
When they play again it is often preferred to show the staves of
all instruments of such a group. This can be done by adding the
Keep_alive_together_engraver to the grouping context (e.g.,
GrandStaff or StaffGroup).
In the example below the violins are silent in the second system. Only the first violin plays the last measure in the third system but the staff of the second violin is also displayed.
\score { << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" shortInstrumentName = "Fl" } \relative c' { \repeat unfold 3 { c'4 c c c | c c c c | c c c c | \break } } \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_Strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "StaffViolinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" shortInstrumentName = "Vi I" } \relative c'' { a1 | R1*7 | \repeat unfold 12 a16 a4 | } \new Staff = "StaffViolinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" shortInstrumentName = "Vi II" } \relative c' { e1 | R1*8 | } >> \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" shortInstrumentName = "Ce" } \relative c { \clef bass \repeat unfold 9 { c1 } | } >> >> } \layout { indent = 3.0\cm short-indent = 1.5\cm \context { \GrandStaff \consists Keep_alive_together_engraver } \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } }
Engravers one by one
LilyPond handles the various elements necessary to typeset a score with plugins. Each plugin is called an engraver. In this example, (some) engravers are switched on one by one, in the following order:
- note heads,
- staff symbol,
- clef,
- stem,
- beams, slurs, accents,
- accidentals, bar lines, time signature, and key signature.
Engravers are grouped. For example, note heads, slurs, beams, etc.,
form a Voice context. Engravers for key signature, accidentals,
bar line, etc., form a Staff context.
topVoice = \relative c' { \key d \major es8([ g] a[ fis]) b4 b16[-. b-. b-. cis-.] d4-> } % empty staff and voice contexts MyStaff = \context { \type Engraver_group \name Staff \accepts Voice \defaultchild Voice } MyVoice = \context { \type Engraver_group \name Voice } % add note heads MyVoice = \context { \MyVoice \consists Note_heads_engraver } \score { \topVoice \layout { \context { \MyStaff } \context { \MyVoice } } } % add staff MyStaff = \context { \MyStaff \consists Staff_symbol_engraver } \score { \topVoice \layout { \context { \MyStaff } \context { \MyVoice } } } % add clef MyStaff = \context { \MyStaff \consists Clef_engraver } \score { \topVoice \layout { \context { \MyStaff } \context { \MyVoice } } } % add stems MyVoice = \context { \MyVoice \consists Stem_engraver } \score { \topVoice \layout { \context { \MyStaff } \context { \MyVoice } } } % add beams, slurs, and accents MyVoice = \context { \MyVoice \consists Beam_engraver \consists Slur_engraver \consists Script_engraver \consists Rhythmic_column_engraver } \score { \topVoice \layout { \context { \MyStaff } \context { \MyVoice } } } % add accidentals, bar, time signature, and key signature MyStaff = \context { \MyStaff \consists Accidental_engraver \consists Bar_engraver \consists Time_signature_engraver \consists Key_engraver } \score { \topVoice \layout { \context { \MyStaff } \context { \MyVoice } } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Engravers one by one ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization > ] |
Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia
L’aspetto delle linee della griglia può essere modificato sovrascrivendo alcune delle loro proprietà.
\new ChoirStaff << \new Staff { \relative c'' { \stemUp c'4. d8 e8 f g4 } } \new Staff { \relative c { % this moves them up one staff space from the default position \override Score.GridLine.extra-offset = #'(0.0 . 1.0) \stemDown \clef bass \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 5.0 c4 \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 1.0 g'4 \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 3.0 f4 \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = 5.0 e4 } } >> \layout { \context { \Staff % set up grids \consists "Grid_point_engraver" % set the grid interval to one quarter note gridInterval = #1/4 } \context { \Score \consists "Grid_line_span_engraver" % this moves them to the right half a staff space \override NoteColumn.X-offset = -0.5 } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Measure counters > ] |
Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization
Regular vertical lines can be drawn between staves to show note synchronization; however, in case of monophonic music, you may want to make the second stave invisible, and make the lines shorter like in this snippet.
\new ChoirStaff { \relative c'' << \new Staff { \time 12/8 \stemUp c4. d8 e8 f g4 f8 e8. d16 c8 } \new Staff { % hides staff and notes so that only the grid lines are visible \hideNotes \hide Staff.BarLine \override Staff.StaffSymbol.line-count = #0 \hide Staff.TimeSignature \hide Staff.Clef % dummy notes to force regular note spacing \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #4.0 c8 c c \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #3.0 c8 c c \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #4.0 c8 c c \once \override Score.GridLine.thickness = #3.0 c8 c c } >> } \layout { \context { \Score \consists "Grid_line_span_engraver" % center grid lines horizontally below note heads \override NoteColumn.X-offset = #-0.5 } \context { \Staff \consists "Grid_point_engraver" gridInterval = #1/8 % set line length and positioning: % two staff spaces above center line on hidden staff % to four spaces below center line on visible staff \override GridPoint.Y-extent = #'(2 . -4) } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Measure spanner > ] |
Measure counters
This snippet demonstrates the use of the
Measure_counter_engraver to number groups of successive
measures. Any stretch of measures may be numbered, whether consisting
of repetitions or not.
The engraver must be added to the appropriate context. Here, a
Staff context is used; another possibility is a Dynamics
context.
The counter is begun with \startMeasureCount and ended with
\stopMeasureCount. Numbering will start by default with 1,
but this behavior may be modified by overriding the count-from
property.
When a measure extends across a line break, the number will appear twice, the second time in parentheses.
\layout { \context { \Staff \consists #Measure_counter_engraver } } \new Staff { \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 7 { c'4 d' e' f' } \stopMeasureCount \bar "||" g'4 f' e' d' \override Staff.MeasureCounter.count-from = #2 \startMeasureCount \repeat unfold 5 { g'4 f' e' d' } g'4 f' \bar "" \break e'4 d' \repeat unfold 7 { g'4 f' e' d' } \stopMeasureCount }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Measure counters ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi) > ] |
Measure spanner
Measure spanners are an alternate way to print annotated brackets. As opposed to horizontal brackets, they extend between two bar lines rather than two notes. The text is displayed in the center of the bracket.
\layout { \context { \Staff \consists Measure_spanner_engraver } } << \new Staff \relative c'' { \key d \minor R1*2 \tweak text "Answer" \startMeasureSpanner \tuplet 3/2 8 { a16[ b c] d[ c b] c[ d e] f[ e d] } e8 a gis g fis f e d~ d c b e \stopMeasureSpanner } \new Staff \relative c' { \key d \minor \tweak text "Subject" \tweak direction #DOWN \startMeasureSpanner \tuplet 3/2 8 { d16[ e f] g[ f e] f[ g a] bes[ a g] } a8 d cis c b bes a g~ g f e a \stopMeasureSpanner \tweak text "Counter-subject" \tweak direction #DOWN \startMeasureSpanner f8 e a r r16 b, c d e fis g e a gis a b c fis, b a gis e a4 g8 \stopMeasureSpanner } >>
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Measure spanner ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Annidare i righi > ] |
Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
La formattazione mensurale, in cui le stanghette non appaiono sui righi ma
nello spazio tra i righi, si può ottenere usando StaffGroup al posto
di ChoirStaff. La stanghetta sui righi viene nascosta con
\hide.
\layout { \context { \Staff measureBarType = "-span|" } } music = \fixed c'' { c1 d2 \section e2 f1 \fine } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \music \new Staff \music >>
Annidare i righi
Si può usare la proprietà systemStartDelimiterHierarchy per creare
gruppi di righi annidati più complessi. Il comando \set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy prende come argomento una lista
alfabetica dell’insieme di righi prodotti. Prima di ogni rigo si può
assegnare un delimitatore di inizio del sistema. Deve essere racchiuso
tra parentesi e collega tutti i righi compresi tra le parentesi. Gli
elementi nella lista possono essere omessi, ma la prima parentesi quadra
collega sempre tutti i righi. Le possibilità sono SystemStartBar,
SystemStartBracket, SystemStartBrace e
SystemStartSquare.
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' << \override StaffGroup.SystemStartSquare.collapse-height = 4 \set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy = #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a (SystemStartSquare b)) c) d) \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } >>
Consentire l’interruzione del rigo all’interno di gruppi irregolari con travature
Questo esempio artificioso mostra come permettere interruzioni del rigo sia manuali che automatiche all’interno di un gruppo irregolare con travature. Si noti che le travature di questi gruppi irregolari fuori dal ritmo devono essere disposte manualmente.
\layout { \context { \Voice % Permit automatic line breaks within tuplets. \remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" % Allow beams to be broken at line breaks. \override Beam.breakable = ##t } } \relative c'' { <>^"manually forced line break" a8 \repeat unfold 5 { \tuplet 3/2 { c8[ b g16 a] } } \tuplet 3/2 { c8[ b \break g16 a] } \repeat unfold 5 { \tuplet 3/2 { c8[ b g16 a] } } c8 \bar "||" } \relative c'' { <>^"automatic line break" \repeat unfold 28 a16 \tuplet 11/8 { a16[ b c d e f e d c b a] } \repeat unfold 28 a16 \bar "||" }
Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note
To print subsequent ChordNames only differing in its bass note
as slash and bass note, use the Scheme engraver defined in this
snippet. The behaviour may be controlled in detail by the
chordChanges context property.
#(define Bass_changes_equal_root_engraver (lambda (ctx) "For sequential `ChordNames` with the same root but a different bass, the root markup is dropped: D D/C D/B -> D /C /B. The behaviour may be controlled by setting the `chordChanges` context property." (let ((chord-pitches '()) (last-chord-pitches '()) (bass-pitch #f)) (make-engraver ((initialize this-engraver) (let ((chord-note-namer (ly:context-property ctx 'chordNoteNamer))) ;; Set 'chordNoteNamer, respect user setting if already done (ly:context-set-property! ctx 'chordNoteNamer (if (procedure? chord-note-namer) chord-note-namer note-name->markup)))) (listeners ((note-event this-engraver event) (let* ((pitch (ly:event-property event 'pitch)) (pitch-name (ly:pitch-notename pitch)) (pitch-alt (ly:pitch-alteration pitch)) (bass (ly:event-property event 'bass #f)) (inversion (ly:event-property event 'inversion #f))) ;; Collect notes of the chord ;; - to compare inversed chords we need to collect the ;; bass note as usual member of the chord, whereas an ;; added bass must be treated separate from the usual ;; chord-notes ;; - notes are stored as pairs containing their ;; pitch-name (an integer), i.e. disregarding their ;; octave and their alteration (cond (bass (set! bass-pitch pitch)) (inversion (set! bass-pitch pitch) (set! chord-pitches (cons (cons pitch-name pitch-alt) chord-pitches))) (else (set! chord-pitches (cons (cons pitch-name pitch-alt) chord-pitches))))))) (acknowledgers ((chord-name-interface this-engraver grob source-engraver) (let ((chord-changes (ly:context-property ctx 'chordChanges #f))) ;; If subsequent chords are equal apart from their bass, ;; reset the 'text-property. ;; Equality is done by comparing the sorted lists of this ;; chord's elements and the previous chord. Sorting is ;; needed because inverted chords may have a different ;; order of pitches. `chord-changes` needs to be true. (if (and bass-pitch chord-changes (equal? (sort chord-pitches car<) (sort last-chord-pitches car<))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'text (make-line-markup (list (ly:context-property ctx 'slashChordSeparator) ((ly:context-property ctx 'chordNoteNamer) bass-pitch (ly:context-property ctx 'chordNameLowercaseMinor)))))) (set! last-chord-pitches chord-pitches) (set! chord-pitches '()) (set! bass-pitch #f)))) ((finalize this-engraver) (set! last-chord-pitches '())))))) myChords = \chordmode { % \germanChords \set chordChanges = ##t d2:m d:m/cis d:m/c \set chordChanges = ##f d:m/b e1:7 \set chordChanges = ##t e \break \once \set chordChanges = ##f e1/f e2/gis e/+gis e e:m/f d:m d:m/cis d:m/c \set chordChanges = ##f d:m/b } << \new ChordNames \with { \consists #Bass_changes_equal_root_engraver } \myChords \new Staff \myChords >>
Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo
Sebbene le indicazioni testuali siano di norma collocate solo sopra il rigo più alto, è possibile farle apparire su ogni rigo.
\score { << \new Staff { \mark \default c''1 \textMark "molto" c'' } \new Staff { \mark \default c'1 \textMark "molto" c' } >> \layout { \context { \Score \remove Mark_engraver \remove Text_mark_engraver \remove Staff_collecting_engraver } \context { \Staff \consists Mark_engraver \consists Text_mark_engraver \consists Staff_collecting_engraver } } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito > ] |
Printing music with different time signatures
In the following snippet, two parts have a completely different time signature, yet remain synchronized.
The bar lines can no longer be printed at the Score level; to
allow independent bar lines in each part, the
Default_barline_engraver and Timing_translator are moved
from the Score context to the Staff context.
If bar numbers are required, the Bar_number_engraver should also
be moved, since it relies on properties set by the
Timing_translator; a \with block can be used to add bar
numbers to the relevant staff.
global = { \time 3/4 s2.*3 \break s2.*3 } \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Timing_translator" \remove "Bar_number_engraver" \override SpacingSpanner.uniform-stretching = ##t \override SpacingSpanner.strict-note-spacing = ##t proportionalNotationDuration = #1/64 } \context { \Staff \consists "Timing_translator" } \context { \Voice \remove "Forbid_line_break_engraver" tupletFullLength = ##t } } Bassklarinette = \new Staff \with { \consists "Bar_number_engraver" barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 2) \override BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible } << \global { \clef treble \time 3/8 d''4. | \time 3/4 r8 des''2( c''8) | \time 7/8 r4. ees''2 ~ | \time 2/4 \tupletUp \tuplet 3/2 { ees''4 r4 d''4 ~ } | \time 3/8 \tupletUp \tuplet 4/3 { d''4 r4 } | \time 2/4 e''2 | \time 3/8 es''4. | \time 3/4 r8 d''2 r8 | } >> Perkussion = \new StaffGroup << \new Staff << \global { \clef percussion \time 3/4 r4 c'2 ~ | c'2. | R2. | r2 g'4 ~ | g'2. ~ | g'2. | } >> \new Staff << \global { \clef percussion \time 3/4 R2. | g'2. ~ | g'2. | r4 g'2 ~ | g'2 r4 | g'2. | } >> >> \score { << \Bassklarinette \Perkussion >> }
Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito
I numeri di battuta possono essere tolti rimuovendo l’incisore
Bar_number_engraver dal contesto Score.
\layout { \context { \Score \omit BarNumber % or: % \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } \relative c'' { c4 c c c \break c4 c c c }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Using mark lines in a Frenched score > ] |
Usare una parentesi quadra all’inizio di un gruppo di righi
Si può usare il segno SystemStartSquare (uno dei segni che delimitano
l’inizio del sistema) impostandolo esplicitamente in un contesto
StaffGroup o ChoirStaff.
\score { \new StaffGroup { << \set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiter = #'SystemStartSquare \new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' } \new Staff { c'4 d' e' f' } >> } }
Using mark lines in a Frenched score
Using MarkLine contexts (such as in “Placing rehearsal marks
other than above the top staff”) in a Frenched score can be problematic
if all the staves between two MarkLines are removed in one
system. The Keep_alive_together_engraver can be used within each
StaffGroup to keep the MarkLine alive only as long as the
other staves in the group stay alive.
bars = { \tempo "Allegro" 4=120 s1*2 \repeat unfold 5 { \mark \default s1*2 } \bar "||" \tempo "Adagio" 4=40 s1*2 \repeat unfold 8 { \mark \default s1*2 } \bar "|." } winds = \repeat unfold 120 { c''4 } trumpet = { \repeat unfold 8 g'2 R1*16 \repeat unfold 4 g'2 R1*8 } trombone = { \repeat unfold 4 c'1 R1*8 d'1 R1*17 } strings = \repeat unfold 240 { c''8 } #(set-global-staff-size 16) \paper { systems-per-page = 5 ragged-last-bottom = ##f tagline = ##f } \layout { indent = 16\mm short-indent = 5\mm \context { \name MarkLine \type Engraver_group \consists Output_property_engraver \consists Axis_group_engraver \consists Mark_engraver \consists Metronome_mark_engraver \consists Staff_collecting_engraver \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-empty = ##t \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-layer = #'any \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN \override VerticalAxisGroup.nonstaff-relatedstaff-spacing.padding = 1 keepAliveInterfaces = #'() } \context { \Staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-empty = ##t \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-layer = ##f } \context { \StaffGroup \accepts MarkLine \consists Keep_alive_together_engraver } \context { \Score \remove Mark_engraver \remove Metronome_mark_engraver \remove Staff_collecting_engraver \override BarNumber.Y-offset = #3 } } \score { << \new StaffGroup = "winds" \with { instrumentName = "Winds" shortInstrumentName = "W." } << \new MarkLine \bars \new Staff \winds >> \new StaffGroup = "brass" << \new MarkLine \bars \new Staff = "trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet" shortInstrumentName = "Tp." } \trumpet \new Staff = "trombone" \with { instrumentName = "Trombone" shortInstrumentName = "Tb." } \trombone >> \new StaffGroup = "strings" \with { instrumentName = "Strings" shortInstrumentName = "Str." } << \new MarkLine \bars \new Staff = "strings" { \strings } >> >> }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Using mark lines in a Frenched score ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello > ] |
Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente
Usando le etichette (tag), è possibile usare la stessa musica per produrre sia
la musica mensurale che quella moderna. In questo frammento, viene introdotta
la funzione menrest, che permette alle pause mensurali di essere
posizionate precisamente sul rigo come nell’originale, ma con le pause moderne
nella posizione standard. Le etichette vengono usate per produrre diversi
tipi di stanghetta alla fine della musica, ma possono essere usate anche
quando sono necessarie altre differenze: per esempio se si vogliono usare
“pause d’intero” (R1, R\breve, etc.) nella musica moderna, ma pause
normali (r1, r\breve, etc.) nella versione mensurale. La conversione di
musica mensurale nel suo equivalente moderno viene solitamente chiamata
trascrizione.
\layout { line-width = 150\mm } menrest = #(define-music-function (note) (ly:music?) #{ \tag #'mens $(make-music 'RestEvent note) \tag #'mod $(make-music 'RestEvent note 'pitch '()) #}) Be = \tag #'mod #(begin (ly:expect-warning (G_ "stem does not fit in beam")) (ly:expect-warning (G_ "beam was started here")) (make-span-event 'BeamEvent START)) Am = \tag #'mod ] MenStyle = { \override Score.BarNumber.transparent = ##t \override Stem.neutral-direction = #up \omit Slur \omit Beam } finalis = \section Music = \relative c'' { \key f \major g1 d'2 \menrest bes4 bes a2 \menrest r4 g4 fis4. fis8 fis4 fis g e f4.([ g8] a4[ g8 f] g2.\Be fis8 e\Am fis2) g\breve \finalis } MenLyr = \lyricmode { So farre, deere life, deare life, from thy bright beames ab- ſen- ted, } ModLyr = \lyricmode { So far, dear life, dear life, from your bright beams ab -- sen -- ted, __ } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \keepWithTag #'mens { << \new PetrucciStaff { \new PetrucciVoice = "Cantus" { \clef "petrucci-c1" \time 4/4 \MenStyle \Music } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "Cantus" \MenLyr >> } \layout { \context { \PetrucciVoice % No longer necessary starting with version 2.25.23. \override Flag.style = #'mensural } } } \markup\vspace #1 \score { \keepWithTag #'mod { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff { \new Voice = "Sop" \with { \remove "Note_heads_engraver" \consists "Completion_heads_engraver" \remove "Rest_engraver" \consists "Completion_rest_engraver" } \shiftDurations 1 0 { \time 2/4 \autoBeamOff \Music } } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "Sop" \ModLyr >> } }
Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello
Questo modello crea una partitura che inizia con una sezione solistica e
prosegue in un ritornello a due voci. Illustra anche l’uso delle
pause spaziatrici all’interno della variabile \global per definire
i cambi di tempo (e altri elementi comuni a tutte le parti) nel corso di
tutta la partitura.
global = { \key g \major % verse \time 3/4 s2.*2 \break % refrain \time 2/4 s2*2 \bar "|." } SoloNotes = \relative g' { \clef "treble" % verse g4 g g | b4 b b | % refrain R2*2 | } SoloLyrics = \lyricmode { One two three | four five six | } SopranoNotes = \relative c'' { \clef "treble" % verse R2.*2 | % refrain c4 c | g4 g | } SopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { la la | la la | } BassNotes = \relative c { \clef "bass" % verse R2.*2 | % refrain c4 e | d4 d | } BassLyrics = \lyricmode { dum dum | dum dum | } \score { << \new Voice = "SoloVoice" << \global \SoloNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "SoloVoice" \SoloLyrics \new ChoirStaff << \new Voice = "SopranoVoice" << \global \SopranoNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "SopranoVoice" \SopranoLyrics \new Voice = "BassVoice" << \global \BassNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "BassVoice" \BassLyrics >> >> \layout { ragged-right = ##t \context { \Staff % these lines prevent empty staves from being printed \RemoveEmptyStaves \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Volta brackets in multiple staves > ] |
Volta sotto gli accordi
Aggiungendo l’incisore Volta_engraver al rigo, è possibile
inserire le volte sotto gli accordi.
\score { << \chords { c1 c1 } \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } { \repeat volta 2 { c'1 \alternative { c' } } } >> \layout { \context { \Score \remove "Volta_engraver" } } }
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Tweaks and overrides >> ] |
| [ < Volta sotto gli accordi ] | [ Up: Contexts and engravers ] | [ Tweaks and overrides > ] |
Volta brackets in multiple staves
By adding the Volta_engraver to the relevant staff, volte can be
put over staves other than the topmost one in a score.
\repeat and related commands should be present in all staves.
voltaMusic = \relative c'' { \repeat volta 2 { c1 \alternative { \volta 1 { d1 } \volta 2 { e1 } } } } << \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \voltaMusic \new Staff \voltaMusic >> \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \consists "Volta_engraver" } \voltaMusic \new Staff \voltaMusic >> >>
| [ << Contexts and engravers ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Volta brackets in multiple staves ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce > ] |
19 Tweaks and overrides
See also Changing defaults and Tweaking output.
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Adding links to objects > ] |
Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce
Se il rigo ha più di una voce, l’ottavazione in una voce trasporrà
la posizione delle note in tutte le voci per la durata della parentesi
dell’ottava. Se si intende applicare l’ottavazione a una sola voce,
occorre spostare l’incisore Ottava_spanner_engraver nel
contesto Voice.
\layout { \context { \Staff \remove Ottava_spanner_engraver } \context { \Voice \consists Ottava_spanner_engraver } } { \clef bass << { <g d'>1~ q2 <c' e'> } \\ { r2. \ottava -1 <b,,, b,,>4 ~ | q2 \ottava 0 <c e>2 } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Adding markups in a tablature > ] |
Adding links to objects
To add a link to a grob stencil you can use add-link as defined
here. It works both with \override and \tweak.
Drawback: point-and-click is disturbed for the linked grobs.
Limitation: Works for PDF only.
The linked objects are colored with a separate command.
#(define (add-link url-strg) (lambda (grob) (let* ((stil (ly:grob-property grob 'stencil))) (if (ly:stencil? stil) (let* ((x-ext (ly:stencil-extent stil X)) (y-ext (ly:stencil-extent stil Y)) (url-expr `(url-link ,url-strg ,x-ext ,y-ext)) (new-stil (ly:stencil-add (ly:make-stencil url-expr x-ext y-ext) stil))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'stencil new-stil)))))) %%%% test %% For easier maintenance of this snippet the URL is formatted to use the %% actually used LilyPond version. %% Of course a literal URL would work as well. #(define major.minor-version (string-join (take (string-split (lilypond-version) #\.) 2) ".")) urlI = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/writing-pitches" major.minor-version) urlII = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/rhythms" major.minor-version) urlIII = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/note-heads" major.minor-version) urlIV = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/beams" major.minor-version) urlV = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/note-head-styles" major.minor-version) urlVI = #(format #f "http://lilypond.org/doc/v~a/Documentation/notation/writing-pitches" major.minor-version) \relative c' { \key cis \minor \once \override Staff.Clef.color = #green \once \override Staff.Clef.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlI) \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.color = #green \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlII) \once \override NoteHead.color = #green \once \override NoteHead.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlIII) cis'1 \once \override Beam.color = #green \once \override Beam.after-line-breaking = #(add-link urlIV) cis8 dis e fis gis2 <gis, \tweak Accidental.color #green \tweak Accidental.after-line-breaking #(add-link urlVI) \tweak color #green \tweak after-line-breaking #(add-link urlV) \tweak style #'harmonic bis dis fis >1 <cis, cis' e> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Adding links to objects ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi > ] |
Adding markups in a tablature
By default, markups are not displayed in a tablature.
To make them appear, revert the stencil property of the
TextScript grob in the TabStaff context.
high = { r4 r8 <g c'> q r8 r4 } low = { c4 r4 c8 r8 g,8 b, } pulse = { s8^"1" s^"&" s^"2" s^"&" s^"3" s^"&" s^"4" s^"&" } \score { \new TabStaff { \repeat unfold 2 << \high \\ \low \\ \pulse >> } \layout { \context { \TabStaff \clef moderntab \revert TextScript.stencil \override TextScript.font-series = #'bold \override TextScript.font-size = #-2 \override TextScript.color = #red } \context { \Score proportionalNotationDuration = #1/8 } } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Adding markups in a tablature ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Adjusting grace note spacing > ] |
Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi
I battiti saltati nei glissandi molto lunghi vengono talvolta segnalati con delle indicazioni di tempo, che consistono solitamente in dei gambi privi di teste di nota. Questi gambi possono essere usati anche per contenere segni di espressione intermedi.
Se i gambi non si allineano bene al glissando, può essere necessario riposizionarli leggermente.
glissandoSkipOn = { \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t \hide NoteHead \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##t } glissandoSkipOff = { \revert NoteColumn.glissando-skip \undo \hide NoteHead \revert NoteHead.no-ledgers } \relative c'' { r8 f8\glissando \glissandoSkipOn f4 g a a8\noBeam \glissandoSkipOff a8 r8 f8\glissando \glissandoSkipOn g4 a8 \glissandoSkipOff a8 | r4 f\glissando \< \glissandoSkipOn a4\f \> \glissandoSkipOff b8\! r | }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Adjusting slur positions vertically > ] |
Adjusting grace note spacing
The space given to grace notes can be adjusted using the
spacing-increment property of Score.GraceSpacing.
graceNotes = { \grace { c4 c8 c16 c32 } c8 } \relative c'' { c8 \graceNotes \override Score.GraceSpacing.spacing-increment = #2.0 \graceNotes \revert Score.GraceSpacing.spacing-increment \graceNotes }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting grace note spacing ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics > ] |
Adjusting slur positions vertically
Using \override Slur.positions it is possible to set the
vertical position of the start and end points of a slur to absolute
values (or rather, forcing LilyPond’s slur algorithm to consider these
values as desired). In many cases, this means a lot of trial and error
until good values are found. You probably have tried the
\offset command next just to find out that it doesn’t work for
slurs, emitting a warning instead.
The code in this snippet allows you to tweak the vertical start and end
positions by specifying relative changes, similar to
\offset.
Syntax: \offsetPositions #'(dy1 . dy2)
offsetPositions = #(define-music-function (offsets) (number-pair?) #{ \once \override Slur.control-points = #(lambda (grob) (match-let ((((_ . y1) _ _ (_ . y2)) (ly:slur::calc-control-points grob)) ((off1 . off2) offsets)) (set! (ly:grob-property grob 'positions) (cons (+ y1 off1) (+ y2 off2))) (ly:slur::calc-control-points grob))) #}) \relative c'' { c4(^"default" c, d2) \offsetPositions #'(0 . 1) c'4(^"(0 . 1)" c, d2) \offsetPositions #'(0 . 2) c'4(^"(0 . 2)" c, d2) \bar "||" g4(^"default" a d'2) \offsetPositions #'(1 . 0) g,,4(^"(1 . 0)" a d'2) \offsetPositions #'(2 . 0) g,,4(^"(2 . 0)" a d'2) }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting slur positions vertically ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Aligning text marks to notes > ] |
Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
% Default layout: << \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } \new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } % Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics: \new Lyrics \with { \override VerticalAxisGroup.nonstaff-relatedstaff-spacing = #'((basic-distance . 1)) } \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Altering the length of beamed stems > ] |
Aligning text marks to notes
By default, TextMark objects are aligned to so-called
NonMusicalPaperColumn grobs, like the left edge of the staff or
a bar line. They can be aligned to a note instead by setting the
non-musical property to #f.
\layout { line-length = 80\mm } { \textMark "mark a" c'1 | \textMark "mark b" c'1 | \break \override Score.TextMark.non-musical = ##f \textMark "mark c" c'1 | \textMark "mark d" c'1 | }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Aligning text marks to notes ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Numeri di battuta alternativi > ] |
Altering the length of beamed stems
Stem lengths on beamed notes can be varied by overriding the
beamed-lengths property of the details of the
Stem. If a single value is used as an argument, the length
applies to all stems. When multiple arguments are used, the first
applies to eighth notes, the second to sixteenth notes and so on. The
final argument also applies to all notes shorter than the note length
of the final argument. Non-integer arguments may also be used.
\relative c'' { \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(2) a8[ a] a16[ a] a32[ a] \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(8 10 12) a8[ a] a16[ a] a32[ a] r8 \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(8) a8[ a] \override Stem.details.beamed-lengths = #'(8.5) a8[ a] \revert Stem.details.beamed-lengths a8[ a] a16[ a] a32[ a] r16 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Altering the length of beamed stems ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo > ] |
Numeri di battuta alternativi
Si possono impostare due metodi alternativi di numerazione della battuta, utili specialmente per le ripetizioni.
music = \relative c' { \repeat volta 3 { c4 d e f | \alternative { \volta 1 { c4 d e f | c2 d \break } \volta 2 { f4 g a b | f4 g a b | f2 a | \break } \volta 3 { c4 d e f | c2 d } } } c1 \bar "|." } \markup "default" { \music } \markup \typewriter "numbers" { \set Score.alternativeNumberingStyle = #'numbers \music } \markup \typewriter "numbers-with-letters" { \set Score.alternativeNumberingStyle = #'numbers-with-letters \music }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Numeri di battuta alternativi ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Parentesi analitiche con etichette > ] |
Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo
Delle semplici parentesi analitiche orizzontali vengono aggiunte, per impostazione predefinita, sotto il rigo. L’esempio seguente mostra un modo per posizionarle sopra il rigo.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver" } } \relative c'' { \once \override HorizontalBracket.direction = #UP c2\startGroup d2\stopGroup }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Asymmetric slurs > ] |
Parentesi analitiche con etichette
Si può aggiungere del testo alle parentesi analitiche tramite la proprietà
text del grob HorizontalBracketText. L’aggiunta di vari frammenti
di testo alle parentesi che iniziano nello stesso momento musicale richiede
l’uso del comando \tweak.
Dopo un’interruzione di linea il testo viene messo tra parentesi.
\layout { \context { \Voice \consists "Horizontal_bracket_engraver" \override HorizontalBracket.direction = #UP } } { \once\override HorizontalBracketText.text = "a" c''\startGroup d''\stopGroup \once\override HorizontalBracketText.text = "a'" e''\startGroup d''\stopGroup | c''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text \markup \bold \huge "b" \startGroup -\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text "a" \startGroup d''\stopGroup e''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text "a'" \startGroup d''\stopGroup\stopGroup | c''-\tweak HorizontalBracketText.text foo \startGroup d'' e'' f'' | \break g'' a'' b'' c'''\stopGroup }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Parentesi analitiche con etichette ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts > ] |
Asymmetric slurs
Slurs can be made asymmetric to match an asymmetric pattern of notes better.
slurNotes = { d,8( a' d f a f' d, a) } \relative c' { \stemDown \slurUp \slurNotes \once \override Slur.eccentricity = #3.0 \slurNotes }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Asymmetric slurs ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata > ] |
Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts
By default, LilyPond uses DynamicLineSpanner grobs to vertically
align successive dynamic objects like hairpins and dynamic text.
However, this is not always wanted. By inserting
\breakDynamicSpan, which ends the alignment spanner
prematurely, this vertical alignment can be avoided.
{ g1\< | e''\f\> | c'\p } { g1\< | e''\breakDynamicSpan\f\> | c'\p }
Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata
A caesura is sometimes denoted by a double “railtracks” breath mark with a fermata sign positioned above. This snippet shows an optically pleasing combination of railtracks and fermata.
\relative c'' { c2. % construct the symbol \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \override #'(direction . 1) \override #'(baseline-skip . 1.8) \dir-column { \translate #'(0.155 . 0) \center-align \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.curved" \center-align \musicglyph "scripts.ufermata" } } \breathe c4 % set the breath mark back to normal \revert BreathingSign.text c2. \breathe c4 \bar "|." }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Changing beam thickness and spacing > ] |
Changing a single note’s size in a chord
Individual note heads in a chord can be modified with the
\tweak command inside a chord, by altering the font-size
property.
Inside the chord (within the brackets < >), before the note to
be altered, place the \tweak command, followed by
font-size and define the proper size like #-2 (a tiny
note head).
\relative c' { <\tweak font-size #+2 c e g c \tweak font-size #-2 e>1 ^\markup { A tiny e }_\markup { A big c } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Changing a single note’s size in a chord ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Modificare la forma delle pause multiple > ] |
Changing beam thickness and spacing
To make beams thicker or thinner alter the Beam.beam-thickness
property. To adjust the spacing between beams alter the
Beam.length-fraction property.
\relative f' { \time 1/8 \override Beam.beam-thickness = #0.4 \override Beam.length-fraction = #0.8 c32 c c c \revert Beam.beam-thickness % 0.48 is default thickness \revert Beam.length-fraction % 1.0 is default spacing c32 c c c \override Beam.beam-thickness = #0.6 \override Beam.length-fraction = #1.3 c32 c c c }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Changing beam thickness and spacing ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Changing properties for individual grobs > ] |
Modificare la forma delle pause multiple
Se la pausa multipla dura dieci misure o un numero inferiore a dieci, nel rigo
apparirà una serie di pause di longa e di breve (chiamate in tedesco “Kirchenpausen”
- pause ecclesiastiche); altrimenti apparirà una semplice linea. Il numero
predefinito di dieci può essere cambiato sovrascrivendo la proprietà
expand-limit..
\relative c'' { \compressMMRests { R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9 \override MultiMeasureRest.expand-limit = 3 R1*2 | R1*5 | R1*9 } }
Changing properties for individual grobs
The \applyOutput command allows the tuning of any layout
object, in any context. It requires a Scheme function with three
arguments.
In the example below, function mc-squared is executed for all
NoteHead grobs (within the current Voice context) at the
current time step; the function modifies the grob’s stencil,
using the staff-position property to replace some pitches with
markup.
See the ‘Extending’ manual for more information.
#(define (mc-squared grob grob-origin context) (let ((sp (ly:grob-property grob 'staff-position))) (ly:grob-set-property! grob 'stencil (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup \lower #0.5 #(case sp ((-5) "m") ((-3) "c ") ((-2) #{ \markup \teeny \bold 2 #}) (else "bla")) #})))) \relative c' { <d f g b>2 \applyOutput Voice.NoteHead #mc-squared <d f g b>2 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Changing properties for individual grobs ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Changing the default text font family > ] |
Cambiare gli stili del testo e degli estensori per le dinamiche testuali
Il testo usato per i crescendo e i decrescendo può essere cambiato
modificando le proprietà di contesto crescendoText e
decrescendoText.
Lo stile della linea dell’estensore può essere cambiato modificando la
proprietà 'style di DynamicTextSpanner. Il valore predefinito
è 'dashed-line; gli altri valori possibili sono 'line,
'dotted-line e 'none.
\relative c'' { \set crescendoText = \markup { \italic { cresc. poco } } \set crescendoSpanner = #'text \override DynamicTextSpanner.style = #'dotted-line a2\< a a2 a a2 a a2 a\mf }
Changing the default text font family
The default font families for text can be overridden.
%{ You may have to install additional fonts. Red Hat Fedora dejavu-fonts-all Debian GNU/Linux, Ubuntu fonts-dejavu-core fonts-dejavu-extra %} \paper { %{ run lilypond -dshow-available-fonts to show all fonts available in the process log. %} property-defaults.fonts.serif = "DejaVu Serif" property-defaults.fonts.sans = "DejaVu Sans" property-defaults.fonts.typewriter = "DejaVu Sans Mono" } { g'''4^\markup { DejaVu Serif: \bold bold \italic italic \italic \bold { bold italic } } g4_\markup { \override #'(font-family . sans) { DejaVu Sans: \bold bold \italic italic \italic \bold { bold italic } } } g''2^\markup { \override #'(font-family . typewriter) { DejaVu Sans Mono: \bold bold \italic italic \italic \bold { bold italic } } } }
Changing the staff size
Though the simplest way to resize staves is to use
#(set-global-staff-size size), an individual staff’s
size can be changed by scaling the properties staff-space and
fontSize.
<< \new Staff { \relative c'' { \dynamicDown c8\ff c c c c c c c } } \new Staff \with { fontSize = #-3 \override StaffSymbol.staff-space = #(magstep -3) } { \clef bass c8 c c c c\f c c c } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Changing the staff size ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Changing the text for sustain markings > ] |
Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica
Per cambiare il tempo del file MIDI senza che appaia l’indicazione metronomica, basta renderla invisibile.
\score { \new Staff \relative c' { \tempo 4 = 160 c4 e g b c4 b d c \set Score.tempoHideNote = ##t \tempo 4 = 96 d,4 fis a cis d4 cis e d } \layout { } \midi { } }
Changing the text for sustain markings
With the pedalSustainStrings context property it is possible to
set the text used for pedal down and up. Note that the only valid
strings are those found in the list of pedal glyphs – the values shown
in this snippet constitute an exhaustive list.
sustainNotes = { c4\sustainOn d e\sustainOff\sustainOn f\sustainOff } \relative c' { \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("P" "P-" "-") \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("d" "de" "e") \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("M" "M-" "-") \sustainNotes \set Staff.pedalSustainStrings = #'("Ped" "*Ped" "*") \sustainNotes } \layout { ragged-right = ##f }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Changing the text for sustain markings ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes > ] |
Controlling spanner visibility after a line break
The visibility of spanners which end on the first note following a line
break is controlled by the after-line-breaking callback
ly:spanner::kill-zero-spanned-time.
For objects such as glissandos and hairpins, the default behaviour is to hide the spanner after a break; disabling the callback will allow the left-broken span to be shown.
Conversely, spanners which are usually visible, such as text spans, can be hidden by enabling the callback.
\paper { line-width = 50\mm } \relative c'' { \override Hairpin.to-barline = ##f \override Glissando.breakable = ##t % show hairpin \override Hairpin.after-line-breaking = ##t % hide text span \override TextSpanner.after-line-breaking = #ly:spanner::kill-zero-spanned-time e2\<\startTextSpan % show glissando \override Glissando.after-line-breaking = ##t f2\glissando \break f,1\!\stopTextSpan }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Controlling spanner visibility after a line break ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script > ] |
Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes
Using various properties of the StemTremolo grob it is possible
to control the appearance of tremolo slashes.
- Property
slopesets the slope for tremolo slashes. - Property
shapedetermines whether tremolo slashes look like rectangles (valuerectangle) or like very small beams (valuebeam-like). - Property
stylesets both the slope and the shape depending on whether the note has flags, beams, or only a plain stem. This is in contrast to the previous two properties, which change the slope and shape unconditionally. There are two styles defined.-
default: slashes for down-stem flags are longer and more sloped than slashes for up-stem flags; slashes on beamed notes have a rectangular shape and are parallel to the beam. -
constant: all slashes are beam-like and have the same slope except for down-stem flags.
-
music = { a''4:32 a': e''8: \noBeam e': a'':[ a':] f':[ g':] d':[ d':] } \new Staff { <>^\markup "default" \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "style = #'constant" \override StemTremolo.style = #'constant \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "shape = #'rectangle" \override StemTremolo.shape = #'rectangle \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "shape = #'beam-like" \override StemTremolo.shape = #'beam-like \music } \new Staff { <>^\markup \typewriter "slope = -0.2" \override StemTremolo.slope = -0.2 \music }
Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script
L’ordine verticale degli script è determinato dalla proprietà
'script-priority. Più il numero è piccolo, più sarà posto
vicino alla nota. In questo esempio, il simbolo di diesis (oggetto
TextScript) ha prima la priorità più bassa, dunque è posto più
in basso nel primo esempio. Nel secondo, il trillo (oggetto Script) ha
la priorità più bassa, quindi si trova all’interno. Quando due oggetti hanno
la stessa priorità, l’ordine in cui sono inseriti determina quale viene
prima.
\relative c''' { \once \override TextScript.script-priority = -100 a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp } \once \override Script.script-priority = -100 a2^\prall^\markup { \sharp } \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-2 a-1>2 <a-1 c\tweak script-priority -100 -2>2 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Creare un gruppetto ritardato > ] |
Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare
Il comportamento predefinito relativo alla visibilità della parentesi quadra del gruppo irregolare è di mostrare una parentesi a meno che non ci sia una travatura della stessa lunghezza del gruppo.
Per controllare la visibilità di tale parentesi, si imposta la proprietà
'bracket-visibility su #t (mostra sempre la parentesi),
#'if-no-beam (mostra la parentesi solo se non c’è una travatura,
che è il comportamento predefinito) o #f (non mostrare mai la parentesi).
L’ultima opzione equivale a omettere l’oggetto @code{TupletBracket}
dall’output.
music = \relative c'' { \tuplet 3/2 { c16[ d e } f8] \tuplet 3/2 { c8 d e } \tuplet 3/2 { c4 d e } } \new Voice { \relative c' { \override Score.TextMark.non-musical = ##f \textMark "default" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam \textMark \markup \typewriter "'if-no-beam" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = ##t \textMark \markup \typewriter "#t" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = ##f \textMark \markup \typewriter "#f" \music \omit TupletBracket \textMark \markup \typewriter "omit" \music } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Creating custom key signatures > ] |
Creare un gruppetto ritardato
Creare un gruppetto ritardato, dove la nota più bassa del gruppetto usa
l’alterazione, richiede vari \override. La proprietà
outside-staff-priority deve essere impostata su #f, perché
altrimenti questa avrebbe la precedenza sulla proprietà avoid-slur.
Cambiando la frazione 2/3 si aggiusta la posizione orizzontale.
\relative c'' { \after 2*2/3 \turn c2( d4) r | \after 4 \turn c4.( d8) \after 4 { \once \set suggestAccidentals = ##t \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.outside-staff-priority = ##f \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.avoid-slur = #'inside \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.font-size = -3 \once \override AccidentalSuggestion.script-priority = -1 \once \hideNotes cis8\turn \noBeam } d4.( e8) }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Creare un gruppetto ritardato ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Creating text spanners > ] |
Creating custom key signatures
LilyPond supports custom key signatures. In this example, print for D minor and D major with an extended range of shown flats.
\new Staff \with { \override StaffSymbol.line-count = #8 \override KeySignature.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeyCancellation.flat-positions = #'((-7 . 6)) \override KeySignature.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override KeyCancellation.sharp-positions = #'((-6 . 7)) \override Clef.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (grob-interpret-markup grob #{ \markup\combine \musicglyph "clefs.C" \translate #'(-3 . -2) \musicglyph "clefs.F" #})) clefPosition = #3 middleCPosition = #3 middleCClefPosition = #3 } { \key d\minor f bes, f bes, | \key d\major fis b, fis b, | }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Creating custom key signatures ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround > ] |
Creating text spanners
The \startTextSpan and \stopTextSpan commands allow the
creation of text spanners as easily as pedal indications or
octavations. Override some properties of the TextSpanner object
to modify its output.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = #"bla" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = #"blu" a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.style = #'line \once \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.style = #'dashed-line \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . 1) } \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = \markup { \draw-line #'(0 . -2) } \once \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.padding = #-2 a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan \override TextSpanner.dash-period = #10 \override TextSpanner.dash-fraction = #0.5 \override TextSpanner.thickness = #10 a4 \startTextSpan b4 c a4 \stopTextSpan }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Creating text spanners ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Cross-staff stems > ] |
Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround
Sometimes it is better to use stems from the ‘other’ staff for creating cross-staff chords to trick LilyPond’s beam collision detector. In the following snippet, if the stems from the lower staff were used instead, it would be necessary to explicitly use
\override Staff.Beam.collision-voice-only = ##t
so that LilyPond doesn’t move the beams.
\new PianoStaff << \new Staff = up \relative c' << { r4 \override Stem.cross-staff = ##t \override Stem.length = #19 % this is in half-spaces, % so it makes stems 9.5 staffspaces long \override Stem.Y-offset = #-6 % stems are normally lengthened % upwards, so here we must lower the stem by the amount % equal to the lengthening - in this case (19 - 7) / 2 % (7 is default stem length) e e e } { s4 \change Staff = "bottom" \override NoteColumn.ignore-collision = ##t c, c c } >> \new Staff = bottom \relative c' { \clef bass \voiceOne g8 a g a g a g a } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Custodes > ] |
Cross-staff stems
This snippet shows how to use Span_stem_engraver and
\crossStaff to connect stems across staves automatically.
The stem lengths need not be specified, as the variable distance between
noteheads and staves is calculated automatically. However, it is
important that \crossStaff is applied to the correct voice or
staff (i.e., on the opposite side of where a beam is or would be
positioned) to get the desired effect.
\layout { \context { \PianoStaff \consists "Span_stem_engraver" } } \new PianoStaff << \new Staff { <b d'>4 r d'16\> e'8. g8 r\! | e'8 f' g'4 \voiceTwo % Down to lower staff \crossStaff { e'8 e'8 } e'4 | } \new Staff { \clef bass \voiceOne % Up to upper staff \crossStaff { <e g>4 e, g16 a8. c8 } d | g8 f g4 \voiceTwo g8 g g4 | } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Cross-staff stems ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Personalizzare la tastiera del diagramma dei tasti > ] |
Custodes
Custodes may be engraved in various styles.
\layout { ragged-right = ##t } \markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \new Staff \with { \consists "Custos_engraver" } \relative c' { \override Staff.Custos.neutral-position = #4 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'hufnagel c1^"hufnagel" \break <d a' f'>1 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'medicaea c1^"medicaea" \break <d a' f'>1 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'vaticana c1^"vaticana" \break <d a' f'>1 \override Staff.Custos.style = #'mensural c1^"mensural" \break <d a' f'>1 } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Custodes ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup > ] |
Personalizzare la tastiera del diagramma dei tasti
Le proprietà del diagramma dei tasti possono essere impostate tramite
'fret-diagram-details. Per i diagrammi dell’oggetto FretBoard,
gli override vengono applicati all’oggetto FretBoards.FretBoard.
Come Voice, FretBoards è un contesto di basso livello,
dunque può essere omesso negli override delle proprietà.
% begin verbatim \include "predefined-guitar-fretboards.ly" \storePredefinedDiagram #default-fret-table \chordmode { c' } #guitar-tuning "x;1-1-(;3-2;3-3;3-4;1-1-);" % shorthand oo = #(define-music-function (grob-path value) (list? scheme?) #{ \once \override $grob-path = #value #}) << \new ChordNames { \chordmode { c1 | c | c | d | bes } } \new FretBoards { % Set global properties of fret diagram \override FretBoards.FretBoard.size = 1.2 \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code = #'in-dot \override FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color = #'white \chordmode { c \oo FretBoard.size #1.0 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-type #'straight \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color #'black \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code #'below-string c' \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-type #'none \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.number-type #'arabic \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.orientation #'landscape \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.mute-string "M" \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.label-dir #LEFT \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color #'black c' \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code #'below-string \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-radius #0.35 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-position #0.5 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.fret-count #3 d \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-type #'straight \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.finger-code #'none \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-radius #0.25 \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.dot-color #'black \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.string-overhang #0. \oo FretBoard.fret-diagram-details.barre-thickness #2. bes } } \new Voice { c'1 | c' | c' | d' | bes } >>
Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup
Le proprietà del diagramma dei tasti si possono impostare tramite
'fret-diagram-details. Per diagrammi di tipo markup, gli
override possono essere applicati all’oggetto Voice.TextScript o
direttamente al markup.
<< \chords { c1 | c | c | d } \new Voice = "mel" { \textLengthOn % Set global properties of fret diagram \override TextScript.size = 1.2 \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details.finger-code = #'in-dot \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details.dot-color = #'white %% C major for guitar, no barre, using defaults % terse style c'1^\markup { \fret-diagram-terse "x;3-3;2-2;o;1-1;o;" } %% C major for guitar, barred on third fret % verbose style % size 1.0 % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre c'1^\markup { % standard size \override #'(size . 1.0) { \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ( (number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . in-dot) (barre-type . straight))) { \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) } } } %% C major for guitar, barred on third fret % verbose style % landscape orientation, arabic numbers, M for mute string % no barre, fret label down or left, small mute label font c'1^\markup { \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ( (finger-code . below-string) (number-type . arabic) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (orientation . landscape) (barre-type . none) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) { \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) } } %% simple D chord % terse style % larger dots, centered dots, fewer frets % label below string d'1^\markup { \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ( (finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) { \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" } } } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Displaying grob ancestry > ] |
Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema
Se c’è un solo rigo in uno dei tipi di rigo ChoirStaff o
StaffGroup, la parentesi e la stanghetta iniziale non
appaiono. Si può modificare questo comportamento predefinito
sovrascrivendo collapse-height e impostando un valore
inferiore al numero di linee del rigo.
Nei contesti PianoStaff e GrandStaff, dove i sistemi
iniziano con una parentesi graffa invece di una parentesi quadra,
occorre impostare un’altra proprietà, come si vede nel secondo
sistema dell’esempio.
\score { \new StaffGroup << % Must be lower than the actual number of staff lines \override StaffGroup.SystemStartBracket.collapse-height = 4 \override Score.SystemStartBar.collapse-height = 4 \new Staff { c'1 } >> } \score { \new PianoStaff << \override PianoStaff.SystemStartBrace.collapse-height = 4 \override Score.SystemStartBar.collapse-height = 4 \new Staff { c'1 } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Dotted harmonics > ] |
Displaying grob ancestry
When working with grob callbacks, it can be helpful to understand a grob’s ancestry. Most grobs have parents which influence the positioning of the grob. X- and Y-parents influence the horizontal and vertical positions for the grob, respectively. Additionally, each parent may have parents of its own.
Unfortunately, there are several aspects of a grob’s ancestry that can lead to confusion:
- The types of parents a grob has may depend on context.
- For some grobs, the X- and Y-parents are the same.
- A particular ancestor may be related to a grob in multiple ways.
- The concept of generations is misleading.
For example, the System grob can be both parent (on the Y-side)
and grandparent (twice on the X-side) to a VerticalAlignment
grob.
The macro defined in this snippet prints (to the console) a textual representation of a grob’s ancestry. For example, the call
{
\once \override NoteHead.before-line-breaking = #display-ancestry
c
}
generates the following output.
------------------------------------
NoteHead
X,Y: NoteColumn
X: PaperColumn
X,Y: System
Y: VerticalAxisGroup
X: NonMusicalPaperColumn
X,Y: System
Y: VerticalAlignment
X: NonMusicalPaperColumn
X,Y: System
Y: System
As a consequence, you have to execute the code in this snippet by yourself, since the generated output file doesn’t show the data we are interested in.
#(define (get-ancestry grob) (if (not (null? (ly:grob-parent grob X))) (list (grob::name grob) (get-ancestry (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (get-ancestry (ly:grob-parent grob Y))) (grob::name grob))) #(define (format-ancestry lst padding) (string-append (symbol->string (car lst)) "\n" (let ((X-ancestry (if (list? (cadr lst)) (format-ancestry (cadr lst) (+ padding 3)) (symbol->string (cadr lst)))) (Y-ancestry (if (list? (caddr lst)) (format-ancestry (caddr lst) (+ padding 3)) (symbol->string (caddr lst))))) (if (equal? X-ancestry Y-ancestry) (string-append (format #f "~&") (make-string padding #\space) "X,Y: " (if (list? (cadr lst)) (format-ancestry (cadr lst) (+ padding 5)) (symbol->string (cadr lst)))) (string-append (format #f "~&") (make-string padding #\space) "X: " X-ancestry "\n" (make-string padding #\space) "Y: " Y-ancestry (format #f "~&")))) (format #f "~&"))) #(define (display-ancestry grob) (format (current-output-port) "~2&~a~2%~a~&" (make-string 36 #\-) (if (ly:grob? grob) (format-ancestry (get-ancestry grob) 0) (format #f "~a is not a grob" grob)))) \relative c' { \once \override NoteHead.before-line-breaking = #display-ancestry f4 \once \override Accidental.before-line-breaking = #display-ancestry \once \override Arpeggio.before-line-breaking = #display-ancestry <f as c>4\arpeggio }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Displaying grob ancestry ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Drawing boxes around grobs > ] |
Dotted harmonics
Artificial harmonics using \harmonic do not show dots. To
override this behavior, set the context property harmonicDots.
\relative c''' { \time 3/4 \key f \major \set harmonicDots = ##t <bes f'\harmonic>2. ~ <bes f'\harmonic>4. <a e'\harmonic>8( <gis dis'\harmonic> <g d'\harmonic>) <fis cis'\harmonic>2. <bes f'\harmonic>2. }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Dotted harmonics ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Drawing circles around various objects > ] |
Drawing boxes around grobs
The stencil property can be overridden to draw a box around
arbitrary grobs, either using \override or \tweak.
\relative c'' { \once \override TextScript.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.3 ly:text-interface::print) c'4^"foo" \tweak Stem.stencil #(make-stencil-boxer 0.05 0.25 ly:stem::print) b8 c4.^"bar" c4 \override Score.RehearsalMark.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.15 0.3 ly:text-interface::print) \mark \default c1 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Drawing boxes around grobs ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Dynamics spanner with custom text > ] |
Drawing circles around various objects
The \circle command draws circles around \markup
objects. For other objects, specific tweaks may be required, as
demonstrated for rehearsal marks and measure numbers.
\relative c' { c1 \set Score.rehearsalMarkFormatter = #(lambda (mark context) (make-circle-markup (format-mark-numbers mark context))) \mark \default c2 d^\markup { \override #'(thickness . 3) { \circle foo } } \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #all-visible \override Score.BarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-circler 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Drawing circles around various objects ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Extending a trill spanner > ] |
Dynamics spanner with custom text
Postfix functions for custom crescendo text spanners. The spanners
should start on the first note of the measure. One has to use
-\mycresc, otherwise the spanner start will rather be assigned
to the next note.
% Two functions for (de)crescendo spanners where you can explicitly % give the spanner text. mycresc = #(define-music-function (mymarkup) (markup?) (make-music 'CrescendoEvent 'span-direction START 'span-type 'text 'span-text mymarkup)) mydecresc = #(define-music-function (mymarkup) (markup?) (make-music 'DecrescendoEvent 'span-direction START 'span-type 'text 'span-text mymarkup)) \relative c' { c4-\mycresc "custom cresc" c4 c4 c4 | c4 c4 c4 c4 | c4-\mydecresc "custom decresc" c4 c4 c4 | c4 c4 c4 c4 | c4 c4\! c4 c4 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Dynamics spanner with custom text ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Estendere i glissandi sulle volte delle ripetizioni > ] |
Extending a trill spanner
For TrillSpanner grobs, the minimum-length property
becomes effective only if the set-spacing-rods procedure is
called explicitly.
To do this, the springs-and-rods property should be set to
ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods.
\relative c' { \key c\minor \time 2/4 c16( as') c,-. des-. \once\override TrillSpanner.minimum-length = #15 \once\override TrillSpanner.springs-and-rods = #ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods \afterGrace es4\startTrillSpan { d16[(\stopTrillSpan es)] } c( c' g es c g' es d c8) }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Extending a trill spanner ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Fine-tuning pedal brackets > ] |
Estendere i glissandi sulle volte delle ripetizioni
Un glissando che si estende in vari blocchi \alternative può
essere simulato aggiungendo all’inizio di ogni blocco \alternative
una nota di abbellimento nascosta da cui inizia un glissando. La nota di
abbellimento deve avere la stessa altezza della nota da cui parte il
glissando iniziale. In questo frammento si usa una funzione musicale
che prende come argomento l’altezza della nota di abbellimento.
Attenzione: nella musica polifonica la nota di abbellimento deve avere una nota di abbellimento corrispondente in tutte le altre voci.
repeatGliss = #(define-music-function (grace) (ly:pitch?) #{ % the next two lines ensure the glissando is long enough % to be visible \once \override Glissando.springs-and-rods = #ly:spanner::set-spacing-rods \once \override Glissando.minimum-length = 3.5 \once \hideNotes \grace $grace \glissando #}) \score { \relative c'' { \repeat volta 3 { c4 d e f\glissando } \alternative { { g2 d } { \repeatGliss f g2 e } { \repeatGliss f e2 d } } } } music = \relative c' { \voiceOne \repeat volta 2 { g a b c\glissando } \alternative { { d1 } { \repeatGliss c \once \omit StringNumber e1\2 } } } \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff << \new Voice { \clef "G_8" \music } >> \new TabStaff << \new TabVoice { \clef "moderntab" \music } >> >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Estendere i glissandi sulle volte delle ripetizioni ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Flat ties > ] |
Fine-tuning pedal brackets
The appearance of pedal brackets may be altered in different ways.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f } \relative c'' { c2\sostenutoOn c c2\sostenutoOff c c2\tweak shorten-pair #'(-7 . -2) \sostenutoOn c c2\sostenutoOff c c2\tweak edge-height #'(0 . 3) \sostenutoOn c c2\sostenutoOff c }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Fine-tuning pedal brackets ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Force a cancellation natural before accidentals > ] |
Flat ties
This snippet provides a function flared-tie to draw a tie that
consist of straight lines. It is intended as a replacement for the
default tie-drawing function (i.e., a replacement argument for the
stencil property of the Tie grob).
The argument of flared-tie is a list of coordinate pairs that
specify additional points between the first and last point to span up
the tie’s lines. The first and last point are identical to the original
tie’s start and end point, respectively. The X and
Y coordinate values are multiples of the bounding box length and
height of the original tie (also taking care of the tie’s direction);
consequently, the first point has coordinates (0,0), and the last point
(1,0).
The function flare-tie defines a shorthand for a flat tie.
Further tweaking of the shape is possible by overriding
Tie.details.height-limit or with \shape. It is also
possible to change the custom definition on the fly.
#(define ((flared-tie coords) grob) (define (pair-to-list pair) (list (car pair) (cdr pair))) (define (normalize-coords goods x y dir) (map (lambda (coord) (cons (* x (car coord)) (* y dir (cdr coord)))) goods)) (define (my-c-p-s points thick) (make-connected-path-stencil points thick 1.0 1.0 #f #f)) ;; Calling `ly:tie::print` and assigning its return value to a ;; variable in this outer `let` triggers LilyPond to position the ;; tie, allowing us to extract its extents. We only proceed, ;; however, if the tie doesn't get discarded (for whatever reason). (let ((sten (ly:tie::print grob))) (if (grob::is-live? grob) (let* ((layout (ly:grob-layout grob)) (line-thickness (ly:output-def-lookup layout 'line-thickness)) (thickness (ly:grob-property grob 'thickness 0.1)) (used-thick (* line-thickness thickness)) (dir (ly:grob-property grob 'direction)) (xex (ly:stencil-extent sten X)) (yex (ly:stencil-extent sten Y)) (lenx (interval-length xex)) (leny (interval-length yex)) (xtrans (car xex)) (ytrans (if (> dir 0)(car yex) (cdr yex))) ;; Add last point. (coord-list (append coords '((1.0 . 0.0)))) (uplist (map pair-to-list (normalize-coords coord-list lenx (* leny 2) dir)))) (ly:stencil-translate (my-c-p-s uplist used-thick) (cons xtrans ytrans))) '()))) % Define a default tie shape consisting of three straight lines. #(define flare-tie (flared-tie '((0.1 . 0.3) (0.9 . 0.3)))) \relative c' { a4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie a4~ a \break <a c e a c e a c e>~ q \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie q~ q\break <>^\markup \small \typewriter "height-limit = 14" \override Tie.details.height-limit = 14 a'4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie a4~ a \break <>^\markup \small \typewriter "height-limit = 0.5" \override Tie.details.height-limit = 0.5 a4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie a4~ a \break \revert Tie.details.height-limit <>^\markup \small \typewriter "\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -1) (0 . -1) (0 . 0))" \shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -1) (0 . -1) (0 . 0)) Tie a4~ a \once \override Tie.stencil = #flare-tie \shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -1) (0 . -1) (0 . 0)) Tie a4~ a \break <>^\markup \small \typewriter "#(flared-tie '((0.2 . 2) (0.5 . -3) (0.8 . 1))" \once \override Tie.stencil = #(flared-tie '((0.2 . 2) (0.5 . -3) (0.8 . 1))) a4~ a <>_\markup \small \typewriter "#(flared-tie '((0.5 . 2)))" \once \override Tie.stencil = #(flared-tie '((0.5 . 2))) a'4~ a }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Flat ties ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note > ] |
Force a cancellation natural before accidentals
The following example shows how to force a natural sign before an accidental.
\relative c' { \key es \major bes c des \tweak Accidental.restore-first ##t eis }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Force a cancellation natural before accidentals ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Fret diagrams explained and developed > ] |
Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note
Quando il motore tipografico non riesce a risolvere una situazione, si può usare la sintassi che sovrascrive le decisioni tipografiche. L’unità di misura usata è lo spazio del rigo.
\relative c' << { <d g>2 <d g> } \\ { <b f'>2 \once \override NoteColumn.force-hshift = 1.7 <b f'>2 } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Generate special note head shapes > ] |
Fret diagrams explained and developed
This snippet shows many possibilities for obtaining and tweaking fret diagrams.
<< \chords { a1 a \bar "||" \break \repeat unfold 3 { c c c d d \bar "||" \break } } \new Voice { % Set global properties of fret diagram \override TextScript.size = 1.2 \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .finger-code = #'below-string \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .dot-color = #'black % 1 % % A chord for ukulele. a'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((string-count . 4) (dot-color . white) (finger-code . in-dot))) \fret-diagram "4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;" % 2 % % A chord for ukulele, with formatting defined in definition % string: 1.2 * size, 4 strings, 4 frets, fingerings below, % string dot radius .35 of fret spacing, dot position 0.55 of % fret spacing. a'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((dot-color . white) (open-string . "o"))) \fret-diagram "s:1.2;w:4;h:3;f:2;d:0.35;p:0.55;4-2-2;3-1-1;2-o;1-o;" %% %% These chords will be in normal orientation %% % 3 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: verbose style, % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight barre. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . below-string) (barre-type . straight))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) % 4 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: double barre used % to test barre function, verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . arabic) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . in-dot) (fret-label-font-mag . 0.6) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 4 2 5) (barre 5 1 3)) % 5 % % C major for guitar, with capo on third fret: verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-upper) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . none) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0.5) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (capo 3) (open 5) (place-fret 4 5 1) (place-fret 3 5 2) (place-fret 2 5 3) (open 1)) % 6 % % Simple D chord. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (string-thickness-factor . 0.3) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" % 7 % % Simple D chord, large top fret thickness. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (top-fret-thickness . 7) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" %% %% These chords will be in landscape orientation %% \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .orientation = #'landscape % 8 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: verbose style, % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight % barre. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . below-string) (barre-type . straight))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) % 9 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: Double barre % used to test barre function, verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . arabic) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . in-dot) (fret-label-font-mag . 0.6) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 4 2 5) (barre 5 1 3)) % 10 % % C major for guitar, with capo on third fret: verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-upper) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . none) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0.5) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (capo 3) (open 5) (place-fret 4 5 1) (place-fret 3 5 2) (place-fret 2 5 3) (open 1)) % 11 % % Simple D chord. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" % 12 % % Simple D chord, large top fret thickness. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (top-fret-thickness . 7) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" %% %% These chords will be in opposing-landscape orientation. %% \override TextScript.fret-diagram-details .orientation = #'opposing-landscape % 13 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: verbose style, % roman fret label, finger labels below string, straight % barre. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-lower) (finger-code . below-string) (barre-type . straight))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 5 1 3)) % 14 % % C major for guitar, barred on third fret: double barre % used to test barre function, verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . arabic) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . in-dot) (fret-label-font-mag . 0.6) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0) (label-dir . -1) (mute-string . "M") (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (place-fret 5 3 1) (place-fret 4 5 2) (place-fret 3 5 3) (place-fret 2 5 4) (place-fret 1 3 1) (barre 4 2 5) (barre 5 1 3)) % 15 % % C major for guitar, with capo on third fret: verbose style. c'1^\markup % 110% of default size \override #'(size . 1.1) \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((number-type . roman-upper) (dot-label-font-mag . 0.9) (finger-code . none) (fret-label-vertical-offset . 0.5) (xo-font-magnification . 0.4) (xo-padding . 0.3))) \fret-diagram-verbose #'((mute 6) (capo 3) (open 5) (place-fret 4 5 1) (place-fret 3 5 2) (place-fret 2 5 3) (open 1)) % 16 % % Simple D chord. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" % 17 % % Simple D chord, large top fret thickness. d'1^\markup \override #'(fret-diagram-details . ((finger-code . below-string) (dot-radius . 0.35) (dot-position . 0.5) (top-fret-thickness . 7) (fret-count . 3))) \fret-diagram-terse "x;x;o;2-1;3-2;2-3;" } >> \paper { ragged-right = ##t system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 } \layout { \context { \Score \override SpacingSpanner.spacing-increment = 3 } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Fret diagrams explained and developed ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Generating custom flags > ] |
Generate special note head shapes
When a note head with a special shape cannot easily be generated with
graphic markup, a drawing specification for ly:make-stencil can
be used to generate the shape. This example gives an example for a
parallelogram-shaped note head.
Unfortunately, the available commands in a drawing specification are
currently not
documented; in any case, the used path sub-command has the
following signature, quite similar to the make-path-stencil
Scheme function.
(path thickness command-list line-cap-style line-join-style fill)
The commands in command-list resemble PostScript drawing commands but with arguments after the command name.
parallelogram = #(ly:make-stencil '(path 0.1 (rmoveto 0 0.25 lineto 1.2 0.75 lineto 1.2 -0.25 lineto 0 -0.75 lineto 0 0.25) round round #t) (cons -0.05 1.25) (cons -.75 .75)) myNoteHeads = \override NoteHead.stencil = \parallelogram normalNoteHeads = \revert NoteHead.stencil \relative c'' { \myNoteHeads g4 d' \normalNoteHeads <f, \tweak stencil \parallelogram b e>4 d }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Generate special note head shapes ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Glissandi can skip grobs > ] |
Generating custom flags
The stencil property of the Flag grob can be set to a
custom Scheme function to generate the glyph for the flag.
#(define-public (weight-flag grob) (let* ((stem-grob (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (log (- (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'duration-log) 2)) (is-up? (eqv? (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'direction) UP)) (yext (if is-up? (cons (* log -0.8) 0) (cons 0 (* log 0.8)))) (flag-stencil (make-filled-box-stencil '(-0.4 . 0.4) yext)) (stroke-style (ly:grob-property grob 'stroke-style)) (stroke-stencil (if (equal? stroke-style "grace") (make-line-stencil 0.2 -0.9 -0.4 0.9 -0.4) empty-stencil))) (ly:stencil-add flag-stencil stroke-stencil))) % Create a flag stencil by looking up the glyph from the font #(define (inverted-flag grob) (let* ((stem-grob (ly:grob-parent grob X)) (dir (if (eqv? (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'direction) UP) "d" "u")) (flag (retrieve-glyph-flag "" dir "" grob)) (line-thickness (ly:staff-symbol-line-thickness grob)) (stem-thickness (ly:grob-property stem-grob 'thickness)) (stem-width (* line-thickness stem-thickness)) (stroke-style (ly:grob-property grob 'stroke-style)) (stencil (if (null? stroke-style) flag (add-stroke-glyph flag stem-grob dir stroke-style ""))) (rotated-flag (ly:stencil-rotate-absolute stencil 180 0 0))) (ly:stencil-translate rotated-flag (cons (- (/ stem-width 2)) 0)))) snippetexamplenotes = { \autoBeamOff c'8 d'16 c'32 d'64 \acciaccatura {c'8} d'64 } { \time 1/4 <>^"Normal flags" \snippetexamplenotes <>_"Custom flag: inverted" \override Flag.stencil = #inverted-flag \snippetexamplenotes <>^"Custom flag: weight" \override Flag.stencil = #weight-flag \snippetexamplenotes <>_"Revert to normal" \revert Flag.stencil \snippetexamplenotes }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Generating custom flags ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Hairpins with different line styles > ] |
Glissandi can skip grobs
NoteColumn grobs can be skipped over by glissandi.
\relative c' { a2 \glissando \once \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t f''4 d, }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Glissandi can skip grobs ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f” > ] |
Hairpins with different line styles
Hairpins can take any style from line-interface:
dashed-line, dotted-line, line, trill, or
zigzag.
\relative c' { c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'dashed-line c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'dotted-line c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'line c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'trill c2\< c\! \override Hairpin.style = #'zigzag c2\< c\! \revert Hairpin.style c2\< c\! }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Hairpins with different line styles ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ How to change fret diagram position > ] |
Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f”
Some dynamic expressions involve additional text, like “sempre pp”. Since dynamics are usually centered under the note, the \pp would be displayed way after the note it applies to.
To correctly align the “sempre pp” horizontally so that it is aligned as if it were only the \pp, there are several approaches:
- Simply use
\once\override DynamicText.X-offset = #-9.2before the note with the dynamics to manually shift it to the correct position. Drawback: This has to be done manually each time you use that dynamic markup... - Add some padding (
#:hspace 7.1) into the definition of your custom dynamic mark so that after LilyPond center-aligns it, it is already correctly aligned. Drawback: The padding really takes up that space and does not allow any other markup or dynamics to be shown in that position. - Shift the dynamic script
\once\override ... .X-offset = .... Drawback:\once\overrideis needed for every invocation! - Set the dimensions of the additional text to 0 (using
#:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0)). Drawback: For LilyPond, “sempre” has no extent now. This means it might put other stuff there, causing collisions (which are not detected by LilyPond’s collision detection algorithm!). There also seems to be some spacing, so it is not exactly the same alignment as without the additional text. - Add an explicit shift directly inside the scheme function for the dynamic script.
- Set an explicit alignment inside the dynamic script. By default, this
won’t have any effect, only if one sets
X-offset! Drawback: One needs to setDynamicText.X-offset, which will apply to all dynamic texts! Also, it is aligned at the right edge of the additional text, not at the center of \pp.
\paper { ragged-right = ##f indent = 5\cm } % Solution 1: Using a simple markup with a particular halign value % Drawback: It's a markup, not a dynamic command, so \dynamicDown % etc. will have no effect semppMarkup = \markup { \halign #1.4 \italic "sempre" \dynamic "pp" } % Solution 2: Using a dynamic script & shifting with % \once \override ...X-offset = .. % Drawback: \once \override needed for every invocation semppK = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) % Solution 3: Padding the dynamic script so the center-alignment % puts it at the correct position % Drawback: the padding really reserves the space, nothing else can be there semppT = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp" #:hspace 7.1))) % Solution 4: Dynamic, setting the dimensions of the additional text to 0 % Drawback: To lilypond "sempre" has no extent, so it might put % other stuff there => collisions % Drawback: Also, there seems to be some spacing, so it's not exactly the % same alignment as without the additional text semppM = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:with-dimensions '(0 . 0) '(0 . 0) #:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) % Solution 5: Dynamic with explicit shifting inside the scheme function semppG = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:hspace 0 #:translate '(-18.85 . 0) #:line (#:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) % Solution 6: Dynamic with explicit alignment. This has only effect % if one sets X-offset! % Drawback: One needs to set DynamicText.X-offset! % Drawback: Aligned at the right edge of the additional text, % not at the center of pp semppMII = #(make-dynamic-script (markup #:line (#:right-align #:normal-text #:italic "sempre" #:dynamic "pp"))) \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "standard" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\pp c\p c c | c\ff c c\pp c } \new Staff \with {instrumentName = "normal markup" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4-\semppMarkup c\p c c | c\ff c c-\semppMarkup c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "explicit shifting" } \relative c'' { \key es \major \once \override DynamicText.X-offset = #-9.2 c4\semppK c\p c c c4\ff c \once \override DynamicText.X-offset = #-9.2 c4\semppK c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "right padding" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppT c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppT c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "set dimension to zero" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppM c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppM c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "shift inside dynamics" } \relative c'' { \key es \major c4\semppG c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppG c } \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "alignment inside dynamics" } \relative c'' { \key es \major \override DynamicText.X-offset = #-1 c4\semppMII c\p c c | c\ff c c\semppMII c } >> \layout { \override Staff.InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #LEFT }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f” ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Inserire una cesura > ] |
How to change fret diagram position
If you want to move the position of a fret diagram, for example, to avoid collision, or to place it between two notes, you have various possibilities.
1) Modify the value of the padding or extra-offset
property (as shown in the first line).
2) You can add an invisible voice and attach the fret diagrams to the invisible notes in that voice (as shown in the second line).
If you need to move the fret according with a rythmic position inside the bar (in the example, the third beat of the measure) the second example is better, because the fret is aligned with the third beat itself.
harmonies = \chordmode { a8:13 \once \override ChordNames.ChordName.extra-offset = #'(10 . 0) b8:13 s4. | s2 b2:13 } \score { << \new ChordNames \harmonies \new Staff { % Method 1. a8^\markup \fret-diagram "6-x;5-0;4-2;3-0;2-0;1-2;" \once \override TextScript.extra-offset = #'(10 . 0) b4.~^\markup \fret-diagram "6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" b4. a8 | \break % Method 2. << { a8 b4.~ b4. a8 } { s2 s2^\markup \fret-diagram "6-x;5-2;4-4;3-2;2-2;1-4;" } >> | } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < How to change fret diagram position ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Keep change clefs full-sized > ] |
Inserire una cesura
I segni di cesura possono essere creati sovrascrivendo la proprietà 'text
dell’oggetto BreathingSign. È disponibile anche un segno di cesura
curvo.
\relative c'' { \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.straight" } c8 e4. \breathe g8. e16 c4 \override BreathingSign.text = \markup { \musicglyph "scripts.caesura.curved" } g8 e'4. \breathe g8. e16 c4 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Inserire una cesura ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Line arrows > ] |
Keep change clefs full-sized
When a clef changes, the clef sign displayed is smaller than the
initial clef. This can be overridden by setting the context property
full-size-change to #t.
\relative c' { \clef "treble" c1 \clef "bass" c1 \clef "treble" c1 \override Staff.Clef.full-size-change = ##t \clef "bass" c1 \clef "treble" c1 \revert Staff.Clef.full-size-change \clef "bass" c1 \clef "treble" c1 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Keep change clefs full-sized ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property > ] |
Line arrows
Arrows can be applied to text spanners and line spanners (such as glissandi).
\relative c'' { \override TextSpanner.bound-padding = #1.0 \override TextSpanner.style = #'line \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.arrow = ##t \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = #"fof" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.text = #"gag" \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.padding = #0.6 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.right.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override Glissando.bound-details.right.arrow = ##t \override Glissando.arrow-length = #0.5 \override Glissando.arrow-width = #0.25 a8\startTextSpan gis a4 b\glissando b, g'4 c\stopTextSpan c2 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Line arrows ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo > ] |
Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property
Setting the transparent property will cause an object to be
printed in “invisible ink”: the object is not printed, but all its
other behavior is retained. The object still takes up space, it takes
part in collisions, and slurs, ties and beams can be attached to it.
This snippet demonstrates how to connect different voices using ties. Normally, ties only connect two notes in the same voice. By introducing a tie in a different voice, and blanking the first up-stem in that voice, the tie appears to cross voices.
\relative { \time 2/4 << { \once \hide Stem \once \override Stem.length = #8 b'8 ~ 8\noBeam \once \hide Stem \once \override Stem.length = #8 g8 ~ 8\noBeam } \\ { b8 g g e } >> } \paper { line-width = 40\mm ragged-right = ##f }
Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo
Per permettere a un glissando di andare a capo se capita su un’interruzione di
riga, si impostano le proprietà breakable e after-line-breaking
su #t:
glissandoSkipOn = { \override NoteColumn.glissando-skip = ##t \hide NoteHead \override NoteHead.no-ledgers = ##t } music = { \repeat unfold 16 f8 | f1\glissando | a4 r2. | \repeat unfold 16 f8 | f1\glissando \once\glissandoSkipOn | a2 a4 r4 | \repeat unfold 16 f8 } \relative c'' { <>^\markup { \typewriter Glissando.breakable set to \typewriter "#t" } \override Glissando.breakable = ##t \override Glissando.after-line-breaking = ##t \music } \relative c'' { <>^\markup { \typewriter Glissando.breakable not set } \music } \paper { line-width = 100\mm }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Measure-centered bar numbers > ] |
Manually controlling beam positions
Beam positions may be controlled manually, by overriding the
positions setting of the Beam grob.
\relative c' { \time 2/4 % from upper staff-line (position 2) to center (position 0) \override Beam.positions = #'(2 . 0) c8 c % from center to one above center (position 1) \override Beam.positions = #'(0 . 1) c8 c }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Manually controlling beam positions ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi) > ] |
Measure-centered bar numbers
For film scores, a common convention is to center bar numbers within
their measure. This is achieved through setting the
centerBarNumbers context property to #t. When this is
used, the type of the bar number grobs is CenteredBarNumber
rather than BarNumber.
This example demonstrates a number of settings: the centered bar numbers are boxed and placed below the staves.
\layout { \context { \Score centerBarNumbers = ##t barNumberVisibility = #all-bar-numbers-visible \override CenteredBarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) \override CenteredBarNumberLineSpanner.direction = #DOWN } } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \relative c' { d4-. f8( e d4) bes'-> | d,-. f8( e d4) cis'-> | g-. f8( d e4) g-> | a,1-> | } \new Staff \relative c { \clef bass d4 f8 e d2~ | 4 f8 e d2~ | 4 4 2 | a1 | } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Measure-centered bar numbers ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava > ] |
Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
La formattazione mensurale, in cui le stanghette non appaiono sui righi ma
nello spazio tra i righi, si può ottenere usando StaffGroup al posto
di ChoirStaff. La stanghetta sui righi viene nascosta con
\hide.
\layout { \context { \Staff measureBarType = "-span|" } } music = \fixed c'' { c1 d2 \section e2 f1 \fine } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \music \new Staff \music >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi) ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Spostare le note puntate in polifonia > ] |
Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava
È possibile cambiare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.OttavaBracket.stencil = #ly:line-spanner::print \override Staff.OttavaBracket.bound-details = #`((left . ((Y . 0) (attach-dir . ,LEFT) (padding . 0) (stencil-align-dir-y . ,CENTER))) (right . ((Y . 5.0) ; Change the number here (padding . 0) (attach-dir . ,RIGHT) (text . ,(make-draw-dashed-line-markup (cons 0 -1.2)))))) \override Staff.OttavaBracket.left-bound-info = #ly:horizontal-line-spanner::calc-left-bound-info-and-text \override Staff.OttavaBracket.right-bound-info = #ly:horizontal-line-spanner::calc-right-bound-info \ottava 1 c1 c'''1 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Moving slur positions vertically > ] |
Spostare le note puntate in polifonia
Quando una nota puntata della voce più alta viene spostata per evitare una
collisione con una nota di un’altra voce, il comportamento predefinito è
spostare la nota più alta a destra. Tale comportamento può essere
modificato tramite la proprietà prefer-dotted-right di
NoteCollision.
\new Staff \relative c' << { f2. f4 \override Staff.NoteCollision.prefer-dotted-right = ##f f2. f4 \override Staff.NoteCollision.prefer-dotted-right = ##t f2. f4 } \\ { e4 e e e e e e e e e e e } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Spostare le note puntate in polifonia ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Annidare i righi > ] |
Moving slur positions vertically
The vertical position of a slur can be adjusted using the
positions property of Slur. The property has
2 parameters, the first referring to the left end of the slur and
the second to the right. The values of the parameters are not used by
LilyPond to make an exact movement of the slur - instead it selects
what placement of the slur looks best, taking into account the
parameter values. Positive values move the slur up, and are appropriate
for notes with stems down. Negative values move downward slurs further
down.
See also “Adjusting slur positions vertically”.
\relative c' { \stemDown e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(1 . 1) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(2 . 2) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(3 . 3) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(4 . 4) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(5 . 5) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(0 . 5) e4( a) \override Slur.positions = #'(5 . 0) e4( a) \stemUp \override Slur.positions = #'(-5 . -5) e4( a) \stemDown \revert Slur.positions e4( a) }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Moving slur positions vertically ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Overriding articulations by type > ] |
Annidare i righi
Si può usare la proprietà systemStartDelimiterHierarchy per creare
gruppi di righi annidati più complessi. Il comando \set
StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy prende come argomento una lista
alfabetica dell’insieme di righi prodotti. Prima di ogni rigo si può
assegnare un delimitatore di inizio del sistema. Deve essere racchiuso
tra parentesi e collega tutti i righi compresi tra le parentesi. Gli
elementi nella lista possono essere omessi, ma la prima parentesi quadra
collega sempre tutti i righi. Le possibilità sono SystemStartBar,
SystemStartBracket, SystemStartBrace e
SystemStartSquare.
\new StaffGroup \relative c'' << \override StaffGroup.SystemStartSquare.collapse-height = 4 \set StaffGroup.systemStartDelimiterHierarchy = #'(SystemStartSquare (SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a (SystemStartSquare b)) c) d) \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } \new Staff { c1 } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Annidare i righi ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale > ] |
Overriding articulations by type
Sometimes you may want to affect a single articulation type. Although
it is always possible to use \tweak, it might become tedious to
do so for every single sign of a whole score. The following shows how
to tweak articulations with a list of custom settings. One use-case
might be to create a style sheet.
#(define (custom-script-tweaks ls) (lambda (grob) (let* ((type (ly:event-property (ly:grob-property grob 'cause) 'articulation-type)) (tweaks (assoc-ref ls type))) (when tweaks (for-each (lambda (x) (ly:grob-set-property! grob (car x) (cdr x))) tweaks))))) customScripts = #(define-music-function (settings) (list?) #{ \override Script.before-line-breaking = #(custom-script-tweaks settings) #}) revertCustomScripts = \revert Script.before-line-breaking % Example % Predefine two sets of desired tweaks. #(define my-settings-1 '( (accent . ((font-size . 0) (color . (1 0 0)))) (segno . ((font-size . 0) (color . (1 0 0)))) (staccato . ((color . (1 0 0)) (padding . 0.5))) (staccatissimo . ((padding . 1) (color . (1 0 0)))) (tenuto . ((color . (1 0 0)) (rotation . (45 0 0)) (padding . 2) (font-size . 10))) )) #(define my-settings-2 '( (accent . ((font-size . 4) (color . (0 1 0)) (padding . 1.5))) (coda . ((color . (0 1 0)) (padding . 1))) (staccato . ((color . (0 1 0)))) (staccatissimo . ((padding . 2) (color . (0 1 0)))) (tenuto . ((color . (0 1 0)) (font-size . 10))) )) music = { f1-> | f\segno | f-. | f-! | f-- | f--\coda | f-!\fermata | } block = { \music \break \revertCustomScripts \music } \new Staff << \new Voice \with { \customScripts #my-settings-1 } \relative c''{ \voiceOne \block } \new Voice \with { \customScripts #my-settings-2 } \relative c' { \voiceTwo \block } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Overriding articulations by type ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Positioning arpeggios > ] |
Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale
I contatori della ripetizione con segno percentuale possono essere mostrati a
intervalli regolari impostando la proprietà di contesto repeatCountVisibility.
\relative c'' { \set countPercentRepeats = ##t \set repeatCountVisibility = #(every-nth-repeat-count-visible 5) \repeat percent 10 { c1 } \break \set repeatCountVisibility = #(every-nth-repeat-count-visible 2) \repeat percent 6 { c1 d1 } }
Positioning arpeggios
If you need to extend or shorten an arpeggio, you can modify the upper and lower start positions independently.
\relative c' { <c e g b>1\arpeggio \once \override Arpeggio.positions = #'(-5 . 0) <c e g b>1\arpeggio \once \override Arpeggio.positions = #'(0 . 5) <c e g b>1\arpeggio \once \override Arpeggio.positions = #'(-5 . 5) <c e g b>1\arpeggio }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Positioning arpeggios ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Posizionamento delle pause multiple > ] |
Positioning fingering indications precisely
The semi-automatic positioning of fingering within a chords works usally well, but if one of the indications needs to be positioned more precisely the following tweak may be used. This is particularly useful for correcting the positioning when intervals of a second are involved.
\markup \with-true-dimensions % work around a cropping issue \score { \relative c' { \set fingeringOrientations = #'(left) <c-1 d-2 a'-5>4 <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 0.2)-2 a'-5> \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down) <c-1 d-2 a'-5> <c-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . -1.1)-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-1.2 . -1.8)-2 a'-5> | \set fingeringOrientations = #'(down right up) <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-0.3 . 0)-2 a'-5>4 <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-1 . 1.2)-2 a'-5> \set fingeringOrientations = #'(up) <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 1.1)-2 a'-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 1)-5> <c-1 d-\tweak extra-offset #'(-1.2 . 1.5)-2 a'-\tweak extra-offset #'(0 . 1.4)-5> | } }
Posizionamento delle pause multiple
Diversamente dalle pause normali, non esiste un comando predefinito per cambiare la posizione sul rigo di un simbolo di pausa multipla di qualsiasi tipo connettendolo a una nota. Tuttavia, nella musica polifonica le pause multiple nelle voci dispari e pari sono separate verticalmente. Il posizionamento delle pause multiple si controlla nel modo seguente:
\relative c'' { % Multi-measure rests by default are set under the fourth line. R1 % They can be moved using an override. \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = -2 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 0 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 2 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 3 R1 \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 6 R1 \revert MultiMeasureRest.staff-position \break % In two Voices, odd-numbered voices are under the top line. << { R1 } \\ { a1 } >> % Even-numbered voices are under the bottom line. << { a1 } \\ { R1 } >> % Multi-measure rests in both voices remain separate. << { R1 } \\ { R1 } >> % Separating multi-measure rests in more than two voices % requires an override. << { R1 } \\ { R1 } \\ \once \override MultiMeasureRest.staff-position = 0 { R1 } >> % Using compressed bars in multiple voices requires another override % in all voices to avoid multiple instances being printed. \compressMMRests << \revert MultiMeasureRest.direction { R1*3 } \\ \revert MultiMeasureRest.direction { R1*3 } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Posizionamento delle pause multiple ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi > ] |
Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento
I testi a margine devono avere la proprietà outside-staff-priority
impostata su false per poter apparire dentro le legature di portamento.
\relative c'' { \override TextScript.avoid-slur = #'inside \override TextScript.outside-staff-priority = ##f c2(^\markup { \halign #-10 \natural } d4.) c8 }
Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi
I numeri di battuta possono apparire anche all’interno di rettangoli o cerchi.
\relative c' { % Center bar numbers except at the beginning of a staff. \override Score.BarNumber.self-alignment-X = #(break-alignment-list CENTER CENTER 0.3) % Prevent bar numbers at the end of a line and permit them elsewhere. \override Score.BarNumber.break-visibility = #end-of-line-invisible \set Score.barNumberVisibility = #(every-nth-bar-number-visible 4) % Increase the size of the bar number by 2. \override Score.BarNumber.font-size = 2 % Draw a circle round the following bar number(s). \override Score.BarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-circler 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) \repeat unfold 7 { c1 } \break % Draw a box round the following bar number(s). \override Score.BarNumber.stencil = #(make-stencil-boxer 0.1 0.25 ly:text-interface::print) \repeat unfold 7 { c1 } \bar "|." }
Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo
Di norma, il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata vengono posizionati sopra il
rigo. Per metterli sotto il rigo basta impostare correttamente la proprietà
direction di MetronomeMark o RehearsalMark.
\layout { ragged-right = ##f } { % Metronome marks below the staff \override Score.MetronomeMark.direction = #DOWN \tempo 8. = 120 c''1 % Rehearsal marks below the staff \override Score.RehearsalMark.direction = #DOWN \mark \default c''1 }
Printing note names with and without an octave marker
The NoteNames context can be used to print the text value of
notes. The printOctaveNames property turns on or off the
representation of the octave of the note.
scale = \relative c' { a4 b c d e4 f g a } \new Staff { << \scale \context NoteNames { \set printOctaveNames = ##f \scale } >> R1 << \scale \context NoteNames { \set printOctaveNames = ##t \scale } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Printing note names with and without an octave marker ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Proportional strict notespacing > ] |
Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side
Whichever option you choose for controlling the tuplet bracket
visibility, it will show or hide the tuplet bracket irrespectively of
tuplet bracket placement (stem side or note head side). However, when
placing the tuplet bracket on the note head side some authors recommend
always printing the tuplet bracket. The option
visible-over-note-heads can be used to achieve this.
music = \relative c'' { \tupletNeutral \tuplet 3/2 { c16[ d e } f8] \tupletUp \tuplet 3/2 { c8 d e } } \new Voice { \relative c' { \override TextScript.staff-padding = #2.5 \time 2/4 \override TupletBracket.visible-over-note-heads = ##t \override Score.TextMark.non-musical = ##f <>^\markup "default" \music \override TupletBracket.bracket-visibility = #'if-no-beam <>^\markup \typewriter "if-no-beam" \music } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Removing brace on first line of piano score > ] |
Proportional strict notespacing
If strict-note-spacing is set spacing of notes is not influenced
by bars or clefs within a system. Rather, they are placed just before
the note that occurs at the same time. This may cause collisions.
\relative c'' << \override Score.SpacingSpanner.strict-note-spacing = ##t \set Score.proportionalNotationDuration = #1/16 \new Staff { c8[ c \clef alto c c \grace { d16 } c8 c] c4 c2 \grace { c16[ c16] } c2 } \new Staff { c2 \tuplet 3/2 { c8 \clef bass cis,, c } c4 c1 } >>
Removing brace on first line of piano score
This snippet removes the first brace from a PianoStaff or a
GrandStaff, together with the clefs. It may be useful when
cutting and pasting the engraved image into existing music.
The code uses \alterBroken to hide the brace delimiter at the
beginning.
someMusic = { \once \omit Staff.Clef \once \omit Staff.TimeSignature \repeat unfold 3 c1 \break \repeat unfold 5 c1 \break \repeat unfold 5 c1 } \score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "right" \relative c'' \someMusic \new Staff = "left" \relative c' { \clef F \someMusic } >> \layout { indent=75\mm \context { \PianoStaff \alterBroken transparent #'(#t) SystemStartBrace } } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Removing brace on first line of piano score ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Eliminare la prima linea vuota > ] |
Removing connecting bar lines on StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or GrandStaff
By default, bar lines in StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or
GrandStaff contexts are connected between the staves, i.e., a
span bar is printed. This behaviour can be overridden on a
staff-by-staff basis.
\relative c' { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff { e1 | e \once \override Staff.BarLine.allow-span-bar = ##f e1 | e | e } \new Staff { c1 | c | c \once \override Staff.BarLine.allow-span-bar = ##f c1 | c } \new Staff { a1 | a | a | a | a } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Removing connecting bar lines on StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or GrandStaff ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Stili di pausa > ] |
Eliminare la prima linea vuota
Il primo rigo vuoto si può togliere dalla partitura impostando la proprietà
remove-first di VerticalAxisGroup. Questa impostazione
agisce a livello globale se posta nel blocco \layout, a livello
locale se posta nel rigo specifico che deve essere tolto. Nel secondo
caso, si deve specificare il contesto (Staff si applica solo al
rigo corrente) prima della proprietà.
Il rigo inferiore del secondo gruppo di righi non viene rimosso, perché l’impostazione ha effetto solo sul rigo in cui si trova.
\layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves % To use the setting globally, uncomment the following line: % \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \relative c' { e4 f g a \break c1 } \new Staff { % To use the setting globally, comment this line, % uncomment the line in the \layout block above \override Staff.VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t R1 \break R } >> \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \relative c' { e4 f g a \break c1 } \new Staff { R1 \break R } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Eliminare la prima linea vuota ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Rhythmic slashes > ] |
Stili di pausa
Esistono vari stili di pausa.
restsA = { r\maxima r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 s32 s64 s128 s256 s512 s1024 s1024 } restsB = { r\maxima r\longa r\breve r1 r2 r4 r8 r16 r32 r64 r128 r256 r512 r1024 s1024 } \new Staff \relative c { \omit Score.TimeSignature \cadenzaOn \override Staff.Rest.style = #'mensural <>^\markup \typewriter { mensural } \restsA \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'neomensural <>^\markup \typewriter { neomensural } \restsA \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'classical <>^\markup \typewriter { classical } \restsB \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'z <>^\markup \typewriter { z-style } \restsB \bar "" \break \override Staff.Rest.style = #'default <>^\markup \typewriter { default } \restsB \bar "" \break }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Stili di pausa ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Separating key cancellations from key signature changes > ] |
Rhythmic slashes
In “simple” lead-sheets, sometimes no actual notes are written. Instead, only “rhythmic patterns” and chords above the measures are notated to represent the structure of a song. Such a feature can be useful while creating or transcribing the structure of a song, or when sharing lead sheets with guitarists or jazz musicians.
startPat = { \improvisationOn \omit Stem } stopPat = { \improvisationOff \undo \omit Stem } \new Voice \with { \consists Pitch_squash_engraver } { c'4 d' e' f' | \startPat 4 4 4 4 | \stopPat f'4 e' d' c' }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Rhythmic slashes ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette > ] |
Separating key cancellations from key signature changes
By default, the accidentals used for key cancellations are placed
adjacent to those for key signature changes. This behavior can be
changed by overriding the break-align-orders property of the
BreakAlignment grob.
The value of break-align-orders is a vector of length 3,
with quoted lists of breakable items as elements. Each list describes
the default order of prefatory matter at the end, in the middle, and at
the beginning of a line, respectively. We are only interested in
changing the behaviour in the middle of a line.
If you look up the definition of break-align-orders in
LilyPond’s Internal Reference (see the
BreakAlignment
grob), you get the following order in the second element:
... staff-bar key-cancellation key-signature ...
We want to change that, moving key-cancellation before
staff-bar. To make this happen we use the
grob-transformer function, which gives us access to the original
vector as the second argument of the lambda function, here called
orig (we don’t need the first argument, grob). We
return a new vector, with unchanged first and last elements. For the
middle element, we first remove key-cancellation from the list,
then adding it again before staff-bar.
#(define (insert-before where what lst) (cond ((null? lst) ; If the list is empty, (list what)) ; return a single-element list. ((eq? where (car lst)) ; If we find symbol `where`, (cons what lst)) ; insert `what` before curr. position. (else ; Otherwise keep building the list by (cons (car lst) ; adding the current element and ; recursing with the next element. (insert-before where what (cdr lst)))))) cancellationFirst = \override Score.BreakAlignment.break-align-orders = #(grob-transformer 'break-align-orders (lambda (grob orig) (let* ((middle (vector-ref orig 1)) (middle (delq 'key-cancellation middle)) (middle (insert-before 'staff-bar 'key-cancellation middle))) (vector ;; end of line (vector-ref orig 0) ;; middle of line middle ;; beginning of line (vector-ref orig 2))))) music = { \key es \major d'1 \bar "||" \key a \major d'1 } { <>^\markup "default" \music } { <>^\markup "cancellation first" \cancellationFirst \music }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Separating key cancellations from key signature changes ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Setting system separators > ] |
Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette
Se la nota che termina una forcella si trova sul primo battito di una
battuta, la forcella si ferma prima della stanghetta che precede la
nota. Si può controllare questo comportamento modificando la
proprietà 'to-barline.
\relative c'' { e4\< e2. e1\! \override Hairpin.to-barline = ##f e4\< e2. e1\! }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Shape individual ties in chords > ] |
Setting system separators
System separators can be inserted between systems. Any markup can be
used, but \slashSeparator has been provided as a sensible
default.
#(set-default-paper-size "a5") \paper { system-separator-markup = \slashSeparator tagline = ##f } notes = \relative c' { c1 | c \break c1 | c \break c1 | c } \book { \score { \new GrandStaff << \new Staff \notes \new Staff \notes >> } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Setting system separators ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Showing the same articulation above and below a note or chord > ] |
Shape individual ties in chords
To shape individual ties in chords use the method demonstrated below.
{ \textMark "Chords can be tied note by note." <c'~ e'~ g'~ c''~>2 q } { \textMark \markup \override #'(baseline-skip . 3) \wordwrap { Modifying those ties with \typewriter "\\shape" does not succeed, because \typewriter TieColumn positions them on its own behalf, ignoring \typewriter "\\shape" input more or less. You may circumvent this by setting \typewriter positioning-done to \typewriter "#t" – alas, \typewriter positioning-done is an internal property, and setting it to \typewriter "#t" means: all positioning is done, don’t do anything further. The next example demonstrates a case where the positioning is not finished: all tie directions are down, and the thickness is not accurate. } <c'~ e'~ g'~ c''~>2 \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark "To fix that, enter ties with explicit direction modifiers." <c'_~ e'_~ g'_~ c''^~>2 \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark \markup { Now you can use \typewriter "\\shape" for each tie as usual. } <c'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0)) _~ e'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0)) _~ g'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0)) _~ c''-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0)) ^~ >2 \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark "This also works at line breaks." <c'-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0))) _~ e'-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0))) _~ g'-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0))) _~ c''-\shape #'(((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0)) ((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0))) ^~ >2 \break \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t q } { \textMark \markup { It also works with the \typewriter tieWaitForNote property. } \set tieWaitForNote = ##t c'4-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -10) (0 . -10) (0 . 0)) _~ e'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -5) (0 . -5) (0 . 0)) _~ g'-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . -2) (0 . -2) (0 . 0)) _~ c''-\shape #'((0 . 0) (0 . 5) (0 . 5) (0 . 0)) ^~ \once \override TieColumn.positioning-done = ##t <c' e' g' c''>1 } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Score \override TextMark.padding = #4 \override TextMark.break-align-symbols = #'(left-edge) } } \paper { score-system-spacing.padding = 3 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Shape individual ties in chords ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ String number extender lines > ] |
Showing the same articulation above and below a note or chord
By default, LilyPond does not allow the same articulation (an accent, a
fermata, a flageolet, etc.) to be displayed above and below a note. For
example, c4_\fermata^\fermata only shows a fermata below. The
fermata above gets simply ignored.
However, one can stick scripts (just like fingerings) inside a chord,
which means it is possible to have as many articulations as desired.
This approach has the advantage that it ignores the stem and positions
the articulation relative to the note head. This can be seen in the
case of the flageolets in the snippet. To mimic the behaviour of
scripts outside a chord, add-stem-support would be required.
The solution is thus to write the note as a chord and add the
articulations inside of <...>, using the direction modifiers
^ and _ as appropriate.
\relative c' { <>^"Wrong" c2_\fermata^\fermata % The second fermata is ignored! <e d'>2^\flageolet_\flageolet \stopStaff s1 \startStaff <>^"Works if written inside a chord" <e_\flageolet d'^\flageolet>2 <e_\flageolet d'^\flageolet>2 <e_\flageolet^\flageolet>2 <e_\fermata^\fermata>2 }
String number extender lines
Make an extender line for string number indications, showing that a series of notes is supposed to be played all on the same string.
stringNumberSpanner = #(define-music-function (StringNumber) (string?) #{ \override TextSpanner.style = #'solid \override TextSpanner.font-size = #-5 \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.stencil-align-dir-y = #CENTER \override TextSpanner.bound-details.left.text = \markup { \circle \number $StringNumber } #}) \relative c { \clef "treble_8" \textSpannerDown \stringNumberSpanner "5" a8\startTextSpan b c d e f\stopTextSpan \stringNumberSpanner "4" g\startTextSpan a | bes4 a g2\stopTextSpan }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < String number extender lines ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Time signature in brackets > ] |
Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns
If notes from two voices with stems in the same direction are placed at
the same position, and both voices have no shift or the same shift
specified, the error message “warning: ignoring too many clashing note
columns” appears when compiling the LilyPond file. This message can be
suppressed by setting the ignore-collision property of the
NoteColumn object to #t. Please note that this does not
just suppress warnings but stops LilyPond trying to resolve collisions
at all and so may have unintended results unless used with care.
ignore = \override NoteColumn.ignore-collision = ##t \relative c' { \new Staff << \new Voice { \ignore \stemDown f2 g } \new Voice { c2 \stemDown c, } >> }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Time signature in parentheses > ] |
Time signature in brackets
The time signature can be enclosed within brackets.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.TimeSignature.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (bracketify-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) Y 0.1 0.2 0.1)) \time 2/4 a4 b8 c }
Time signature in parentheses
The time signature can be enclosed within parentheses.
\relative c'' { \override Staff.TimeSignature.stencil = #(lambda (grob) (parenthesize-stencil (ly:time-signature::print grob) 0.1 0.4 0.4 0.1)) \time 2/4 a4 b8 c }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Time signature in parentheses ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Tuplet bracket and change staff > ] |
Indicazione di tempo che mostra solo il numeratore (invece della frazione)
Talvolta un’indicazione di tempo non deve mostrare la frazione intera (ad esempio
7/4), ma solo il numeratore (numero 7 in questo caso). Si può ottenere
facilmente con \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'single-number,
che cambia lo stile in modo permanente. Con \revert
Staff.TimeSignature.style, questa impostazione può essere annullata. Per
applicare lo stile a cifra singola (single-number) a una sola indicazione
di tempo, si usa il comando \override preceduto da \once.
\relative c'' { \time 3/4 c4 c c % Change the style permanently \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'single-number \time 2/4 c4 c \time 3/4 c4 c c % Revert to default style: \revert Staff.TimeSignature.style \time 2/4 c4 c % single-number style only for the next time signature \once \override Staff.TimeSignature.style = #'single-number \time 5/4 c4 c c c c \time 2/4 c4 c }
Tuplet bracket and change staff
This snippet shows how to set a tuplet starting in a lower staff and finishing in the upper one.
aigues = \relative c' { \time 6/8 s4. \stemDown c16[ bes' e] \stemUp g c e \stemDown g8 } basses = \relative c { \time 3/4 \clef F \tweak positions #'(4.5 . 9.5) \tweak edge-height #'(1 . -1) \tuplet 7/6 { c16[ bes' e] \change Staff = md \stemUp g[ c e g] } s4.s8 } \new PianoStaff \with { \omit TimeSignature } << \new Staff = md \aigues \new Staff = mg \basses >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Tuplet bracket and change staff ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano > ] |
Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave
Cambiando il glifo della chiave, la sua posizione o l’ottavazione non
cambia la posizione delle note successive nel rigo. Per far sì che
le armature di chiave si trovino sulle linee del rigo corrette, bisogna
specificare anche middleCPosition, con valori positivi o negativi
che spostano il Do centrale rispettivamente su o giù in senso
relativo alla linea centrale del rigo.
Per esempio, \clef "treble_8" equivale a impostare
clefGlyph, clefPosition (che regola la posizione
verticale della chiave), middleCPosition e
clefTransposition. Viene stampata una chiave quando cambia una
di queste proprietà, eccetto middleCPosition.
Gli esempi seguenti mostrano le possibilità date dall’impostazione manuale di tali proprietà. Sulla prima linea le modifiche manuali preservano il posizionamento relativo standard di chiavi e note, mentre sulla seconda linea non lo fanno.
{ % The default treble clef. \key f \major c'1 % The standard bass clef \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.F" \set Staff.clefPosition = 2 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 6 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 6 \key g \major c'1 % The baritone clef. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.C" \set Staff.clefPosition = 4 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 4 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 4 \key f \major c'1 % The standard choral tenor clef. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.G" \set Staff.clefPosition = -2 \set Staff.clefTransposition = -7 \set Staff.middleCPosition = 1 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = 1 \key f \major c'1 % A non-standard clef. \set Staff.clefPosition = 0 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 0 \set Staff.middleCPosition = -4 \set Staff.middleCClefPosition = -4 \key g \major c'1 \break % The following clef changes do not preserve % the normal relationship between notes, key signatures % and clefs. \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.F" \set Staff.clefPosition = 2 c'1 \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.G" c'1 \set Staff.clefGlyph = "clefs.C" c'1 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 7 c'1 \set Staff.clefTransposition = 0 \set Staff.clefPosition = 0 c'1 % Return to the normal clef. \set Staff.middleCPosition = 0 c'1 }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Using alternative flag styles > ] |
Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano
L’aspetto di tutte le espressioni contenute nei blocchi \grace di un
brano può essere modificato con le funzioni add-grace-property e
remove-grace-property. L’esempio seguente toglie la definizione
della direzione di Stem nell’abbellimento, in modo che gli abbellimenti
non siano sempre rivolti in su, e barra le teste di nota.
\relative c'' { \new Staff { $(remove-grace-property 'Voice 'Stem 'direction) $(add-grace-property 'Voice 'NoteHead 'style 'cross) \new Voice { \acciaccatura { f16 } g4 \grace { d16 e } f4 \appoggiatura { f,32 g a } e2 } } }
Using alternative flag styles
Alternative shapes for flags on eighth and shorter notes can be displayed by
overriding the stencil property of Flag. LilyPond provides
the following functions: modern-straight-flag,
old-straight-flag, and flat-flag. Use \revert to
restore the default shape.
To get stacked (i.e., vertically more compact) flags, call the command
\flagStyleStacked, which can be reset with
\flagStyleDefault.
Overriding the Flag stencil does not change how flag elements are
positioned vertically. This is especially noticeable for flat flags:
LilyPond doesn’t dynamically adjust the vertical gaps between flag elements
in the same way as it does for beams. A possible solution to harmonize the
appearance is to replace flat flags with half beams, as shown in the second
staff; however, this can’t be done automatically. In the code of this
snippet, such half beams are entered with @ as a prefix, for example
@c8.
Be aware that half beams are not Flag grobs. This means in
particular that modifying Flag properties won’t have any effect on
them (you have to use Beam properties instead), and properties for
their associated Stem grob will also behave beam-like.
"@" = #(define-music-function (music) (ly:music?) #{ \set stemLeftBeamCount = 0 $music [] #}) testnotes = { \autoBeamOff c8 d16 e''32 f64 \acciaccatura { g,,,8 } a128 b } \relative c' { \override TextScript.staff-padding = 6 \time 1/4 <>^"default" \testnotes \override Flag.stencil = #modern-straight-flag <>_"modern straight" \testnotes \override Flag.stencil = #old-straight-flag <>^"old straight" \testnotes \override Flag.stencil = #flat-flag <>_"flat" \testnotes \revert Flag.stencil \flagStyleStacked <>^"stacked" \testnotes \flagStyleDefault <>_"default" \testnotes } \relative c' { \time 3/4 \override Flag.stencil = #flat-flag <>^"flat" c8 c[ c] d16 d[ d] e''32 e[ e] f64 f[ f] \acciaccatura { g,,,8 } a128 a[ a a a a] <>^"beam-like" @c8 c[ c] @d16 d[ d] @e''32 e[ e] @f64 f[ f] \acciaccatura { g,,,8 } @a128 a[ a a a a] } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Score \override NonMusicalPaperColumn.line-break-permission = ##f } }
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Using alternative flag styles ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Using the \tweak command to tweak individual grobs > ] |
Using ly:grob-object to access grobs with \tweak
Some grobs can be accessed “laterally” from within another grob’s
callback. These are usually listed as “layout objects” in the “Internal
properties” section of a grob interface. The function
ly:grob-object is used to access these grobs.
Demonstrated below are some ways of accessing grobs from within a
NoteHead callback, but the technique is not limited to
NoteHeads. However, the NoteHead callback is particularly
important, since it is the implicit callback used by the \tweak
command.
The console output of the example function below (display-grobs)
is as follows.
-------------------- #<Grob Accidental > () #<Grob Stem >
It is probably not that useful, but it demonstrates that the grobs are indeed being accessed.
#(define (notehead-get-accidental notehead) ;; notehead is grob (ly:grob-object notehead 'accidental-grob)) #(define (notehead-get-arpeggio notehead) ;; notehead is grob (let ((notecolumn (notehead-get-notecolumn notehead))) (ly:grob-object notecolumn 'arpeggio))) #(define (notehead-get-notecolumn notehead) ;; notehead is grob (ly:grob-parent notehead X)) #(define (notehead-get-stem notehead) ;; notehead is grob (let ((notecolumn (notehead-get-notecolumn notehead))) (ly:grob-object notecolumn 'stem))) #(define (display-grobs notehead) ;; notehead is grob (let ((accidental (notehead-get-accidental notehead)) (arpeggio (notehead-get-arpeggio notehead)) (stem (notehead-get-stem notehead))) (format (current-error-port) "~2&~a\n" (make-string 20 #\-)) (for-each (lambda (x) (format (current-error-port) "~a\n" x)) (list accidental arpeggio stem)))) \relative c' { %% display grobs for each note head: %\override NoteHead.before-line-breaking = #display-grobs <c %% or just for one: \tweak before-line-breaking #display-grobs es g>1\arpeggio }
Using the \tweak command to tweak individual grobs
With the \tweak command, every grob can be tuned directly. Here
are some examples of available tweaks.
\relative c' { \time 2/4 \set fingeringOrientations = #'(right) < \tweak font-size #3 c \tweak color #red d-\tweak font-size #8 -4 \tweak style #'cross g \tweak duration-log #2 a >2 }
Dinamiche e segni testuali allineati verticalmente
Tutti gli oggetti DynamicLineSpanner (forcelle e testi di dinamica)
sono posti a una distanza minima dal rigo determinata da 'staff-padding.
Se si imposta 'staff-padding su un valore abbastanza grande,
le dinamiche saranno allineate.
music = \relative c' { a'2\p b\f e4\p f\f\> g, b\p c2^\markup { \huge gorgeous } c^\markup { \huge fantastic } } { \music \break \override DynamicLineSpanner.staff-padding = 3 \textLengthOn \override TextScript.staff-padding = 1 \music } \paper { tagline = ##f }
Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale
Questo frammento mostra come usare le proprietà di contesto
alignBelowContext e alignAboveContext per
controllare il posizionamento del testo vocale e degli ossia.
\relative c' << \new Staff = "1" { c4 c c c } \new Staff = "2" { d4 d d d } \new Staff = "3" { e4 e e e } { \skip 2 << \lyrics { \set alignBelowContext = "1" lyrics4 below } \new Staff \with { alignAboveContext = "3" fontSize = -2 \override StaffSymbol.staff-space = #(magstep -2) \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-staff-spacing = #'((minimum-distance . 0) (basic-distance . 0) (padding . 1)) } { \tuplet 6/4 { \override TextScript.padding = 2 c8[^"ossia above" d e d e f] } } >> } >>
Vertically aligning stanza numbers of different staves
It can happen that stanza numbers don’t align vertically if the verses
are attached to different staves. To fix that, override the
self-alignment-X property of the LyricText grob.
\markup { default behavior } << \new Staff { b b b b } \lyrics { \set stanza = "3." a a a a } \new Staff { b b b b } \lyrics { \set stanza = "1." aaaaaaaaaa a a a } \lyrics { \set stanza = "2." a a a a } >> \markup \vspace #1 \markup { using \typewriter "self-alignment-X = #LEFT" } << \new Staff { b b b b } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \set stanza = "3." a a a a } \new Staff { b b b b } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \set stanza = "1." \once \override LyricText.self-alignment-X = #LEFT aaaaaaaaaa a a a } \new Lyrics \lyricmode { \set stanza = "2." a a a a } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Paper and layout >> ] |
| [ < Vertically aligning stanza numbers of different staves ] | [ Up: Tweaks and overrides ] | [ Paper and layout > ] |
Vertically centering paired figured bass extenders
Where figured bass extender lines are being used by setting
useBassFigureExtenders to #t, pairs of congruent figured
bass extender lines are vertically centered if
figuredBassCenterContinuations is set to #t.
<< \relative c' { \repeat unfold 3 { c8 c b b a a c16 c b b } } \figures { \set useBassFigureExtenders = ##t <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 r <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 <4 3+>16 r \set figuredBassCenterContinuations = ##t <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 r <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 <4 3+>16 r \set figuredBassCenterContinuations = ##f <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 r <6+ 4 3>4 <6 4 3>8 <4 3+>16 r } >>
| [ << Tweaks and overrides ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Vertically centering paired figured bass extenders ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Aligning and centering instrument names > ] |
20 Paper and layout
See also Spacing issues.
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Paper and layout ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Arranging separate lyrics on a single line > ] |
Aligning and centering instrument names
The horizontal alignment of instrument names is tweaked by changing the
self-alignment-X property of the InstrumentName grob
(usually in the Staff context). The \layout variables
indent and short-indent define the space in which the
instrument names are aligned before the first and the following
systems, respectively.
\paper { left-margin = 3\cm } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #LEFT instrumentName = \markup \left-column { "Left aligned" "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Left" } { c''1 \break c''1 } \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #CENTER instrumentName = \markup \center-column { Centered "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Centered" } { g'1 g'1 } \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #RIGHT instrumentName = \markup \right-column { "Right aligned" "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Right" } { e'1 e'1 } >> \layout { indent = 4\cm short-indent = 2\cm line-width = 6.5\cm }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Aligning and centering instrument names ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Book parts > ] |
Arranging separate lyrics on a single line
Sometimes you may want to put lyrics for different performers on a
single line: where there is rapidly alternating text, for example. This
snippet shows how it can be done with adjusting the
nonstaff-nonstaff-spacing property of the
VerticalAxisGroup grob.
\layout { \context { \Lyrics \override VerticalAxisGroup .nonstaff-nonstaff-spacing .minimum-distance = ##f } } aliceSings = \markup { \smallCaps "Alice" } eveSings = \markup { \smallCaps "Eve" } << \new Staff << \new Voice = "alice" { f'4^\aliceSings g' r2 | s1 | f'4^\aliceSings g' r2 | s1 | \break % ... \voiceOne s2 a'8^\aliceSings a' b'4 | \oneVoice g'1 } \new Voice = "eve" { s1 | a'2^\eveSings g' | s1 | a'2^\eveSings g' % ... \voiceTwo f'4^\eveSings a'8 g' f'4 e' | \oneVoice s1 } >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "alice" { may -- be sec -- ond % ... Shut up, you fool! } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "eve" { that the words are % ... …and then I was like– } >>
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Arranging separate lyrics on a single line ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Changing the staff size > ] |
Book parts
\bookpart can be used to split a book into several parts. Each
part last page can be affected by ragged-last-bottom. Header and
footer markups can detect a part’s last page to differentiate with the
book’s last page.
#(set-default-paper-size "a6") \book { %% book paper, which is inherited by all children bookparts \paper { ragged-last-bottom = ##t %% Page footer: add a different part-tagline at part last page oddFooterMarkup = \markup { \column { \fill-line { %% Copyright header field only on book first page. \if \on-first-page \fromproperty #'header:copyright } \fill-line { %% Part tagline header field only on each part last page. \if \on-last-page-of-part \fromproperty #'header:parttagline } \fill-line { %% Tagline header field only on book last page. \if \on-last-page \fromproperty #'header:tagline } } } } %% book header, which is inherited by the first bookpart \header { title = "Book title" copyright = "Copyright line on book first page" parttagline = "Part tagline" tagline = "Book tagline" } \bookpart { %% a different page breaking function may be used on each part \paper { page-breaking = #ly:minimal-breaking } \header { subtitle = "First part" } \markup { The first book part } \markup { a page break } \pageBreak \markup { first part last page } \markup \wordwrap { with ragged-last-bottom (see the space below this text) } } \bookpart { \header { subtitle = "Second part" } { c'4 } } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Book parts ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Clip systems > ] |
Changing the staff size
Though the simplest way to resize staves is to use
#(set-global-staff-size size), an individual staff’s
size can be changed by scaling the properties staff-space and
fontSize.
<< \new Staff { \relative c'' { \dynamicDown c8\ff c c c c c c c } } \new Staff \with { fontSize = #-3 \override StaffSymbol.staff-space = #(magstep -3) } { \clef bass c8 c c c c\f c c c } >>
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Changing the staff size ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Creating blank staves > ] |
Clip systems
This code shows how to clip (extract) snippets from a full score.
This file needs to be run separately with -dclip-systems; the
snippets page may not adequately show the results. The result will be
files named
‘base-from-start-to-end[-count].eps’.
If system starts and ends are included, they include extents of the System grob, e.g., instrument names.
Grace notes at the end point of the region are not included.
Regions can span multiple systems. In this case, multiple EPS files are generated.
#(set-default-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) \layout { indent = 2.4\cm } #(ly:set-option 'clip-systems) #(ly:set-option 'separate-page-formats "ps") #(define output-suffix "1") origScore = \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Instrument" } \relative c' { c1 d1 \grace c16 e1 \key d \major f1 \break \clef bass g,1 fis1 } \book { \score { \origScore \layout { % Each clip-region is a (START . END) pair % where both are rhythmic locations. Syntax: % % (make-rhythmic-locations BAR-NUMBER NUM DEN) % % means NUM/DEN whole-notes into bar numbered BAR-NUMBER clip-regions = #(list (cons (make-rhythmic-location 2 0 1) (make-rhythmic-location 4 0 1)) (cons (make-rhythmic-location 0 0 1) (make-rhythmic-location 4 0 1)) (cons (make-rhythmic-location 0 0 1) (make-rhythmic-location 6 0 1))) } } } #(ly:set-option 'clip-systems #f) #(ly:set-option 'separate-page-formats #f) #(define output-suffix #f) \book { \score { \origScore } \markup { \bold \fontsize #6 clips } \score { \lyrics { "from-2.0.1-to-4.0.1-clip.eps" \markup \epsfile #X #30.0 #(format #f "~a-1-from-2.0.1-to-4.0.1-clip.eps" (ly:parser-output-name)) } } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Clip systems ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Demonstrating all \header fields > ] |
Creating blank staves
To create blank staves, generate empty measures then remove the
Bar_number_engraver from the Score context, and the
Time_signature_engraver, Clef_engraver and
Bar_engraver from the Staff context.
#(set-global-staff-size 10) % for the documentation % #(set-global-staff-size 20) % for letter and A4 \book { \score { { \repeat unfold 12 { s1 \break } } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \Staff \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \remove "Clef_engraver" \remove "Bar_engraver" } \context { \Score \remove "Bar_number_engraver" } } } % for the documentation \paper { #(set-paper-size "a6") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 90\mm left-margin = 7.5\mm bottom-margin = 5\mm top-margin = 5\mm tagline = ##f } % uncomment these lines for "letter" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "letter") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 7.5\in left-margin = 0.5\in bottom-margin = 0.25\in top-margin = 0.25\in tagline = ##f } %} % uncomment these lines for "A4" size %{ \paper { #(set-paper-size "a4") ragged-last-bottom = ##f line-width = 180\mm left-margin = 15\mm bottom-margin = 10\mm top-margin = 10\mm tagline = ##f } %} }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Creating blank staves ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive > ] |
Demonstrating all \header fields
A demonstration of all header fields that LilyPond defines by default.
Thanks to setting print-all-headers to #t, much more
fields as usual are displayed, indicating the hiearchy of
\header blocks.
\paper { #(set-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) print-all-headers = ##t } \book { \header { title = "title" subtitle = "subtitle" composer = "composer" arranger = "arranger" instrument = "instrument" meter = "meter" opus = "opus" piece = "piece" poet = "poet" copyright = "copyright" tagline = "tagline" } \bookpart { \score { \relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c } \header { title = "localtitle" subtitle = "localsubtitle" composer = "localcomposer" arranger = "localarranger" instrument = "localinstrument" meter = "localmeter" opus = "localopus" piece = "localpiece" poet = "localpoet" copyright = "localcopyright" tagline = "localtagline" } } } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Demonstrating all \header fields ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Setting system separators > ] |
Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive
In many orchestral scores it is custom to not show staves for
instruments that are silent for a while; this is called a ‘Frenched’
score. LilyPond provides this functionality via the
\RemoveEmptyStaves command.
When they play again it is often preferred to show the staves of
all instruments of such a group. This can be done by adding the
Keep_alive_together_engraver to the grouping context (e.g.,
GrandStaff or StaffGroup).
In the example below the violins are silent in the second system. Only the first violin plays the last measure in the third system but the staff of the second violin is also displayed.
\score { << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" shortInstrumentName = "Fl" } \relative c' { \repeat unfold 3 { c'4 c c c | c c c c | c c c c | \break } } \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_Strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "StaffViolinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" shortInstrumentName = "Vi I" } \relative c'' { a1 | R1*7 | \repeat unfold 12 a16 a4 | } \new Staff = "StaffViolinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" shortInstrumentName = "Vi II" } \relative c' { e1 | R1*8 | } >> \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" shortInstrumentName = "Ce" } \relative c { \clef bass \repeat unfold 9 { c1 } | } >> >> } \layout { indent = 3.0\cm short-indent = 1.5\cm \context { \GrandStaff \consists Keep_alive_together_engraver } \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Table of contents > ] |
Setting system separators
System separators can be inserted between systems. Any markup can be
used, but \slashSeparator has been provided as a sensible
default.
#(set-default-paper-size "a5") \paper { system-separator-markup = \slashSeparator tagline = ##f } notes = \relative c' { c1 | c \break c1 | c \break c1 | c } \book { \score { \new GrandStaff << \new Staff \notes \new Staff \notes >> } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Setting system separators ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar > ] |
Table of contents
A table of contents is included using
\markuplist \table-of-contents; its items are added with the
\tocItem command.
#(set-default-paper-size "a7" 'landscape) #(set-global-staff-size 11) \paper { print-all-headers = ##t } \book { \markuplist \table-of-contents \pageBreak \tocItem \markup { The first score } \score { { c'1 \pageBreak \mark \default \tocItem \markup { Mark A } d'1 } \header { title = "First score" } } \pageBreak \tocItem \markup { The second score } \score { { e'1 } \header { title = "Second score" } } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Titles >> ] |
| [ < Table of contents ] | [ Up: Paper and layout ] | [ Titles > ] |
Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar
This snippet shows how to achieve vertically aligned StaffGroups
with a SystemStartBar for each StaffGroup, but without
connecting them.
Note that this only works properly for music that can be printed as a single system.
#(set-global-staff-size 15) \paper { ragged-right = ##f print-all-headers = ##t tagline = ##f } \layout { indent = 0 \context { \StaffGroup \consists Text_mark_engraver \consists Staff_collecting_engraver systemStartDelimiterHierarchy = #'(SystemStartBrace (SystemStartBracket a b)) } \context { \Score \remove Text_mark_engraver \remove Staff_collecting_engraver \override SystemStartBrace.style = #'bar-line \omit SystemStartBar \override SystemStartBrace.padding = #-0.1 \override SystemStartBrace.thickness = #1.6 \override StaffGrouper.staffgroup-staff-spacing.basic-distance = #15 } } %%%% EXAMPLE txt = \lyricmode { Wer4 nur den lie -- ben Gott läßt wal2 -- ten4 und4 hof -- fet auf ihn al -- le Zeit2. } % First StaffGroup "exercise" eI = \relative c' { \textMark \markup { \bold Teacher: This is a simple setting of the choral. Please improve it. } \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceOne \partial 4 e4 a b c b a b gis2 e4\fermata g! g f e a a gis a2.\fermata \bar ":|." } eII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceTwo \partial 4 c4 e e e gis a f e2 b4 b d d c c d d c2. \bar ":|." } eIII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceOne \partial 4 a4 c b a b c d b2 gis4 g g b c a f e e2. } eIV = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceTwo \partial 4 a,4 a' gis a e a, d e2 e,4\fermata e' b g c f d e a,2.\fermata \bar ":|." } exercise = \new StaffGroup = "exercise" << \new Staff << \new Voice \eI \new Voice \eII >> \new Lyrics \txt \new Staff << \new Voice \eIII \new Voice \eIV >> >> % Second StaffGroup "simple Bach" sbI = \relative c' { \textMark \markup { \bold" Pupil:" Here's my version! } \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceOne \partial 4 e4 a b c b a b gis2 e4\fermata g! g f e a a gis a2.\fermata \bar ":|." } sbII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceTwo \partial 4 c8 d e4 e e8 f g4 f f e2 b4 b8 c d4 d e8 d c4 b8 c d4 c2. \bar ":|." } sbIII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceOne \partial 4 a8 b c4 b a b8 c d4 d8 c b2 gis4 g g8 a b4 b a8 g f4 e e2. } sbIV = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceTwo \partial 4 a,4 a' gis a e f8 e d4 e2 e,4\fermata e' b a8 g c4 f8 e d4 e a,2.\fermata \bar ":|." } simpleBach = \new StaffGroup = "simple Bach" << \new Staff << \new Voice \sbI \new Voice \sbII >> \new Lyrics \txt \new Staff << \new Voice \sbIII \new Voice \sbIV >> >> % Third StaffGroup "chromatic Bach" cbI = \relative c' { \textMark \markup { \bold "Teacher:" \column { "Well, you simply copied and transposed a version of J.S.Bach." "Do you know this one?" } } \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceOne \partial 4 e4 a b c b a b gis4. fis8 e4\fermata g! g f e a a8 b gis4 a2.\fermata \bar ":|." } cbII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \voiceTwo \partial 4 c8 d e4 e e8 fis gis4 a8 g! f!4 e2 b4 e e d d8[ cis] d dis e fis e4 e2. \bar ":|." } cbIII = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceOne \partial 4 a8 b c[ b] a gis8 a4 d, e8[ e'] d c b4. a8 gis4 b c d8 c b[ a] a b c b b c16 d c2. } cbIV = \relative c' { \key a \minor \time 4/4 \clef bass \voiceTwo \partial 4 a4 c, e a, b c d e2 e4\fermata e a b8 c gis[ g] fis f e dis e4 a,2.\fermata \bar ":|." } chromaticBach = \new StaffGroup = "chromatic Bach" << \new Staff << \new Voice \cbI \new Voice \cbII >> \new Lyrics \txt \new Staff << \new Voice \cbIII \new Voice \cbIV >> >> % Score \score { << \exercise \simpleBach \chromaticBach >> \header { title = \markup \column { \combine \null \vspace #1 "Exercise: Improve the given choral" " " } } \layout { \context { \Lyrics \override LyricText.X-offset = #-1 } } }
| [ << Paper and layout ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Spacing >> ] |
| [ < Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adding the current date to a score > ] |
21 Titles
See also Titles and headers.
| Adding the current date to a score | ||
| Aligning and centering instrument names | ||
| Demonstrating all \header fields | ||
| Outputting the version number |
| [ << Titles ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Spacing >> ] |
| [ < Titles ] | [ Up: Titles ] | [ Aligning and centering instrument names > ] |
Adding the current date to a score
With a little Scheme code, the current date can easily be added to a score.
\paper { tagline = ##f } % first, define a variable to hold the formatted date: date = #(strftime "%d-%m-%Y" (localtime (current-time))) % use it in the title block: \header { title = "Including the date!" subtitle = \date } \score { \relative c'' { c4 c c c } } % and use it in a \markup block: \markup { \date }
| [ << Titles ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Spacing >> ] |
| [ < Adding the current date to a score ] | [ Up: Titles ] | [ Demonstrating all \header fields > ] |
Aligning and centering instrument names
The horizontal alignment of instrument names is tweaked by changing the
self-alignment-X property of the InstrumentName grob
(usually in the Staff context). The \layout variables
indent and short-indent define the space in which the
instrument names are aligned before the first and the following
systems, respectively.
\paper { left-margin = 3\cm } \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #LEFT instrumentName = \markup \left-column { "Left aligned" "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Left" } { c''1 \break c''1 } \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #CENTER instrumentName = \markup \center-column { Centered "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Centered" } { g'1 g'1 } \new Staff \with { \override InstrumentName.self-alignment-X = #RIGHT instrumentName = \markup \right-column { "Right aligned" "instrument name" } shortInstrumentName = "Right" } { e'1 e'1 } >> \layout { indent = 4\cm short-indent = 2\cm line-width = 6.5\cm }
| [ << Titles ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Spacing >> ] |
| [ < Aligning and centering instrument names ] | [ Up: Titles ] | [ Outputting the version number > ] |
Demonstrating all \header fields
A demonstration of all header fields that LilyPond defines by default.
Thanks to setting print-all-headers to #t, much more
fields as usual are displayed, indicating the hiearchy of
\header blocks.
\paper { #(set-paper-size "a6" 'landscape) print-all-headers = ##t } \book { \header { title = "title" subtitle = "subtitle" composer = "composer" arranger = "arranger" instrument = "instrument" meter = "meter" opus = "opus" piece = "piece" poet = "poet" copyright = "copyright" tagline = "tagline" } \bookpart { \score { \relative c'' { c1 | c | c | c } \header { title = "localtitle" subtitle = "localsubtitle" composer = "localcomposer" arranger = "localarranger" instrument = "localinstrument" meter = "localmeter" opus = "localopus" piece = "localpiece" poet = "localpoet" copyright = "localcopyright" tagline = "localtagline" } } } }
| [ << Titles ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Spacing >> ] |
| [ < Demonstrating all \header fields ] | [ Up: Titles ] | [ Spacing > ] |
Outputting the version number
It is possible to print the version number of LilyPond in markup.
\markup { Processed with LilyPond version #(lilypond-version) }
| [ << Titles ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Outputting the version number ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics > ] |
22 Spacing
See also Spacing issues.
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Spacing ] | [ Up: Spacing ] | [ Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo > ] |
Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
This snippet shows how to bring the lyrics line closer to the staff.
% Default layout: << \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } \new Lyrics \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } \new Staff \new Voice = melody \relative c' { c4 d e f | g4 f e d | c1 } % Reducing the minimum space below the staff and above the lyrics: \new Lyrics \with { \override VerticalAxisGroup.nonstaff-relatedstaff-spacing = #'((basic-distance . 1)) } \lyricsto melody { aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa aa } >>
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics ] | [ Up: Spacing ] | [ Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts > ] |
Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo
Per impostazione predefinita, le diteggiature orientate verticalmente sono poste fuori dal rigo; questo comportamento tuttavia può essere disabilitato. Occorre fare attenzione alle situazioni in cui le diteggiature e i gambi sono rivolti nella stessa direzione: normalmente le diteggiature evitano soltanto i gambi con travature. Questa impostazione predefinita può essere cambiata in modo da evitare tutti i gambi oppure nessuno. L’esempio seguente mostra queste due opzioni, così come tornare al comportamento predefinito.
\relative c' { <c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>2 \override Fingering.staff-padding = #'() <c-1 e-2 g-3 b-5>4 g'-0 a8[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = ##f a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = ##t a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r \override Fingering.add-stem-support = #only-if-beamed a[-1 b]-2 g-0 r }
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo ] | [ Up: Spacing ] | [ Page label > ] |
Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts
By default, LilyPond uses DynamicLineSpanner grobs to vertically
align successive dynamic objects like hairpins and dynamic text.
However, this is not always wanted. By inserting
\breakDynamicSpan, which ends the alignment spanner
prematurely, this vertical alignment can be avoided.
{ g1\< | e''\f\> | c'\p } { g1\< | e''\breakDynamicSpan\f\> | c'\p }
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts ] | [ Up: Spacing ] | [ Proportional strict notespacing > ] |
Page label
Page labels may be placed inside music or at top-level, and referred to in markups.
\label license \markup "This snippet is available under the Creative Commons Public Domain Dedication license." { \repeat volta 2 { \label startRepeat \repeat unfold 20 { c'2 2 } \pageBreak 2 2 } \textEndMark \markup { \with-link #'startRepeat \line { To page \page-ref #'startRepeat "0" "?" } } } \markup { See page \page-ref #'license "0" "?" for licensing information. }
Proportional strict notespacing
If strict-note-spacing is set spacing of notes is not influenced
by bars or clefs within a system. Rather, they are placed just before
the note that occurs at the same time. This may cause collisions.
\relative c'' << \override Score.SpacingSpanner.strict-note-spacing = ##t \set Score.proportionalNotationDuration = #1/16 \new Staff { c8[ c \clef alto c c \grace { d16 } c8 c] c4 c2 \grace { c16[ c16] } c2 } \new Staff { c2 \tuplet 3/2 { c8 \clef bass cis,, c } c4 c1 } >>
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Proportional strict notespacing ] | [ Up: Spacing ] | [ Dinamiche e segni testuali allineati verticalmente > ] |
Reconciliating bar lines thickness when staves are of different sizes (TODO duplicates snippet in Documentation/en/notation/spacing.itely)
A regularly occurring problem in ensemble or chamber music scores, particularly with piano, is that when some of the staves are printed in a smaller size, their bar lines do not not match those of larger staves. This may become particularly egregious for closing double bar lines, as demonstrated here.
There are different solutions, which all involve correcting some of the
properties overridden by the \magnifyStaff command: namely,
kern thick-thickness and hair-thickness (the
latter of which also governs ordinary bar lines). These are properties
of the BarLine graphical object (“grob”), which resides
in the Staff context.
This can be done by using either the \revert command, or more
advanced commands such as revert-props. Alternatively, some
effects of \magnifyStaff may be replicated on other staves
through the scale-props command, which may be used to harmonize
all bar lines either to their appearance on the smallest staves, or to
some intermediate value.
%% This snippet relies on some internal commands that are not part of the %% most common and stable syntax generally recommended to regular users. \markup \fontsize #-3 { \center-column { \vspace #0.3 Default: \vspace #1.7 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 } { b1 b \bar "|."} \new Staff { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { "Reverting only the" "final bar line:" \vspace #1.2 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 } { b1 b \revert Staff.BarLine.thick-thickness \revert Staff.BarLine.hair-thickness \revert Staff.BarLine.kern \bar "|." } \new Staff { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { \line {Cancelling \typewriter "\magnifyStaff"} "only for bar lines:" \vspace #1.1 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 #(revert-props 'magnifyStaff 0 '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b1 b \bar "|."} \new Staff { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { \line {Mimicking \typewriter "\magnifyStaff"} "on the other staves:" \vspace #1.3 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 } { b1 b \bar "|." } \new Staff \with { #(scale-props 'magnifyStaff 1/2 #t '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b b } >> } } \hspace #2 \center-column { "Applying an intermediate" "value to all staves:" \vspace #1.3 \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { \magnifyStaff #1/2 #(scale-props 'magnifyStaff 3/2 #t '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b1 b \bar "|." } \new Staff \with { #(scale-props 'magnifyStaff 3/4 #t '((BarLine thick-thickness) (BarLine hair-thickness) (BarLine kern))) } { b b } >> } } } \layout { indent = 0 }
Dinamiche e segni testuali allineati verticalmente
Tutti gli oggetti DynamicLineSpanner (forcelle e testi di dinamica)
sono posti a una distanza minima dal rigo determinata da 'staff-padding.
Se si imposta 'staff-padding su un valore abbastanza grande,
le dinamiche saranno allineate.
music = \relative c' { a'2\p b\f e4\p f\f\> g, b\p c2^\markup { \huge gorgeous } c^\markup { \huge fantastic } } { \music \break \override DynamicLineSpanner.staff-padding = 3 \textLengthOn \override TextScript.staff-padding = 1 \music } \paper { tagline = ##f }
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ MIDI >> ] |
| [ < Dinamiche e segni testuali allineati verticalmente ] | [ Up: Spacing ] | [ MIDI > ] |
Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale
Questo frammento mostra come usare le proprietà di contesto
alignBelowContext e alignAboveContext per
controllare il posizionamento del testo vocale e degli ossia.
\relative c' << \new Staff = "1" { c4 c c c } \new Staff = "2" { d4 d d d } \new Staff = "3" { e4 e e e } { \skip 2 << \lyrics { \set alignBelowContext = "1" lyrics4 below } \new Staff \with { alignAboveContext = "3" fontSize = -2 \override StaffSymbol.staff-space = #(magstep -2) \remove "Time_signature_engraver" \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-staff-spacing = #'((minimum-distance . 0) (basic-distance . 0) (padding . 1)) } { \tuplet 6/4 { \override TextScript.padding = 2 c8[^"ossia above" d e d e f] } } >> } >>
| [ << Spacing ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Templates >> ] |
| [ < Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Impostare l’output MIDI su un canale per voce > ] |
23 MIDI
See also Creating MIDI output.
| [ << MIDI ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Templates >> ] |
| [ < MIDI ] | [ Up: MIDI ] | [ Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica > ] |
Impostare l’output MIDI su un canale per voce
Nella creazione del file di output MIDI, il comportamento predefinito prevede che ogni rigo sia assegnato a un canale MIDI, con tutte le voci del rigo amalgamate in un canale. Ciò diminuisce il rischio di esaurire i canali MIDI disponibili, dato che ce ne sono solo 16 per traccia.
Tuttavia, spostando Staff_performer nel contesto Voice, ogni
voce in un rigo può avere il proprio canale MIDI, come è illustrato
nell’esempio seguente: sebbene le voci siano sullo stesso rigo, vengono
creati due canali MIDI, ciascuno con un diverso strumento MIDI
(midiInstrument).
\score { \new Staff << \new Voice \relative c''' { \set midiInstrument = "flute" \voiceOne \key g \major \time 2/2 r2 g-"Flute" ~ g fis ~ fis4 g8 fis e2 ~ e4 d8 cis d2 } \new Voice \relative c'' { \set midiInstrument = "clarinet" \voiceTwo b1-"Clarinet" a2. b8 a g2. fis8 e fis2 r } >> \layout { } \midi { \context { \Staff \remove "Staff_performer" } \context { \Voice \consists "Staff_performer" } \tempo 2 = 72 } }
| [ << MIDI ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Templates >> ] |
| [ < Impostare l’output MIDI su un canale per voce ] | [ Up: MIDI ] | [ Creare dinamiche personalizzate nell’output MIDI > ] |
Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica
Per cambiare il tempo del file MIDI senza che appaia l’indicazione metronomica, basta renderla invisibile.
\score { \new Staff \relative c' { \tempo 4 = 160 c4 e g b c4 b d c \set Score.tempoHideNote = ##t \tempo 4 = 96 d,4 fis a cis d4 cis e d } \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << MIDI ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Templates >> ] |
| [ < Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica ] | [ Up: MIDI ] | [ Demo of MIDI instruments > ] |
Creare dinamiche personalizzate nell’output MIDI
L’esempio seguente mostra come creare un segno di dinamica, non incluso nell’elenco predefinito, e assegnargli un valore specifico così che possa essere usato per cambiare l’output MIDI.
Al segno di dinamica \rfz viene assegnato il valore 0.9.
#(define (myDynamics dynamic) (if (equal? dynamic "rfz") 0.9 (default-dynamic-absolute-volume dynamic))) \score { \new Staff { \set Staff.midiInstrument = "cello" \set Score.dynamicAbsoluteVolumeFunction = #myDynamics \new Voice { \relative { a'4\pp b c-\rfz } } } \layout {} \midi {} }
| [ << MIDI ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Templates >> ] |
| [ < Creare dinamiche personalizzate nell’output MIDI ] | [ Up: MIDI ] | [ Modificare l’equalizzazione predefinita degli strumenti MIDI > ] |
Demo of MIDI instruments
Problem: How to know which midiInstrument values would be best
for your composition?
Solution: A LilyPond demo file. You have to compile this snippet by yourself and listen to the created MIDI output file.
melody = \relative c' { \tempo 4 = 150 c4.\mf g c16 b' c d e16 d e f g4 g'4 r R1 } \score { \new Voice \melody \layout { } } \score { \new Voice { r\mf % 1-8 keyboard \set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic grand" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "bright acoustic" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric grand" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "honky-tonk" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric piano 1" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric piano 2" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "harpsichord" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "clav" \melody % 9-16 chrom percussion \set Staff.midiInstrument = "celesta" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "glockenspiel" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "music box" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "vibraphone" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "marimba" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "xylophone" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "tubular bells" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "dulcimer" \melody % 17-24 organ \set Staff.midiInstrument = "drawbar organ" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "percussive organ" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "rock organ" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "church organ" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "reed organ" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "accordion" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "harmonica" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "concertina" \melody % 25-32 guitar \set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic guitar (nylon)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic guitar (steel)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric guitar (jazz)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric guitar (clean)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric guitar (muted)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "overdriven guitar" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "distorted guitar" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "guitar harmonics" \melody % 33-40 bass \set Staff.midiInstrument = "acoustic bass" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric bass (finger)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "electric bass (pick)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fretless bass" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "slap bass 1" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "slap bass 2" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synth bass 1" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synth bass 2" \melody % 41-48 strings \set Staff.midiInstrument = "violin" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "viola" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "cello" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "contrabass" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "tremolo strings" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pizzicato strings" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "orchestral harp" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "timpani" \melody % 49-56 ensemble \set Staff.midiInstrument = "string ensemble 1" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "string ensemble 2" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synthstrings 1" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synthstrings 2" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "choir aahs" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "voice oohs" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synth voice" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "orchestra hit" \melody % 57-64 brass \set Staff.midiInstrument = "trumpet" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "trombone" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "tuba" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "muted trumpet" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "french horn" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "brass section" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synthbrass 1" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synthbrass 2" \melody % 65-72 reed \set Staff.midiInstrument = "soprano sax" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "alto sax" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "tenor sax" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "baritone sax" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "oboe" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "english horn" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "bassoon" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "clarinet" \melody % 73-80 pipe \set Staff.midiInstrument = "piccolo" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "flute" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "recorder" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pan flute" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "blown bottle" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "shakuhachi" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "whistle" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "ocarina" \melody % 81-88 synth lead \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 1 (square)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 2 (sawtooth)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 3 (calliope)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 4 (chiff)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 5 (charang)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 6 (voice)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 7 (fifths)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "lead 8 (bass+lead)" \melody % 89-96 synth pad \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 1 (new age)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 2 (warm)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 3 (polysynth)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 4 (choir)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 5 (bowed)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 6 (metallic)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 7 (halo)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "pad 8 (sweep)" \melody % 97-104 synth effects \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 1 (rain)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 2 (soundtrack)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 3 (crystal)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 4 (atmosphere)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 5 (brightness)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 6 (goblins)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 7 (echoes)" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fx 8 (sci-fi)" \melody % 105-112 ethnic \set Staff.midiInstrument = "sitar" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "banjo" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "shamisen" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "koto" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "kalimba" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "bagpipe" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "fiddle" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "shanai" \melody % 113-120 percussive \set Staff.midiInstrument = "tinkle bell" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "agogo" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "steel drums" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "woodblock" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "taiko drum" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "melodic tom" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "synth drum" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "reverse cymbal" \melody % 121-128 sound effects \set Staff.midiInstrument = "guitar fret noise" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "breath noise" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "seashore" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "bird tweet" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "telephone ring" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "helicopter" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "applause" \melody \set Staff.midiInstrument = "gunshot" \melody } \midi { } }
| [ << MIDI ] | [Top][Contents] | [ Templates >> ] |
| [ < Demo of MIDI instruments ] | [ Up: MIDI ] | [ Templates > ] |
Modificare l’equalizzazione predefinita degli strumenti MIDI
L’equalizzatore predefinito degli strumenti MIDI può essere modificato
impostando la proprietà instrumentEqualizer nel contesto Score
come una procedura Scheme definita dall’utente che usi il nome dello strumento
MIDI come argomento insieme a una coppia di frazioni indicanti i volumi
minimi e massimi da applicare a quello specifico strumento.
L’esempio seguente imposta i volumi massimo e minimo per il flauto e per il clarintetto.
#(define my-instrument-equalizer-alist '()) #(set! my-instrument-equalizer-alist (append '(("flute" . (0.7 . 0.9)) ("clarinet" . (0.3 . 0.6))) my-instrument-equalizer-alist)) #(define (my-instrument-equalizer s) (let ((entry (assoc s my-instrument-equalizer-alist))) (if entry (cdr entry)))) \score { << \new Staff { \key g \major \time 2/2 \set Score.instrumentEqualizer = #my-instrument-equalizer \set Staff.midiInstrument = "flute" \new Voice \relative { r2 g''\mp g fis~ 4 g8 fis e2~ 4 d8 cis d2 } } \new Staff { \key g \major \set Staff.midiInstrument = "clarinet" \new Voice \relative { b'1\p a2. b8 a g2. fis8 e fis2 r } } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << MIDI ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modificare l’equalizzazione predefinita degli strumenti MIDI ] | [ Up: Top ] | [ Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music > ] |
24 Templates
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Templates ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per salmo anglicano > ] |
Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music
This example demonstrates how to do modern transcription of Gregorian music. Gregorian music has no measure, no stems; it uses only half and quarter note heads, and special marks, indicating rests of different length.
chant = \relative c' { \set Score.timing = ##f f4 a2 \divisioMinima g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior g4( f) f( g f) a2 \finalis \break f4 a2 \divisioMinima g4 b a2 f2 \divisioMaior g4( f) f( g a) g2( f) \finalis } verba = \lyricmode { Lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met, lo -- rem ip -- sum do -- lor sit a -- met. } \score { \new GregorianTranscriptionStaff << \new GregorianTranscriptionVoice = "melody" \chant \new GregorianTranscriptionLyrics = "one" \lyricsto melody \verba >> }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per inno > ] |
Modello per salmo anglicano
Questo modello presenta un modo per impostare un salmo anglicano. Mostra anche come le strofe possano essere aggiunte come testo separato al di sotto della musica. Le due strofe sono scritte con stili diversi per illustrare le varie possibilità.
SopranoMusic = \relative g' { g1 | c2 b | a1 | \bar "||" a1 | d2 c | c b | c1 | \bar "||" } AltoMusic = \relative c' { e1 | g2 g | f1 | f1 | f2 e | d d | e1 | } TenorMusic = \relative a { c1 | c2 c | c1 | d1 | g,2 g | g g | g1 | } BassMusic = \relative c { c1 | e2 e | f1 | d1 | b2 c | g' g | c,1 | } global = { \time 2/2 } dot = \markup { \raise #0.7 \musicglyph "dots.dot" } tick = \markup { \raise #1 \fontsize #-5 \musicglyph "scripts.rvarcomma" } % Use markup to center the chant on the page \markup \fill-line { \score { % centered \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff << \global \clef "treble" \new Voice = "Soprano" << \voiceOne \SopranoMusic >> \new Voice = "Alto" << \voiceTwo \AltoMusic >> >> \new Staff << \clef "bass" \global \new Voice = "Tenor" << \voiceOne \TenorMusic >> \new Voice = "Bass" << \voiceTwo \BassMusic >> >> >> \layout { \context { \Score \override SpacingSpanner.base-shortest-duration = \musicLength 2 } \context { \Staff \remove "Time_signature_engraver" } } } % End score } % End markup \markup \fill-line { \left-column { \null \null \null \line { \fontsize #5 O \fontsize #3 come let us \bold sing | unto \dot the | Lord : let } \line { us heartily \concat { re \bold joice } in the | strength of | our } \line { sal | vation. } \null \line { \hspace #2.5 8. Today if ye will hear his voice * } \line { \concat { \bold hard en } \tick not your \tick hearts : as in the pro- } \line { vocation * and as in the \bold day of tempt- \tick } \line { -ation \tick in the \tick wilderness. } } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per salmo anglicano ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per combo jazz > ] |
Modello per inno
Il codice seguente presenta un modo di impostare un inno in cui ogni verso inizia e finisce con una misura parziale. Mostra anche come aggiungere delle strofe come testo separato sotto la musica.
Timeline = { \time 4/4 \tempo 4=96 \partial 2 s2 | s1 | s2 \breathe s2 | s1 | s2 \caesura \break s2 | s1 | s2 \breathe s2 | s1 | s2 \fine } SopranoMusic = \relative g' { g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 } AltoMusic = \relative c' { d4 d | d d d d | d d d d | d d d d | d2 d4 d | d d d d | d d d d | d d d d | d2 } TenorMusic = \relative a { b4 b | b b b b | b b b b | b b b b | b2 b4 b | b b b b | b b b b | b b b b | b2 } BassMusic = \relative g { g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 g4 g | g g g g | g g g g | g g g g | g2 } global = { \key g \major } \score { % Start score \new PianoStaff << % Start pianostaff \new Staff << % Start Staff = RH \global \clef "treble" \new Voice = "Soprano" << % Start Voice = "Soprano" \Timeline \voiceOne \SopranoMusic >> % End Voice = "Soprano" \new Voice = "Alto" << % Start Voice = "Alto" \Timeline \voiceTwo \AltoMusic >> % End Voice = "Alto" >> % End Staff = RH \new Staff << % Start Staff = LH \global \clef "bass" \new Voice = "Tenor" << % Start Voice = "Tenor" \Timeline \voiceOne \TenorMusic >> % End Voice = "Tenor" \new Voice = "Bass" << % Start Voice = "Bass" \Timeline \voiceTwo \BassMusic >> % End Voice = "Bass" >> % End Staff = LH >> % End pianostaff } % End score \markup \fill-line { \left-column { "This is line one of the first verse" "This is line two of the same" \null "And here's line one of the second verse" "And the next line of the same" } } \layout { \context { \Score caesuraType = #'((bar-line . "||")) fineBarType = "||" } } \paper { % Start paper block indent = 0 % don't indent first system line-width = 130 % shorten line length to suit music tagline = ##f % Don't print tag line, can be removed } % End paper block
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per inno ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte > ] |
Modello per combo jazz
Ecco un modello piuttosto complesso, per un gruppo jazz. Si noti che tutti
gli strumenti sono in \key c \major. Si tratta della tonalità
reale; sarà trasposta automaticamente includendo la
musica all’interno di una sezione \transpose.
\header { title = "Song" subtitle = "(tune)" composer = "Me" meter = "moderato" piece = "Swing" tagline = \markup \column { "LilyPond example file by Amelie Zapf," "Berlin 07/07/2003" } } % To make the example display properly in the documentation. \paper { paper-width = 130\mm paper-height = 205\mm } % #(set-global-staff-size 16) \include "english.ly" %%%%%%%%%%%% Some macros %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% sl = { \override NoteHead.style = #'slash \hide Stem } nsl = { \revert NoteHead.style \undo \hide Stem } crOn = \override NoteHead.style = #'cross crOff = \revert NoteHead.style % Insert chord name style stuff here. jazzChords = { } %%%%%%%%%%%% Keys'n'thangs %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% global = { \time 4/4 } Key = { \key c \major } % ############ Horns ############ % ------ Trumpet ------ trpt = \transpose c d \relative c'' { \Key c1 | c | c | } trpHarmony = \transpose c' d { \jazzChords } trumpet = { \global \clef treble \trpt } % ------ Alto Saxophone ------ alto = \transpose c a \relative c' { \Key c1 | c | c | } altoHarmony = \transpose c' a { \jazzChords } altoSax = { \global \clef treble \alto } % ------ Baritone Saxophone ------ bari = \transpose c a' \relative c { \Key c1 | c1 | \sl d4^"Solo" d d d \nsl | } bariHarmony = \transpose c' a \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | s | d2:maj e:m7 | } bariSax = { \global \clef treble \bari } % ------ Trombone ------ tbone = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } tboneHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords } trombone = { \global \clef bass \tbone } % ############ Rhythm Section ############# % ------ Guitar ------ gtr = \relative c'' { \Key c1 | \sl b4 b b b \nsl | c1 | } gtrHarmony = \chordmode { \jazzChords s1 | c2:min7+ d2:maj9 | s1 | } guitar = { \global \clef treble \gtr } %% ------ Piano ------ rhUpper = \relative c'' { \voiceOne \Key c1 | c | c | } rhLower = \relative c' { \voiceTwo \Key e1 | e | e | } lhUpper = \relative c' { \voiceOne \Key g1 | g | g | } lhLower = \relative c { \voiceTwo \Key c1 | c | c | } PianoRH = { \clef treble \global << \new Voice = "one" \rhUpper \new Voice = "two" \rhLower >> } PianoLH = { \clef bass \global << \new Voice = "one" \lhUpper \new Voice = "two" \lhLower >> } piano = << \new Staff = "upper" \PianoRH \new Staff = "lower" \PianoLH >> % ------ Bass Guitar ------ Bass = \relative c { \Key c1 | c | c | } bass = { \global \clef bass \Bass } % ------ Drums ------ up = \drummode { \voiceOne hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | hh4 <hh sn> hh <hh sn> | } down = \drummode { \voiceTwo bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | bd4 s bd s | } drumContents = { \global << \new DrumVoice \up \new DrumVoice \down >> } %%%%%%%%% It All Goes Together Here %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \book { % For the LilyPond documentation. \score { << \new StaffGroup = "horns" << \new Staff = "trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet" } \trumpet \new Staff = "altosax" \with { instrumentName = "Alto Sax" } \altoSax \new ChordNames = "barichords" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariHarmony \new Staff = "barisax" \with { instrumentName = "Bari Sax" } \bariSax \new Staff = "trombone" \with { instrumentName = "Trombone" } \trombone >> \new StaffGroup = "rhythm" << \new ChordNames = "chords" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \gtrHarmony \new Staff = "guitar" \with { instrumentName = "Guitar" } \guitar \new PianoStaff = "piano" \with { instrumentName = "Piano" midiInstrument = "acoustic grand" } \piano \new Staff = "bass" \with { instrumentName = "Bass" } \bass \new DrumStaff \with { instrumentName = "Drums" } \drumContents >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } \context { \Score \override BarNumber.padding = 3 \override RehearsalMark.padding = 2 skipBars = ##t } } \midi { } } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per combo jazz ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per pianoforte (semplice) > ] |
Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
Questo modello mostra come usare i contesti annidati StaffGroup e
GrandStaff per creare sottogruppi degli strumenti dello stesso
tipo. Mostra anche come usare \transpose in modo che le variabili
mantengano la musica per gli strumenti traspositori nell’intonazione reale.
#(set-global-staff-size 17) \paper { indent = 3.0\cm % add space for instrumentName short-indent = 1.5\cm % add less space for shortInstrumentName } fluteMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } % Pitches as written on a manuscript for Clarinet in A % are transposed to concert pitch. clarinetMusic = \transpose c' a \relative c'' { \key bes \major bes1 d } trumpetMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } % Key signature is often omitted for horns hornMusic = \transpose c' f \relative c { d'1 fis } percussionMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g1 b } sopranoMusic = \relative c'' { \key g \major g'1 b } sopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { Lyr -- ics } altoIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoILyrics = \sopranoLyrics altoIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } altoIILyrics = \lyricmode { Ah -- ah } tenorMusic = \relative c' { \clef "treble_8" \key g \major g1 b } tenorLyrics = \sopranoLyrics pianoRHMusic = \relative c { \key g \major g''1 b } pianoLHMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } violinIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violinIIMusic = \relative c' { \key g \major g'1 b } violaMusic = \relative c { \clef alto \key g \major g'1 b } celloMusic = \relative c { \clef bass \key g \major g1 b } bassMusic = \relative c { \clef "bass_8" \key g \major g,1 b } \book { \score { << \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_woodwinds" << \new Staff = "Staff_flute" \with { instrumentName = "Flute" } \fluteMusic \new Staff = "Staff_clarinet" \with { instrumentName = \markup { \concat { "Clarinet in B" \flat } } } % Declare that written Middle C in the music % to follow sounds a concert B flat, for % output using sounded pitches such as MIDI. %\transposition bes % Print music for a B-flat clarinet \transpose bes c' \clarinetMusic >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_brass" << \new Staff = "Staff_hornI" \with { instrumentName = "Horn in F" } % \transposition f \transpose f c' \hornMusic \new Staff = "Staff_trumpet" \with { instrumentName = "Trumpet in C" } \trumpetMusic >> \new RhythmicStaff = "RhythmicStaff_percussion" \with { instrumentName = "Percussion" } \percussionMusic \new PianoStaff \with { instrumentName = "Piano" } << \new Staff { \pianoRHMusic } \new Staff { \pianoLHMusic } >> \new ChoirStaff = "ChoirStaff_choir" << \new Staff = "Staff_soprano" \with { instrumentName = "Soprano" } \new Voice = "soprano" \sopranoMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "soprano" { \sopranoLyrics } \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_altos" \with { \accepts Lyrics } << \new Staff = "Staff_altoI" \with { instrumentName = "Alto I" } \new Voice = "altoI" \altoIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoI" { \altoILyrics } \new Staff = "Staff_altoII" \with { instrumentName = "Alto II" } \new Voice = "altoII" \altoIIMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altoII" { \altoIILyrics } >> \new Staff = "Staff_tenor" \with { instrumentName = "Tenor" } \new Voice = "tenor" \tenorMusic \new Lyrics \lyricsto "tenor" { \tenorLyrics } >> \new StaffGroup = "StaffGroup_strings" << \new GrandStaff = "GrandStaff_violins" << \new Staff = "Staff_violinI" \with { instrumentName = "Violin I" } \violinIMusic \new Staff = "Staff_violinII" \with { instrumentName = "Violin II" } \violinIIMusic >> \new Staff = "Staff_viola" \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } \violaMusic \new Staff = "Staff_cello" \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } \celloMusic \new Staff = "Staff_bass" \with { instrumentName = "Double Bass" } \bassMusic >> >> } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro > ] |
Modello per pianoforte (semplice)
Ecco un comune doppio pentagramma per pianoforte con un po’ di note.
upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } \score { \new PianoStaff \with { instrumentName = "Piano" } << \new Staff = "upper" \upper \new Staff = "lower" \lower >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per pianoforte (semplice) ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo > ] |
Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro
Invece di destinare un rigo a parte alla linea melodica e al suo testo, è possibile collocare il testo al centro di un doppio pentagramma per pianoforte.
upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } \score { \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = upper { \new Voice = "singer" \upper } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "singer" \text \new Staff = lower { \lower } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi > ] |
Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo
Ecco un tipico formato per canzoni: un rigo con linea melodica e testo, e sotto l’accompagnamento per pianoforte.
melody = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } upper = \relative c'' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } lower = \relative c { \clef bass \key c \major \time 4/4 a2 c } \score { << \new Voice = "mel" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto mel \text \new PianoStaff << \new Staff = "upper" \upper \new Staff = "lower" \lower >> >> \layout { \context { \Staff \RemoveEmptyStaves } } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi > ] |
Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi
Modello per coro SATB (quattro righi)
global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 \dynamicUp } sopranonotes = \relative c'' { c2 \p \< d c d \f } sopranowords = \lyricmode { do do do do } altonotes = \relative c'' { c2\p d c d } altowords = \lyricmode { re re re re } tenornotes = { \clef "G_8" c2\mp d c d } tenorwords = \lyricmode { mi mi mi mi } bassnotes = { \clef bass c2\mf d c d } basswords = \lyricmode { mi mi mi mi } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff << \new Voice = "soprano" << \global \sopranonotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "soprano" \sopranowords >> \new Staff << \new Voice = "alto" << \global \altonotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "alto" \altowords >> \new Staff << \new Voice = "tenor" << \global \tenornotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "tenor" \tenorwords >> \new Staff << \new Voice = "bass" << \global \bassnotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "bass" \basswords >> >> }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi
Ecco il modello di un comune spartito semplificato (lead sheet): include linea melodica, testo vocale e sigle degli accordi.
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } harmonies = \chordmode { a2 c } \score { << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \harmonies } \new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi > ] |
Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets
Here is a simple lead sheet template with melody, lyrics, chords, and fret diagrams.
verseI = \lyricmode { \set stanza = #"1." This is the first verse } verseII = \lyricmode { \set stanza = #"2." This is the second verse. } theChords = \chordmode { % insert chords for chordnames and fretboards here c2 g4 c } staffMelody = \relative c' { \key c \major \clef treble % Type notes for melody here c4 d8 e f4 g \bar "|." } \score { << \context ChordNames { \theChords } \context FretBoards { \theChords } \new Staff { \context Voice = "voiceMelody" { \staffMelody } } \new Lyrics = "lyricsI" { \lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseI } \new Lyrics = "lyricsII" { \lyricsto "voiceMelody" \verseII } >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi
Vuoi preparare uno spartito semplificato (lead sheet) con melodia e accordi? La tua ricerca è finita!
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 f4 e8[ c] d4 g | a2 ~ a } harmonies = \chordmode { c4:m f:min7 g:maj c:aug | d2:dim b4:5 e:sus } \score { << \new ChordNames { \set chordChanges = ##t \harmonies } \new Staff \melody >> \layout{ } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello di rigo singolo con solo note > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo
Questo piccolo modello presenta una semplice linea melodica con un testo. Copialo e incollalo, aggiungi le note e le parole. Questo esempio disabilita la disposizione automatica delle travature, come è consuetudine per le parti vocali. Per usare la disposizione automatica delle travature, cambia o commenta la relativa linea di codice.
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } text = \lyricmode { Aaa Bee Cee Dee } \score{ << \new Voice = "one" { \autoBeamOff \melody } \new Lyrics \lyricsto "one" \text >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice) > ] |
Modello di rigo singolo con solo note
Questo modello molto semplice mette a disposizione un rigo con delle note ed è quindi adatto per uno strumento non accompagnato o per un frammento melodico. Copialo e incollalo in un file, aggiungi le note e hai finito!
melody = \relative c' { \clef treble \key c \major \time 4/4 a4 b c d } \score { \new Staff \melody \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello di rigo singolo con solo note ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate > ] |
Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice)
Questo modello presenta un semplice quartetto d’archi. Impiega anche una
sezione \global per definire il tempo e l’armatura di chiave.
global= { \time 4/4 \key c \major } violinOne = \new Voice \relative c'' { c2 d e1 \bar "|." } violinTwo = \new Voice \relative c'' { g2 f e1 \bar "|." } viola = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef alto e2 d c1 \bar "|." } cello = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef bass c2 b a1 \bar "|." } \score { \new StaffGroup << \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 1" } << \global \violinOne >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 2" } << \global \violinTwo >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } << \global \viola >> \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } << \global \cello >> >> \layout { } \midi { } }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice) ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per complesso vocale > ] |
Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate
Il frammento di codice del “Modello per quartetto d’archi” crea un bel
quartetto, ma cosa fare se si ha bisogno di creare le singole parti? Questo
nuovo modello mostra come usare la funzionalità \tag per dividere
facilmente un pezzo in parti staccate.
Occorre dividere questo modello in file separati; i nomi dei file sono
indicati nei commenti all’inizio di ogni file. piece.ly
contiene tutte le definizioni musicali. Gli altri file – score.ly,
vn1.ly, vn2.ly, vla.ly e vlc.ly –
creano ciascuna parte.
Non dimenticare di togliere i commenti quando usi i file separati!
% piece.ly % (This is the global definitions file.) global= { \time 4/4 \key c \major } Violinone = \new Voice \relative c'' { c2 d e1 \bar "|." } Violintwo = \new Voice \relative c'' { g2 g e1 \bar "|." } Viola = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef alto e2 d c1 \bar "|." } Cello = \new Voice \relative c' { \clef bass c2 b a1 \bar "|." } music = << \tag #'score \tag #'vn1 \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 1" } << \global \Violinone >> \tag #'score \tag #'vn2 \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Violin 2" } << \global \Violintwo >> \tag #'score \tag #'vla \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Viola" } << \global \Viola >> \tag #'score \tag #'vlc \new Staff \with { instrumentName = "Cello" } << \global \Cello >> >> % These are the other files you need to save on your computer % score.ly % (This is the main file.) % Uncomment the line below when using a separate file. % \include "piece.ly" #(set-global-staff-size 14) \score { \new StaffGroup \keepWithTag #'score \music \layout { } \midi { } } %{ Uncomment this block when using separate files. % vn1.ly % (This is the Violin 1 part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vn1 \music \layout { } } % vn2.ly % (This is the Violin 2 part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vn2 \music \layout { } } % vla.ly % (This is the Viola part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vla \music \layout { } } % vlc.ly % (This is the Cello part file.) \include "piece.ly" \score { \keepWithTag #'vlc \music \layout { } } %}
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica > ] |
Modello per complesso vocale
Ecco una tipica partitura corale a quattro parti, SATB. Se il complesso è più ampio, è spesso comodo scrivere gli elementi comuni in un’unica sezione, che verrà poi inclusa in tutte le parti. Ad esempio, l’indicazione di tempo e l’armatura di chiave sono quasi sempre le stesse per tutte le parti. Come nel modello dell’“Inno”, le quattro voci sono ripartite in due soli righi.
\paper { top-system-spacing.basic-distance = 10 score-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 last-bottom-spacing.basic-distance = 10 } global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative { c''4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative { e'4 f d e } altoWords = \lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Lyrics = "sopranos" \with { % this is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "altos" \new Lyrics = "tenors" \with { % this is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "basses" \context Lyrics = "sopranos" \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \context Lyrics = "altos" \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \context Lyrics = "tenors" \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \context Lyrics = "basses" \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per complesso vocale ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica
Questo modello aggiunge una riduzione automatica per pianoforte alla tipica
partitura vocale SATB illustrata in “Modello per complesso vocale”. Si
dimostra così uno dei punti di forza di LilyPond – è possibile usare una
definizione musicale più di una volta. Qualsiasi modifica venga fatta alle note
delle voci (ad esempio, tenorMusic) verrà applicata anche alla riduzione
per pianoforte.
\paper { top-system-spacing.basic-distance = 10 score-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 system-system-spacing.basic-distance = 20 last-bottom-spacing.basic-distance = 10 } global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative { c''4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative { e'4 f d e } altoWords =\lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { << \new ChoirStaff << \new Lyrics = "sopranos" \with { % This is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "altos" \new Lyrics = "tenors" \with { % This is needed for lyrics above a staff \override VerticalAxisGroup.staff-affinity = #DOWN } \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics = "basses" \context Lyrics = "sopranos" \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \context Lyrics = "altos" \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \context Lyrics = "tenors" \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \context Lyrics = "basses" \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> \new PianoStaff << \new Staff << \set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f \partCombine << \global \sopMusic >> << \global \altoMusic >> >> \new Staff << \clef bass \set Staff.printPartCombineTexts = ##f \partCombine << \global \tenorMusic >> << \global \bassMusic >> >> >> >> }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi
Questo modello è fondamentalmente analogo al semplice modello “Complesso vocale”,
con l’unica differenza che qui tutti i versi del testo sono posizionati
usando alignAboveContext e alignBelowContext.
global = { \key c \major \time 4/4 } sopMusic = \relative c'' { c4 c c8[( b)] c4 } sopWords = \lyricmode { hi hi hi hi } altoMusic = \relative c' { e4 f d e } altoWords = \lyricmode { ha ha ha ha } tenorMusic = \relative c' { g4 a f g } tenorWords = \lyricmode { hu hu hu hu } bassMusic = \relative c { c4 c g c } bassWords = \lyricmode { ho ho ho ho } \score { \new ChoirStaff << \new Staff = "women" << \new Voice = "sopranos" { \voiceOne << \global \sopMusic >> } \new Voice = "altos" { \voiceTwo << \global \altoMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = "women" } \lyricsto "sopranos" \sopWords \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = "women" } \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords % we could remove the line about this with the line below, since % we want the alto lyrics to be below the alto Voice anyway. % \new Lyrics \lyricsto "altos" \altoWords \new Staff = "men" << \clef bass \new Voice = "tenors" { \voiceOne << \global \tenorMusic >> } \new Voice = "basses" { \voiceTwo << \global \bassMusic >> } >> \new Lyrics \with { alignAboveContext = "men" } \lyricsto "tenors" \tenorWords \new Lyrics \with { alignBelowContext = "men" } \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords % again, we could replace the line above this with the line below. % \new Lyrics \lyricsto "basses" \bassWords >> }
| [ << Templates ] | [Top][Contents] | [ >> ] |
| [ < Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi ] | [ Up: Templates ] | [ > ] |
Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello
Questo modello crea una partitura che inizia con una sezione solistica e
prosegue in un ritornello a due voci. Illustra anche l’uso delle
pause spaziatrici all’interno della variabile \global per definire
i cambi di tempo (e altri elementi comuni a tutte le parti) nel corso di
tutta la partitura.
global = { \key g \major % verse \time 3/4 s2.*2 \break % refrain \time 2/4 s2*2 \bar "|." } SoloNotes = \relative g' { \clef "treble" % verse g4 g g | b4 b b | % refrain R2*2 | } SoloLyrics = \lyricmode { One two three | four five six | } SopranoNotes = \relative c'' { \clef "treble" % verse R2.*2 | % refrain c4 c | g4 g | } SopranoLyrics = \lyricmode { la la | la la | } BassNotes = \relative c { \clef "bass" % verse R2.*2 | % refrain c4 e | d4 d | } BassLyrics = \lyricmode { dum dum | dum dum | } \score { << \new Voice = "SoloVoice" << \global \SoloNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "SoloVoice" \SoloLyrics \new ChoirStaff << \new Voice = "SopranoVoice" << \global \SopranoNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "SopranoVoice" \SopranoLyrics \new Voice = "BassVoice" << \global \BassNotes >> \new Lyrics \lyricsto "BassVoice" \BassLyrics >> >> \layout { ragged-right = ##t \context { \Staff % these lines prevent empty staves from being printed \RemoveEmptyStaves \override VerticalAxisGroup.remove-first = ##t } } }
| [Top][Contents] |
Table of Contents
- 1 Pitches
- Un ambitus per voce
- Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce
- Teste di nota Aiken variante sottile
- Altering the length of beamed stems
- Ambitus
- Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
- Ambitus su più voci
- Applicazione degli stili delle teste di nota in base al grado della scala
- Cambiare automaticamente la direzione del gambo della nota centrale in base alla melodia
- Changing ottava text
- Modifica dell’intervallo dell’ambitus
- Changing the interval of lines on the stave
- Clefs can be transposed by arbitrary amounts
- Coloring notes depending on their pitch
- Creating a sequence of notes on various pitches
- Creating custom key signatures
- Direction of merged ‘fa’ shape note heads
- Force a cancellation natural before accidentals
- Forcing a clef symbol to be displayed
- Generating random notes
- Nascondere le alterazioni delle note con legatura di valore all’inizio di un nuovo sistema
- Keep change clefs full-sized
- Esempio di makam
- Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava
- Armature di chiave non tradizionali
- Numeri dentro le teste di nota
- Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
- Impedire l’inserimento automatico dei bequadri supplementari
- Impedire l’inserimento dei segni di bequadro quando cambia l’armatura di chiave
- Quoting another voice with transposition
- Separating key cancellations from key signature changes
- Transposing pitches with minimum accidentals (“smart” transpose)
- Turkish Makam example
- Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave
- Using \autoChange with more than one voice
- 2 Rhythms
- Adding beams, slurs, ties, etc., when using tuplet and non-tuplet rhythms
- Adding drum parts
- Adjusting grace note spacing
- Allineare i numeri di battuta
- Note brevi alternative
- Appoggiatura or grace note before a bar line
- Automatic beam subdivisions
- Automatically change durations
- Estremità delle travature nel contesto Score
- Beam nibs
- Travature che attraversano le interruzioni di linea
- Modificare la distanza delle travature angolari
- Modificare la forma delle pause multiple
- Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota
- Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica
- Modifica del numero del gruppo irregolare
- Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using \scaleDurations
- Chant or psalm notation
- Compound time signatures
- Segni per la conduzione, segni di raggruppamento della misura
- Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare
- Cow and ride bell example
- Creare indicazioni metronomiche in modalità testuale
- Disegnare manualmente le legature di valore
- Engraving tremolos with floating beams
- Inserire vari gruppi irregolari usando una sola volta il comando \tuplet
- Forcing rehearsal marks to start from a given letter or number
- Generating custom flags
- Ritmi di accompagnamento per chitarra
- Heavily customized polymetric time signatures
- High and low woodblock example
- Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property
- Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio
- Manually controlling beam positions
- Merging multi-measure rests in a polyphonic part
- Modifying tuplet bracket length
- Spostare le note puntate in polifonia
- Regolazione della lunghezza delle pause multiple
- Testo a margine delle pause multiple
- Numeri non predefiniti per i gruppi irregolari
- Numbering single measure rests
- Partcombine and \autoBeamOff
- Percussion example
- Consentire l’interruzione del rigo all’interno di gruppi irregolari con travature
- Positioning grace note beams at the height of normal note beams
- Posizionare gli abbellimenti con dello spazio fluttuante
- Posizionamento delle pause multiple
- Positioning opposing fermatas on a bar line
- Preventing final mark from removing final tuplet
- Mostrare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari
- Printing bar numbers for broken measures
- Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi
- Printing bar numbers using modulo-bar-number-visible
- Stampare i numeri di battuta a intervalli regolari variabili
- Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo
- Printing music with different time signatures
- Mostrare il numero di battuta nella prima misura
- Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side
- Ridefinire le impostazioni predefinite globali degli abbellimenti
- Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito
- Stili di pausa
- Reverting default beam endings
- Rhythmic slashes
- Skips in lyric mode
- Skips in lyric mode (2)
- Stemlets
- Travatura che segue strettamente il battito
- Suddividere le travature
- Tam-tam example
- Tambourine example
- Three-sided box
- Time signature in brackets
- Time signature in parentheses
- Indicazione di tempo che mostra solo il numeratore (invece della frazione)
- Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano
- User-defined time signatures
- Using alternative flag styles
- Usare il gambo barrato degli abbellimenti con le teste normali
- Usare le legature di valore con un arpeggio
- 3 Expressive marks
- Adding parentheses around an expressive mark or chordal note
- Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi
- Adjusting slur positions vertically
- Cambiare la forma dei portamenti indeterminati verso il basso o verso l’alto
- Allineare le estremità delle forcelle alle direzioni di NoteColumn
- Note brevi alternative
- Asymmetric slurs
- Breathing signs
- Broken crescendo hairpin
- Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata
- Center text below hairpin dynamics
- Cambiare gli stili del testo e degli estensori per le dinamiche testuali
- Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed
- Cambiare il simbolo del segno di respiro
- Modifica del numero di punti di aumentazione per nota
- Combining dynamics with markup texts
- Combining dynamics with markup texts (2)
- Glissando contemporaneo
- Controlling spanner visibility after a line break
- Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
- Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script
- Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics
- Creare un gruppetto ritardato
- Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano note appartenenti a voci diverse
- Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano il rigo del pianoforte
- Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano i righi in altri contesti
- Creating double-digit fingerings
- Creating slurs across voices
- Creating text spanners
- Dynamics spanner with custom text
- Glissandi can skip grobs
- Hairpins with different line styles
- Nascondere la linea di estensione per le dinamiche testuali
- Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f”
- Inserire una cesura
- Laissez vibrer ties
- Line arrows
- Legature di portamento con complesse strutture di tratteggio
- Modificare i valori predefiniti per le abbreviazioni delle articolazioni
- Moving slur positions vertically
- Spostare le estremità delle forcelle
- Positioning arpeggios
- Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento
- Stampare le forcelle in vari stili
- Forcelle con notazione al niente
- Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo
- Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette
- Impostare la lunghezza minima delle forcelle
- Showing the same articulation above and below a note or chord
- Snap pizzicato (“Bartok” pizzicato)
- Using \arpeggioBracket to make divisi more visible
- Usare un segno di spunta come simbolo di respiro
- Uso delle doppie legature di portamento per gli accordi legati
- Uso della proprietà whiteout
- Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark
- Vertically aligning dynamics across multiple notes
- 4 Repeats
- Changing the default bar lines
- Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes
- Tremoli attraverso i righi
- Engraving tremolos with floating beams
- Ripetizioni con segni di percentuale isolati
- Measure counters
- Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale
- Contatore della ripetizione con segno percentuale
- Positioning segno and coda (with line break)
- Impostare la doppia ripetizione predefinita per le volte
- Accorciare le parentesi delle volte
- Unfolding tremolo repeats
- Volta sotto gli accordi
- Volta brackets in multiple staves
- Volta text markup using repeatCommands
- 5 Simultaneous notes
- Voci ulteriori per evitare le collisioni
- Changing \partCombine texts
- Changing a single note’s size in a chord
- Clusters
- Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo
- Displaying complex chords
- Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note
- Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property
- Spostare le note puntate in polifonia
- Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns
- Two \partCombine pairs on one staff
- 6 Staff notation
- Un ambitus per voce
- Adding an extra staff
- Adding an extra staff at a line break
- Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break
- Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale
- Numeri di battuta alternativi
- Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
- Changing the default bar lines
- Changing the number of lines in a staff
- Changing the staff size
- Creating blank staves
- Creating custom key signatures
- Cross-staff stems
- Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema
- Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive
- Extending a trill spanner
- Estendere i glissandi sulle volte delle ripetizioni
- Flat ties
- Forcing measure width to adapt to a metronome mark’s width
- Glissandi can skip grobs
- Incipit
- Inserting score fragments above a staff, as markups
- Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom
- Letter tablature formatting
- Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo
- Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre
- Measure counters
- Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
- Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava
- Annidare i righi
- Armature di chiave non tradizionali
- Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
- Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note
- Putting lyrics inside the staff
- Quoting another voice
- Quoting another voice with transposition
- Reconciliating bar lines thickness when staves are of different sizes (TODO duplicates snippet in Documentation/en/notation/spacing.itely)
- Removing brace on first line of piano score
- Removing connecting bar lines on StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or GrandStaff
- Eliminare la prima linea vuota
- Setting system separators
- Shape individual ties in chords
- Tick bar lines
- Time signature in brackets
- Time signature in parentheses
- Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave
- Two \partCombine pairs on one staff
- Usare una parentesi quadra all’inizio di un gruppo di righi
- Using \autoChange with more than one voice
- Using mark lines in a Frenched score
- Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar
- Volta sotto gli accordi
- Volta brackets in multiple staves
- 7 Editorial annotations
- Adding fingerings to a score
- Adding links to objects
- Adding markups in a tablature
- Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo
- Numeri di battuta alternativi
- Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo
- Parentesi analitiche con etichette
- Applicazione degli stili delle teste di nota in base al grado della scala
- Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command
- Changing a single note’s size in a chord
- Changing the appearance of a slur from solid to dotted or dashed
- Coloring notes depending on their pitch
- Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
- Creare un gruppetto ritardato
- Creating blank staves
- Creating double-digit fingerings
- Direzione predefinita dei gambi sulla linea centrale del rigo
- Different font size settings for instrumentName and shortInstrumentName
- Drawing boxes around grobs
- Drawing circles around note heads
- Drawing circles around various objects
- Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block
- Generate special note head shapes
- Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia
- Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization
- Martellato e strappato
- Martellato e strappato usando accordi
- Martellato e strappato usando le voci
- Rendere alcune linee del rigo più spesse delle altre
- Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme)
- Measure counters
- Measure spanner
- Positioning fingering indications precisely
- Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento
- Printing text from right to left
- String number extender lines
- Uso della proprietà whiteout
- 8 Text
- Adding markups in a tablature
- Adding the current date to a score
- Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
- Aligning and centering instrument names
- Aligning syllables with melisma
- Aligning text marks to notes
- Blanking staff lines using the \whiteout command
- Center text below hairpin dynamics
- Changing ottava text
- Changing the default text font family
- Combining dynamics with markup texts
- Combining dynamics with markup texts (2)
- Combinare due parti sullo stesso rigo
- Creating “real” parenthesized dynamics
- Creating text spanners
- Demonstrating all \header fields
- Embedding native PostScript in a \markup block
- Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale
- How to put ties between syllables in lyrics
- Allineamento del testo vocale
- Markup list
- Testo a margine delle pause multiple
- Of the ubiquity of markup objects
- Outputting the version number
- Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro
- Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo
- Printing text from right to left
- Putting lyrics inside the staff
- Testo separato su due colonne
- String number extender lines
- Three-sided box
- UTF-8
- Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi
- Volta text markup using repeatCommands
- 9 Vocal music
- Un ambitus per voce
- Adding indicators to staves which get split after a break
- Aggiungere citazioni orchestrali a una partitura vocale
- Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
- Aligning syllables with melisma
- Ambitus
- Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
- Ambitus su più voci
- Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music
- Modello per salmo anglicano
- Arranging separate lyrics on a single line
- Changing stanza fonts
- Chant or psalm notation
- Forcing hyphens to be shown
- Formattazione delle sillabe del testo vocale
- How to put ties between syllables in lyrics
- Modello per inno
- Allineamento del testo vocale
- Marking notes of spoken parts with a cross on the stem (Sprechstimme)
- Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
- Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo
- Putting lyrics inside the staff
- Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi
- Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi
- Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets
- Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo
- Skips in lyric mode
- Skips in lyric mode (2)
- Using \arpeggioBracket to make divisi more visible
- Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente
- Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale
- Vertically aligning stanza numbers of different staves
- Vertically centered common lyrics
- Modello per complesso vocale
- Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica
- Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi
- Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello
- 10 Chord notation
- Adding a figured bass above or below the notes
- Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames
- Adjusting figured bass alteration glyphs
- Changing a single note’s size in a chord
- Modifica del separatore dell’accordo
- Cambiare la posizione delle alterazioni del basso continuo
- Eccezioni dei nomi degli accordi
- Nome dell’accordo di settima maggiore
- Chord names alternative
- Chords with stretched fingering for FretBoards and TabVoice
- Clusters
- Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
- Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround
- Customizing the chord grid style
- Customizing the no-chord symbol
- Display non-English chord names
- Displaying complex chords
- Manually break figured bass extenders for only some numbers
- Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note
- Mostrare gli accordi nei cambi
- Canzoniere semplice
- Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi
- Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets
- Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi
- Vertically centering paired figured bass extenders
- Volta sotto gli accordi
- 11 Keyboard and other multi-staff instruments
- Simboli di registro della fisarmonica
- Changing the text for sustain markings
- Clusters
- Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
- Creating slurs across voices
- Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround
- Tremoli attraverso i righi
- Fine-tuning pedal brackets
- Indicare accordi trasversali al rigo con la parentesi quadrata dell’arpeggio
- Modello per combo jazz
- Laissez vibrer ties
- Modello per pianoforte (semplice)
- Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro
- Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo
- Removing brace on first line of piano score
- Using \autoChange with more than one voice
- Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica
- 12 Percussion
- 13 Fretted string instruments
- Adding fingerings to a score
- Adding fingerings to tablatures
- Adding markups in a tablature
- Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo
- Automatic fretboards barré
- Cambiare l’orientamento della tastiera
- Chord changes for fretboards
- Glissando di accordi in intavolatura
- Chords with stretched fingering for FretBoards and TabVoice
- Controllare il posizionamento delle diteggiature di un accordo
- Personalizzare la tastiera del diagramma dei tasti
- Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup
- Diteggiature, indicazioni di corda e diteggiature della mano destra
- Flamenco notation
- Fret diagrams explained and developed
- Tabelle alternative per i diagrammi dei tasti
- Armonici su corde premute in intavolatura
- Guitar slides
- Ritmi di accompagnamento per chitarra
- Martellato e strappato
- Martellato e strappato usando accordi
- Martellato e strappato usando le voci
- How to change fret diagram position
- Modello per combo jazz
- Laissez vibrer ties
- Let TabStaff print the topmost string at bottom
- Letter tablature formatting
- Armonici su corde a vuoto in intavolatura
- Posizionamento delle diteggiature della mano destra
- Polifonia in intavolatura
- Setting up predefined fretboards for other instruments
- Slides in tablature
- Comportamento di gambi e travature in intavolatura
- String number extender lines
- 14 Unfretted string instruments
- 15 Wind instruments
- 16 Ancient notation
- Adding a figured bass above or below the notes
- Ancient fonts
- Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music
- Ancient time signatures
- Chant or psalm notation
- Custodes
- Incipit
- Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
- Stili di pausa
- Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente
- Vertical line as a baroque articulation mark
- 17 World music
- 18 Contexts and engravers
- Un ambitus per voce
- Adding an extra staff
- Adding an extra staff at a line break
- Aggiungere stanghette al contesto ChordNames
- Ambitus dopo armatura di chiave
- Parentesi analitiche con etichette
- Cambiare automaticamente la direzione del gambo della nota centrale in base alla melodia
- Impostare l’output MIDI su un canale per voce
- Changing time signatures inside a polymetric section using \scaleDurations
- Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano note appartenenti a voci diverse
- Creating blank staves
- Creare degli arpeggi che attraversano i righi in altri contesti
- Creating custom key signatures
- Cross-staff stems
- Defining an engraver in Scheme: ambitus engraver
- Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive
- Engravers one by one
- Modificare l’aspetto delle linee della griglia
- Grid lines: emphasizing rhythms and notes synchronization
- Measure counters
- Measure spanner
- Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
- Annidare i righi
- Consentire l’interruzione del rigo all’interno di gruppi irregolari con travature
- Print chord names with same root and different bass as slash and bass note
- Stampare le indicazioni su ogni rigo
- Printing music with different time signatures
- Togliere i numeri di battuta da uno spartito
- Usare una parentesi quadra all’inizio di un gruppo di righi
- Using mark lines in a Frenched score
- Usare le etichette per produrre musica mensurale e moderna dallo stesso sorgente
- Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello
- Volta sotto gli accordi
- Volta brackets in multiple staves
- 19 Tweaks and overrides
- Aggiungere un segno di ottava a una sola voce
- Adding links to objects
- Adding markups in a tablature
- Aggiungere i segni di tempo per i glissandi lunghi
- Adjusting grace note spacing
- Adjusting slur positions vertically
- Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
- Aligning text marks to notes
- Altering the length of beamed stems
- Numeri di battuta alternativi
- Parentesi analitiche sopra il rigo
- Parentesi analitiche con etichette
- Asymmetric slurs
- Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts
- Caesura (“railtracks”) with fermata
- Changing a single note’s size in a chord
- Changing beam thickness and spacing
- Modificare la forma delle pause multiple
- Changing properties for individual grobs
- Cambiare gli stili del testo e degli estensori per le dinamiche testuali
- Changing the default text font family
- Changing the staff size
- Modificare il tempo senza mostrare l’indicazione metronomica
- Changing the text for sustain markings
- Controlling spanner visibility after a line break
- Controlling the appearance of tremolo slashes
- Controllo dell’ordine verticale degli script
- Controllare la visibilità della parentesi del gruppo irregolare
- Creare un gruppetto ritardato
- Creating custom key signatures
- Creating text spanners
- Cross-staff chords – beaming problems workaround
- Cross-staff stems
- Custodes
- Personalizzare la tastiera del diagramma dei tasti
- Personalizzare il diagramma dei tasti di tipo markup
- Mostrare la parentesi anche se c’è un solo rigo nel sistema
- Displaying grob ancestry
- Dotted harmonics
- Drawing boxes around grobs
- Drawing circles around various objects
- Dynamics spanner with custom text
- Extending a trill spanner
- Estendere i glissandi sulle volte delle ripetizioni
- Fine-tuning pedal brackets
- Flat ties
- Force a cancellation natural before accidentals
- Forzare lo spostamento orizzonatale delle note
- Fret diagrams explained and developed
- Generate special note head shapes
- Generating custom flags
- Glissandi can skip grobs
- Hairpins with different line styles
- Horizontally aligning custom dynamics like “più f”
- How to change fret diagram position
- Inserire una cesura
- Keep change clefs full-sized
- Line arrows
- Making an object invisible using the ‘transparent’ property
- Lasciare che i glissandi vadano a capo
- Manually controlling beam positions
- Measure-centered bar numbers
- Formattazione mensurale (stanghette tra i righi)
- Modificare l’inclinazione dell’estensore dell’ottava
- Spostare le note puntate in polifonia
- Moving slur positions vertically
- Annidare i righi
- Overriding articulations by type
- Visibilità del conto della ripetizione con segno percentuale
- Positioning arpeggios
- Positioning fingering indications precisely
- Posizionamento delle pause multiple
- Posizionare il testo a margine dentro le legature di portamento
- Numeri di battuta racchiusi in rettangoli o cerchi
- Posizionare il metronomo e i numeri di chiamata sotto il rigo
- Printing note names with and without an octave marker
- Printing tuplet brackets on the note head side
- Proportional strict notespacing
- Removing brace on first line of piano score
- Removing connecting bar lines on StaffGroup, PianoStaff, or GrandStaff
- Eliminare la prima linea vuota
- Stili di pausa
- Rhythmic slashes
- Separating key cancellations from key signature changes
- Impostare il comportamento delle forcelle sulle stanghette
- Setting system separators
- Shape individual ties in chords
- Showing the same articulation above and below a note or chord
- String number extender lines
- Suppressing warnings for clashing note columns
- Time signature in brackets
- Time signature in parentheses
- Indicazione di tempo che mostra solo il numeratore (invece della frazione)
- Tuplet bracket and change staff
- Modifiche manuali della proprietà della chiave
- Modificare l’aspetto degli abbellimenti di un intero brano
- Using alternative flag styles
- Using ly:grob-object to access grobs with \tweak
- Using the \tweak command to tweak individual grobs
- Dinamiche e segni testuali allineati verticalmente
- Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale
- Vertically aligning stanza numbers of different staves
- Vertically centering paired figured bass extenders
- 20 Paper and layout
- Aligning and centering instrument names
- Arranging separate lyrics on a single line
- Book parts
- Changing the staff size
- Clip systems
- Creating blank staves
- Demonstrating all \header fields
- Displaying a whole GrandStaff system if only one of its staves is alive
- Setting system separators
- Table of contents
- Vertically aligned StaffGroups without connecting SystemStartBar
- 21 Titles
- 22 Spacing
- Adjusting vertical spacing of lyrics
- Far sì che la diteggiatura appaia dentro il rigo
- Breaking vertical alignment of dynamics and textscripts
- Page label
- Proportional strict notespacing
- Reconciliating bar lines thickness when staves are of different sizes (TODO duplicates snippet in Documentation/en/notation/spacing.itely)
- Dinamiche e segni testuali allineati verticalmente
- Allineare verticalmente gli ossia e il testo vocale
- 23 MIDI
- 24 Templates
- Ancient notation template – modern transcription of Gregorian music
- Modello per salmo anglicano
- Modello per inno
- Modello per combo jazz
- Modello per orchestra, coro e pianoforte
- Modello per pianoforte (semplice)
- Modello per pianoforte con testo al centro
- Modello per pianoforte con melodia e testo
- Modello per coro SATB - quattro righi
- Modello di rigo singolo con note, testo e accordi
- Single-staff template with notes, lyrics, chords, and frets
- Modello di rigo singolo con note e accordi
- Modello di rigo singolo con note e testo
- Modello di rigo singolo con solo note
- Modello per quartetto d’archi (semplice)
- Modello per quartetto d’archi con parti separate
- Modello per complesso vocale
- Modello per gruppo vocale con riduzione per pianoforte automatica
- Modello per gruppo vocale con testo allineato sotto e sopra i righi
- Modello per gruppo vocale con strofa e ritornello